A commentary on the Revelation of St. John

'l^^

^J^^^^ff

I I

PRESENTED TO THE LIBRARY

PRINCETON THEOLOGICAL SEMINARY

|VIfs. Alexander Ppoudfit.

^iii^a-g^^^ sec

I< V^

COMMENTARY

REVELATION.

COMMENTARY

ON THE

REVELATION

OF

St. J 0 H N.

IN TWO VOLUMES.

^

Br BRTCE JOHNSTON, D. D.

MINISTER OF THE GOSPEL AT HOLYWOOD.

VOL. I.

EDINBURGH:

PRINTED FOR IV J L L I A JM CREECH.

SOLD BY

T. CADELL LONDON.

MDCCXCIV.

ERRATA, Vol. I.

Page l/^l/jyLitrcd. line 6tb, for or read of.

31, end of line J^b, read of before the body.

ZS5,lifie Ilibffor he read John; and line IZfb, for John is fliewn

him, read he is Ihewn to him.
j<)i y line sth, for Fox Mar. p. 103, >-f<zJ Fox's Afts and Monuments,

Vol. id, p, 72. London edition, 16 10, folio.
191, line zitb, for p. 533, read p. 566, London edition, o£lavo, 1699.

INTRODUCTION

llAVING explained all the other parts of
the New Teftament, in the courfe of my lec-
turing to the parifhi oners of Holy wood, I
Gonfidered it my duty, as a minifter of the
gofpel in that parifh, to explain alfo the book
of the Revelation, No part of infpired fcrip-
ture is more fully proven to belong to the
facred canon than this book hath been. Thofe
who deiire to fee that proof may confult Sir
Ifaac Newton's Obfervations on the Revela-
ilion, Lardner's Credibility of Gofpel-hiflory,
and Millii Prolegomena. This prophecy bears
the ftrongeil internal evidence, that no fub-
fequent prophecy ibould be neceflary in or-
der to unfold the meaning of this one, but
that it Ihould be difcovered by the right ufe
a ' of

11 INTRODUCTION.

of ordinary means, chap. xxii. lo. In chap.
i. 3. all men are called upon^ by a regard
for their own happinefs, to read, hear, (ludy,
and obey the words of this prophecy.

In the years 178; and 1786, I delivered a
courfe of ledures on the whole of this book,
Thefe were not committed to writing. 1 af-
terwards examined all the writers on the Re-
velation, who had come to my knowledge ;
many of whom were men of great abilities,
learning, worth, and reputation. But I ne-
ver met with one who explained that book
upon fixed and eftabliflied principles, or who
unfolded its true and connected meaning.
For want of fuch principles of interpreta-
tion, their writings were rather conjecftures
than explanations. Many of them, indeed,
were, like the perfons who made them, very
fagacious ; and hence in many parts they
hit upon the truth. If I had found a juft
and complete explanation of that book, on
fixed and rational principles, in the writings
of a Vitringa, a Sir Ifaac Newton, a Lord
Napier, aLowman, or any other commenta-
tor, I fhould never have troubled the public
with my opinion on this important fubjeifl,

though

INTROJDUCTION, lU

tiiough it is one in which we are all deeply
interefted. Having never met with fuch a
commentary, I refolved, in the year 1789,
to write out one on that book, the fame in
fubftance with the courfe of ledlures which
I had deUvered upon it three years before.
With great attention, and, if 1 know my own
heart, with great candour, and with prayer
to God for his direction and blefling, I exa-
mined all the prophetic writings in the Old
and the New Teilament, in order to difcover
whether or not there is any one peculiar
idiom or fixed charader of prophetic writ-
ings, any charafleriflic features in which
they all agree. I foon found that two pecu-
liar features marked all prophecies. The
firfl, that they are written in the fymbolical
language ; and the fecond, that all prophe-
tic writings of any coniiderable length are
interfperfed with keys or explanatory parts,
written in alphabetical language. Thefe
keys are always introduced by an angel, or
by a particular exprefiion direcling the atten-
tion of the reader to them ; fuch as, *' here i?
'* wifciom," Key. xiii. 18. xvii. 9.

a 2 Though

lY INTRODUCTION.

Though the language of China, and of
fome few other parts of the world, is a kind
of lymholical Imguage, yet that language in
its perfe(5liou is now to be found only in the
prophetic writings. From them a grammar
and a di(51ionary of that language may eafily
be formed. No language is firft formed
from a grammar and a didlionary, but thefe
are made from the pre-exifting language.

There are two charaders in this language.
The one is uniformly called an hieroglyphic,
and the other a fymbol, in the commentary.
An hieroglyphic is a complete figure made
up of the aflemblage of two or more parts
into one pidure. An example of a hiero-
glyphic may be feen in chap. i. from the
middle of verfe 12 to the end of verfe 16.
And a fymbol is a fingle detached member,
fuch for inftance as a candll^flick, a ilar, or a
two-edged fword. livery prophet, in what-
ever country or age he wrote, always ufed
the fame hieroglyphic, or the iame fymbol,
to fignify the fame thing, without a fmgle
exception.

irrom this ufage may be feen in fad, what
reafon teaches us to exped, that the meaning

of

IKtRODUCTION. v

of fymbols is much more fixed and uniform
than that of words is in any alphabetical
language. Alphabetical chara6lers and words
are not natural but only arbitrary figns^ and
therefore may and do change with the chan-
ges of timen and of men ; but hieroglyphics
and fymbols are either picflures of things ac-
tually exifting or of ideas which thefe things
naturally excite and therefore not arbitrary
but natural figns, fixed and permanent as
the things themfelves. For the fame reafon,
the fymbolical is an univerfal language. Eve-
ry alphabetical language is local and change-
able. For inftance the Greek, the Latin,
the Italian, the Spanifli, the French, and the
Englifh languages, were or are each the lan-
guage of a particular dil\ri(ft of territory, and
are altogether unintelligible to the illiterate
inhabitants of any other diftricfl ; and they
have all undergone fuch changes, that the
language of one period is fcarcely intelligible
to the inhabitants of the fame country in a-
nother period of time. But fliew the pidlure
of a ftar, of a candlelUck, of a fword, or of
a horfe and his rider, to any man of any
country or age, and he will be at no lofs to

tell

vi INTRODUCTION,

tell you what it reprefents. Shew thefe to
an intelligent and thinking man, of whatever
country or period he is an inhabitant, and h?
will readily tell you what ideas they excite in
his niind. He will read- thefe fymbols with
the fame eafe and certainty with which he
reads hiftorical painting, though it had been
drawn by a perfon who had lived in a coun-
try or age far diflant from his, and had fpo-
ken a language which he does not under-
ftand.

As an univerfal and unchangeable lan-
guage, the fymbolical mufl be the mofl fit
language for prophecies intended for all
countries and ages : And who can fo well
form the keys for opening up the intricacies
of prophecies as, that God who knows all
their parts ? They, like the intricate ward?
of the lock which they are to open, muft be
fixed and permanent, and mufl not change
with the fancies of man. In the commenta-
ry, 1 have explained the meaning of every
hieroglyphic or fymbol the firfl time it oc-
cured in the book of Revelation,and whenever
it appeared again I have ufed it in the fame
fenfe » taking it for granted that the reader

wiU

INTRODUCTION. Vll

will recolledl the interpretation which was
given of it on its firft appearance. When-
ever the fame hieroglyphic or fymbol oc-
curred, it hath always been ufed in the fame
fenfe, which is a itrong proof that it hath
Iieen righvly interpreted. It will alfb appear
in the commentary, that the fymbols and hie-
roglyphics are ufed in the fame fenfe in the
prophecies of Ifaiah, of Jeremiah, of Ezekiel,
of I aniel, of Hofea, of Paul, and of Peter,
in which they are ufed by John in this book.
The book of R e vclation confifts of two great
or general divifions. Thefe are made by
Chrift himfelf, when, chap. i. 19. he faid to
John, " Write the things which thou haft
" feen, even the things- which are^ and the
** things which fhall be hercajter,'^

\fi^ " The things which are^' or the hif-
tory of things which were then in exiftence.
Chap. i. is a general introduction to the
whole book, and chap. ii. and iii. are the
hiftoricai part, relating to the prefent ftate of
the feven Chriftian churches then in Afia.

And, id, "The things whichyZW/^^y^^r^? -
" ajter^' or propliecies of future events.
Thefe fill up all the remainder of the book,

from

VIU INTRODUCTION.

from the beginning of the fourth chapter.
The prophecies of this book are of that fpe-
cies which is called 'vtfion. This is the clear-
eft kind of prophecy. It is like the teftimo-
ny of the fenfe of fight. The impreflions
were made upon the mind of John by the
Spirit of God, in the fame way, and of the
fame nature with thofe which would have
been made, if he had aclually feen with his
bodily eyes the very objecls themfelves,
which are reprefented by the various vifions
which are narrated in this book.

Thefe prophecies were revealed to John
in fourteen diftincft and fucceffive vifions :
But they feem to have been all communica-
ted to him in the fime place, the ifle of Pat-
mos, and in the fpace of one Lord's tiay.
In chap. i. 9, 10, 11, he exprelsly fays that
he was in the ifle of Patmos, and that ir was
on the Lord's day, when he faw the vifions
which he was commanded to write in a book,
and to fend to the feven churches in Afia.
That book, as is fliewri in the commentary,
is the whole book of the Revelation. In no
part of that book does he mention any other
place or time, in which any of thefe vifions

were

INTRODUCTION. IX

"wtre made to him. He repeatedly fpeclfies
the particular fcenes of particular vifions:
Such for inftance, as chap. x. 2. " his right
" foot upon the fea, and his left foot on the
*' earih ; chap. xiii. i. "the fand of the /^^;"
chap xiv. I. " Mount Zion ;" chap xvii. 3^
" the wildernefs ;" and chap. xxi. 10. "a
" great and high mountain." But, as is
fully (hewn in the commentary, all thefe
fcenes reprefent the particular times when
the events predi(5\ed in thefe particular vi-
iions fliall acflually happen, and neither the
times nor places in which thefe vifions ap-
peared to John,

The following are the fourteen vifions, in-
to which the prophecies of this book are di-
vided, as they appeared in fuccelfion to the
mind of John in the fpace of one -day.

Vision first, narrated in chap. iv. v. vi.
v»^hich contains the general introdudlion to
the prophecies of this book, the opening of
the fealed book in general, and the opening
of the fix feals in particulai%

Vol. L *b Vision

X INTRODUCTION.

Vision second, narrated in chap, vii,
which contains the feahng of the fervants
of God.

Vision third, narrated in chap. viii.
and ix. which contains the founding of the
fix trumpets.

Vision fourth, narrated in chap. x.
which contains the little opened book, and
the general introduc):ion to the prophecies,
which refpe(5l the hiftory of the world and
of the church, from the year of Chrift 756
to the end of the world.

Vision fifth, narrated in chap. xi.
which contains the two witneffes prophefy-
ing in fackcloth.

Vision sixth, narrated in chap. xiL
which contains the woman in the wilder-
nefs, and the red dragon.

Vision seventh, narrated in chap. xiii.
which contains the beaft with feven heads

and

INTRODUCTION. Xl

and ten horns, with crowns upon his horns,
and the name of blafphemy upon his heads.

Vision eighth, narrated in chap. xiv.
which contains the Lamb {landing upon
Mount Zion, and the introdudlion to the
fall of Babylon.

Vision ninth, narrated in chap. xv.
and xvi. which contains the feven vials and
feven laft plagues.

Vision tenth, narrated in chap. xvii.
which contains the woman fitting upon the
fcarlet coloured bead.

Vision eleventh, narrated in chap, xviii.
which contains the fall of Babylon.

Vision twelfth, narrated in chap. xix.
which contains the marriage of the Lamb.

Vision thirteenth, narrated in chap.
XX. which contains the reign of Chrift for a
thoufand years on earth.

b 2 And

Xil INTRODUCTION.

And Vision fourteenth, narrated ia
chap xxi. and xxii. which contains the new
Jeruihlem.

All thefe vifions are marked, and their im-
port explained in the commentary. A great
part of this book contains prophecies which
have been fulfilled before the prefent time.
The true meaning of thefe rpay therefore
be learned more minutely from the actual
events as they are recorded jn hi (lory. The
vifion of the fix feals predided events which
have fince adlually happened, from the days
of the apoftle John to the year of Chrilt 325 ;
and the feventh feal opens up the fucceeding
period. The vifion of the fix trumpets pre-
dicted events which have taken place from
the year of Chrifl: 325 to the year 1090;
and the feventh trumpet opens up the fol-
lowing period. In point of time, chapters 1.
iv. V. X. and xv. which are introdudory,
comprehend general periods of time, as ex-
tenfive as the particular chapters do to which
they are introductory. Chapters ii. and iii.
are hin:oncal of the adual flate of the fevtn

Chriftiaj:^

INTRODUCTION. . Xlll

Chriflian chnrches then in \{ia, about the
year of Chrifl 95. Chapters vi. viii. and ix.
predidled events, the laft of which took
place before the year of Chrift 1 100. Chap-
ter vii. predicts events which run from the
year of Chrift 325 to the year 2000, Chap,
xi. the two witneiTes prophefying in fack-
cloth ; chap. xii. the woman in the wilder-
nefs ; chap. xiii. the beaft with the {even
heads and ten horns, w^ith crowns on his
horns, and the name of blafphemy on his
heads ; and chap. xvi. the feven vials, all
predicfl contemporary events, which run pa^
rallel to one another from the year of Chrift
y^G to the year 1999 : So that, in this year,
1790, 1034 years of the time are run, and
only 209 years remain to complete all the
events predicted in thefe four chapters.
Chap. xiv. predicts events which {hall hap-
pen in the end of the 3^ear of Chrift 1 999
and the beginning of the year 2000. Chap,
xvii. is an explanation of the predictions con-
tained in chap xiii, and therefore relates to
the fame period from 756 to 1909. Chap.
?tviii. predicts and defcribes an event which
^all happen in the end of the year 1 999.

Chap.

SIV INTRODUCTION.

Chap. xix. prcdids one which fhall take place
in the year 2000. And chapters xx. xxi.
xxii. predi(5l and defcribe events which fhall
happen from the year 2000 to the year 3000,
with fhorr, and in point of time indefinite,
hints of the ftate of the world after the year
3000 ; of a final judgement, and of a future
and eternal ftate.

All the periods of time are particularly
explained and eftablifhed upon fixed princi-
ples in the commentary. In explaining the
text, I have taken neither the larger divifion
of a chapter, nor the fmaller one of a verfe
at once ; but I have always been regulated
by the nature of the pafTage itfelf. When
the pafTage confifled of an hieroglyphic, it
was always taken under view at once, whe-
ther it was larger or fmaller. This certainly
is the rule of nature ; for to divide a com-
plete figure is to mangle and mifreprefent it.
But where the pafTage is made up of detach-
ed fymbols, or detached alphabetical de-
scriptions, fo as a fingle verfe or a few ver-
fes could be underfliood by themfelves, I
have viewed fuch pafTiges in one or a few
verfes together. Convinced that marginal

notes

INTRODUCTION. XV

notes and references break the thread of the
fubjedl, diftracfl the attention of the reader,
and occafion confufion and fatigue to him,
I have thrown the quotations from hiftories
into the body of the commentary. On this
plan, to have quoted a great variety of his-
torians on each event v^rould have fwelled
the v^ork too much : Therefore the reader
is here referred to the following hiftorians :
Eufebius Pamphilus, Socrates Scolafticus, and
Evagrius Scolafticus, their church hiftories ;
Lewis EUies Dupin, dodor of the Sorbonne,
his Church-hiftory ; and Edward Gibbon,
his Hiftory of the Decline and Fall of the
Roman empire. Thefe hiftorians agree with
Moflieim's Church hiftory, in their account
of fadls and dates, as the inquifitive reader
will fee, by comparing him and them toge-
ther, on the refpedive periods to which the
events belong. Indeed Mr Gibbon acknow-
ledges in exprefs words his general agree-
ment with Moftieim, and gives that hifto-
rian the charader for learning and candour
which he juftly deferves. In a note on chap.
XV. at figure 103, he fays, " In the hiftory
" of the Chriftian hierarchy, I have, for the

" moft

XVI INTltODUCTION-

" mofl part followed the learned and candid
" Moaieim."

Indeed I might have faved the readers and
myfelf this trouble : Becaufe all the events
predi(5led in this book are of fuch magnitude
and importance, and fo generally known,
that all hiftorians are agreed as to the na-
tures and times of them. The following
are the editions of the books which are moft
frequently quoted in the commentary :

Caroli Sigonii hiftoria, de Occidental! im-
perio, Hanovia^, typis Wechelianis, 1618,
folio.

Moflieim's Church-hiftory, tranflated into
Englifli by Maclaine, in 2 vols, quarto.
London. 1 765. — Of this hiflorian I have
made much ufe, not only on account of his
high charader, but alfo becaufe, in his notes,
he refers to all the early hiftorians of cha-
ra6ler, who had written upon the fame fub-
jec?\s with him.

Tranflation of Sleidan's hiftory of the
Reformation, by Edmund Bohun, folio,
London 1689.

Tranflation of Mezeray's hiftory of France,
by John Bulteel, folio, London 1683.

Dr

INTRODUCTION. XVli

Dr Robertfoii's hiftory of Charles V.
quarto, London i 769.

Spon and Wheeler, their voyages, vol i 11:,
duodecimo, Amfterdam 1679.

Smith feptem Alice ecclefiarum notitiaj
odlavo, Oxonii 1674.

In quoting from facred fcripture, I have
always ufed numerals for chapters and fi-
gures for verfes ; thus, chap. xii. 6, 7. for
chap. 1 2th, verfes 6th, and 7rh.

Perhaps fome readers may think that this
work would have been better for the want of
the many praiflical obfervations, with which
the explanatory parts are interfperfed. But
I truft that many others of them will think,
with me, that thefe ftricflly accord to the
great defign of the book of the Revelation,
which is, as repeatedly declared in it, to pro-
mote the faith and the patience of the faints,
to teftify of Jefus, and to blefs men in read-
ing, hearing, and keeping the things which
are written in this book. 1 trud it will ap-
pear, that thefe obfervations are fairly drawn
from the events which are predi(5led, and
Vol. I. c that

XVlll INTRODUCTION,

that they evidently tend to promote, under
the divine blelling, the bed difpofitions of
the heart of man. However pure and high
the pleafure is, which I Ihould feel in being
inftrumental under God of increafing the
knowledge of any of my fellow men, it is
far inferior to that which I fhould ever feel
in being the inflrument of alfo exciting or
promoting in them the graces and virtues,
which Chriflianity teaches and inculcates,
and which her divine founder exemplified
in the higheft perfedlion.

If a great variety of necefTary duties had
afforded me more time, the language might
have been better poliihed : But I hope it is
fuch as fliall convey the fentiments to the
reader without difgufling him ; and, if that
fhall be the cafe, I trufh my time hath been
as well employed in many necelTary duties,
as it would have been in merely rounding a
period.

The book of the Revelation being formed
in a regular and connecfled chain, the fub-
fequent parts can be underftood only after
a perfon hath obtained a competent know-
ledge

INTRODUCTION. XlX

ledge of the preceeding parts. The com-
mentary is conflrucfled in the fame way ;
and befides, each fymbol is explained only
the firft time it occurs. It is therefore hop-
ed that the reader will read the whole com-
mentary over in regular order, before he
form an opinion of it; that, after having
feen the connecHiion of the whole, and the
light which one part reflecfts upon another,
he may be qualified to form an impartial
judgement.

Having no controverfy with any com-
mentator, and never thinking truth the lefs
genuine or valuable that other Derfons have
feen it before me, I have never rejected nor
difguifed any juft interpretation of any of
the predi(5lions, with which I have met in a-
ny of the commentators ; nor have 1 entered
into controverfy v/ith thofe from whom I
differ in opinion ; but have limply ftated
what appears to me the right interpretation,
hoping that the candid and enlightened read-
er, judging for himfelf, will prefer truth,
from its innate evidence, to the mere autho-
rity of any man.

c 2 I

XX INTRODUCTION.

1 have not eiedlcated this book to any per-
fon. If it does not contain the truths of God,
^ and truths in which men are deeply intereft^
ed, I do not wilh that it fliould receive coun-
tenance and fupport from any man ; and, if
it does, though it may be oppofed by thofe
perfons, wl'.ofe mind is enmity againft God,
and who hate men and books for telUng
them the truth, I trufl that Divine provi-
dence w^ill, in the mod fcafonable time, raifc
up the moft fit inflruments to fupport and
give it effect in tlie world. If any pcrfon^ {hall
write agalnfl this commentary ; if his objec-
tions fliall ^fcovcr more of prejudice, of paf-
fion, or of |wty, than of knowledge, of judge-
ment, and of virtue, they will Toon confute
themfelves; and fljall therefore receive no an-
fwer from me. If his objections, though well
intended, are founded in miftake, it will be
eafy to anfvver them, by pointing out the
miilake ; and, if they are of fuch a nature
a-, for the good of the public, to deferve an
anfwer, they fliali receive fuch an one as they
deferve. But if they fliali be founded on
nny error in this commentary, which may

have

INTRODUCTION. XXI

have efcaped my notice, and if they fhall un-
fold the latent truth, I fhall be the firft per-
fon who iliall give him fincere and hearty
thanks for difcovering the error, and who
fliall embrace the truth which he hath
brought to view. In quell of truth, I ob-
taii|;i the objedl of my purfuit whenever I
clearly perceive truth. Let the perfon who
brings it to view or his intentions be what
they will, I truft I fliall regard him as a
friend who thus iliall tell me the truth,
though he fliould do it even in the tone of an
enemy.

Perhaps even in this enlightened and li-
beral age, bigots to the church'of Rome may
be offended at the application of many of
the predictions to the Papal hierarchy, and
the more fo that it is fo flriking. I afliire
them that it is no pleafurc to me to fay any
thing that is bad of any perfon, or of any
eftabliflH-ncnt, whether civil or religious ;
but. when writing upon the word of God,
and for the public, 1 muft fay the truth, who-
ever fnall be difpleafed With it. Perhaps
feme bigots of that church of which I have
the happincfs to be a member, or of fome

other

XXU INTRODUCTION.

Other Proteftant churches or fe6\s may be
difpleafed, on the other hand, that I have
written fo favourably of the character and
future expedations of v^ell meaning indivi-
duals of the church of Rome, as on ch. xiv.
ver. 9, 10, II. and in other paffages.

I have in fubflance faid, and I here fay it
again, that I know no external church in
the w^orld, in the prefent period, which is in
every thing perfecflly Chriftian; that the real
church of Chrift, at prefent on earth, con-
fifts of all thofe fcattered individuals, in eve-
ry land, and of every external denomination,
who, as in chap. vii. are " God's fealed fer-
*' vants," whom " the Lord knows to be his,
*' and who name the name cf Chrift, and
" depart from evil." Unmoved by the cen-
fures of bigots of every church, I have faid
what the voice of -fcripture in general, of
this b(3ok in particular, and of reafon and
experience uniformly fays, that thofe indi-
viduals, of every external denomination, who
are wife and good men, whom the Lord who
Cannot err knows to be his people, are the
true worfliippers of God, are fanclified by
the fplrit of God, and flmll be finally faved

by

INTRODUCTION. XXUl

by the mercy of God through the mediation
of Chrift ; and that no external church or
profefTion can render foolifh and wicked indi-
viduals, if they live and die of that charac-
ter, true worfliippers of God in this world,
or finally holy and happy in a future ftate.
Until the commencement of the millennium,
in the year of Chrifb 2000, there will always
be many perfons. who, by difbelieving, de-
fpifing, and oppofing the prophecies of this
book, fhall fulfil them, *' Let him that is
" filthy be filthy ftill ;" and there will be
many who fhall be blefTed in reading, hear-
ing, fludying, and obeying them. My fin-
cere prayer to that God, who does all things
in the befl time and manner, is, that every
error, whether my own or of other perfons,
may be difcovered and rejedled ; and that
the truth of God may be perceived, believed,
loved, obeyed, and blefTed.

COMMENTARY

REVELATlONo

CHAP. I.— Ver. I, 2.

1 HE Revelation of Jefus Chrift, which God
gave unto him, to fhew unto his fervants
things vs^hich muft iliortly come to pafs ; and
he fent and fignified it, by his angel, unto his
fervant John : Who bare record of the word
of God, and of the teftimony of Jefus Chrift,
and of all things that he faw.

In tliefe words are contained, ift, The title of this

book : " The Revelation of Jefus Chrift, which

" God gave unto him, to fliew unto bis fervants

" things which mull: Iliortly come to pafs." 2d, The

Vol. T, a melTenger

1 A COMMENTARY Ch. I.

mefienger by whom, and the perfon to whom this
revelation was lir(l communicated. " And he fent
*' and lignified it, by his angel, unto his fervant John."
And, 3^?, The manner in which that perfon dii-
charged the trull repofed in him. " Who bare re-
" cord of the word of God, and of the teftimony of
" Jefus Chrifl, and of all things that he faw."

The title of this book plainly (hews that it is a reve-
lation from God, through the mediation of Jefus Chrift,
the only Mediator between God and man : That it
is a revelation of the prophetic kind : That, though
fome of the prophecies, as lliaH afterwards appear,
comprehend events which fliall happen to the time
of the dilTolution of this earth, yet the lirlt events
foretold in it were to happen very foon ; and that,
from thefe to the laft events foretold in this book,
there fliall be a clofely conneded chain of predic-
tions, and of correfpondent events : And that the
end of this prophecy is to communicate important
difcoveries to the fervants of God ; to thofe, in eve-
ry age and country, *' whom the Lord knoweth to
" be his, and Vvho name the name of Chrift, and
*' depart from iniquity ;" to thofe who are really
religious, and make it as their meat and drink to do
the will of God. While the fervants of lin, the
flaves of Satan, and the men of the world, fhall treat
this divine revelation with negled or contempt, and
^lall reap no advantage from it, the fervants of
God, in every age, fliall learn from it the important

events

Ver. I. 2. ON THE REVELATION. 3

events which it foretells, in fo far at leall as, by that
knowledge, to ftrengthen and fupport their faith and
patience. Though this revelation was from God,
yet, like every other bleffing of the gofpel, it was
communicated through the mediation of Jefus Chrift.
Jefus did not himfelf reveal the whole of it to John ;
but he employed an angel to ihew a great part of
it to him. Why Jefus employed an angel to fliew
unto John, what he could eafily have done himfelf?
whether there is one particular angel, who is dif-
tinguillied from all the other angels by the appella-
tion of Chrift's angel ? or what particular angel this
one was, who was employed to fliew unto John the
things which lliould fhortly come to pafs ? are quef-
tions more calculated to gratify a vain, and perhaps
a criminal curiofity, even a defire of " being wife
" above what is written," than to promote know-
ledge and virtue. But the plain and unequivocal
meaning of the words now under our view is, that
an angel was employed by Chrift to fhew to the au-
thor of this book the things which muft come to pafs.
That in fact an angel was employed for this purpofe,
is evident from chap. xix. ver. lo. and chap. xxii.
ver. 8, 9.

The author of this book ftiles himfelf John. That
he was the Apoltle John appears evident in the exph-
cation of fome of the following verfes of this chapter.
John tells us in what manner he executed the commif-
fion with which he wasveftcd. "He bare record;" or,

as

4 A COMMENTARY Ch. I,

as ijua^Tv^mifihe word in the original, lignifies, he gave
teflimony as a witnefs does. He dehvered no con-
jedtures nor opinions of his own. He candidly and
impartially narrated matters of fad, juft as he had
heard and feen them ; particularly, he wrote thofe
things which God revealed unto him, — " the word
" of God ;" thofe things which Jefus teflified unto
him, — " the teftimony of Jefus ;" and the vifions
which appeared to his mind, — " and the things
" which he faw." Like a faithful witnefs, he not on-
ly teflified fiothitig but what he heard and faw, but
he teflified alfo all that he heard and faw, relative
to the things which mull (liortly come to pafs.

Ver. 3. BlefTed is he that readeth, and they
that hear the v^ords of this prophecy, and keep
thefe things which arc written therein : for the
time is at hand.

On reading thefe words, one is ready to conclude
that the apoftle had forefeen, with what neglect and
contempt this gofpel prophecy ftiould be treated, in
almoft every age and country, by too many even of
thofe who are called Chriftians, and who dare not
call in queftion its authenticity as a part of infpired
fcripture ; and therefore he not only cautions them
againfl that negled and contempt, but produ-
ces the mofl diredt and flrong anfwers to the very
pbjedtions which they make to the ftady of this

book.

Ver. 3. ON THE REVELATION. . 5

book. Though they acknowledge it to be a part of '
divine revelation, they fay it is folly and prefump-
tion to read, hear, or ftudy it ; for it is unintelligible,
and therefore can never profit them. But John
fays, " Bleffed is he that readeth, and they that
'■' hear the words of this prophecy, and keep
*' thofe things which are written therein ; for the
*' time is at hand.'* John calls this book a prophe-
cy, that is, a predidion of future events through
the infpiration of God. - Every one, acquainted with
theOldTeftament difpenfation, knows that there are
anany prophecies in the fcriptures of the Old Telia-
ment ; that they were exprefled in dark and hiero-
glyphical language ; that thofe of them, which pre-
dided events which were to happen before this day,
have been minutely fulfilled in the courfe of divine
providence ; and that, whenever the event took
place, the minute and exadt correfpondence between
the prediction and the event, was evident to every
perfon who examined them with knowledge, can-
dour, and diligence.

In the New Teilament there are many fliort and
detached predidions : Thofe of them, which refer-
red to events which were to take place before the
age in which we live, have been fully verified in
the events; and thofe of them, which refpecl events
yet to come, fhall be accompliflied in due time.
But, as in the Old Tefi;ament, there was a chain of
prophecy by which the days of Ifaiah, of Daniel,

I

6 A COMxMENTARY Ch. I.

I might go back to the earlieft times, and fay, the
days of Mofes, of Jacob, of Abraham, and even
of Adam, were conneded with the coming of Chrifl
in human nature, and with the great events clofe-
ly connected with that mofl important a^ra : So, in
the New Teftament, this book contains a clofely
connected chain of prophecy, relative to the various
events which fhould happen to the church of Chrift,
or " kingdom of heaven,*' from the day in which
John wrote it, until the diflblution of this earth.

The following qualities feem infeparable from
prophecy ; at leaft they are found in every prophe-
cy which I have conlidered ; and appear to me to
be clofely connected with the very nature of pro-
phecy.

jjl. That the prophecies are exprefled in dark»
but never in contradiclory language.

2d, That, before their accompHfliment, the great
outlines of the events may be difcovered with cer-
tainty ; but not all the minute circumftances.

3^, That, the nearer the time of their accomplifh-
ment approaches, more of the predictions may be
known ; and that, after the events have happened,
the mofl exad correfpondence may be traced be-
tween every circumitance of the events and the
predidions. And,

4tb, That, neither before the event fliall the ge-
neral meaning of the prophecy, nor after the event
ihcill the full meaning of it, appear to the genera-
lity

Ver. 3. ON THE REVELATlONo 7

lity of mankind; but they fliall appear to thofe
perfons only, who itudy it with competent know-
ledge, uprightnefs, and diligence. If prophecy were
not pofleired of thefe qualities, it would defeat its
own end. By being clearly forefeen by thofe per-
fons who fnould be the inllruments of bringing
them about, the events would be prevented. For
inflance, is it ever to be fuppofed that, if the indivi-
dual Jews who crucified Jefus had clearly feen, from
the antient prophecies, that he was the Melliab,
and that his kingdom was not of this world, and
yet that with wicked hands they were to crucify
and flay him, that they would have done fo ? With-
out thefe qualities, prophecy could not be a proper
trial of candour, diligence, faith, and patience. By
thefe it bears a clofe analogy to the nature of moral
and rehgious evidence, which enlightens and per-
fuades the upright and the dihgent, whilll it does
not forcibly controul the prejudifed, the partial, and
the indolent. By thefe it proves the foreknowledge
and determination of God, in conlillency with the
liberty of moral agents.

From thefe obfervations, the force of the motives
to read and hear this book, ftated in this verfe, may
appear. We ought to read and ftudy it with can-
dour and diligence. And, as it muft be publicly
read and explained in Chriilian congregations, as a
part of that fcripture " which is given by infpira-
*' tion of God, and is profitable for dodrine, for re-

" proof,

8 A COMMENTARY Ch. L

" proof, for corre6}ion, for inftrudlioii in righteouf-
*' nefs ; that the man of God may be perfect, t.ho-
*' roughly furnillied unto all good works ;" Chri-
flians are required to hear it with fmcerity and at-
tention ; for " faith cometh by hearing, and hear-
*' ing by the word of God/' We muft not only
read,.ftudy, and hear, but we mud alfo keep the
fayings of this book. By them we muit regulate
our condud. By them we muft prepare to meet,
in a proper manner, the various events predicted in
this book, as they fnall occur to us in the courfe of
divine providence.

*' For the time is at hand." Though this book con-
tains a long conneded chain of prediclions of future
events, fome of which were at a great many hundred
years diftancefrom its date, yet the firft events in that
chain were to happen very foon, even in that year in
which it was written. That they have done fo fliall
appear as we proceed in this commentary. As fuch
is the nature of this book, and as the men now living
muft foon meet with fome of the events, which it
predicts, they fliall moft certainly confult their own
duty and happinefs, by ftadying and pradifing the
fayings which it contains.

From the nature of this book, as a clofely connect-
ed chain of predidions, the motives in this verfe, to
read, hear, and obey the things that are written
therein, are equally ftrong in every age as they were
at the time the npoftle wrote them ; or rather they

grow

Ver. 3. ON THE REVELATION. 9

grow ftronger and ftronger every day. As a pro-
phecy it mull be ftudied with candour, knowledge,
and diligence, otherwife it cannot be underllood.
As a chain of prophecies, refpeding a chain of e-
vents, which reaches from the Apoille's days to the
end of this world ; fome of the events mud be at
hand in the prefent, and in every prefent age.

At this time, 1700 years from the date of the
prophecy, many of the events predicted have taken
place, fo that, by them, much additional hght is
thrown upon this book. Before the prefent time,
much more than the half of the prophecies con-
tained in it have been accomplifhed ; fo that the
greateft part of the book is now in the fituation of
a prophecy fulfilled ; the meaning of which may,
therefore, be fully and minutely difcovered. By
comparing the fads as recorded in authentic hiftory,
with the correfpondent predictions in this book ;
we may clearly fee the meaning of thofe already
accompliihed, obtain a convincing evidence of the
infpiration of this book, and of fcripture in general,
be fully fatisfied of the omnifcience of God, and of
his moral government of the world, obtain a juit
view'of the nature of Chrift's kingdom, and perceive
much light reflected upon thofe parts of this pro-
phecy, which are not yet accomplifhed.

Ver\ 4, 5 — John to the feven churches
Vol, I, B which

10 A COMiMENTART-' Ch I.

which are in Afia : Grace be unto you, and
peace from him who is, and who was, and who
is to come ; and from the fevcn fpirits which
are before his throne : and from Jefus Chrift,
who is the faithful witnefs, and the firft be-
gotten of the dead, and the prince of the
kings of the earth.

As the apoflles addrefTed their epiftles to
foiTie particular church or perfon, fo John addrefTes
this book to the feven churches which were then in
Alia Minor. In the nth verfe of this chapter Jefus
expreffely commands John to write this book, and
to fend it to the feven Chriftian churches in Afia.
It was, therefore, neceflary that he fliould addrefs
it to them. Without fuch a command, it was very
proper and natural for him to addrefs this book to
thefe churches ; becaufe a part of it confifts of a
particular" epiftle to each of thcfe feven churches,
contained in chapters fecond and third : and to
whom is it fo proper to addrefs a letter as to the
perfon, or colledive body to w liom it is written ?

As John was in a Hate of baniflnnent, this book
might have been foon deftroyed by bis perfccutors,
had it remained in his own cuftody ; and, at any
rate, it would not have been of ufe to the fen-ants
of God, if it had not been communicated to them.
It was tl\erefore proper that he fliould addrefs it

to

Ver. 4, 5- ^^ "^^^ revelatign. ir

to feme Chriftain church or churches ; and to none
was it more natural for him to have done fo than
to thofe in Afia Minor, for he had refided for a
conliderable time at Ephcfus, and fuperintended
the church there, which was one of them, and all
the feven were at a fmall diflance from the ifland
of Patmos, where he wrote this book.

Like the other apoftles, in their epiftolary ad-
drefles, he prays for grace and peace to thofe
chvirches. By grace we arc to underlland, the free
favour of God to pardon their fins, and to renew
and perfe6l their natures : and by peace, peace
with God, peace of mind, and peace with man ;
the natural coniequences of that grace. Thefe
bleilings he prays for them from God, the Father,
the Son, and the Holy Ghoft, the only fource from
which we are taught by the gofpel of Jefus, to
hope for that grace and peace. The Father, the
Son, and the Holy Spirit, he defcribes by a kind of
circumlocution ; or rather, according to the idiom of
prophetic writing, he gives them fymbolical names,
evidently expreffive of the names which are given
to them, in common or alphabetical language. As
we proceed, we fhall meet with fymbolical names,
uniformly in this book in place of literal ones, and
for this obvious rcafon, that the book is written in
the fymbolical language, which is the language of
prophecy. The nature of the fymbolical language
B 2 fhall

12

A COMMENTARY Ch. I,

Ihall be explained in our commentarj on verfes 12,
13, 14, 15, and 16, of this chapter.

God the Father is fliled, *' him which is, and
" which was, and which is to come :" A defcrip-
tion exactly expreffing, that felf-exillence, indepen-
dence, omniprefence, and eternity, which are lig-
nified by Jehova^ the incommunicable name of
God. The Holy Spirit is fliled " The feven fpirits
which are before his throne." In the fymbolical
language Seien fignifies Holy and perfedl. It fig-
ilifies Holy in allulion to the feventh part of time
having been confecrated as a holy Sabbath to the
Lord. This was the cafe not only at the creation
of the world, when " God blefled the feventh day
" and fandified it ;" but under the Mofaic difpen-
fation, God faid " Remember the fabbath day to
" keep it holy, fix days flialt thou labour, and do
** thy work : but \h& feventh day is the fabbath of
" the Lord thy God." The feventh year was holy
as the Sabbatical year, and feven times feven years
Were to be counted to mark out the holy year of
Jubilee. The number feven too was very common
in the facrificcs and purifications among the Jews,
in order to ceremonial holinefs. It lliall afterwards
be fliewn, in its proper place ; that thefe Sevens,
which run through the old Teitament fcriptures,
and through this book, have a reference to the fe-
venth Chiliad, (or feventh thoufand years) of the
woifld ; which fhall be the Millennium or great

Sabbath

Ver. 4, 5. ON the revelation. 1^

Sabbath of the whole earth. In allufion to the
fame things feven iignifies perfedion. On theyd*-
ventb day God had perfedly finifhed the works of
creation. Before atonements, confecrations, or luf-
trations could be perfeded under the law of Mofes,
the guilty perfon, the perfon or thing to be con-
fecrated,andthe impure perfon were to be fprinkled
feven times. When an Hebrew forfeited his li-
berty, y^z;^/z years perfeded his flavery. He muft
have been fet free at the Sabbatical year. When
an Hebrew alienated his landed property, fevefi
times fe've?i years perfected the period of its aliena-
tion, and it returned to him or his heirs, clear of
all incumbrances, at the year of Jubilee. Seven
Chiliads too, fnall perfect the ages of the World ;
in fo far that ; though the world ihall continue for
fome time afterthe end of the feventh Chiliad, yet
not fo long, in all probability, as to make up another
age, as fhall afterwards be fliewn in its proper
place. Though the ages of the world are fixed in
fcripture,' yet not the precife time of its diiTolution.
*' But of that day and hour knoweth no man,
•' no, not the angels of heaven." Hence in the iyni-
bohcal language the /even fpirits, is of the fame
import with. The Holy and perfect Spirit : an ap-
pellation which in the full fenfe of the words can
apply to that Spirit only who is God. Rev. xv. 4.
It is faid " Who Ihall not fear thee, O Lord, and
^' glorify thy name ? for tbou only art holy.'* And

certainly

14 A COMMENTARY Ch. I .

certainly abfolute perfedtion is to be attributed to
God only.

As in this verfe John prays for grace and peace
for the feven churches ; and as the fy mbolical def-
cription of the holinefs and perfection of the .di-
vine Spirit is taken from the legal purifications ap-
pointed for finful men, and from the completion
of the ages of the world ; by the appellation of the
fcven fpirits, it is intimated that the divine fpirit
pcrfedly purifies men from fin, by renewing them
in the fpirit of their mind. " That they are chofen
" to falvation through fanclification of the fpirit :"
That his gifts and operations are fully equal to all
the ages and countries of the world, and particu-
larly to the number and fituations of all the feven
churches in Afia, for whom John here prays for
grace and peace.

" Before the throne," refers to the vifion in verfe
5th chap. iv. which fliall be explained in its place.
The Son of God, is filled, " Jefus Chrift, who is
*' the faithful witnefs, and thefirfl begotten of the
" dead, and the prince of the kings of the earth,"
The whole of this name as applied to the Son of
God is fymbolical, even the well known and com-
mon appellation Jefus Chrift. He is" called Jefus,
(which fignities a faviour) becaufe he laves his
people from their fms, and Chrifl (which fignifies
anointed) becaufe he is the Lord's anointed, he is
the MefTiah. " The faithful witnefs." It is the

peculiiir

Ver. 4. 5. ON THE REVELATION. I5

peculiar office of Chrift faithfully to reveal the \vill
of God to men. Matt. xi. 27. " Neither knoweth
" any man the Father, fave the Son, and he to
*' whomfoever the Son will reveal him." Before
Pilate Jefus faith, John xviii. 37. " To this end was
" I born and for this caufe came I into the world,
" that I fhould bear witnefs unto the truth. Every
" one that is of the truth heareth my voice."

As the revealer of the will of God, it feems to
me that he was ftiled, The Word of God, even before
his incarnation. A word reveals or makes known
to thofe who hear it the mind of the perfon whofe
word it is. Hence whatever makes known the
mind of God is called the word of God. Thus
facred fcripture is called the word of God ; and,
on this account it appears to me, that the Son of
God is called the Word of God. John i. i. " In
" the beginning was the Word, and the Word was
" with God, and the Word was God." This is the
prophet whom Mofes faid the Lord would raife up
from among the Jews like unto him.

" And the firft begotten of the dead." The
words in the original are Tr^oToroKTot; U rc^y nK^o^r,
which fliould have been tranflated, " The firil born
tf, or on account of, the dead." In the epiltle to
the Coloffians chap. i. 18. Jefus is fliled the firlt
born from the dead, which, in the original, is the
very fame with the words in this verfe. To fhew
us that he who is thus called the firfl: born of the

dead

l6 A COMMENTARY Ch. t,

dead is true God, it is faid verfes i6, 17, of that
chapter ; " For by him were all things created
" that are in heaven and that are in earth, vifible
*' and invifible, whether they be thrones, or domi-
" nions, or principalities, or powers, all things were
" created by him and for him, and he is before all
" things, and by him all things confifl.'*

In the patriarchal age, the firfl born was the
prieft of his family ; and under the Mofaic dif-
penfation, the firft born were virtually the priefls ;
becaufe God exprefsly declares, Numbers iii. 11,12,
13. that he took the Levites for his prielts inilead of
the Firjl Bern. By the dead we are to underftand
thofe who are fpiritually dead : thofe who in the
language of fcripture " are dead in trefpaffes and
" lins. For to be carnally minded is death."
Hence the firfl born of the dead, is the prieft of
thofe who were fpiritually dead. Jefus is our great
High Prieft. But his prieftly office was rendered
neceflary only by the iin and depravity of men. If
men had not been guilty, there would have been
no need for Chrift as their prieft, to take away
their fin by the one facrifice of himfelf. If men had
been pure they could have approached immediate-
ly, in ads of devotion, to a pure God ; and there-
fore would not have needed Chrift to intercede
with God for them, as their prieft. The Apoftle
gives us a full account of the prieftly office of
Chrift in the epiftle to the Hcb, chap. vii. 17, — 28,

- And

Ver. 4. 5. ON THE REVELATION. ly

" And the prince of the kings of the eartli."
fey the kings of the earth, we are to underftand
not only all the kings of the earth in general, but
efpecially all the kings and emperors of the Ro-
man empire, in its heathen, and in its papal Hate,
with all the feparate kingdoms into which it hath
been divided in that laft ftate. The prophet Da-
niel predided the rife, the decline and downfall of
the Roman empire as the laft of the four kingdoms
which fliould bear rule over all the earth, in chap.
ii. 31, — 43. And then in,the 44th;verfe, he foretold
that the God of heaven fliould fet up a kingdom
even Chrift's kingdom, which fliould deftroy all
thefe kingdoms, and continue for ever. *' And in
" the days of thefe kings fliall the God of heaven
*' fet up a kingdom, which fliall never be deftroy-
*' ed : and the kingdom fliall not be left to other
** people, but it fliall break in pieces, and confume
" all thefe kingdoms, and it fliall ftand for ever."
The fame prediction is more fully explained in the
feventh chapter of Daniel's prophecies. In the
I3tli and 14th verfes of that chapter, he thus pre-
didls and reprefents Chrift by his well known
name The So?i of Alan, as the prince of the kings
of the earth: " 1 faw in the night viiions, and be-
"hold one like the So?i of Ma?i came with the
" clouds of heaven, and came to the Antient of
" days, and they brought him near before him.
" And there was given him dominion, and glory, and
C 9.

l8 A COMMENTARY Ch. I.

" a kingdom, that all people, nations, and lan-
*' guages fliould ferve him : his dominion is an e-
*' veiiafting dominion, which ihall not pafs away,
" and his kingdom that which fhall not be deftroy-
" ed." In confequence of thefe predictions of Da-
niel, in which he calls the Roman Empire the
kingdom of the earth, and Chrift's kingdom the
kingdom of heaven ; it is, that, unifsrmly in this
book, the Roman Empire, whether heathen or pa-
pal, is called by the fymbolical name of The Earthy
and Chrift's kingdom by that of Heaven. Under
thefe appellations they are very frequently men-
tioned through the w hole of the New Teltament.
But the reafon of that application of thefe fymboli-
cal names fhall be explained more fully in its proper
place. The w^hole of the fecond pfalm is a very
plain prediction of Chrift the Son of God, as the
prince of the kings of the earth, which the reader
is defired to confider with attention. In the fecond
verfe of that pfalm he is called " The Lord's anoin-
ted." The word in the original is in^u;Q (or his
Mefliah) which jQiould have been tranflated, his
Chrift. But indeed, anointed m the Englifli lan-
guage is of the fame fignification with Chr'i/l in
the Greek, and Mejjlah in the Hebrew languages.
In the 6th verfe he is ftiled a " King upon Zion."
In the 7th he is called the Son of God; from the
8th to the 1 2th verfe, the extent of his dominion
is^mentioneJ, and the kings and the judges of the

earth

Ver. 5. 6. ON the revelation. 19

earth are called upon to acl a wife part in fubmit-
ting to his iron fcepter, and in doing obeifance to
the Son. It is thus, that, in the fymbolical language,
Chrifl's kingly office is defcribed. By the fuperin-
tendency of his providence he over-rules, controuls,
and governs the kingdoms of this world, and parti-
cularly the Roman empire both in its heathen and
papal flate, in fuch a manner that, without their
intending it, they fliall bring about the full efta-
bliftiment and triumph of his kingdom in this
world, and accomplilh the purpofes predided in
this book. One kingdom lliall be diflblved and
another fhall rife out of its ruins; not by chance,
but by the appointment of the Prince of the kings
of the earth. And at the appointed time the Ro-
man empire, in its laft form of government, fhall
be totally deflroyed ; and then all the kingdoms
of the world lliall become the kingdom of our
God and of his Chrift. But this will fall more
properly to be explained in chap. xix. 1 1,— -21, to
which paflage the reader is now referred.

Lajl claufe of <verfe sth and 6th. — Unto
him that loved us, and waflied us from our
fins in his own blood, and hath made us
kings and priefls unto God and his Father ;
to him be glory and dominion forever and
ever. Amen.

C 2 This

20 A COMMENTARY Ch. I.

This fong of praife John offers up in name of
the whole church of Chriil. It contains, not only
praifes for bleffings already received ; but predic-
tions of praifes, which fhall be offered up by gene-
rations yet unborn, for bleffings which are yet to
come. In it he praifes Chrifl for loving his church.
The tongue of man cannot exprefs, nor the heart
of man conceive love more pure, warm and per-
manent, than that, which, for us men and for our
falvation, when we were llrangers, aliens, and e-
nemies to God by wicked works, brought the Son
of God from heaven to earth; made the Word be-
come flefli and dwell among us ; take upon him
the form" of a fervant ; become a man of forrows
and acquainted with grief; and at lall die upon the
crofs, the jull for the unjuft, that he might bring
us unto God ; Rom. v. 6, — 8. He praifes him for
wafliing us from our fins in his own blood. " He
*' is the propitiation for our fins." " He took a-
*' way fin by the one facrifice of himfelf." " The
" blood of Jefus Chrift cleanfeth us from all fin I"
1 Pet. i. i8, 19. Heb, ix. 11 — 2S. And lafl:ly,
he praifes him for making us kings and priells un-
to God, even his Father. In one refped true Chrif-
tians are made kings in every age of the church,
a; they are refcued from the llavery of fin and
fiatan, and vindicated to the liberty of Ions of God.
In one relped they are made priefts to God in e-
very age, becaufe under the gofpel, they are al-
lowed

Ver. 5* 6. on the revelation. 21

lowed near accefs to God in ads of devotion. The
Chriflian, needs not, like the Jew of old, a prieft to
offer up facrifices to God for him. He approaches
unto God through the mediation of Chrift alone.
John iv. 23, 24. " But the hour cometh, and now
" is, when the true worfliippers Ihall worlhip the Fa-
*' ther in fpirit and in truth : for the Father feek-
" eth fuch to worfhip him. God is a fpirit, and
" they that worlhip him, muft worfliip him in fpirit
" and in truth.'* Pfalm li. 17. " The facrifices of
" God are a broken fpirit : a broken and a contrite
" heart, O God, thou will not defpife." The
Chriltian as a prieft unto God, can not only offer
lip unto God prayers and praifes for himfelf, but
alfo interceflions and thankfgivings for others. In
thefe fenfes the apoftle Peter ftiled Chriftians in his
day, (i Pet. ii. 9.) " A chofen generation, a royal
" priefthood ; that they might lliew forth the
" praifes of him who hath called them out of dark-
" nefs, into his marvelous light." But this ground
of praife is prophetic, and refpefts a period of time
as yet at about two hundred years diftance from
^is, in which the church of Chrift ihall be raifed
to fo trumphant and pure a ftate in this world,
that, in a much more exalted fenfe of the words,
Chriftians fhall be made kings and priefts unto
God. This triumphant and pure ftate of the
church is foretold in Daniel vii. 25, — 27. And in
this book, V. 10. and xx.4, — 6. on which laft paf-

fage

22 A COMMENTARY Ch. I.

fage this prediclion will fall moll properly to be
explained.

By afcribing glory and dominion to Chrifl for-
ever and ever, John foretells that all thefe gracious
interpoiitions of Chriit, however defpifed, and con-
temned by many, fhall illullriouily difplay the
glory of all perfections in him ; and that his king-
dom, however oppofed by " principalities, powers,
*' the rulers of the darknefs of this age and fpiri-
" tual wickednefs in heavenly places," fhall not be
overthrown, nor its triumph over all oppolition
retarded a fingle day beyond the time foretold by
the prophets of God. The AfTyrian, Perfian, Gre-
cian, and the heathen Roman empire have all
been diflblved. The modern kingdoms of the
earth, fliall have their rife, decline and downfall,
like thefe ancient ones ; but Chrift's kingdom fhall
never be overthrown. In a period yet to come,
it fliall fiourifli much more in this world than it
hath hitherto done. And, w^hen not only the
kingdoms of this world, but this world itfelf fhall
be dilTolved, his kingdom of truth, righteoufnefs,
peace, and joy fliall flourifli forever in heaven.
•' His dominion is an everlafting dominion, which
*' fliall not pafe away, and his kingdom that which
" fliall not be dellroyed."

" Amen," So be it, or So let it be. By this word,
with which John clofes his fong of praife, and with
which, we ordinarly clofe our prayers and thankf-

givings

Ver. 7. ON THE REVELATION. 23

givings unto God, he exprefTes his confident hope,
and ardent delire, that the love of Chrift, in the
redemption of mankind by his blood, lliall illuf-
trate the glory of his perfedions; and that his king-
dom of truth, righteoufnefs, peace and joy fliall
never be overthrown by men or devils.

Ver, 7. — Behold, he cometh with clouds;
and every eye fhall fee him, and they alfo
which pierced him : and all kindreds of the
earth fhall wail becaufe of him: even fo. Amen.

This verfe is a citation from three predictions
of the coming of Chriil recorded in Daniel vii. 13.
Zechariah xii. 10. and Matt. xxiv. 30. The firll
of thefe Ts an early prophecy of the profperity of
Chriil's kingdom in this world, after the final over-
throw of the laft head of Roman government.
This is evident from the whole 7th chap, of Da-
niel, which will fall to be explained more fully as
we proceed in this book. The fecond is a predic-
tion of the converfion of the Jews, who are here
defigned tbej that pierced him. And the laft is a
prophecy of the final overtlu'ow of the Roman
empire, when Chrift's kingdom fliall come in all that
glory and triumph which Ihall mark the period
foretold in Rev. xx. 4, — 6. Hence the meaning of
this verfe is, that thefe early and dark hints deli-
vered by Daniel, Zechariah, and Matthew, con-
cerning-

24 A COMMENTARY Ch. T.

cerning the profperity of Chrift's kingdom in this
world, in a diftant period, the converfion of the
Jews, and the total overthrow of papal Rome,
fliall be more fully and clearly unfolded in this
book. That they are fo will 1 hope, appear as we
proceed. To thefe things John fays Amen, in
token of his firm belief that they fhall be fo, his
ardent defire that they may happen, and his full
conviction of their fitnefs and propriety.

Ver. 8. — I am Alpha and Omega, the be-
ginning and the ending, faith the Lord,
which Ls, and which was, and which is to
come, the Almighty.

This book is the Revelation of Jefus Chrift. In
this verfe Chrilt himfelf fpeaks, and tells us who he
is. He is " the Lord ;" in confequence of that
eflential fovereignty over all ; which is effential to
Chrifi: as true God, that dominion with which he
is veiled as Mediator during the fubliftance of the
mediatorial kingdom, and until he fhall dehver up
that kingdom unto God the Father, and that fu-
preme power by which he controuls, over-rules and
fliall at lad fubdue all his enemies, and the op-
pofers of his kingdom. He is ililed " The Lord'* in
a great multitude of paflages of fcripture : But the
34th, 35th, and 36th verfes of the fecond chapter
•f the Acls of the Apoftlcs in fo ftriking a manner

apply

Yer. §■. ON THE REVELATION. 2^

apply" the appellation of Lord to Chrifl, that I fliall
Infert them : " For David is not alcended into the
" heavens ; but he faith himfelf, the Lord faid un-
*' to my Lord, fit thou on my right hand, until I
" make thy foes thy footftool. Therefore let all
" the houfe of Ifrael know affuredly, that God
*' hath made that fame Jefus whom ye have cruci-
*' fied, both Lord and Chrijl,'* This Lord, who is
Jefus Chrift, faith, " I am Alpha and Omega."
Thefe two words are the names of the firft, and
the laft letters of the Greek alphabet, and indeed
the two letters themfelves (a xi) are in the origi-
nal, and not the names of them. The Greeks re-
prefent numbers, not by the digits or figures ufed
by us, and many other nations, but by the letters
of their alphabet. Hence alpha and omega, whicli
are the firft and the laft of their numbers, fignify
in the fymbolical language the firft and the laft.
Thus Chrift, as God, is the firft and the laft of be-
ings. He was before all other beings. Of every other
he could have faid, as he faid to the Jews of Abra-
ham, Johnviii. 58. *' Verily verily, 1 fay unto you,
" before Abraham was, I am." He is the laft.
None fhall furvive him. He is felf-exiftent and
eternal.

" He is the beginning*" He created all. " In

" the beginning was the Word, and the Word was

*' with God, and the Word was God. All things

Vol. L D " vvere

Q.G A CO:\IMENTARY Ch. I.

*' were made by him : and without him was not
" any thing made that was made."

He is " the ending." He will at laft judge all,
and fix their final doom. John v. 22, 2,3. " For
" the Father judgeth no man ; but hath commit-
*' ted all judgement unto the Son : that men fhould
*' honour the Son, even as they honour the Fa-
" ther."

" Who is, who was, and who is to come," the
fymbolical name of Jehova the incommunicable
name of God ; which is applied, verfe 4th, to God
the Father, and in this verfe to Jefus Chrift, to
fhew that he is true God, fince he exids in all time
part, prefent and future. He is alfo called the Al-
mighty. Though fome creatures may be ililed
mighty, yet not even the firlt and greateft of crea-
tures can be lliled Almighty. Omnipotence, like
fclf-exiftence and eternity, is an incommunicable
attribute of Deity. The account given of Chrift
in this verfe fo fully fliews him to be true God,
that it is not poffible to exprefs Deity in more un-
equivocal terms, than *' the firil and the laft, the
" beginning and the ending, which is, which was,
" and which is to come, the Almighty."

But perhaps, thofe who will not acknowledge
the true divinity of Chrifl, will endeavour to evade
the force of this defcription, by faying, that it ap-
plies to God only and not to Jcfus Chrili. Let
them readwith attention verfes nth, — i8th of this

chapter,

Ver. 9. ON THE REVELATION. 27

chapter, efpecially the 17th, and jSth ; and they
will find, that the fame perfon who faith, " I am
" Alpha and Omega, the firft and the laft, the Al-
'* mighty," faith alfo " I am he that liveth, and
" was deads and behold I am ahve for ever more."
But this.daft part of the defcription cannot apply
to God the Father, but muft apply only to the
" Word which is God, and which was made flefli,
" and dwelt among men.**

As fuch is the character of Jefus, he could clear-
ly forefee, perfedly foretell, and, in fpite of all op-
pofition, bring about, every event. What event
could efcape the notice of him v/ho is " the firlt
*' and the laft, the beginning and the ending, which
" is, which w^as, and which is to come ?" Or what
power or policy could prevent the full accomplifli-
ment of the predidions of him who is the Lord,
and the Almighty ?

Ver. g. — I John, wlio alfo am your brother,
and companion in tribulation, and in the
kingdom, and patience of Jefus Chrift, v^as
in the ifle that is called Patmos, for the word
of God, and for the tellimony of Jefus ChriH:.

John informs the feven churches in Alia of his

fituarion, and of the occafion of it, at the time he

f^w and wrote the heavenly vifions contained in

D 2 thi";

8:2 A COMMENTARY Ch. I.

this book. He was in the ifland of Patmos,
a fmall, barren, and thinly peopled ifland (of aboutf
thirty miles in circumference), in the iEgean fea,
or as it is now called the Archipelago. It is li-
tuated about forty miles from the continent of
x\fia towards Ephefus, and therefore at a fmall dif-
tance from the feven Afiatic churches. Its mo-
dren name is Palmofa. Thither the apoftle John
was baniflied by the Roman emperor Domitian,
about the year of Chrift 9^

At that time Domitian carried on a perfecution
againft the Chriftians, and baniflied John to
this ifland for his attachment to the truths of
infpired fcriptures, as the word or revelation of
the will of God to man ; and for that open tefti-
mony which he gave that Jefus is the Chrift, and
the Son of God.

In this perfecuted ftate he ftiles himfelf, a brother
and companion to the Chriftians in Afia, in the
three following particulars, in which that moral or
fpiritual relation between him and them was found-
ed: ly?, In "the tribulation of Jefus Chrift;"
thofe perfecutions to which he and they were both
expofed, from the hands of Domitian, for their faith
in Chrift, and open attaclmient to his religion.
idly, "In the kingdom of Jefus Chrift/' In the belief,
obedience and enjoyment of that truth, righteouf-
nefs, peace, and joy, which conftitute the king-

^orii

Ver, I©, II. ON THE REVELATION. 29

dom of Chrill. And ^dly, " In the patience of
Jefus Chrift." In that patience, ferenity and firni-
nefs of mind when fuffering for the truth, which
Chrill taught, and examplified in his own unpara-
lelled fuflerings ; and which thofe only poffefs, in
whofe hearts the kingdom of Chrift is evecled.

Ver, 10,11 .- — I was in the fpirit on the
Lord's day, and heard behind me a great
voice, as of a trumpet, faying, I am Alpha
and Omega, the firft and the lad : And
v^rhat thou feeft, write in a book, and fend
it unto the feven churches which are in Afia ;
unto Ephefus, and unto Smyrna, and unto
Pergamos, and unto Thyatira, and unto Sar-
ciis, and unto Philadelphia, and unto Lao-
dicea,

John fays " He was in the fpirit'' This is the
fcripture expreffion for being under the power of
divine infpiration. In every pafTage of fcripture
where this expreffion occurs, it always fignifies that
the perfon, to whom it is applied, was infpired at
the time. Thus Matth. xxii, 43. " Jefus faith unto
" them, How then doth David in fpirit call him
" Lord?" By looking into the context, the reader
will clearly fee that the meaning of that expreffion
is, How then doth David, fpeaking by infpiration,

call

30 A COMMENTARY Ch. I.

call him Lord ? Rev. iv. 2. " And immediately I
was in the^/rzV," — xvii. 3. "So he carried me away
" in thefpirit into the wildernefs;" — and xxi, 10.
" And he carried me away in the fpirit, to a great
*' and high mountain." In all thefe palTages the
context fully fliews that by this expreffion John
declared that he was infpired at thefe times. This
phrafe is exceedingly expreffive of the nature of
infpiration, the thing lignified by it. When a per-
fon perceives and feels through the channels of
the bodily organs, as we all ordinarly do, he is
faid to be in the body. But when perceptions are
conveyed to, and impreffions are made upon, his
mind by the fpirit of God immediately, and with-
out the intervention of his bodily organs, as are done
in infpiration, he is with equal propriety faid to
be in the fpirit, becaufe the impreflion is made
upon him in a way iimilar to that, or probably in
the precife fame way, in which one unembodicd
fpirit communicates its ideas to another, in the fe-
parated ftate of man's exiftence after the death of
his body, and before the refurre(5tion of the dead.
Agreeably to this account of the matter, the in-
fpired Paul giving us an account of a vifion which
he faw, and at the fame time being at a lofs to fay,
whether it was communicated to him through the
channel of his bodily organs, or by immediate in-
fpiration, fays, 2 Cor. xii. 2, 3, 1 knew a man in
" Chvifl, above fourteen years ago (whether in the

♦' body,

Ver. lO, II. ON THE REVELATION. 3 1

" body, I cannot tell ; or whether out of the body
*' I cannot tell : God knoweth) luch an one caught
" up to the third heaven. And I knew fuch a
" man (whether in the body, or out the body, I
*' cannot tell : God knoweth.)" &c.

It was on the Lord's day that John was infpired
at this time. The firft day of the week was fo
called in memory of Chrill's refurreclion from the
dead on that day ; and is facred to the worfliip of
God by the difciples of the Lord.

To enumerate the various kinds and degrees of
divine infpiration, as they are dated by thofe wtI-
ters who treat diredly of'that fubjed, would be an
uneceflary digreffion. Let it be obferved in ge-
neral only, that it is unneceflary to attempt a proof
of the reality or nature of divine infpiration, to
real Chriftians, becaufe their faith, founded upon
facred fcripture, neceflarily pre-fuppofes the be-
lief of it.

But, if any fliould look into this book, who de-
ny divine infpiration ; for their fakes, let it be ob-
ferved : That that God, who endowed one man
with the power of making known Jiis ideas to a-
nother man, in fuch a way as to convince him
fully who it is that fpeaks to him ; cntainly muil
have a power himfelf of making his mind known to
the men, whom he hath made, and in fuch a man-
ner as to leave them under no doubt, that the com-
munication comes from him. " Underftand,'yc

" brutilli

3^ A COMMENTARY Ch. I.

" brutifli among the people : and ye fools when will
*' ye be wife ? He that planted the ear fhall he not
" hear ? He that formed the eye fhall he not fee ?
*' He that cHaftifeth the heathen, Ihall not he cor-
" reel? He that teacheth man knowledge, fliall
" not he know ?" What are called natural intel-
ledual powers are as much the gift of God, as in^
fpired communications are. It is God who makea
man wifer than the fowls of heaven, and giveth
him more underilanding than the beads of the
earth. It is God, who maketh one man to differ
from another in kind and degree of natural genius.
Let not any, then, who mult admit that they are
indebted to God for their intelledual powers;
through a falfe, criminal, and dangerous pride of
tmderflanding, be afhamed to acknowledge him
for the bleffings of divine revelation. Let them
read this book with candour and attention, and
the hiflorical detail of fads, in which the predic-
tions of John have been accompliflied in a moft
minute and Ihiking manner, and in its effects ; I
truft, and pray to God, they fliall then fee an in-
conteftible proof of divine infpiration.

In whatever manner God communicates his
will by infpiration to any man, at any time, we
may be certain that that perfon dillinctly perceives
what is communicated, and from whom it comes.
Infpiration was communicated to the mind fome-
rime'^,by impreffions made upon it iimilar to thofe,

which,

Vei';, lO. II, ON THE REVELATION. 33

which, in the ordinary way are made upon it,
through the ear by founds ; and at other times by
impreffions fimilar to thofe, which, in an ordinary
way, are made upon it, through the eye, by the
objeds of fight.- In both thefe ways; it was fre-
quently communicated to the prophets of God,
both in the Old and New Tellament, and parti-
cularly to John in this book.

We are not to imagine that, in the firft of thefe
kinds, an audible voice is acflually heard by the
bodily ear; or, in the fecond, that a vilible obje(5t
is adually feen by the bodily eye : but only, that
in the firfl:, an impreflion is made on the mind)
and ideas are communicated to it direclly, withont
the intervention of an audible found ftriking on
the bodily organ ; very iimilar to thefe impreffions
which are made upon it in ordinary cafes through
the ear : and in the fecond, like thofe which are
made upon it through the eye; but without being
conveyed to it through that organ. Of thefe im-
mediate impreffions on the mind, perfons accuftom-
ed to dreaming, may form fome idea, when they
recoiled: with what diftindnefs and force of im-
preffion, they have heard words, and feen perfons,
or other vilible objeds with their minds, when their
ears and eyes were not only clofed with ileep,
but in fact no audible words were fpoken in their
ears, and no fach perfon or vifibic objecfl was be-
fore their eyes.

Vol., L E Ths

34 A COMMENTARY Ch. L

The firft impreffion, which, at this time, was
made upon the mind of John by infpiration, was
juft fuch an one, as, in an ordinary way, would
have been made upon it by a great voice behind
him, loud as the found of a trumpet. This voice
was not only loud, but alfo articulate and diftind.
By it John was informed that the impreffion was
made upon his mind by Jefas Chrift, ftiled Alpha
and Omega, and that the revelation fhoutd be
made to him in the way of vifion. The different
revelations made to him, as recorded in this book,
were communicated to his mind by vifions. All
thefe different vifions fhall be dillindly marked as
we proceed.

Infpiration in the way of vifion, like the evi-
dence of fight, is the clearefl kind of impreffion
which can be made upon the mind of man.

Jefus commands John to write thefe vifions in a
book, and to fend it to the feven Chriftian church-
es in Alia, particularly mentioned in this veife.
The refpedlive fituarions and charadrers of thefe
feven cities, and of the Chriftian churches in
them, v.'ill fall more properly to be conlidered
when the particular epiftles, addrelTed to each of
them, come under our review.

Ver/e 1 2th, \Jl claiife. — And I turned to fee
the voice that fpake with me.

though

Ver. 12. ON THE REVELATION, 35

Though John was commanded to write the vi-
fions in a book, he had, as yet, feen none of them ;
but had only heard a loud and diftind voice, be-
hind him, giving that command. Following the
found, he turned about to fee what it was that
fpake to him.

It is faid, he turned to " fee the voice," Even
the bell: writers fometimes ufe a word, expreilive
of the perception of one fenfe, to fignify that of a-
nother fenfe. To fee a found, or a voice, is a
phrafe ufed in Exodus xx. 18. and in Efchylus,
Prom. V. 21. The phrafe is not unnatural in this
paflage ; but, on the contrary, very expreffive of
what muft have ?been the ftate of John's mind
when he fpake thefe words. He had jull heard,
behind him, an awful, loud, articulate, and di-
ftincl found ; but had feen no perfon. He there-
fore, inftantaneoufly and inftindively, turned a-
bout to fee ; but he did not know whether any
perfon or vifible obje£l was to be feen. He turn-
ed, therefore, to fee if he could obtain any more
diftind perception of the voice and of the fpeaker.
It was the voice which, at that time, had feized
upon and captivated his mind : It was therefore
very natural for him to fay, that he turned to fee
the voice.

E 2 INTRO-

36 A COMMENTARY Ch. I.

INTRODUCTORY VISION.

Verfe 12th, 2d claufe, and i^erfes 13, 14, 15-,
16. — And being turned, I faw feven golden
candlefticks ; and in the midft of the feven
candleflicks, one, hke unto the Son of man,
clothed with a garment down to the foot, and
girt about the paps with a golden girdle.
His head and his hair were white like wool,
as white as fnow ; and his eyes were as a
flame of fire ; and his feet like unto fine brafs,
as if they burned in a furnace ; and his voice
as the found- of many waters. And he had
in his right hand feven flars : and out of his
mouth went a fliarp two-edged (Word: and his
countenance was as the fun Ihineth in his
ftrength.

Thefe four verfes contain the Iiitrodudlory V'ljion
which was made to John.

Before explaining this one, it is neceflln-y, and
will be of the greateft ufe, for underftanding
this book aright, that I explain the nature of
the fymbolical language, in which it is writ-
ten. One great reafon why this book is fo little
underftood, is, that men ar^ either ignorant of, or
inattentive to, the fymbolical or hieroglyphical

language.

Ver. 12. &C. ON THE REVELATION. 37

language. To difcover the meaning of any book,
it is abfolutely neceiTary that we underftand the
language in which it is written. — Let the meaning
of a book be as plain as poilible, if it is written in
the Hebrew, Greek, or Latin languages, it will be
psrfedly unintelligible to every pedbn who can
read the Engiifti language only. In like man-
ner, if a book is written in the fymbolical lan-
guage, which is the cafe with all the prophetical
parts of this book, it muft be equally uninteUigible
to thofe perfons, who, though acquainted with all
the languages which are written in the alphabeti-
cal characters, are entire ilrangers to the fymboli-
cal language.

In the firll ages of the world, no charaders were
invented to exprefs the limple founds of which
words are compounded. Thefe arbitrary figns,
which exprefs the different founds, of which all
the words in our language are formed, and in eve-
ry other language in which alphabetical letters
are ufed, are of later invention. In the earlieft
and moft limple times, the characlers, which men
firft ufed in writing, were the moil; natural and
iimple j even the exadl pidures of thofe viiible ob-
je<5ts, which were the fubjecls of their few and
fimple writings. Thus, for inftance,— to exprefs
a bird, they drew the pidure of a bird ; to ex-
prefs a liorfe, — the pidture of horfe ; and, to ex-
prefs a man, — the pidure of a man. But this

ftaire

38 A COMMENTARY Cll. I.

flage of writing, like the firfl ftage of every other
art, was not only fimple, but alfo very rude and li-
mited. This painting and engraving could exprefs
material and vifible objeds only, but was quite un-
fit for exprefling fpiritual objedls or abftrafl ideas.

In the next ftage of writing, the figures or

pidures of vifible objedts w^ere continued : But,
then they were ufed to exprefs not thefe things
themfelves, of which they were the pidures ; but
other things of an invifible nature, and even abftrad
ideas, between which, and the things of which thefe
charaders were the pidures, there was fome kind
of refemblance. Thus, for inftance, the pidure
of the face of man fignified wifdom ; becaufe man
is the wifeft of all vifible creatures which we have
feen : The pidure of a lion fignified boldnefs and
courage ; becaufe a lion is the moft couragious of
animals : And a circle fignified eternity ; becaufe
it hath neither beginning nor end. This mode of
waiting was called the fymbolical ; and, becaufe it
was continued among heathen priefts, long after
the invention of alphabetical charaders, in order
to conceal the myfteries of their religion from the
people, it was alfo called the hieroglyphical man-
ner of writing ; that is, the facred engraving or
painting. That the fymbolical was the mode of
writing, before the invention of letters, every one
acquainted with the hiftory of writing muft know.
If any doubt of this, let them confult Diodo-

Ver. I2.&C. ON THE REVELATION. 39

rus Siculus, lib. iii. Servius, j?i Virgil. JEn. lib. v.
85. Lucan, Pharf. lib. iii. Tacitus, Annal. lib. xi.
c. 14. Amm. Marc. lib. xvii.

The inhabitants of America knew nothing of
letters until the Europeans difcovered that conti-
nent. They had only hieroglyphical characters,
and they ftill retain the ufe of them. The Chi-
nefe flill ufe the fy mbolical charadlers.

The prophetic parts, or vifions, of this book,
are written in the fymbolical language. I have
not faid fymbolical charadlers, but fymbolical
language ; becaufe, though the charadiers in which
this book was originally written, were the letters
of the Greek alphabet, and thofe in which our
tranflation is written are the letters of the Roman
alphabet ; yet the language itfelf, though ex-

prefled in thefe characters, is the fymbolical.

To make my meaning more cleajr, let it be obferv-
ed, that if a copy of the Old Teftament Avere all
written in Hebrew words, but all thefe words writ-
ten in Englifli or Roman charadlers ; and a copy
of the New Teftament were all written in Greek
words, but all thefe words written in Englifli or
Roman letters ; though it could not be faid of
fuch a copy of the Old Teftament, that it was writ-
ten in Hebrew characters ; or of fuch a copy of
the New Teftament, that it was written in Greek
letters ; yet, with the utmoft propriety, it could
be faid, that the former was written in the He-
brew

40 A COMMENTARY Ch. t,

brew language, and the latter In the Greek : And
though a perfon, who could read the Engliih lan-
guage only, might read and pronounce the words
of both; yet, becaufe he does not underftand the
Hebrew language, he could not underftand the
meaning of the former, and, becaufe he is igno-
rant of the Greek language, he could not difcover

the contents of the latter. Exadly fimilar is

the cafe with the prophetic parts of this book ; be-
caufe written originally in Greek letters, and tran-
llated into Englifh letters, they may be read and
pronounced by ihofe who can read thefe letters ;
but, becaufe written in the fymbolical language,
they can be underftood by thofe perfons only who
are acquainted with that language.

This feems, to me, to be tlie ordinary language
of prophecy. In particular, it runs through the
prophecies of Ifaiah, Ezekiel, and Daniel. Many
good reafons might be alligqed for the propriety
of this language, of this kind of univerfal and
natural language, in propiiecies hitended for ma-
ny ages, and all nations of the world, as many of
thofe of ifaiah, Ezekiel, Daniel, and John are. To
ftate thefe it is unneceffary. Since, in fad, God hath
made choice of this language for this book and o-
ther prophecies, we may be ceitain that he who
cannot err did fo for the bed rccaons. The na-
ture of this language will more clearly appear as I
proceed in the explication of this book y when e-

very

Ver. 4, 5. ON the revelatiok. 41

very different fymbol fliall be explained as it oc-
curs.

Each fymbol has as determinate and diftin<5l a
meaning, as each word in other languages hath.
Every time the fame fymbol occurs in this book,
and in all the prophetic writings, it preferves its.
proper and determinate fenfe, as much as the fame
word in other languages preferves its proper mean-
ing, whenever it occurs.

Belides the common fymbols, which, in this and
all other fymbolical writings, are ufed in their com-
mon acceptation, fome fymbols in this book are
taken from the vilible reprefentations under the
Mofaic difpenfation. As that difpenfation was
typical of the Chriftian, and as the obfervances
under the law were the fiiadows of better and
more fpiritual things to come under the gofpel ;
fuch peculiar fymbols Vv-ere exceedingly proper in
a book of prophecies, written under the Chriftian
difpenfation. It is alfo to be obferved, that the
prophets, Ezekiel, Daniel, and alfo John in this
book, give literal and plain explications of the moft
myfterious of the fymbols which they ufe; which
explications are the proper keys to their prophe-
cies. We fliall meet with feveral of thefe keys
in this book, fo plain, when duly confidered, and
fo well fitted for opening up the true meaning of
this book, that we flial! be apt to be aftoniflied
Vol. I. F at

4r2 A COMMENTARY Ch. I.

at our own inattention, in not having clearly per-
ceived them long ago.

Having faid fo much with refpecl to the fymbo-
lical language in which this book is written, let
us proceed to confider this Introdudory Vijion. In
it we have an inltance of this language. We are
not to fuppofe that John faw, with his bodily eyes,
the things defcribed in thefe verfes. The exact
fame impreflions were made upon his mind by the
Spirit of God, without the ufe of his bodily eyes,
that would have been made upon it, if he had ac-
tually feen, with his bodily eyes, the things de-
fcribed in thefe verfes. To fpend any time, to
explain, in this place, the meaning of this vifion,
would be unnecefTary, becaufe it is particularly
explained in the 17 th, i8th, and 20th verfes of
this chapter, as lliall appear in that place.

Verfe \^th^ 18/^.— And when I faw him,
I fell at his feet as dead : And he laid his
right hand upon me, faying unto me; Fear
not, I am the firft and the lafk : I am he
that livcth, and was dead ; and behold f
am alive for evermore, Amen ; and have
the keys of hell and of death.

This viiion llruck John \\ith awe. It had the
riime effect upon his mind, as if he had in facl

feen

Ver. 17. 18. ON THE REVELATION. 43

feen, with his bocltly eyes, fuch a majeflic and glo-
rious perfon. He fainted for fear, and fell down
at his feet. This glorious perfon laid his right
hand upon him, thus recovered him from his
fainting, and faid untc him ; Fear jiot. He then
tells him who he is :— " The firfl and the laft/'
A name which Jefus had taken in verfe nth;—*
a name which can fuit no being but that God,
who is felf-exiftent and eternal, who was before
all other beings, and who fliall live for ever. And
he adds, " I am he that liveth, and was dead ;
" and behold I am alive for evermore." Whilft
this part of the defcription correfponds with the
former, in fliewing that he is more than mortal ;
that he is divine, becaufe he hath life in himfelf,
and liveth for evermore ; it (liews, at the fame
time, that, in this perfon, there is alfo a nature
that had been mortal, and is different from the di-
vine nature ; for he was dead.

" He hath the keys of hell and of death ;" that
is of the invilible ftate. He it is only, who re-
fcues from' hell thofe who lliall be finally deliver-
ed from deftrudion. He it is, who for himfelf o-
pened the gates of death, burfl open the fealed
tomb, unlocked the grave for mortal man, and
who, by his own power, fhall raife the dead at th^
general refurredion : " For as in Adam all die, fo
^' fo in Chrift fliall all be made alive."

Jt is highly probable, that Chrift is here faid to
f ? have

44 A COMMENTARY Ch. I.

have the keys of hell and of death, in reference
to what is frequently faid, in this book, about
death, and the keys of hell. In chap. ix. i, i. — -
"-And 1 faw a flar fall from heaven to earth*
"and to him was given the key of the bottom-
" lefs pit; and he opened the bottomlefs pit."
Chap, XX. I, 2. — " And I faw an .angel come
" down from heaven, having the key of the bot-
" tomlefs pit, and a great chain in his hand. And
" he laid hold on the dragon, that old ferpent,
" which is the Devil and Satan, and bound him
-•* a thoufand years." In the former of thefe paf-
fages, the many dangerous errors which the Bifhop
of Rome, after his decline from the purity of Chri-
ftianity, was to be inftrumental in bringing from
hell to earth, are predicled ; and, in the fecond,
the reilraint which ihall be laid upon the devil for
the thoufand years of the millenium ftate, when
he fhall be confined to hell, and hindered from
tempting men upon earth, is predicT:ed, as lliall be
fully fhewn in their places. When it is faid» that
Chrill hath the keys of hell, the Chriftianis taught
that neither the errors of Popery, nor the temp-
tations of the devil Ihall totally banifli true reli-
gion and virtue from the world. The angel of
the bottomlefs pit cannot open a door in hell,
through which a fingle doclrine of devils can be
conveyed to this world, until Chrilf, who has the
great key of liell, fliall permit him to open it. And

the

Ver. 17.18. ON THE REVELATION. 45

tlie devil himfelf can gO- no longer about like a
roaring lion on this eaith, feeking whom he may
devour, than Chrift, who has the key of hell is
pleafed for wife, but to us myfterious, purpofes, to
permit him. When Chrift fends his angel with
the key of hell, Satan muft be locked up in it as a
prifon ; and muft deceive the nations no more, till
the thoufand years be fuliiiled.

In this book, it is frequently prediiSled, that
Chriftians fliall be killed by their perfecutors;
and frequent mention is made both of the firft i^nd
fecond death. It is promifed to the Chriftian, who
overcomes temptations, that he fhall not be hurt
of the fecond death. When, therefore, it is faid,
that Chriit hath the key of death, the Chriftian
is aflured that none of his perfecutors can hurt or
kill him, till Chrift is pleafed to permit them ; and
that, if it is the will of him who hath the key of
the fecond as well as of the firft death, that he
fhall lofe his animal life for Chrift in this world, he
Ihall fave his fpiritaal life in the future and eternal
world.

There is only one perfon in the whole univerfe,
to whom all the parts of this defcription, appa-
parently fo inconfiftent with one another, exadlly
agree, even Jefus Chrift, the Son of God and the
Son of man. This is he of whom infpired fcrip-
ture fays, John i. i. — 3. " In the beginning was the
" Word, and the Word was with God, an! the

Word

46 A COMMENTARY Cll. I.

" Word was God. All things were made by him,
" and without him was not any thing made that
•' was made." Heb. tiie whole of chap. i. Philip.
ii. 6. — II. John i. 14. — " And the Word was
•* made flefh, and dwelt among us; and we beheld
*' his glory, the glory as of the only begotten of
" the Father, full of grace and truth." i Pet.
iii. 18. — " For Chrift alfo hath once fuffered for
" lins, the juil for the unjuft, (that he might
" bring us to God,) being put to death in the
*« flefli, but quickened by the Spirit." Rom. v. 8.
— " But God commendeth his love towards us,
*' in that while we were yet linners, Chrift died
*' for us." Rom. vi. 9 — " Knowing that Chrift
*' being raifed from the dead, dieth no more ;
" death hath no more dominion over him.'*
Heb. ix. 24. — 28. 1 Cor. xv. 3. — S. 20. — 26.
and 55. 57. — " O death, where is thy fting? O
" grave, where is thy victory ? the fting of death
" is fm ; and the ftrength of fin is the law ; but
" thanks be to God, who giveth us the victory
" through our Lord Jefus Chrift." Heb. ii. 14,
16. The reader is defired to confiilt the pafta-
ges of fcripture, v.hich are here ret'cired to, but
not tranfcribed. From all thefe paflages, and many
others, which might have been adduced, it is as
evident as language can make it, that the perfon
marked by the particular features of the charader
contained in the tvv'o verfes now under our view,

is

Ver. 19. ON THE REVELATION. 47

is Jefus Chrift, the only Saviour of the world, in
whom the divine and the human nature are united.

Vsrfe igthf and ifl chiife of 'verfe loth. —
Write the things wliich thou haft feen, and
the things which are, and the things which
Ihall be hereafter, the myiliery of the feven
liars, which thou faweft In my right hand,
and the feven golden candlefticks.

Thefe words contain the commifTion which Je-
fus gave to John, and the great divifion of this
book. He was commanded to write thofe things,
as this revelation was made to him, not for his
private information only, nor for that of his co-
temporaries merely ; but alfo for mankind at large,
and for fucceeding ages. He wrote thefe things,
not of his own accord, nor by the advice and com-
mand of any mere man ; but by the exprefs com-
mand of Chrift.

Firjl^ He was to write " the things which he
*' had feen;*' or, more agreeably to the true mean-
ing of the Greek v/ord, a «'^£f, he was to write the.
vilion which he had it^n already : and thefe vi-
fions, alfo, which he was foon to fee, even all the
other vilions contained in this book. As thefe
vifions were made to John in fucceffion, one after
another, time, which=related to them all, behoved

to

48 A COMMENTARY Ch. I.

to be indefinite ; and hence, according to the con-
jftrutftion of the Greek verbs, A is in the aorift.
The various vifions which were made to John, he
was to write exadly as they appeared to his mind.
Whether he underftood the real meaning of the
vifions, or not, he was not to make the fmalleil al-
teration, in his wTitten account of them, from that
appearance, which, at the time of the vifions, they
had to his mind. In obedience to this command,
he wrote down thefe vifions jufi: as they fi:aTid in
this book of the Revelation ; which vifions, as we
proceed, fiiall appear to make up the greateft part
of it.

The following part of verfe 19th runs thus in

the original : kxi d aci, aat d /Ai\Kc-i yBeo-Ba; /AiTX ravTX^

and fhould have been thus tranflaced, ^^as every
one acquainted with the Greek language mufl;
know) : " Even the things whicl| at prefent cxifl:,
" and the things which fliall come into exifi:ence
" after thefe ;" that is, the vifions relate to the
prefent Hate of the Chrifiian church, and of the
■world as connccled with it, and alfo to thofe e-
vents relative to both, which have not taken
place yet, but which, in the courfe of divine pro-
vidence, fiiall rife into exifience, in regular fuc-
ceflion, from the prefent moment to the diirolution
of this earth.

Accordingly, fome of the vifions reprefent the
things which exified in the days of John, about

the

Ver. 19. ON THE REVELATION. 49

the year of Chrift, ninety five, when this vifion was
made to him. Such, for inftance, as the firH vi-
lion recorded in this chapter, verfes 12, — 16.
which related to the then prefent Hate of the
feven Chriftian churches in Afia. The ftate of
thefe churches, at that time, is dehneated in the
feven epiftles addrefled to them, and contained in
chap. ii. and iii. The firft feal alfo relates to the
things which are ; and all the other vifions predidl
the various events, which, in regular fucceffion,
were to happen to the church of Chrift, and the
kingdoms of the world, as connecled with it, to
the end of this world.

Such was the command given to John ; and
fuch is the great divifion of this book. As we
proceed, I truft, it ihail appear, that he hath
faithfully executed this command ; aad that this
book exadtly correfponds to this diviliua He is
commanded, in particular, at this time, to write
the myftery of the feven ftars, which he lUvv in
Chrift's right hand, and the feven goiden candle-
ilicks.

Verfe 20! b, id claufi. — The feven ftars
are the angels of the feven churches ; and
the i^QYQw candlefticks, which, thou faweil,
are the itytw churches.

Vol. I, G In

50 A COMMEl^tARY Ch. I.

In this verfe, Jefus explains the myftery, or
hieroglyphical meaning, of the feven ftars, which
John favv in his right hand, and of the feven can-
dleflicks. He plainly tells him, that the feven
flars are the angels of the feven Chriftian churches
in Alia, particularly enumerated in the nth verfe;
and that the {e\en candieflicks are the feven
churches. The angels are the minifters of thefe
churches. 'Ayyi\oi, the word tranflated angels,
lignifies meffengers, thofe who carry u meffage
from one perfon to another. It is commonly ufed
to lignify that order of heavenly fpirits, who are
employed as the meffengers of God; who, not
from any thing peculiar in their nature, but from
the nature of their office, are ftiled angels. Hence
any perfon, or even event or thing, that is employ-
ed as an inllrument to carry the meflages of God
to men, is called an angel ; as fhall appear in the
courfe of this book. The peculiar and official work
of aminifler of the gofpel, is to deliver to the church
the melfages of God. He is to preach to them,
not the commandments of men, as dodrines, but
t;i]iy ihe dodlrines of the gofpel of Ch rill, as they
are t:iught by God, in thofe fcriptures, which
*' are given by infpiration of God, and are profi-
*' table for dodrine, for reproof, for corredion,
" and for inftrudion in righteoufnefs, that the
*' man of God, (or mellenger of Godj, may be
" perfect, throughly furniflied unto all good

•' works."

Ver. 9. ON THE REVELATION. 5I

" works." The gofpel fignifies good tidings, as it
was originally denominated by the angel who
proclaimed the birth of Chrifl, and the introduc-
tion of the gofpel into the world, Lukeii. lo.

The connexion between the import of the word,
angel, and the work of a minilter of the gofpel, is
very clofe, and muil be very ftriking to thofe whoare
acquainted with the Greek language, the language
in which the New Teftament was written. In
the 2d chapter and loth verfe of Luke's gof-
pel hillory, when the angel faid, as in our tranf-
lation, " 1 bring you good tidings," it is in the
original, ayyiKoz tvayyiKilo^uat, which, tranflatcd lite-
rally, is, " And the angel faid, I ad the part of
" a good angel, or meflenger."

That the angels of the churches are the mini-
ilers of thefe churches, is further evident from the
fymbol by which they are reprefented, even a flar.
In the fymbohcal language, a ftar always fignifies
a minifter of religion. We fliall frequently meet
with this fymbol, in this book, and in every place
find that it is of the fame fignification.

In the fymbolical language, fcven candlefticks
fignify feven churches. We cannot err in ex-
plaining the meaning of the hieroglyphics ufed in
this firfl vifion, becaufe a plain explanation of
them is given by Chriil himfelf. Yet, as the
fame fymbolical language runs through all the o-
ther vifions in this book, and as the meaning of
G 2 the

52 A COMMENTARY Ch. 1.

the fymbols is not explained in every one, though
it Is in feveral of them, but is to be learned only
from a knowledge of the fymbolical language, it
will be highly proper, that I make a few explana-
tory obfervations on the hieroglyphics ufed in tliis
vifion.

As the fymbolical language was invented in a
very early and fimple ftage of civil fociety, the re-
femblance between the fymbol, and the thing fig-
nified, muft always be obvious and ftriking, and
never far-fetched or whimfical. Let us examine
the fymbols in this vifion upon this principle.
Thefe we flK.ll examine with peculiar advantage,
becaufe Chrift hath told us their meaning before-
hand. He hath done fo, probably for this reafon
among others, that, with the more certainty, in
the entry of this book, we might difcover tiie key
to the language in which it is written.

The perfonage, whom John faw, was " like unto
" the Son of man ;" a name by which Chrift, in
confequence of his having alfumcd the human
nature, is well known in fcripture ; a name by
which he was pointed out, in the viiion which Da-
niel faw, chap. X. i6. " Clothed with a garment
" down to the foot, and girt about the paps with
" a golden girdle ; his eyes^were as a flame of fire.
" and his feet like unto fine brafs, as if they burn-
*' ed in a furnace; and his voice as the jbund of
''- many waters." This is the very drefs and ap^

pcarancQ

Ver. 20. ON THE REVELATION. 53

pearance of the Son of man in the forefaid vifion to
Daniel, chap. x. verfes 5. 6. The drefs, both in that
vifion and this, is borrowed from that of the high
prieft under the law; and is therefore a proper fjm-
bol of Chrift, the high prieftof our profeffion. The
brightnefs and piercing appearance of his eyes
lignify his perfect knowledge and clear difcern-
ment of every thing. His feet, like brafs in a fur-
nace, fignify the purity and {lability of his human
nature, notwithftanding the mod fiery trials to
which he was expofed. John fays, *' his voice
" was as the found of many waters ;" and Daniel
fays, " and the voice of his words like the voice of
" a multitude." This apparent difference in their
defcriptions, is a llrong confirmation of the truth
of their tefl:imony, that the two defcriptions ap-
ply to the fame perfon, becaufe many waters in
the fymbolical language fignify a multitude.
Thus it is explained, Rev. xvii. i. 15. — "The
" great whore that fitteth upon many waters.
" And he faith unto me, The waters which thou
" fawefl;, where the whore fitteth, are people, and
" multitudes, and nations, and tongues." When
■ two witnelTes agree in faying the fame thing in
diflferent words, much more credit is due to them,
than to thofe witneffes who agree in every fingie
word which they ufe. The latter cafe, by their
too exact agreement in all the words, looks like a
concerted flory ; but the former, by an exa6l a-

^reement

54 A COMMENTARY Ch. J.

greement in meaning, whilll there is a difference
in words, looks like the teftimony of honefl and
intelligent men, without any previous concert,
limply telling the real truth, each in his own lan-
guage. By this account of his voice, it is fignified,
that the facred fcriptures, the words of his mouth,
Ihall be tranflated into different languages; lliall
in due time be made known to men of every
country of the world, and fhall reach down to the
lateil periods of time. As waters moll com-
monly lignify multitudes in a tumultuous ftate,
probably by this fymbol it is meant, that amid all
the tumults and revolutions predidted in this book,
Jefus fhall " flill the noife of the feas, the noife of
*' their waves, and the tumult of the people.*'

In the middle of this defcription, John mentions
one flriking particular, of which Daniel takes no
notice in his vifion, chap. x. " That his head and
'* his hair, were white like wool, as white as fnow."
White hair is the fymbol of old age, great wifdom,
and dignity. It is the fymbolical defcription which
is given of God as the Ancient of days, in Daniel
vii. 9. The obvious realbn of this difference is,
that Daniel defcribes the human nature of Chrill:,
as the Son of man, chap. x. 16. and the divine
3vature, or true God, chap. vii. 9. ; but John, in this
hieroglyphic, defcribes both the divine and the
human nature in the perfon of Chriil, and there-
fore mult join die two defcriptions of Daniel toge-
ther,

Ver.20. ON THE REVELATION. 55

ther, to mark fully the perfonage whom he de-
fcribes. He thus marks this perfonage to be Je-
fus Chrill, in whom only the divine and human
nature are united.

*' In the midft of the feven golden candlefticks,"
A candleftick formed for placing a candle upon,
in fuch a lituation as to make its light more dif-
fuUve and beneficial, fitly reprefents a conftituted
church, which is calculated to fpread the light of
truth and religion. It is " golden," in reference
to the golden candleftick in the tabernacle and
temple of God, and thus to fhow that it is the
church of God, conftituted after the heavenly pat-
tern, in oppofition to thofe churches, which are
marked more by the inftitutions of men than by the
ordinances of God. Being in the midft of the feven
candlefticks, Chrift is never far from his churches,
to fee their conduct, and to proted or fcourge
them, as their condudl and fituation require.

" And he had in his right hand fdven ftars.'*
The ftars, which have no light of their own, but
only refled the light of the fun upon men, to
guide them during the night, when they are not
blefTed with the rays of the fun, are very proper
fymbols of the minifters of the gofpel, who com-
municate to men the light of that truth and right-
eoufnefs, which they have received from Chrift
the Sun of righteoufnefs ; by which they enlight-
en

56 A COMMENTARY Ch. I.

en the church of Chrift, now when he hath with-
drawn his perfonal minillry from this world.

The right hand is the fymbol of Hvill and power.
Our Englifh word dexterity, which comprehends
both, is derived from dexter, the Latin word for
the right hand. Chriit, by his flvill, wifdom, and
power, directs and protects the minilters of his
church. Guided by the wifdom which is from
above, though harmlefs as doves, they fliall be wife
as ferpents. Supported by the arm of Chrift,
though weak in themfelves, they lliall be ftrong
in the Lord, and in the power of his might. Be-
fore their miniftrations can be rendered inefFedual,
they muft be alTaulted by a wifdom and power,
greater than thofe of Chrift. But where fliall
greater wifdom and power be found, than thofe
which are divine and infinite ? " They fliall never
" perifli, 'neither fliall any pluck them out of his
" hand."

" And out of his mouth went a fliarp two-edged
" fword." This is the fcripture fymbol of the word
of God, or facredfciptures, which proceed out of the
mouth of Chrift. Eph. vi. 17. — " And the fword
" of the Spirit, which is the word of God." Hcb.
iv. 12. — " For the word of God is quick and power-
*' ful, and fliarper than any two edged fword." The
word of God is the proper fword of thofe perfons, the
weapons of whofe warfare are not carnal but fpiri-
tual. It is the only ollenfive weapon provided for

the

Ver. 12. ON THE REVELATION. 57

the foldier of Jefus in the whole armour of God,
Eph. vi. 13, — iH, It is by this fword of the Spi-
rit, chiefly, that the great enemy of Chrifl: and of
Chriflianity dehneated in this book, fliall be finally
deftroyed ; as fliall appear in the explication of
yerfes 13th, 14th, and 15th, of chap. xix.

" And his countenance was as the fun fliineth in
** his ftrength." The fun fliines with real lightj
inherent in, and darted from itfelf j not, like the
fl:ars, with a light refledled from another body.
The fun, therefore, is the proper fymbol of Jefus
Chrifl;, " the fun of righteoufnefs, who is the light
•' of the world." In his divine nature, he hath
truth and righteoufnefs inherent in himfelf.
The underived rays of divinity ftione through the
vail of his human nature, when he appeared among^
men. " The Word was made flefli, and dwelt a-
" mong us, (and we bt'-held his glory, the glory
" as of the only begotten of the Father,) full of
** grace and truth."

Vol. L a C H A ?,

58. A COMMENTARY Cll. IL

CHAP. II.

Verfe ijl. — T TNTO the angel of the chiircli
^^ of Ephefus, write,thefe things
faith he that holdeth the feven flars in his
right hand, who walkech in ^he midfl of the
feven golden candleflicks-

Chrift commands John to write to the minifter of
the church of Ephefus. From ve.rfe nth, chap. i.
it appears that John wrote the whole book of the
Revelation, and fent it to the feven Chrifliaiv
churches then in Afia Minor. Whether he wrote
feven copies of it, and fent one to each of them,
which is mofl probable, or fent the original, from-
which they took fix copies for themfelves, is not
told us, and indeed is of no great confequence for
us to know.

By fending this book to thefe feven churches,
not only were they favoured with the important
inflructions which it contains; but a very wife
precaution was taken to preferve it in exigence
and purity to fucceeding ages. Lodged in feven
difi event churches, it was not very probable that
all the copies of it fliould be dcltroycd, or that fo

many

Ver. I. ON THE REVELATION-. 59

many churches lliould confpire to corrupt it by in-
terpolations of their own.

Along with the book of the Revelation, or ra-
ther as a part of it, John wrote a Ihort epiftle to
the minilter of each of thefe churches In thefe
epiflleshe gives, by the command, and in the very
words of Chrifi:, an exacl and minute defcription
of their refpective charaders and lituations, and
exhorts them to correcft what in them is wrong in
fentiment and conduct; and to improve what is
right. By this minute defcription of their real
charader, he not only taught them their duty,
but alfo led them to acknowledge the infpiration
of this book. When, in the particular epiftle ad-
dreifed to each church, they were told fo exaclly
thofe fentiments and that condud, which they
knew to be their own, could they entertaia
a doubt of the infpiration of this book, or of
tbq power of its divine Author of defcribing as
exadlly the fentiments and conducT: of other per-
fons and churches in every age of the world ?

The argument addreficd to them is the fame
which convinced the woman of Samaria, John iv.
19. that Jefus was the Meffiah. When Jefus
told her all her real and even fecret hillory, ilie
faid, verfe 19th, " Sir, I perceive that thou art a
*' prophet." And flie thus addrefTed the inhabi-
tants of Sychar, verfe 29th, " Come, fee a man
H 2 *« who

6o A COMMENTARY Ch. U.

" who told me all things that ever I did; Is not
" this the Chrift ?"

The epiftles addrefTed to the p.aflors of thefe
churches, were addrefTed to them, not in their
private, but in their public characters, as paflors
of their particular churches; tor the things con-
tained in them evidently relate to the whole
church.

Ephefus was the principal city of Ionia, and
even of Alia Minor. The gofpel was planted in
it by Paul, as mentioned in Acts xix near twenty
years before the date of this book. From Ephe-
fus the knowledge of Chriftianity fpread through
the reftof Afia Minor. In this city flood the fa-
mous temple of the goddefs Diana. To the Chrif-
tian church planted in that city, Paul wrote the
canonical epiftle, which is addrefTed to the Ephs-
fians, about feven years after he had founded that
church.

The epillle contained in the firfl (even verfes of
this chapter, adcjrelled to the church of Ephefus,
is all written in the name, and in the very words
ofChrift,

" Thefe things fahh he who holdeth the feven
*• ftars in his right hand." Chriit is here defcrib-
ed by two of the particular fymbols, whkh are
contained in the general hieroglyphical defcription
of his peifon and charafler, chc!p, i. 12, — 16. It is
he who guides and fupports his minifl;er3 by his

wifdom

Ver, 2, 3. ON THE REVELATION. Cc

wifdom and power, extended to them in his pro^
vidence and grace. It is he who infpedls his
churches, perceives what is good and bad in
them and adminiflers praife and reproof accor*
dingly.

Ver/es 2^, 3^.' — I know thy works, and
thy labour, and thy patience, and how thou
canfl not bear them which are evil : and thou
haft tried them which fay they are apoftles,
and are not ; and haft found them liars : and
haft born, and haft patience, and for my
names fike haft laboured, and haft not
fainted.

This, and all the other fix epillles, Chrii! be-
gins, by alTuring thefe churches, that he knows
their works. As the Son of God, he knows all
their works perfedtly. He knows all their adions,
public, private, and fecret ; all their intentions,
and the motives of their conducH:. He fearches
their hearts, and tries their reins. As a full proof
that he knows their works, he particularly enume-
rates them. He praifes them for their labour,
their diligent endeavours to deted impoilors, and
to propagate the truth, — their patience under per-
fecution for the religion of Jefus, to which, at this
time, they v/ere expofed under Domitian, — and

for

62 A COJ.IMENTARV Ch. IL

for eflimciting men, not by their external appen-
dages, but by their real characlers. Like the ci-
tizen of Zion, they defpifed vile men, but honour-
ed them that fear the Lord. He praifes them for
their care in tryhig, and for their fuccefs in dete(5l-
ing falfe apoftles, who neither taught the doctrines
of Jeius in their purity, nor produced proper cre-
dentials of their extraordinary commillion. Chrift
repeats their long-fufFering, their patience, and
-their labour, to jfhow that they had long continued
in the practice of thefe virtues ; and that he might
take notice of that principle, from which they acl:-
ed, and which preferved them from fainting under
their perfecutions, even an attachment to his name.
It was becaufe they believed and trufted in him
as the Chrift, and the Son of God ; it was becaufe
they ardently deifired to promote the knowledge
of his name, and the intereil of his religion in the
world ; in fine, it was becaufe they firmly believed
bis religion to be the truth; that they prac-
tifed fuch things, and perfevered in that courfc
with fuch patience, at the expence of their pro-
perty, liberty, and fame, and at the rifli of their
lives.

Ver/e ^th — Neverthelefs, I have fomevt^hat
againfl thee, becaufe thou halt kk thy fiid
love.

As

Ver. 4« ON the revelation. 6^

As there is no particuler church on earth per-
fedly pure, it is not to be expelled, that, in the
church at Ephefus, there fliould be every thing to
be praifed, and nothing to be blamed. Chrift re-
proves that church for having fallen from the ar-
dour of her firil love. Supreme love to God, fin-
cere love to all men, brotherly love to^tiie houfehold
of faith, aad a ftrong and Heady love to truth and
holinefs, are indifpenlably neceffary in a Chriilian.
The firlt fruit of the Spirit is love. The firft and
great commandment is to love the Lord our God,
with all our heart, with all our foul, with all our
flrength, and with all our mmd ; and the fecond
is like to it, to love our neighbour as ourfelves.
It is not uncommon for new converts, to feel and
exprefs a greater ardour c^ love at firlt, than they
do afterwards. This was the cafe with the church
at Ephefus. But the commonnefs of the fault does
not diminifli the guilt.

Verfe ^th. Remember therefore from

whence thou art fallen, and repent, and do
the firfl works ; or elfe I will come unto thee
cpickly, and will remove thy candleflick
out of his place, except thou repent.

This church is called upon to recollccl the for-
mer ardour of their love, to compare it Vvith their

prefent

64 A COMMENTARY Ch. II.

prefent indifference of mind, fincerely to repent of
their fins, and to exprefs their repentance by fuch
anions, as thofe which formerly flowed from their
firfl love. *' This is the love of God, that we
" keep his commandments : and his command-
" ments are not grievous." Chrift aflUres them,
that, if they do not repent, he will come unto
them, in the courfe of his providence, and quick-
ly deprive them of the benefit of a conflituted
church among them. It is highly probable, that
this church did not repent ; and that, therefore,
the threatened judgement was brought upon it ;
for, long before the time in which 1 write, there
was no Chriftian church in that place, which was
once the famous church and city of Ephefus.

Ver/e 6th — But this thou haft, that thou
hateft the deeds of the Nicolaitans, which I
alfo hate.

This church is praifed for hating the deeds of
the Nicolaitans. This feet abounded in Afia a-
bout the time John wTote this book. It took its
name from Nicolas its founder. Clement, Ephi-
phanius, Auflin, Eufebius, and other ancient wri-
ters, give large accounts of the erroneous princi-
ples and vicious pradices of this fed. As it long
ago funk into that oblivion; which its own impu-
rity deferved, it is unnecefikry, and would be im-
proper

Ver. 7. ON THE REVELATION. 6^

proper to trouble the reader with a particular
account of it. Its votaries allowed and pra6lifed
fornication, adultery, and idolatrous facrifices.
Thefe deeds the church at Ephefus hated ; and
thefe are hateful to Chrift.

Verje yth. — 'He that hath an ear, let him
hear what the Spirit faith unto the churches.
To him that overcometh will I give to eat
of the tree of life, which is in the midft o£
the paradife of God.

Whoever hears the things contained in this e-
piftle, let him, for his own intereft, attend to what
the Spirit of God faith to all the churches. Tho'
the church of Ephefus, as a colledlive body, may
not repent, and therefore may be deprived of the
priYilege of a conftituted church, yet no indivi-
dual Chrillian, who ads a proper part, fnall be
deprived of the internal and fpiritual blefRngs of
religion, for the fault of others, or even of that
church of which he is a member. Every indivi-
dual Chriltian, who overcomes the temptations to
which he is expofed, and efpecially thofe trying
ones, which ariie from communion with a church
grofsiy corrupted, and from the example of im-
pure fedaries, v;hatever he may lofe of v/orldly
poiTeffions, lliall enjoy the intelleduai, the moral,

Vol. I. I tlig

66 A COMMENTARY Ch. II.

the fpiiitual life, with all its concomitant plea-
fures in the prefent and future world. This is
the import of" eating of the tree of life, which is
" in the midft of the paradife of God." This
hieroglyphic is taken from the account of the tree
of life, in the midft of the paradife of God, contain-
ed in Genefis ii. 8, — 9, 16, — 17. and iii. 22, — 24.
That tree of life was the fymbol of the fpiritual,
intelledlual, and moral life of man, which confifts
in perceiving, feeling, intending, acting, and en-
joying, as fuch a creature as man was intended to
do, and ought to do. This fpiritual life ftands in
the clofeft connedion with the innocence, or re-
novation of our nature, and is inconfiftent with the
grofs perverlion of it. Hence, from the fore-cited
palTages, we find, that Adam was not prohibited
from the tree of life, fo long as he preferved his in-
nocence ; but whenever he yielded to temptation,
and ate of the forbidden fruit of the tree of know-
ledge of good and evil, he was prohibited from the
tree of life, and a guard was placed around it. As
Adam, by yieldmg to temptation, deprived himfelf
of the tree of life, fo, whoever by the grace of God
lliall refill and overcome temptations, fliall receive
from Chrift, and enjoy in the prefent, and more
perfectly in a future ftate, that fpiritual life, of
which the tree of hfe in the middle of the garden
was the emblem. Rom. viii. 6.—" To be carnally
" minded is death ; but to be fpiritually minded

Ver. ?. ON THE REVELATION. 67

** is life and peace." Chrift faith, (John x. lo.)
" I am come that they might have life, and that
" thej might have it more abundantly." They
fhall polTefs that fpiritual life which is the perfec-
tion and the biifs of human nature.

Verfe 8. — And unto the angel of the church
in Smyrna, write, thefe things faith the firft
and the laft, which was dead, and is alive ;

Chrilt commands John to write this epiftle to
the miniifer of f^he church in Smyrna, and defigns
himfeif by a part of ihat hieroglyphic, under which
he appeared in the firft vilion. Particularly, he
ftiies himfclf the firfl; and the laft, true God ; and
he who Vv-as dead and is alive again, true man.
This defcriptioii of his characler was very proper
to adminilter comfort and fiipport to the church in
Smyrna. Their character was afperfed. How
comforting, to think that Chrift, as God, knows
their real characler; and cannot pofiibly be
milled by any mifreprefentations? Many of
them were to fufter death from the hands of
their perfecutors: How comforting to know, that
Chrift, by his own death, had taken the fting out
of death to all his followers, and, by his refur-
redion, had given them the fuUeft proof and the
fare ft pledge of their refurredion .^ Smyrna, as
I 2 v.ell

68 A COMMENTARY Ch. II.

well as Ephefus, was a city of Ionia, and the next
to it in fize.

Verfe 9. — I know thy v/orks, and tribula-
tion, and poverty, (but thou art rich), and
I know the blafphemy of them who fay they
are Jews, and are not, but are the fynagogue
of batan.

Chrifl informs this church, that he knows their
whole condudt and fituation ; that he is well ac-
quainted with their tribulation and outward po-
verty; but, at the fame time, that he who judgeth
not as men judgeth, but who looks unto the heart,
knows that they are fpiritually rich, rich in faith,
in love, and in good works.

By Jews, in the fymbolical language of this
book, we are to underfland the true worfliippers
of God under that difpenfation of revealed religion,
under which it was written, that is, the Chriilian.
In this fenfe, the term Jew and Ifraelite are ufed
in other parts of the New Teilament, Rom. ii.
28, 29. ix. 6. John 1. 47.

'Ihe Syjiagogue of Satan fignifies any religious
fe6t, whofe principles are erroneous, and whofe
praclice is impure; becaufe Satan is the fource of
all falfehood and fin. He fivfl: tempted and mif-
led men: and, though the erroneous and wicked

acknowledge

Ver. 8. ON the revelation. 69

acknowledge it not, and perhaps perceive it not,
he flill worketh in the children of difobedience.
They are the Haves of Satan. John viii- 44. — " Ye
" are of your father the devil ; and the lufts of
" your father ye will do : He was a murderer
" from the beginning, and abode not in the truth,
" becaufe there is no truth in him. When he
" fpeaketh a lie, he fpeaketh of his own; for he is
" a liar, and the father of it. i John iii. 10. — '• In
*' this the children of God are manifeft, and the
" children of the devil : whofoever doeth not
*' righteoufnefs is not of God, neither he that lo-
*' veth not his brother."

It would appear from this verfe, that, at that
time, there was fome religious fed in Smyrna, of
erroneous principles, and impure praAices, who
pretended that they were true Chriflians, and who
mifreprefented and afperfed the characler of the
church in Smyrna. Chriit informs this church
that he knows the . principles and practices of that
fed, however fecret, and that he conliders their
calumnies of them as blafphemies againft God
himfelf. Luke x. 16. — " He that defpifeth you,
" defpifeth me ; and he that defpifeth me, defpi-
" feth him that fent me." i Theli". iv. 8.—" He
*' therefore that defpifeth, defpifeth not man but
^» God."

Verfe

yo A COMMENTARY Ch, IT.

Vtrfeio. — Fear none ofthofe things, which
thou Ihak fuffer : behold, the devil fhall cafl
fbme of you into prifon, that ye may be
tried ; and ye fliall have tribulation ten days :
Be thou faithful unto death, and I will give
thee a crown of life.

It is predi(5led that this church fhould be expo-
fed to a fevere trial and periecatTon for ten days.
In the language of prophecy, a day is the fymbol
for a year, as fhal! be fho\Yn afterwavds, when we
come to confider the more highly prophetic parts
of this book. But it is mort probable, that ten
dayt here are taken literally for that fpace of
time. It is unnecelTary to give the reafon of this opi-
nion here, as it will fall to be explained afterwards,
W'hen it Ihali be ihewn, when, in prophetic writ-
tings, a day fignifies an ordinary day, and when it
signifies a year.

It is predicled, without any condition, that this
church lliall have tribmation for ten days. We
may conclude, therefore, that this prediflion has
been accomplifned ; and we ought to lock for its
accompliihment in the hiflory of this church.
Accordingly, in the reign of the emperor Anto-
ninus Pius, A. D. 147, many members of the
church of Smyrna were caft into prifon, tortured,
exhibited on the theatre, and cafi to be devoured
by lions. Lail of all, Polycarp, the minifter of

Smyrna,

Ver. 10. ON THE REVEL ATIOK. Jl

Smyrna, was burnt at a flake. By his death a
flop was put to this perfecution. It appears to
have been raifed by the Heathens, at the time of
their public Ihews, and to have iafted about ten
days. Bp. PearforHs Bijf. Cbron. i. p. ii. a cap.
xiv. ad XX. Circular Letter of the Church of Smyr-
na concerning the Martyrdom of Polycarp.

Chriit exhorts this church, and every member
of it, to fear none of thofe tilings, and to be faith-
ful to the death; to adhere, u^ith the moil un-
fliaken fideUty, to the belief of the dodrines, the
^obfervance of the ordinances, and the obedience
of the precepts of the gofpel; in one word, to con-
d-u6l themfelves, in every reipecl, in the moil llrid
conformity to the profeffion, which real Chriftians
make, though, for that fidelity to the truth as it
• is in Jefus, they fliould be perfecuted even to
the death. To them who are thus faithful onto
the death he promifes a crown of life. By a crown.
of life we are not to underfland a living or never-
fading crown. Unlefs the quality of the crown is
determined, the eternity of its duration can give
us no idea of its value and importance. The mere
continuance of exiftence is neither a bleffing nor
acurfe of itfeif, but increafes either, when added
to it. If the lituation of any perfon is miferable,
it mull greatly increaie his mifery that he is im-
mortal. But, by the crown of life, the nature of
the crown is fpeciiied. It is life : it is the fpirituai

72 A COMMENTARY Ch. II.

life of an intelligent, rational, and moral creature ;
a life which is eternal. This life confifts in being
freed from the condemning fentence of God, as his
offended judge ; in being renewed by the Spirit of
God, in the fpirit of his mind ; and in perceiv-
ing, feeling, adting, and enjoying, as fuch a crea-
ture as man was intended to do, ought to do, and
always does, when his nature is in a ftate of recti-
tude. This is the greateil bleffing which man
can poUefs. Without this, he cannot be really
happy in the pofleffion of any external good. Pof-
fefTed of this, he enjoys all things. This is the ve- ^
ry bleffing which depraved man needs : For he is
dead in trefpaffes and fins. This is the very blef-
fing which Chrifl: came into this world to pur-
chafe for and bellow upon men, John x. lo. This
is that bleffing, which, under the influence of
divine grace, is formed by faithfulnefs unto death.
It is by this faithfulnefs unto death, that the
change wrought in him, at converfion, by the a-
gency of the Spirit of God, is brought to perfec-
tion. It is thus, that his evil habits are gradually
eradicated, that his wife and good rcfolutions are,
by degrees, confirmed into lafiing habits of head
and of heart ; and that he at death, is brought to
the full ftature of a perfed man in Chrifl Jefus.
This crown of life is the free gift of Chrid, to thofe
who are faithful unto the death, Rom. viii. 1.-13.

Ver. II. ON THE REVELATION. 73

Verfe 1 1. — He that hath an ear, let him
hear what the Spirit faith unto the churches,
He that overcometh Ihall not be hurt of the
fecond death.

Every perfon who hears this epiftle is called up-
on in a mod folemn manner to attend to its im-
port. Whatever may be the conduct of others, no
individual fhall be hurt, as to his final ftate, by a-
ny bad conduct but his own. Though others
may not be faithful to the death ; though others
may yield to the temptations to which they are
expofed ; no one who overcomes the temptations
by which he is furrounded, and continues faithful
to the death, lliall ever be hurt of the fecond death,
hi chap, XX, 12, — 15. we have an account of the
fecond death. It is that endlefs and hopelefs mifery^
to which the impenitently wicked fliall be con-
figned, immediately after the general judgement.
It is a ftate diredly oppofite to that crown of life
promifed, in the preceding verfe, to the faithful
Chriftian. It is denominated the fecond death, to
diftinguilli it from that death which confifts in the
diflblution of the body, and thereby, in the fepa-
ration of foul and body, which is called the firft
death. Hence the import of the promife in
this verfe is, that the Chriftian, by refifting
temptation, may fometimes be expofed to death,
yet he lliall be oo lofer thereby ; for he fliall
not be hurt by the fecond death. Wicked men
Vol. I. K and

74 A COMMENTARY Ch. II.

and devils, when permitted by God, may inflid
the firfl death upon the faithful fervants of Chrift;
but none of them, nor all of them combined, can
infllft upon them the fecond death. Chrifl: faith,
Matth. X, 28. and 39. " Fear not them who kill
" the body ; but are not able to kill the foul. He
" that findeth his life Ihall lofe it ; and he that
** lofeth his life, for my fake, fhall find it."

Verfe 12. — And unto the angel of the
church in Pergamos, write, thefe things faith
he, which hath the fharp fword, with the
two edges.

This epiftle is addreffed to the minifler of the
Chrillian church in Pergamos, a famous city of
Myfia Major in Alia Minor. It was for a long
time the capital of a great ftate called the king-
dom of Pergamus ; and feveral cities were under
itsjiirifdidion. About 132 years before the birth
of Chrift, Attalus Philometer, the laft king of Per-
gamus, died ; who, by his laft will, had made the
people of Rome his heirs. That people, a few
years after, took poffefiion of the kingdom by this
title ; and then Pergamus became the refidence of
a Roman proconful.

In this epiftle, Chrift defigns himfelf " him who
" hath the fharp fword with two edges." This
uvord of the Spirit, which proceeds out of the

mouth

Ver. 12. ON THE REVELATION. 75

mouth of Chrift, is the word of God, thofe fcrip-
tures which are given by infpiration of God. It is
two-edged, becaufe facred fcripture is equally well
formed for defending the Chrilian, and giving the
deepell wounds to his enemies. Like a two-edged
fword, every part of facred fcripture is fitted for
ufe. The fcriptures are equally calculated, to ad-
minifter inftrudion and reproof; and, as both are
needed in this church, and both are adminiftered
in this epiftle, it was highly proper that the divine
Author of it lliould deiign himfelf as he does iu
this verfe.

Verfe i ^th. — 1 know thy works, and where
thou dwelleft, even where Satan's feat ■. is :
and thou holdeft faft my name, and haft not
denied my faith ; even in thofe days, where-
in Antipas was my faithful maftyr, who was
flain among you where Satan dwelleth.

In this, as in all the other epiftles, Chrift informs
the church that he knows their works. This
church is faid to dwell where Satan's feat is. As
the devil is the author of all idolatry, and moft
commonly the obje6l of it, wherever idolatry
greatly prevails, there Satan may be faid to have
his feat. On this account, as fhall appear in the
courfe of this book, both Heathen and Papal Rome
are faid to be the feat of the dragon, who is the
K 2 devih

76 A COMMENTARY Ch.- II.

devil. In a particular manner, Satan's feat is faid
tr be at Pergamos, on account of the great num-
ber of heathen temples and idols in that city, and
particularly on account of the temple of ^fcula-
pius, who was worfhipped there under the figure
of a ferpent. For, from the firft temptation of
mankind, by the devil in the form, or by the in-
flrumcntality of a ferpent, the devil is ftill repre-
fented by, and even called a ferpent. In chap,
xii. 9, 14, 15, he is called a ferpent no lefs than
three times. Belides this great temple in which
JEfculapius was worfhipped in the form of a fer-
pent, there was a temple in Pergamos in honour
of the city of Rome and the emperor Auguftus,
and alfo a temple of Diana. In this fituation,
peculiarly trying and dangerous, this chiu'ch ad-
hered to the piofeflion of the Chriflian name, to
the behef of the Chriftian faith, and to a corre-
fpondent practice, Ihe time when this epiftle
was written to them was no lefs trying than their
fituation was, for perfecution then ra^ed to fuch
a degree, that, in that city, Antipas, a faithful
martyr of Chrifl, v/as Hain.

Verfe 14/^. — But I have a few things a-
gainll thee, becaufb thou had there them
that hold, the dodrine of Balaam, who
tanght Balak to cait a {tumbling block be-
fore

Ver. 14. ON THE REVELATION. *J^

fore the children of Ifrael, to eat things fa^
crificed to idols, and to commit fornica-
tion.

Though this church was highly commendable
for her fidelity to the Chriftian faith, in the mofl
trying fituation and times, yet there were fome
things in her character which deferved reproof
and correction. She is reproved, in particular,
for allowing fome to live in communion with her,
who held the fame errors, which marked the cha-
racter and conduct of Balaam, when he advifed
Balak, the king of Moab, to caft a {tumbling block
before the people of Ifrael, by which, as in Numb,
XXV. I, 1. and xxxi. 16. they were led to eat
things facrificed to idols, and to commit fornica-
tion.

Verfe i^th — So haft thou alfo them that
hold the do(flrine of the Nicoiaitans, which
thmg 1 hate.

She is alfo reproved for not cenfuring fome of
her members, who held the doClrines of the Nico-
iaitans. Thefe were explained on the fixth verfe.
Both in that place and this, Chrift declares that
he hates thefe doClrines. Such a declaration, al-
ways repeated whe-iever they are mentioned,
ftrongly marks them as highly crniiinal and o-

dious.

y8 a' commentary Ch, II.

dious. This church is not reproved, becaufe per-
fons, who held the do6lrines of Balaam and of the
Nicolaitans, lived in the town of Pergamos. Had
they merely lived in that town, fhe would have
been no more accountable for their errors, and
would have been no more reproved by Chrift for them,
than Ihe would have been for thofe of the votaries
of Auguftus, ^fculapius, or Diana, who lived in
Pergamos, and worlhipped in the three temples
of thefe heathen deities. But ihe is reproved,
becaufe fhe allowed perfons, who openly held
thefe errors, to live in communion with her, and
to enjoy the privileges of the Chriftian name and
church. She ought to have given them a firft
and fecond admonition ; and if, after thefe, they
had obftinately adhered to their errors and fins,
fhe fhould have rejeded them from the commu-
nion of the chMrch, according to the fcripture
rule. Titus iii. lo. — " A man that is an heretic
•' after the fuit and fecond admonition rejed:.'*

/>r/^ 1 6/^.— Repent, or elfe I will come
unto thee quickly, and will iight againlt
tliee with the fword of ntiy mouth.

Chrift calls upon them to repent of their ne-
glect of difcipline, affuring them that, if they did
not, he would quickly come unto them, and
inflid upon them thofe judgements which, in the

facred

Ver. i6. ON the revelation. 79

facred fcriptures, are denounced upon thofe who
obftinately adhere to dangerous errors and fins.
In reproving them for the negledl of difcipline,
Chrift fays that he will fight againft them with
" the fword of his mouth ;" thereby intimating,
that the difcipHne obferved in Chriftian churches
fliould not be penances of merely human inftitu-
tion ; but all that difcipline, and that only which
is appointed in the facred fcriptures for the church
of Chrift ; and that, however, in confequence of
human refinements, thofe churches which negled
difcipline may efcape the cenfure, perhaps meet
the approbation of the men of the world at leaft,
they muft draw upon themfelves the judgements
denounced, in the word of God, againft thofe who
fear man more than God, and delire the praife of
men more than the praife of God.

Verfe I'jth. — He that hath an ear, let him
hear what the Spirit faith unto the churches.
To him that overcometh will I give to eat
of the hidden manna, and will give him a
white (lone, and in the (lone a new name
written, which no man knoweth, faving he
that receiveth it.

Every perfon who hears this epiftle is called up-
«n ferioufly to attend to its import ; becaufe it

wa'i

Bo A. COMMENTARY Ch. II.

was dictated by the unerring Spirit of God, and
contains mofl important reproof and inftrudion
for all, in every age, who fhall be placed in a fitua*
tion fimilar to that of the church in Pergamos.
To every individual, who overcomes the tempta-
tions to which he is expofed, Chrift will give to
eat of the hidden manna, and will give him a
white flone.

The hidden manna is a fymbolical phrafe taken
from the command, which God gave to the If-
raelites in Exodus xvi. 32, — 34, to lay up an omer
full of manna in a golden pot, in the ark of the co-
venant, in the molt holy place in the tabernacle,
as a perpetual memorial of the food, by which God
miraculoufly fed them, for forty years in the wil-
dernefs. Of this hidden manna the apoflle fpeaks,
in Heb. ix. 4. This hidden manna was alfo a type
of Chrift, the bread of life, John vi. 48, — 58.
The manna which fell in the fields was gathered
and eaten by all the Ifraelites, without exception,
as their daily food, while they were in the wilder-
refs; but, during that period, or rather during the
whole period of the Mofaic difpenfation, not one
of them was allowed to eat of the hidden manna,
which was laid up in the ark of the covenant, and
continued there, until Chrift appeared as the bread
of life, when a more perfed and fpiritual difpenfa-
tion was opened up. Hence to eat of the hidden
pianna, is not only to have their fouls nourifhed

and

Vcr. 17. ON THE REVELATION. Si

and flrengthened by the fpiritual provifion which
the gofpel affords in this world ; but alfo to par-
take of that fpiritual food, in its higher flate of
perfedion forever in the heavenly world, to w'hich
the gofpel difpenfation is preparatory. It is to
have their fouls nourillied up to eternal hfe. It is
to worfhip, ferve and enjoy God, in purity and per-
fection, forever" in heaven ; of which place and
flate the holy place, in which the hidden manna
was laid up, is a type. In fine, it is to glorify and
enjoy God forever, as directed by the word of
God and the difpenfations of grace by Jefus Chriit,
of which the ark of the covenant, in which this
manna was hid, was a type.

The white (tone is a fymbol taken from an an-
tient, but well known cuftom, in courts of judica-
ture, of delivering a white ftone to thofe pannels
who upon trial were abfolved, and a black flon^ to
thofe who were condemned. But, in this white
llone, there is fomething which was not in the white
ftone of abfolution, in the antient courts. For, in
this ftone, there was a new name engraven, a name
which none knoweth, faving he that receiveth it.
By the white ftone which Chrift ftiall give them,
it is meant, that God *' fliall juftify them freely
" by his grace, through the redemption that is in
" Jefus Chrift." A mere abfolviture from guilt,
and deliverance from condemnation, is not the
whole of the blefling which is promifed ; for, in

Vol. I. L the

82 A COMMENTARY Cll. 11.

the white ftone, a new name is written. This'in-
fcription is eflentially different from the white
flone ; but being engraven in it, it is infeparable
from it, and given by God along with the white
ftone. This new name is the name ox fans of God,
which in fcripture is given to thofe, " who being
" in ChriO: Jefiis are 7iew creatures, frorn whom old
" things are paffed away, and to whom all things
" are becom.e new." Gall. vi. 15. — "For in
" Chrift Jefus neither circumcifion availeth any
" thing, nor uncircumcifion, but a ne^v creature.'^
In their perverted flate, their old name was that of
fons of men ; or, in the language of fcripture,
children of the devil: But, " having put oif, con-
*' cerriJng the former converfation, the old man,
/" which is corrupt according to the deceitful lulls,
"^-and having been renewed in the fpirit of their
*' #iind, and having put on the new man, which
" after God is created in righteoufners and true
" holinefs," the new name of fons of God is given to
them. This renovation of their nature is the gift
of God, through the mediation of Chrift, the agen-
cy of the Spirit, and the belief of the truth, as well
as their juftification is; and though, in its own na-
ture, it is diftindt from juftification, it ii. in fact in-
feparable from it, like the new name, which is in-
feparable from the white flone in which it is en-
graven. John i. 12, 13. — " Ikit as many as receiv-
'• cd him, to them gave he power to become the

*' fo ns

Ver. 12. ON THE REVELATION. 83

•• fons of God, even to them that believe on his
" name ; which were born, not of blood, nor o£
" the will of the flefh, nor of the will of man, but
" of God/' Rom. viii. 30. — "Whom he called,
" them he alfo JLifiiiied ; and whom he juflified,
" them he alfo glorified."

The excellency of the charadler, and the purity^
fublimity, and permanency of the enjoyment, ex-
prefTed by the name of fotis of God, are the greateft
to which the nature of man is capable of being
raifed. Rom. viii. 17. — "And if children, then
" heirs, heirs of God, and joint heirs with Chriif."
I John iii. i, — 3. — " Behold what manner of love
" the Father hath bellowed upon us, that we
" fhould be called the fons of God : therefore the
" world knoweth us not, becaufe it knev/ him not.
*' Beloved, now are we the fons of God, and it
" doth not yet appear what we fliall be ; but we
*' know that, when he fliall appear, w^e fhall be
" like him ; for we iliall fee him as he is."

This new name no man knowetli, faving he who
hath received it. The degenerated fons of men,
the children of the devil, are perfedlly ignorant of
that excellency, which confiils in the reftoration of
the image of God to the foul of man, and of that
happinefs which confifts in the enjoyment of God.
Their ignorance of the new nature, the fpiritual life,
is no Angularity in nature ; it is analogous to what
takes place among all the orders of God's crea-^
L 2 rures.

84 A COMMENTARY Ch. II.

tures. Thofe which are of an inferior nature,
and poffefs a life of an inferior kind, can form ra
diflind perception of the nature of [life of a fupe-
rior kind. For inftance, vegetables, polTefTed of
vegetable life, know nothing of animal life ; and
mere animals knov/ nothing of fpiritual life : Why-
then fhould it be furpriling that the fons of men
know not the nature and the fpiritual life of the
fons of God? 1 Cor. ii. 12, 14. — " Now we have
" received, not the fpirit of the world, but the
*' fpidt which is of God ; that we might know the
" things that are freely given us of God. But the
"-natural man receiveth not the things of the
" fpirit of God ; for they are fooliflinefs unto him ;
" neither can he know them, becaufe they are
*' fpiritually difcerned."

Vi^r/e 18. — And nnto the angel of the
church in Thyatira, write ; Thefe things
faith the Son of God, who hath his eyes
like unto a flame of fire, and his feet are
like fine brafs.

This epiftle is addrelTed to the minifter of the
duirch in Thyatira. This was a very conlidera-
ble city of Lydia, in Alia Minor, under the jurif-
didlion of Pergamus. See Plin. Nat. Hijl. 1. 5.
i\ 30. Some perfons belonging to this city were
€;ivly conrerted to Cbriftianity, by the miniftra-

lion-

Ver. 19. ON THE REVELATION. 85

tion of Paul and Silas, as appears from Ads xvL
14, 15. Chrifl takes, in this epiftle, his well known
name of the Son of God. His perfedi knowledge
and clear difcernment are expreffed by eyes like
a flame of lire, and his liability and purity by feet
hke fine brafs. Thefe two features of his hiero-
glyphical charader were peculiarly proper to he
exhibited to this church, when he was about to de-
fcribe the concealed parts of their charader, and
to reprove them for their impurity.

Verjh igth, — I know thy wofks, and cha-
rity, and fervice, and faith, and thy patience,
and thy works ; and the lad to be more than
the firft.

Chrift'mentions, with high approbation, the cha-
rity of this church, conlifting in fupremelove to God,
and fincere love to man, — her fervice, conlifting in
her attendance upon, and beneficial fervices to the
poor, the fick, and the afflided. The word, tranf-
lated fervice, is that which fignifies the work of a
deacon, whofe office was to attend to the fituation
of the poor and fick. He praifcs her for her faith,
that is, her diftind and firm belief, and hearty ap-
probation of all the truths of the gofpel; — her pa-
tience under the trials and perfecutions to which
Ihe had been expofed ; and her works, that is, her
outward condud in every refped, correfpondent to

her

86 A COMMENTARY Ch. IL

her chanty, faith, and patience, and particularly
for making daily progrefs in all thefe graces and
virtues of the Chriilian life.

Ver/e 20th, — 2^d. — Notwithfl:anding,Ihave
a few things againtl thee, becaufe thou fuf-
ferefl: that woman Jezebel, which calleth her-
felf a prophetefs, to teach and to feduce my
fervants to commit fornication, and to eat
things facrificed to idols. And I gave her
fpace to repent of her fornication, and fhe re-
pented not. Behold I v/IU cad her unto a
bed, and them that commit adultery with
her into great tribulation, except they re-
pent of their deeds. And I will kill her
children Vv^th death; and all the churches
fhall know that I am he v»^hich fearcheth the
reins and hearts, and I will give unto every
one of you according to your works.

In thefe verfes Chriil reproves this church for
HQt difcountenancing a falfe teacher, who laid
claim to infph'ation, and taught in that city, with
conliderable fuccefs, certain impure and impious
tenets and practices. She was very artful, and too
fuccersful in fcducing the fervants of Chrift. On
that account fnc is called Jezebel, and compared
to the peribn of that name, wife to Ahab king of

Ifrael,

Ver. 20, &c. ON the revelation. 87

Ifrael, who artfully miiled the elders and nobles
of the city of Naboth to become her inilruments,
in unjuftly taking away the life and vineyard of
Naboth, under the mafk of religion and law. She
alfo induced King Ahab to encourage impuritj
and idolatry. The various particulars relative to
Jezebel are recorded in the whole 21ft chapter of
I Kings. For fuch wickednefs God fent the pro-,
phet Elijah to denounce judgements on Jezebel,
and the houfe of Ahab, fo exadly correfponding
to the fins of which fhe had been guilty, that it
fiiould clearly appear that God perfeftly knew her
conduct, however artful, fecret, and difguifed;
and that he rendered unto her according to her
works. Ahab having humbled himfelf before
God, thefe punifliments were not inflided, in their
full extent, on his family, in his day ; but they
were allinflided on Jezebel, and their children, as
appears from 2 Kings chap, ix, and x.

The reader is delired to perufe the 2 ill chap, of
I Kings, and thefe two, with ati:ention, as they
contain a moft llriking hiftory of the charader of
Jezebel, and a beautiful and aweful account of
the omnifcience of God, and of the impartiality of
his juftice in the government of the world. In
like manner, Chrift fays, that he had given this
falfe prophetefs at Thyatira time to repent, as he
had given Jezebel ; but hke her, fhe repented not.
That, therefore, he v/ould puniili her and her vo-
taries

^8 A COMMENTARY Ch. II.

taries iti as fcriking and exemplary a manner as
lie had punifhed Jezebel.

As the manner of Jezebel's punilhments fully
proved that God knew the fecrets of her heart,
and puniflied her according to her works ; fo the
punifhment of this falfe prophetefs il^.ould be in-
fiidled in fuch a manner as to afford a llriking
proof to all the churches, that Chriil fearches the
reins and heart, and gives to every one according
to his works.

It is very probable, that this falfe prophetefs did
not repent. For, now, not fo much as the trace or
name of that town is left ; but only feme (lender
remains of infcriptions, not eafily to be found ;
like the fkull, feet, hands, and blood of Jezebel,
as mentioned in 2 Kings ix. 35. A long time ago
it was only a fmall village, called Ak-hiffar, con-
iifting of houfes built of earth upon the ruins of
the ancient Thyatira ; and there is not one Chri-
llian church in it. See Sir George Wbeeler, Dr
Smith, and Dr Spon.

Verfe 2/\.th^ 2^th. — But unto you I fay, and
unto the rcfl in Thyatira, as many as have
not this dodtrine, and which have not known
the depths of Satan, as they fpeak, I will put
upon you none other burthen, but that which
ye have already, hold faft till I come.

This

Ver. 24, 25. ON THE EEVELATION. 89

This church, and every indlvidualinit, who are
not mifled by the doclrines of Jezebel, and who have
not known the depths of Satan are allured that
Chrift will lay no other burthen upon them, than
that which they have already. Some are of opi-
nion, that by the depths of Satan are meant cer-
tain fecret books, in which were contained the myf.
teries of the erroneous feels mentioned in this and
fome others of thefe epiftles. It is true, that many
of the early erroneous feds had certain fecret myf-
teries which they concealed from all, excepting their
confirmed members : Such fecret myfteries are a
fure proof of the falfehood of the fecret doclrines,
for truth is not afraid of the light, and is never hurt
by it. Men love darhnefs rather than light on-
ly when their tenets and their deeds are evil.

I am of opinion, that men are faid to know the
depths of Satan, when by his temptation they are
brought to commit hns and crimes under the malic
of religion and law : It was thus that Jezebel and
the elders and nobles of Ifrael unjuftly took away
the life and vineyard of Naboth, under the malk of
religion and theform of law, i Kings xxi. 7 — 14. ; to
which, in my opinion, reference is made here. To
make men impious under the mafic of religion, and
unjufl under the flicker of law, is the very depth of
Satan's art of deceiving, a depth too from which
he draws out temptations in every age and coun-
try, in this way he leads men to the greateil length
M in

90 • A COMMENTARY Ch. II,

in fin, and keeps them for a long time in the prac-
tice of it, becaufe he deceives both them and the
generality of the men of the world around them.
However bad their actions arq, neither they nor the
world fee their impiety and malignity when they
fland connedled with religion : Thus for inflance,
all the fliocking barbarities and injuftice of the
Croifades, inftead of Ihockiug the perpetrators or
fpedators, were confidered by both as the moft
glorious actions, becaufe connected with and view-
ed as a part of religion : Thus too, all peilecu-
tions for confcience fake, and all pious frauds, as
they are called, are for the fame reaibn, not offen^
five to fuperflitious and enthufiaftic men : Tims in
defpotic governments, civil and criminal laws are
often made inconliftent with the natural and un-
alienable rights of men, and with the laws of
God ; and men go on linning againft the laws of
God and violating the rights of man, without ever
thinking that they are doing wrong, merely be-
caufe they are ading according to the laws of
their country. Even in the freeil countries, there
may be ibme laws and cuftoms by wliich men are
led heedlefsly to practife cruelty and injuilice.
Suppofe a merchant in the African Trade Ihould
employ failors to pickup and fell for flavcs all the
poor men they could meet with in the flreets of
London or Liverpool, would not Iiis conduct
iliock himi'elf, fliock mankind aiound him, and

make

Ver. 24, 25. ON THE REVELATION. gi

make him be hifled out of fociety, even though the
laws of the land were not to call him to account ?
How happens it then, that, without fhocking him-
felf or his countrymen, he can employ failors to
pick up and fell forflaves hundreds of poor men on
the coaft of Guinea ? it is becaufe in the laft place,
he violates the natural rights of man under the
flicker of law. — Probably both may be compre-
hended under the depths of Satan. Chrift affures
all the members of this church who are not infec-
ted by thefe errors, that nothing Ihall ever be
binding upon them in matters of religion, except
thefe things which are already binding upon them
by the facred fcriptures, thefe things by which they
have hitherto regulated their faith, charity, fervice,
patience, and works ; and he exhorts them to
hold thefe fail till he come, that is, till he fhall come
to put an end to their ftate of difcipline by their
death.

Ver/es 2 6th, — 2 9/^.-— -And he that o vercom-
eth and keepeth my works unto the end, to him
will I give power over the nations, (and he
fliall rule them with a rod of iron, as the vef-
fels of a potter (hall they be broken to Ihi-
vers), even as I received of my Father ; and I
will give him the morning ftar. He chat

hath

92 A COMiMENTARY Cll. it.

hath an car let him hear what the Spirit faith
unto tlie churches.

Thefe verfes feem to contain a promile not to
the members of the church oFThyatira in particu-
hir, but to thele Chriftians in general who fliall o-
vercome the temptations to \\ hich they are expol-
cd from the depths of Satan, and fliall keep the
works of Chriil unto the end of that period in which
the world is to be mifled by the depths of Satan.
From the addrefs in the beginning of verfe 24th,
" Unto you 1 fay, and to the reft in Thyatira,"
it appears that the 24th and 25th verfes are ad-
drelfed particularly to the members of that church,
and then what follows in the four la(l verfes of this
chapter feems to be addielTed in general to thofe
who fliall overcome the depths of Satan, and keep
the works of Chriil: to the end of that period 1.0
which the depths of Satan relate.

Irichiip. XX, I, — 3. — The particular time is pre-
ditied when Satan fliall be reitrained from deceiv-
ing the nations for a thoufand years. When that
time fliall come, the time meant by the end of the
depths of Satan fliall anive. in what year of the
Chriilian ;i?ra this time fhall happen, will be flle\^n
in the commentary on that pafllige.

The perfons to whom the promile is made are
thofe who overcome the depths of Satan and kee^i
the works of Chriil to the end. They overcome

tlie

Ver. 26, — 29. ON THE revelation. 93

the depths of Satan who are not mifled either by
the fuperftitions of falferehgion, or the unrighteous
laws of men to fin againft God, or violate the na-
tural and unalienable rights of mankind. They
who thus overcome the depths of Satan in rejeding.
the domination of fuperftition and tyranny, do not
reject religious and civil authority, but a Heady re-
gard to both in conformity to the bed rule the world
everfaw, marks their character; they keep the works
ofChrift. By the doctrines, ordinances, and precepts
of Chrifl they regulate the whole of their rehgion ;
and fuperftition has no hold of them ; as citizens
they.alfo keep the works of Chrift, they acl a pro-
per part under that government, of whatever form
it is, of which they are citizens. " They render un-
*' to all their dues, tribute to whom tribute is due,
" cuflom to whomcuftom, fear to whom fear, honour
" to whom honour, and they owe no man any thing
" but to love one another: They fear God and ho-
" nour the king, they render to Casfai; the thing?
" that are Caefar's, and unto God the things that
" are God's ; they are fubjecl not only for wrath,
*' but for confcience fake. ' They are good citizens
from principle. But the fear of God, which makes
them good citizens fro;.n principle, hinders them
from doing ads of injuftice, and inhumanity, or
acts in any refpedl fipful, though permitted or con-
nived at by law. And if at any time, the laws of

men

94 -A- COMMENTARY Ch. II.

men Ihould be evidently contrary to the laws of
God, though that interference fhould give them
much unealinefs, they would in thefe cafes, obey
God rather than man, though for obeying God they
fliould forfeit their property, their liberty, and
even their lives, to the unjuft and tyrannical laws
ef men.

Such is the character of thofe to whom the
bleffings contained in thefe verfes are promifed :
This charader the world in general hath been gra-
dually forming iince the fixteenth century of the
Chriftian aera, and fhall form it with an accelerated
motion for two hundred years yet to come, and
fuch fhall be the charader of the world at the end
of the depths of Satan, when the promifes contain-
ed in thefe verfes fhall be performed. The world
is going on and fhall go on in Hiaking off the chains
of fuperflition and tyranny, until they A»ll as men
and as citizens keep the works of Chrifl : Then to
thofe of this charader Chrift will give power over
the nations, even as he received of his Father. This
is a predidion of the triumphant ftate of Chriil's
church, which Ihall take place when all the king-
doms of the world Ihall become the kingdom of our
God and of his Chrilt, which is fully predided in
chapters 19, 10, 21, and 22d of this book, and fliall
be explained in the commentary on thefe chap-
ters. It was alfo predided in Plalm ii, 8, 9. which is

cit^ed

Ver.26, — 29. ON the revelation. 95

cited in the 27th verfe now under our confidera-
tion. It was predicted in Daniel vii. 27. " And
" the kingdom and dominion and the greatnefs of
"the kingdom under the whole heaven fhall begi-
" ven to the people of the faints of the Moll High.'*
He will alfo give them the morning fiar. By the
morning ilar is meant Chrift, as is evident from
chap. xxii. 16. "I Jefus have fent mine angel to
*' teflify to you thefe things in the churches; I am
" the root and the offspring of X)avid, and the
♦* bright and morning liar.'* At the glorious pe-
riod of Chriil's church predided in that chapter,
mankind fliall entertain the mod juft views of the
nature and character of Chrift, and fhall derive
their religious knowledge fo immediately from
his word and fpirit, that he will be as it were the
ftar which conduds them. So far will he differ
from the minifters of his religion who conducl his
church in its prefent ftate, and fo far will that ftate
of his church differ from this, that he is filled the
morning ftar, the ftar which uftiers in the light of
day, and which Ihines when all the other ftars dif-
appear becaufe of the fuperior light of the fun. In
chap. xxi. ver. 23. It is faid of that ftate of the
church under the hieroglyphic of the new Jeruia-
lem, that " the Lamb is the light thereof." At
that period they ftiall be in no danger of pradifing
iniquity under the fanclion of human laws, for

then

$6 ' A COMMENTARY Ch. II.

then the famts of the Moll High Ilmllhave power
over the nations, rind the civil laws of men fliall
correfpond to the righteous laws of God. Then
they fliall be in no danger of being mifled to fni
under the influence of fuperflition, for they fliall
receive the morning ftar. From the word and fpi-
rit of Chrift they fliall receive their religion. The
promife of thefe blefTings was well calculated to
keep the. Chriflians at Thyatira from knowing the
depths of Satan. What could have a more power-
ful tendency to keep them from finning againfl
God or violating the unalienable rights of men un-
der the influence of human laws and fuperilition,
than a promife from him who could neither be de-
ceived nor deceive, that the time would come in
this world when all tyranny and fuperftition would
be banifhed out of it by that pure and undefiled
religion and that equitable and righteous civil go-
vernment which accord to the gofpel of ]efus as a
fyltem of truth, right eoufnefs, peace and joy. And
that though they lliould not live in this world to fee
that period, by overcoming the depths of Satan
and keeping ChrilVs works to the end, they lliould
be confidercd by God as martyrs or witntTies to
the truth, in oppofltion to the laws, cuftoms.andfu-
perftitions of the world, in the next world they
would receive the martyrs crown, and even in this
world Avhen the triumphant period of Chrift's

church

Ver. 20, &c, ON the revelation. 97

church fhould come, their memories fhould be held
in honourable remembrance, when thofe of the he-
roes of the world, who have deluged it in blood,
lliall be funk into total obhvion.

This epiftle, like all the preceding ones, is clofed
with a mofl folemn charge to all who hear it, fe-
rioufly to conlider and attend to it.

Vol. I. X CHAP.

98 A COMMENTARY Ch. IIT.

CHAP. III.

Verje iji. A ND unto the Angel of the
•* ^ church 'in Sardis write, Thefe
things faith lie that hath the feven fpirits of
God, and the feven ftars ; I know thy works,
that thou haft a name that thou lived, and
art dead.

Sardis was the metropolis of Lydialn Afia Minor.
It vvas antiently a magnificent city, and the feat of
the Lydian kings ; it is now a fmall poor village,
inhabited by fliepherds only, and a few ignorant
Chriftians without a church or a paftor. See Plhu
Nat. Hi/}. I. V. c 29. Br iimitWs Not.fept. AJta
Ecclp.i^l.)

Chriil defigns himfelf *' Him who hath the fe-
" ven fpirits of God, and the feven ftars." It is he
who hath promifed and who fends to his church
the other comforter the Holy Spirit ; he who takes
a charge of his church and of the minifters of re-
hgion in it, for he hath the liars in his right hand.
Thefe parts of his charader were peculiarly fuited
to the fituation of this church. The church of
Sardis had a good charader outwardly, but in rea-
lity was deftitute of the power and life of true reli-
gion.

Ver. I. ON THE REVELATION. 99

gion.. "He who hath the feven fpirits of God,"
looks into the heart, defires truth only in the
inward parts, and exprelles his care of this church
by direding her to cultivate the power, rather than
to fatisfy herfelf with the mere form of religion,
and to defire the praife of God more than the praife
of man. He tells her that he knows her works;
in particular, that fhe is fpiritually dead though flie
hath the reputation in the world of being fpiri-
tually alive : that her religion is merely external,
fuch as attracts the obfervation of the world, whilil
file is deftitute of that faith, and thofe graces and
virtues which conflitute pure and undefiled reli-
gion before God.

Verfe 2d. — Be watchful, and (Irengthen the
things which remain that are ready to die : for
I have not found thy works perfedl before
God.

They are called upon to watch, over themfelves,
to watch againil temptation, efpecially againft that
ihare into which too many fall, of being more de-
firous of being thought good than of adually be-
ing good. They are required to ftrengthen the
good difpolitions which remain in them, and which
•are in fo feeble aftate, that if not foon flrengthened
they muft entirely die away. Though they had a
high reputation among men, yet their works were
N 2 not

I GO A COMMENTARY Ch. IIL

not acceptable in the fight of that God who looks
into the heart, and judgeth righteous judgement.

Yerfe rt^d. — Remember therefore how thou
haft received and heard, and hold faft and re-
pent. If therefore thou flialt not watch, I
will come unto thee as a thief, and thou flialt
not know what hour 1 will come upon thee.

They are exhorted to recoUecl the truths and
precepts which they had received from the {i.icred
fcriptures, and had heard from the apoftles and
minifters of rehgion, to hold thefe faft and to re-
pent of all their deviations from them. When a-
ny church becomes lukewarm, and more attentive
to human forms and to the fafhion of the times than
tolhofe things in religion which are effential and
immutable, the beft way to correal their er?,'rs is
to bring them back to that facred fcripture which
is the Aandard of Chriilianity. Chrift aifures this
church, that if they do not watch, they Ihall as
certainly be furprifed at an nncxpefted time by
his judgements, as that family are into wliofe houle
a thief breaks when they are fait alleep.

Verfe z^th. — Thou hall: a few names even in
Sardis, which have not defiled their garments ;
and they fliall walk with me in vv^hite, for
they are worthy.

Though

Ver. 4. ON THE REVELATION. lOl

Though fuch was the general flate of this
church, he who perfedlly knows the true charac-
ter of every individual, declares that there are a
few perfons even in Sardis who are lincere and up-
right before God. They are called a few names, to
intimate that Chrift knows them perfedly, and, if
neceffary or proper, could have called every one of
them by their name. Thefe have not defiled their
garments. As garments are intended to preferve
the body from that debility ajid thofe difeafes
which excefs of cold or heat occaiions, and alfo to
adorn it ; the virtues of the Chrillian life are (tiled
the garments of the foul, they are its beft orna-
ments, and they preferve it from that debility and
depravity which are the difeafes of the foul, and
the confequence of indolence and vice. Hence, in
fcripture, we are exhorted to be " clothed with hu-
" mility." Job fays, that he '''put on righteouf-
" nefs, and it clothed him." ' And mention is
made of the *' ornaments of a meek and quiet fpi-
*' rit.'* Thefe few regulated their hearts and their
lives by the laws of the gofpel, even in that church
which regarded the good opinion of men more
than the approbation of God \ thefe few fhall walk
Mdth Chrifl in white, becaufe they are worthy.
White garments fignify the righteoufnefs of faints,
or true hohnefs, thus chap. xix. 8. it is faid of the
church of Chrift in its pureft ftate on earth, a period
yet at a conliderable diftance, ** And to her was

*' that

102 A COMMENTARY " Ch. III.

" granted that fhe fliould be arrayed in fine linen
*' clean and white ; for the fine linen is the righ-
" teoufnefs of faints." Thefe few fhall be admitted
into the heavenly ftate, whither Chrill hath gone
before to prepare raaniions for them in his Father's
" houfe. They fliall ever be with the Lord/' and
their righteoufnefs (liall be without fpot. They (hall
be brought to the perfection of their natures, and
confequently, when placed in fuch a fituation and
in fuch fociety, to the perfection cf happinefs. All
this is exprefled by walking with Chrift in white.

White raiment is ufed to fignify in a peculiar
manner the righteoufnefs of martyrs. Martyrs are
thofe witnelTes for the truth as it is in Jefus, who will
fuffer the lofs of all things in this world, and even
of life itfelf, rather than they Avill abandon the
truth. Thofe of this character, moft certainly will
be moft attentive to the purity and holinefs of their
hearts and lives. Chap. vi. 1 1. it is faid of the mar-
tyrs under the altar, " white robes were given
" to every one of them.'*

Thefe few perfons in Sardis are faid to be wor-
thy of the white garments, that is, though they
were not put to death, they were in fud martyrs
for the trutli. Nothing but the true fpirit of mar-
tyrs can make a few perfons adhere to the truth,
the purity and the ilmplicity of the gofpel of Jefus,
in a degenerate church more anxious to pleafe the
tafte of the tunes, be that what it will, than to ap-
prove

Ver. 4. ON THE REVELATION. I03

prove herfelf to God. From fuch a church, and in
fuch an age, a few fuch perfons meet with as much
perfecution, though of a different kind, as others fuf-
fcr from profeffed heathens. This kind of perfecu-
tion requires fully as much uprightnefs and firm-
nefs of mind to fupport it as thofe do which hea-
thens infiift by the torture, and at the ftake.

V^rfe ^tb, 6th. — 'He that overcometh, the
fame fhall be clothed in white raiment, and I
will not blot out his name out of the book of
life, but I will confefs his name before my
Father, and before his angels. ' He that hath
an ear, let him hear what the Spirit faith un-
to the churches.

Whoever overcomes the trials and temptations
to which he is expofed in fuch a time-ferving and
men-plealing^church, though treated by the other
members of that church as ignorant, weak, and bi-
gottfed, in the heavenly ftate he fhall be regarded
by Chrift as a friend of truth, and much wifer than
thofe who derided his weaknefs. He fhall receive
tlie martyr's white clothing, though he was repre-
fented by them as an hypocrite. While they who
had a name to hve among the men of the world,
and did all that they could to render his name
contemptible, lliall be found in a future flate to be
dead in trefpaffes and fins, he fhall be found to be

fpiritually

104 ' ^ COMMENTARY Ch. IIL

fpiritually alive, and his name Ihall never be blot-
ted out of the book of life.

The book of life is frequently mentioned in fa-
ded fcripture : it does not fignify any particular
book, but it lignifies that all thofe who are fpiri-
tually alive are as perfectly known to God, and
that they are as fafe as they could be if their names
were ail recorded in a book kept for the purpofe of
regillering, in the court of heaven, all thofe who are
alive in Chrill Jefus. It is as it were a record in
the Divine mind of all thofe who are fpiritually a-
live.

Though in fuch a church, whofe fame is high with
the men of the world, he may be confidered by
both as a difgrace to fo refpeclable and poliflied a
church and age ; yet when Chrift comes to judge
the world in righteoufnefs, he will confefs him be-
fore his flither and the holy angels ; whilft h-e will
deny them who never followed him, but who were
the votaries of fame and fafhion, havinghad a name
to live while they were dead. He will confefs him
as his difciple and fervant, place him on his right
hand, and introduce him into the celeftial man-
lions of perfecl and endlefs purity, reditude and
blifs ; faying, " Come ye blellcd of my Father,
'* inherit the kingdom prepared for you from the
*' foundation of the world.". To every perfon wlio
hears this epiftlc, and who in any age or country
lives in a church of a character limilar to that

her"

Ver. 7, S. on the revelation. 105

here defcribed, the fphit of God fays the fame
things which are faid in this epiitle to thofe who
were members of the church of Sardis.

Verfe yth^ 8/^. —And to the angel of the
church in Philadelphia, write, Thefe things
faith he that is holy, he that is true, he that
hath tHe key of David, he that openeth, and
no man fhutteth ; and fhutteth, and no man
openeth. I know thy works : Behold I have
fet before thee an open door, and no man
can fliut it : For thou haft a little ftrength,
and haft kept my word, and haft not denied
my name.

This epiflle is addrelfed to the minifter of the
church in Philadelphia. This was a city of Lydia
in i\fia Minor under the jurifdidion of Sardis. It
was never very large or populous.

The divine Author of this epiflle deligns him-
felf, " him that is holy, that is true, and that open-
'* eth and no man iliutteth." This characler of
Chrift was particularly well adapted to the iitua-
tion and charadter of this church. She is praifed
for her holinefs. Who could perceive the beauty
of holinefs fo well as he who is holy ? Chrift tells
this church that he hath fet before her an open
door, and none can fhut it. On vrhom can they
Yor..L O relv

106 A COMMENTARY Ch. III.

rely with fuch perfect confidence for the perform-
ance of this promife, as on him, who is not only-
true, and therefore cannot fay what is falfe, but
alfo who hath the key of David, and therefore can
flmt fo as no man can open, and open fo as no man
can flmt. Chrift is perfedly holy both in his Divine
and human nature. He is the holy one and the
iuft. He is true. He cannot be deceived him-
felf, and he can deceive no man.

The phrafe, *' The key of David which open-
'* eth, and no man fliutteth" is taken from what is
promifed to Ehakim in Ifaiah, xxii. 22. " And
" the key of the houie of David will I lay upon
" his Ihoulder, fo he lliall open, and no man lliall
" fhut, and he fliall Ihut and none Ihall open."
That power over Judah and Jerufalem, which was
given to Eliakim when he was entrufted with the
key of the houfe of David, is only a faint emblem
of the power which Chriil, the illuftrious fon of
David, hath over his church, of which Judah and
Jerufalem were typicnl. When^he fets open, a
door to any particular church, by keeping open
to them the inftituted ordinances of religion, it is
not in the pov^'er of men or devils to Ihut it, or to
deprive them of theie means of knowledge and
grace. — When, in the courfe of his providence,
he is pleafed, for wife ends, to deprive any church
of thofe means of inftrudtion, none can reflore
ihem to ir. He does as he will, in the armies of

heriven*

Ver. 7, S. ON the revelation. 107

heaven and among the inhabitants of this earth,
whatever feemeth good in his fight.

Chrift tells this church that he knows her
works. He alfo alTures her that he hath fet before
her an open door ; and that the ordinances of reli-
gion ihall be continued to her in fpite'of all diabo-
lical and human oppofition. He mentions the
reafon why he hath fet an open door to this
church, which none can fliut. It was not becaufe
Ihe had much worldly power and ftrength, by
which fhe could repel her enemies, and, by the
fword, defend her civil and religious privileges. In
this refpedl Itie had only Httle ftrength. Phila-
delphia was a fmall city. But it was becaufe Ihe
had kept the word of Chrift, and had not denied
his name. She had formed her faith, worfliip,
difcipline, and conduct upon the word of God con-
tained in the facred fcriptures. She entertained
right apprehenfions of and fuitable affedtions to the
natures, charader, and offices of Chrift, and was
never afliamed nor afraid to profefs his name. She
was not like too many ; who are fonder of any o-
ther ftandard than of the word of God ; and ad-
here to this or that name or leader, rather than
to the name of Chrift.

A religion, which is ftom God cannot be over-
thrown by men or devils. A religion, which is
from God, muft be found, in its purity, in thofe
iacred writings which were didated by the fpirit
O 2 of

Io8 A COMMENTARY Ch. III.

of God. The votaries of a religion, in which
Chrift is the Alpha and Omega, muft ever pay the
higheft refped to the name of Jefus. Xhofe,
therefore, who keep the word of God, and do not
deny the name of Chrift, have every reafon to
truft that their church fhall not be overthrown.
Such a church is a work of God, therefore, as
Gamahel faid, men cannot overthrow it. Such a
church is built upon a rock, and the gates of hell
fiiall not prevail againft it. Though others may
err concerning the truth, neverthelefs, the foun-
dation of God flandeth fure. But when any par-
ticular church treats the word of God with con-
tempt or negled, when it denies the name of Je-
fus, when it fubftitutes human inftitutions in the
place of Divine laws, when it teaches fordodtrines
the commandments of men, and makes void the
law of God by human traditions, when it be-
comes alliamed of the name of Chrift, and enlifts
under the party name of feme church, feet, or
leader; it hath then no reafon to exped that the
promifes made to the church of Chrift will be ac-
complifhed to it. For, certainly, that is not the
church of Chrift which does not keep his word, and
which denies his name.

Verfe <)th. — Behold I will make them of
the fynagogue of Satan (which fay they are
Jews, and are not, but do licj \ behold 1 will

make

Ver. lO. ON THE REVELATION. I Op

make them to come and worfhip before thy
feet, and to know that I have loved thee.

Jews, in the fymbolical language, fignifj the true
worfhippers of God. When applied, as in this
verfe, to perfons living under the Chriftian difpen-
fation, they lignifj true Chriftians. Thofe of the
fynagogue of Satan, who fay they are Jews, and
are not, but do lie, are the follov/ers of Mahomet,
who pretended to be a true prophet of God, but
was only an impollor. Chrift promifes that the
followers of Mahomet fliould pay them very high
refpedl, and be obliged to acknowledge that Phila-
delphia is beloved of God.

Verfe loth. — Becaufe thou hafl kept the
word of my patience, I alfo will keep thee
from the hour of temptation, which fhall
come upon all the world, to try them that
dwell upon the earth.

When this book was written the emperor Domi-
tian was perfecuting the Chriftian churches. Suc-
ceeding emperors raifed up many perfecutions,
and thereby deprived many churches of the ordi-
nances of religious worfliip. But, in this verfe,
Chrift promifes that he would keep this church
from being deprived of the ordinances of religion,
by thofe trials and perfecutions, which Ihould come

upon

ILO A COMMENTARY Ch. 11,

upon the whole habitable world, to try thofe who
dwell upon the earth. This promife he makes to
them, becaufe they had learned to condud them-
felves amid all the trials to which they were expof-
ed, with the patience which his word inculcates.

Verfe 1 1 th. — Behold I come quickly : hold
that fad which thou haft, that no man take
thy crown.

Chrift alTures them, that, in fome of thefe perfe-
cutions, he would come upon them fuddenly, in
the courfe of his providence. And he exhorts
them to hold fall the word of God, and their at-
tachment to the name of Jefus ; and then no man
Ihould take from them their crown. Mofl proba-
bly their crown is that high honour, which is pro-
mifedthem, that they alone, as a church, without
interruption of the adminiftration of the ordinan-
ces of religion, fliall furvive all thofe perfecutions,
by which fo many churches were to be deflroyed."
It is alfo intimated, that they fiiall obtain and keep
this crown, not by innovations in religion, but by
holding faft that religion which they have already,
and for which they are praifed in verfe 8th,

The promifes made to this church in this and the
three preceding verfes, have been fulfilled to it, in a
mofl ftriking manner, fo as to difcover the finger of
God. Notwithftp.ndjng the fmall number of its

inhabitants,

Ver. 12. — 13. ON THE REVELATION. Ill

inhabitants, Philadelphia withftood, with great
conllancy and courage, the fury of the Turks, and
was blefled with vifible fuccefs. When all the reft
of Alia had lubmitted to them, this town held out,
and had in it a Chriltian church, in uninterrup-
ted fucceffion till after the year 1676. It is called
by the Turks Allah-Skeyr, that is the city of God.
Thus an open door hath been fet to this church,
and none hath been able to iliut it. Thus the fy-
nagogue of Satan, or Mahometans have been made
to woriliip at her feet, and to know that God hath
loved her. See Plin. Nat. Hiji. 1. v. c. 29. Stra-
bo Geogr, b. 12. Smith de Statu Sept. Ecc. Span's
Voyage. In the hiftory of this church we may
learn how it is that any Chriftian church lliall beft
confult her own (lability and honour, even by keep-
ing the word of God, and not denying the name of
Jefus.

Ver/es i2th^ iph. — Him that overcometh,
will I make a pillar in the temple of my God,
and he fhall go no more out : and I will write
upon him the name of my God, and the name
of the city of my God, which is new Jerufa-
lem, which cometh down out of heaven from
my God : and I will write upon him my new
name. He that hath an ear, let him hear
what the Spirit faith unto the churches.

He

112 A COMMENTARY Ch. II.

He who overcomes all the temptations, to which
he is expofed in this world, fliall be made a pillar
in the temple of God in heaven. Every individual
Chriftian in this world is lliled a temple of the li-
ving God, becaufe he is confecrated to God ; God
is worfliipped in his heart, and the Spirit of God, by
his gracious influences, dwelleth in him, i Cor. iii.
i6, 17. " Know ye not that ye are the temple of
*' God, and that the Spirit of God dwelleth in you.
" If any man defile the temple of God, him Ihall
" God deftroy : for the temple of God is holy
*' which temple you are."

In the heavenly ftate all the votaries fhall be fo
pure and holy, and confidered colledively fhall be
fo much one, that the whole faints in heaven are
lliled one great temple. This feems to be the
meaning of Ephef. ii. 21. *' In v.^hom all the build-
" ing fitly joined together, groweth into an holy
*• temple in the Lord." Hence, to be made a pil-
lar in the temple of God, is to be a confpicuous
and highly refpedable member in the church of
God in heaven. For, in temples and fuch public
buildings, pillars are intended, at once to fupport
and adorn the building. On pillars too, monu-
mental infcriptions are written, to perpetuate the
memory of illuflrious perfons and events.

On this pillar three infcriptions fliall be writ-
ten, jjl, The name of God. id. The name of the
city of God. And 3^, Chrifl's new name. By the

name

Ver. H, 13. ON THE REVELATION. II3

name of God is meant an open acknowledgement
that they are fervants of God, as fhall be fhewn in
the commentary on chap. xxi. 4. By the city of
God is meant the millenium ftate of the church, as
fhall be fhewn in the commentary on chap. xxi.
By Chriil's new name is meant the new name which
is given to him, chap. xix. 16. " And he hath on
*' his vefture and on his thigh a name writtenj
*' King of Kings and Lord of Lords."

All thefe three infcriptions refer to the millen-
nium ftate of the church as fliall appear from the
commentary on thefe palTages. It is then that men
fhall ferve God rather than man, and fliall not be
afliamed to profefs themfelves the fervants and
w^orfhippers of God. It is then that the church of
Chrift fhall appear in the greateft purity and mag-
nificence. And it is then, that all the Kings and
Lords of the world fhall bow to the fceptre of Je-
fus, that he fhall appear in a charadler new and
different from that which he and his religion have
hitherto exhibited in the world. He, whofe reli-
gion was every where fpoken againft, and who
hirafelf appeared in the form of a flave, and fuffer-
ed like one, fnall then eftablifh his religion over
the whole w^orld, and by the triumph of his king-
dom of truth, righteoufnefs, peace and joy, over all
the kingdoms of the world, fhall in fad prove him-
felf to be the King of Kings, and Lord of Lords,
and fhall then alTume this new name.

Vol. I. P Jt

2J4 A COMxMENTARY . Ch. IIL

It is thus declared, that, for ever in heaven, fuch
perfons fliall be honoured as illuflrious inftru-
ments in the hand of God, by which the millenium
flate of tlie church hath been brought about. If
none had overcome the "v arious temptations and
trials to v.hich they have been expofed in pall
times ; if none overcome the trials they meet with
in the p'-efent times, and if none fliall overcome
the trials to which they fliall be expofed between
this day and the time predicted for the commence-
ment of the millenium fiate ; — that ilate could ne-
ver commence. If none in the pad or prefent
times had feared God more than man ; obeyed
God rather than man; pradifed religion in its
fcriptural purity ; or experienced the kingly power
of Chritl in rendering them a willing people to
himfelf, and in making them conquerors, and
more than conquerors over all their enemies ; — the
millenium ftate would never arrive. As the men
of tliis charad^r in every age and country between
the date of this book, and the commencement of
the millenium ftate, are expofed to much greater
trials, that the men who ftiall live in that ftate fhall
be.; as, on account of the great difference of fitua-
tions, much more praife is due to them, than even
to the members of the church in the millennium
ftate, if in both cafes the whole praife is not due
to the grace of God ; and as they are the volun-
tary inilruments in the hand of God for bringing

about

Ver. 14,15. ON THE REVELATION. II5

about that flate ; — they fliall, on that account, be
highly diflinguiflied for ever in heaven, as pillars
which fupport and adorn the church of Chrift.
They Ihall be known with honour by all the re-
deemed in the heavenly ftate, as the excellent
ones of the earth, to whom under God, the church
of Ghrill and the world were indebted for the mil-
lenium ftate. Let every one v/ho hears this epif-
tle, attend to it, and remember, that what the Spi-
rit faith to the church of Philadelphia, he faith to
all who are in fimilar fituations and of iimilar cha-
rad:ers.

Verfes i^th^ 15/^. — And unto the angel of
the church of the Laodiceans, write, Thefe
things faith the Amen, the faithful and true
witnefs, the beginning of the creation of God,
I know thy works, that thou art neither cold
nor hot : I would that thou were cold or hot.

This epiille is addreffed to the minifler of the
church of the Laodiceans. Laodicea was a very
confiderable city of Caria in Alia Minor ; and had
feveral cities under its jurifdidion. It was a place
of great riches, partly from the kindnefs of its citi-
zens, who, by their wills, had left great wealth to
it ; and partly on account of the fale of its v/ool,
which was in great requeft in other places, on ac-
count of its colour and foftnefs.

P z la

Il6 A COMMENTARY Ch. III.

In this epiftle, Chrlft defigns himfelf the Amen,
the faithful and true witnefs, the beginning of the
creation of God. Amen is a Hebrew word, which
lignifies true or cer ain. It is commonly ufed at
the end of prayers, and there it fignifies, fo it is,
and fo let it he.

In Chap. i. 8. Chrifl lliles himfelf Alpha and
Omega, and then explains what we are to under-
ftand by that defignation, even the beginning and
the ending. In like manner, when he ftiles him-
felf the Amen, he explains, that, by Amen we are
to underfland, the true and faithful witnefs, and
the beginning of the creation of God. Whatever
he fays is truth, and Ihall be verified. If he pro-
mifes any thing, his promife is not only made in
truth, but it Ihall alfo be faithfully performed. If,
with refped: to creation, he fays but the word,
creatures arife into exiftence. He at firft gave be-
ginning to the creation of God. " In the begin-
" ning was the word, and the word was with God,
" and the word was God. — All things were made
" by him ; and without him was not any thing
" made that was made." This characler of Chrift
is very fuitable totheftate of this church, and the
llrain of the epiftle addrefled to her. — The luke-
warm are not cafily roufed to a fenfe of their lin
and danger ; what therefore can be fo fit to roufe
them as a defcription of their fin and a threatening
of their danger, by him who is the Amen : All

whofe

Ver. 1 6. ON the revelation. 117

whofe words are true, all whofe threatenings Ihall
be accomplifhed ; and who having created, is able
to deltroy.

This church is reproved for her lukewarmnels
and indifference in matters of religion. Whilft
fhe profeffed to believe, at lead, whilft fhe did
not actually diibelieve the truths of religion fhe
treated the moft important dodlrines, and duties
with the utmoft indifference.

Verfe 1 6th. — So then becaufe thou art luke-
warm, and neither cold nor hot, I will fpue
thee out of my mouth.

Becaufe of her lukewarmnefs, Chrift declares
that he will rejed this church with difguft and ab-
horrence. This threatening was infflcled on her.
In the tenth year of Nero, this city was deftroyed
by an earthquake, and though it was rebuilt after-
wards, it is long ago deftroyed, is a heap of ruins,
and inhabited by wild beafts only. (See Plin.
Nat. His. I. |. c. ig. Tacit. A?in. I. 14. c, 2y.^

Verfes i 'jth^ 1 8/^. — Becaufe thou fayed, I
am rich, and increafed with goods, and have
need of nothing ; and knowefl not that thou
art wretched, and miferable, and poor, and
blind and naked, I counfcl thee to buy of

Il8 A. COMiMENTARY Ch. III.

me gold tried in the fire, that thou mayeft be
rich ; and white raiment that thou mayeft be
clothed, and that the fhame of thy nakednefs
do not appear ; and anoint thine eyes with
eye falve, that thou mayefl fee.

Here Chrift affigns another reafon, why he will
rejed this church with abhorrence; becaufe flie
is elated by her worldly riches, and fays flie has
need of nothing ; whilft flie is ignorant of, or in-
attentive to her wretched contemptible and mifer-
able flate, on account of her ignorance of the
great truths of religion, and her want of thofe vir-
tues of the chrillian life, which are the beil cloth-
ing and ornament of the foul. In this lituation,
lie advifes her to apply to him for all thofe fpiri-
tual riches which flie fo much needs; even that
knowledge, and thofe virtues which are fo much
adapted to her wants.

Verfe igth. — As many as I love ; I rebuke
and chaften ; be zealous therefore and repent.

Chrirt, like a wife parent ; often fliews his love
to his children by not fparing the rod. He re-
bukes and chaftens thofe whom he loves, when
they tranfgrefs. He therefore affures her, that
if fhe would wifu hfs rebukes may terminate in

her

Ver. 21, 22. ON THE REVELATION. 11^

her amendment, and not in her deftruclion, flie
ought to repent of her lukewarmnefs, and culti-
vate that zeal for the important and intereffing
truths and duties of religion, which accords to
their own value, and the deep concern which Ihe
hath in them. True zeal is always according to
knowledge, and equally diftant fr6m indifference
and enthuliafm.

Verje loth. — ^^ehold, I iland at the door
and knock : If any man hear my voice, and
open the door, I will come in to him, and
will fup with him, and he with me.

However the church of Laodicea may defpife,
Chrill's exhortation, and therefore may foon be
defpifed and rejected by him with difguft, every
individual, who ihall open the door of his heart
and give him admittance, fhall enjoy communion
with him. He fhall find ChriH to be his God, his
Saviour, and his portion; -if he is heartily willing
to become one of his people, and to accept of him
as his chief good.

Verfes 217?, 22^, — To him that ovcrcom-
cth will I grant to fit with me in my throne ;
even as I alfo overcame, and am fet down
with my Father in his throne. He that hath

an

120 A COMMENTARY Ch. III.

an ear, let him hear what the Spirit faith un-
to the churches.

To every one, who reiifleth, and finally over-
cometh the various trials and temptations to which
he is expofed in this world ; Chrift will grant to fit
with him, at laft, in his throne ; as certainly as
Chrifl himfelf, after having overcome all the temp-
tations and lufferings to which he had been expo-
fed in this world, hath fat down with his Father in
his throne.

Chrifl is faid, in his mediatorial charader, to
have fat down with his Father in his throne ; be-
caufe he is exalted, even in that perfon, in which
the divine and human nature are united, to a dig-
nity far fuperior to the rank or right of all created
beings ; to a power fuited to the fupremacy of Deity,
even to the adoration of men and angels, and to
the right of judging the world. To this dignity
he was raifed in his mediatorial charadler, on ac-
count of his having overcome all the temptations
and fiifferings to v»'hich he was expofed in the flefli.
Heb. xii. 2. In like manner, thofe who overcome
are faid to fit down with Chrifl in his throne ; be-
caufe, in a future fl:ate, they fliall be raifed to that
perfedion of human nature, which hath been ex-
emplified and is poiTefled by Chrifl. This is a flate
fuperior even to the original ftate of man. hi his

original

Ver. 21, 22. ON THE REVELATION. 121

original ftate, man was upright ; but he was fidli-
ble and adually did fall. But though Chrift was
expofed to much ^greater trials in his human na-
ture, than thofe to which Adam was expofed, he
overcame them and Hill preferved his uprightnefs.
In like manner, thofe who overcome fhall be raif-
ed to unlinningand infallible perfection. In them
human nature Ihall nearly refemble the perfect
human nature in Chriil. They Ihall be purified for
heaven, in a manner far furpaffing the original
flate of man, in which he was fit for a terreftrial
paradife, but clothed in fiefli and blood, in fuch a
ftate, as could not inherit the kingdom of heaven.
Angels fhall minifter unto them, and they fhall
judge angels, Rom. viii. 12. Johnx. 28. i Cor. xv.
47,-58. Heb. i. 14. iCor.vi. 3. What ftronger
motive to zeal for the fervice of Chriil can be de-
vifed,- than the promife from him of being feated
with him in his throne. What Chriil hath faid to
this church and to the individual members of it, he
faith to all who, in any age or country, fhall hear
this epiftle.

Vol. I. O CHAP.

122 A COMMENTARY Ch. IV,

CHAP. IV.

VISION I.

Verfe ift, \ FTER this I looked, and be-
hold, a door was opened in
heaven : and the firfl: voice which I heard,
was as it were of a trumpet talking with me j
which faid, come up hither, and I will fhew
thee things which muft be hereafter.

This is the fecond vilion which John faw ; and it
relates to the fecond part of his commiffion. In
chap. i. xix. he was commanded to write, firft, tlie
things which are ; and then, the things which
Jhall he hereafter. Jn the fecond and third chap-
ters, he wrote" the things which then were, in the
hiftoryofthe feven -^liatic churches. And now
he proceeds to write the things which fhall follow
thefe in regular fucceffion, with the hieroglyphical
vifions, which he faw ; and by which thefe future
events are reprefented

After this, or rather {[j.ir9. tojutu in the original)
After thefe things ; after he had feen and heard
\)\Q things contained in the firfl vifion, and narra-
ted

Ver. I. ON THE REVELATION. 1 23

ted in the three preceding chapters, he looked and
behold a door was opened in heaven. When he be-
held a door opened in heaven, he at the fame time
heard the firft voice, as the voice of a trumpet talk-
ing with him, which he had heard as in chap. i. 10.
The voice faid, " come up hither, and I will Ihew
*' thee the things which mull be (^erx ravra) after
" ^thefe things."

By the door opened in heaven, and the invita-
tion to Johii to come up hither, it is intimated that
the fcene of this vilion was in heaven. He was,
jiot corporally, but in fpirit caught up into the
third heaven. The voice which fpake to him
was that of Chrilt ; for from the original it is evi-
dent that it was the firft voice that ipoke to him,
but that was fhewn to be the voice of Chrift, chap.
i. 10. The defign of this vifion was to fhew John
the things, which moft certainly would follow in
regular fucceffion ; thofe things which he had al-
ready feen and reprefented. For this is the meaning
of the words in the original, a S« yectVSa/ /.ttra Taura.

Verfes id^ 3J.-^And immediately I was in
the Spirit : and behold a throne was fet in
heaven, and one fat on the throne, and he that
fat was to look upon like a jafper, and a far-
dine flone : and there was a rainbow round a-
bout the throne, in light like unto an emeralds
Q, 21 Immediately

124 A COMMENTARY Ch. IV.

Immediately on hearing this voice, John felt his
Snind in that ftate in which the mind of man is,
Vv^hen it is under the immediate influence of divine
hlfpiration. ' *' He vi^as in the bpirit." For the full
explanation of this phrafe, fee the commentary on
chap. i. 10. In this ftate of mind, the fame im-
preffions were made upon his mind by the Spirit of
God, without the intervention of material objefts
and organs, as would have been made upon it in
a natural way, if he had feen the following vilions
'Cvith his bodily eyes. ^

" A throne fct in heaven, and one fitting upor
" it," fignifies, that the events themfelves which
Ihall take place from the days of John to the con-
fummation of all things, as well as the predidlions
©f them, proceed from that God, whofe throne is in
the heavens, whofe footflool is the earth, and whofe
kingdom ruleth over all : That all the revolutions
and kingdoms are overruled by that God, who
makes the wrath of man to praife him, and re-
itraineth the remainder of his wrath.

The vifion does' not give any reprefentation of
him who fat upon the throne ; becaufe God is
a pure fpirit, and therefore cannot be reprefented
by any material objecl, Iluiah xL i8. " To whom
*' then will ye liken God, or what hkenefs will ye
*' compare unto him."

It is laid, that he w ho fat upon the throne, was
<?^look upon hke ajafpsr and a fardine ftone. From

the

Ver. 2, 3. OU THE REVELATION. I25

the mode of expreffion, it is evident, that it is the
colour of thefe ftones to which the reference is
made. The jafper is a ftone of a white and bright
fliining colour, and the fardine of a red colour.
The white and bright colour is the fymbol of good
will and favour ; and the red of anger and difplea-
fure. Hence they lignify that the events predic-
ted in this book, lliall be expreilive of the good
will and favour of God to his church, and of his
difpleafure againft his enemies. That they are fo
in fad, fliall appear in the fequel of this book.
God fixed upon the rainbow. Gen. ix. 8, — 17. as
the fymbol of his covenant with Noah and allflefh,
that he would never more dcftroy the world by a
flood. Hence the rainbow round the throne fig-
nifies, that however thick the clouds fiiall be which
fliall hang over the church of Chrift, and however
great the floods of error fhall be which the devil
and wicked men fliall pour out in order to drown
her, as fnall appear as we proceed in this book ;
God fliall never forget his covenant with her; and
therefore flie fliall never be drowned by thefe floods.
Built on Chrift, the rock of ages, the gates of hell
fliall HOt prevail againfl her. This rainbow is
in fight like an emerald. The colour of the eme-
rald is green. By mentioning the green colour of
this rainbow, it is declared, that the cloud which-
is to hang over the church is to be very thick and
black, for the thicker and blacker the, cloud is, the

126 A COMMENTARY Ch. IV,

more does the green colour predominate over the
othcf" colours of the rainbow. Green, too, is the
colour which it is moil pleafant for the eye to be-
hold, and the one which ftrengthens it mod. In
like manner, the covenant of God /hall be contem-
plated with delight by the church of Chrift, under
all her clouds ; and the contemplation of it fhall
flrengthen her faith, hope, and patience, the eyes
of the foul in this ft ate in which Chrillians live by
faith, and not by fight ; in which hope, in many
things, fupplies the place of enjoyment.

Verfe ^th. — And round about the throne
were four and twenty feats ; and upon the
feats I faw four and twenty elders fitting,
clothed in white raiment ; and they had on
their heads crowns of gold.

(iTfiabwefo/ Prefl^ytcrs), or as it is tranflated, el-
ders, is a fymbol borrowed from the elders who
were the reprefentatives of the people of Ifrael,
the people of God ; and from the elders which were
ordained in every church, as the reprefentatives of
the Chriftians in that church. The number twen-'
ty-four is taken from twelve, the number of the el-
ders of Ifrael, added to that of the apoflles of Chrift.
Hence the twenty-four elders round about the
throne on twenty-four feats, iignify the members of
the church of Chrift in this world, confiftingof every

true

{
Ver. 4. ON THE REVELATION. I27

true wo^fliipperof God, whether he is Jew or Gen-
tile.

Thefe elders are clothed in white, and have ou
their heads crowns of gold. By being clothed in
white garments, it is intimated, that, during a con-
liderable period of the hiilory predided in this
book, and particularly the firft part of it, the true
worfliippers of God fliall be perfecuted ; and, un-
der all their perfecutions, fliall preferve their pu-
rity in faith and obedience, " for white raiment is
" the righteoufnefs of faints," chap, xix. 8. " White
" robes were gi(^en to the martyrs," chap. vi. il.

By having golden crowns on their heads, it is
predided, that, in the latter part of that period, the
church of Chrift fhall be triumphant, and lliall
reign in purity, peace, and honour for a thoufand
years on earth : which fliall appear on the com-
mentary on chap. xx.

The twenty four elders are placed around the
throne, becaufe the true worfliippers of God re-
ceive their laws from God, obey God rather than
man ; and becaufe not one of them in any coun-
try or age fliall efcape the notice, or not enjoy the
protedion of God. And alfo, becaufe the revela-
tions in this book which proceed from the throne of
God, have a particular refped to all the fervants of
God, whether Jews or Gentiles, and to that glo-
rious flate of the church when they fhall both be
pnited. That ftate, when the Jews, rightly un-

derftandiiig

128 A COMMENTARY Ch. IV.

derftanding and believing Mofes, fliall believe in
Jefus of whom Mofes teftified, when God fhall bring
in his antient people the Jews with the fullnefs of
the Gentiles, and when the Jews, feeing Chrill and
his kingdom triumphant over the Roman em-
pire and all the kingdoms of the earth, fhall hear-
tily embrace him, not as a temporal but as a fpiri-
tual king, whofe kingdom is not of this world.

Verfe ^th. — -And out of the throne pro-
ceeded lightnings and thunderings, and voi-
ces : and there were feven lamps of fire, burn-
ing before the throne, which are the feven
Jpirits of God.

Thunderings and lightnings proceeding out of
the throne, fignify, that this book fliall fortell ma-
ny awful judgements, which fhall come upon the
world; and, that who or whatever fliall be the im-
mediate inflruments of infilling thefe, they fhall
all happen in the time and manner fixed by God
the fupreme Governor of the world. And the
voices fignify, that the intention of thefe is to give
neceffary and feafonable warning and directions to
the church of Chrift, and to the world at large.
That both fhall be done fhall appear as we proceed.
We are told that the feven lamps of fire, burn-
ing on the front of the throne, fignify the feven
fpirits of God; that is the Holy Spirit of God, as

hath

Ver. 6. ON the revelation. 129

hath been fhewn at conliderable length m the
commentary on chap. i. 4.

The fymbol of feven lamps of fire burning, fig-
nifies the illuminating and purifying influences of
the Holy Spirit. For the lamp gives light, and
fire purifies by melting away the drofs. Thefe in-
fluences (hall extend to, and are fuificient for all,
the feven ages of the world.

Ver/e 6/^.-^ And before the throne there was
a feaof glafs, like unto cryflal ; and in the
midfl: of the throne, and round about the
throne, were four beafts full of eyes before
and behind.

In the fame fituation with the feven lamps, even
on the front of the throne, was a fea of glafs, like un-
to cryflal. This fymbolistaken from' he molten fea,
a large veflTel of thirty cubits in circumference, and
five in depth ; placed in the temple at Jei ufalem, and
filled with pure water. The facrifices which were
to be offered as burnt offerings, were waflied in
water drawn from this fea into ten lavers on the fide
of it ; and the priefls, before offering them, were to
wafli themfelves in the molten fea, i Kings vii.
23, — 39. 2 Chron. iv. 6. The defign therefore of
the molten fea was to purify the facrifice, and the
priefl: who offered it. It was a fymboiical repre--

Vol. I. R fentation

130 A COMMENTARY Ch. IV,

fentatioQ of the purifying influences of the blood
of Chrifl:, without which neither the facrifice nor
the priefl could have been of any avail to the puri-
fying of the confcience, or avertings the wrath of
God. Hence, the fea of glafs fignifies Chrift, by
whole blood every Chriftian is purified. Chriftians
are filled priefts unto God in this book, and other
parts of facred fcripture. Chiifl is the fea in which
thefe priefls mult wafh, before they can offer unto
God, in an acceptable manner, the facrifice of pray-
er and praifc. This fea of glafs is mentioned again
in chap. xv. 2. in which pafiage it is evident, and
Ihall appear in th^ commentary, that it fignifies
Chrift as the mediator between God and man.

This fea of glafs, like the fpirit of God, is on the
front of the throne. Ey this fituation, it is figni-
fied, that Chrilt is a divine perfon as well as the
Holy Spirit, and that he proceeds from the Father.
The word in the original, which in both cafes is
tranflated " before the throne" is ivuTncv, which fig-
nifies the face or countenance. The pure Deity h
invifible by the bodily eye of man, and his couofels
cannot be dii'covercd by any created being. But
the Holy Spirit reveals fo many of bis counfels as
are fit for us to know, and the .;on of God in the
ilefh difplayedin a vifible manner many ot the na-
tural and moral perfeclions of God. Thus they
have, as it were, made his face vifible to men,
I -Cor. ii. 9;— ;6. Johni. 14, and 18.

In

Ver. 6. ON the revelation. 131

In the fpace between the throne, and that circle
around it, in which the twenty-four elders fat on
twenty-four feats, John faw four heafts, full of eyes
before and behind. The faces of thefe bealls look-
ed to the throne, and their backs to the elders.

Our-franllation throws great obfcurity over thi^
paflage, by tranllating the Greek word {ax, beails.
It fignifies living creatures. It is entirely diffe-
rent and diftind from Oj^f/sc, ^yhich is rightly ^itranf-
lated heqfi, chap. xi. 7. where it is faid, '* the b^afl
" that afcended out of the bottomlcfs pit". Buficv
fignifies a ravenous bead of prey. What it figni-
fies in the fymbolical language, lliall be fhewn in
the commentary on that verfe, and how exadly
thatfignificationcorrefpondsto the original one of a
beaft of prey. The beafts (living creatures) fpo-
ken of in this verfe, arc mentioned no lefs than
nineteen times in the following paifages of this
book, ch. iv. 6, 7, 9. ch. v. 6, 8, 11, 14. cb. vi". i,
3, 5, 7. ch. vii. II. ch. xiv. 3. ch. xv. 7. and ch.
xix. 4. and in everyone of them the word ^«a is ufed.
Mention is made of the beafl, (the beaft of prey)
which is mentioned in chap. xi. 7. no lefs than ele-
ven times in the following palTages of this book,
chap. xi. 7. chap. xiii. i, ii. chap. xv. 2. chap,
xvi. 13. chap. xvii. 8, 11, 12, 13. chap. xix. 19. and
chap. XX. 10. in every one of which the woxd ^nfio?
is ufed. The diftindion between thefe words in
the original is perfedly evident to every perfon ac-
R 2 quainte4

132 A Comment Ail Y Ch. IV.

quainted with the Greek language* The fame
diftindlioii ought to be preferved in every tranfla-
tipn of them We cannot fuppofe, that the uner-
ring Spirit of God had not a fuiTicient reafon for
preferving the dillindion between them, as we fee
he hath done in every palTage, without a fingie ex-
ception, in which they areufedin this book, though
they are ufed in it no fewer than thirty times.

Thefe four living creatures, for this term 1 lliall
henceforth ufe inilead of the four beafts, are fym-
bols of the gofpel miniftry in four fucceffive pe-
riods, diflinctly marked by the beautiful hierogly-
phic of thefe four living creatures, which is drawn
in the following verfe. By the gofpel miniftry is
not meant the individuals who in thefe periods
bear the name of minifters of the gofpel; but )the
colleftive body, which is made up of all thole par-
ticular minifters df the gofpel whom Chrift knows
t6 be his fervants, and will undoubtedly approve
of at laft as fuch. Such minifters of the gofpel,
are with great propriety denominated "living crea-
" tures," becaufe they are fpiritually alive ; and
their office, as inftruments in the hand of God, is
to excite and ftrengthen the fpiritual hfe in Chrif-
tians.

That thefe four living creatures fignify the gof-
pel miniftry, is evident from the ftation in which
they are placed, and the part which they are re-
prefented as ading in this vifion. They Hand in

the

Ver. 6. ON the revelation. 133

the fpace between the throne, and the chcle a-
round it on which the four and twenty elders fat.
The J are placed as it were between God, as manifeft-
ed by the mediation of Chrift and the agency of the"
Holy Spirit, and the Chriftian worfliippeTS. With
their faces towards the throne, on the front of which
are the feven lamps and the fea of glafs, and with
their backs to the elders ; they conduct Chriftians
to that glorious place in which they fhall ever be
with the Lord, and fhall be bleffed with feeing
God ; they fay unto them, " Be ye followers of us,
even as we are alfo of Chrif!:." They lead and con-
dud the worfhip of the elders, that is, of the Chrif-
tian church, verfes 8, — 11. chap. v. 8, — 10.

In chap. V. 11. angels, the living creatures and
the elders are all mentioned diftinclly from one ano-
ther. Sometimes thefe three diftinft bodies join in
one fong of praife to God ; and whenever they do
lb, there is not one word of redemption in the fong,
as appropriated to them ; becaufe angels could not
ling'that Chrift hath redeemed them. " For verily
" Chrift took not on him the nature of angels, but
" he took on him the feed of Abraham." At other
times, the four living creatures with the elders only,
join in fongs of praife to God ; and then in every one
of thefe fongs they ling redeeming love, or fome pe-
culiar bleffing of the gofpel of Jefus ; becaufe all
the parties Avhich join in thefe fongs are equally
interefted in the theme of redemption. Thus

chap.

134 A COMMENTARY Cll. IV.

chap. V. 8, — 10. The four living creatures and the
elders fiiig unto Jefus a fong mofl fuitable for the
miniders and Chriftians of the church of Chrift, but
a fong in which no angel could join them ; for
they {ling to the Lamb that was llain • " For thou
" waft flain, and haft redeemed us to God by thy
'* blood out of every kindred, and tongue, and peo-
♦* pie, and nation, and haft made us unto our God
*' kings and priefts ; and we ftiall reign on the eart h."
. In the two following verfcs, angels join
with the living creatures and elders ; and though
the Lamb that was llain is the cbjedl of their
adoration and praife, yet redemption is no purt
of the fubjeft of it. Chrill, becaufe God the
Creator of all things vifible and invilible, is the
objefl: of worfliip to the higheft angels. God
" when he bringeth in the firit begotten into
*• the world, faith, and lut all tiie angels of
'* God worfliip him". In their fong they never
mention redeeming love ; they fmg *' worth" is
" the Lamb that was flaia to receive power, and
" riches, and wifdom, and fticngth, and honour,
'* and glory and blelling.'*

In chap. vii. 1 1, 12. The angels, the elders,, and
the fuur living creatures again join in one fong,
und there is not one word of the peculiarities of the
gofpel in it.— And in chap. xix. i,— ^. the elders
and the four living creatures, without the angels,
join in a fong which is full of the pecuharities of

the

Ver. 7. ON THE REVELATIOK, t^g

the gofpeL — The reader is delired to confult with
attention the ijiany pc^flages of this book referred
to in the commentary on this verfe.

Thefe living creatures are full of eyes before, to
look to God, to receive inftrudion, diredion and
fupport from him. They learn the whole counfelof
God from the facred oracles of truth and the illu-
minations of the Holy Spirit. They fet the Lord
ever before them, and therefore they Ihall not be
moved. They are full of eyes behind, to infped
their flocks, and to look well to the church of
Chriil, over which they are overfeers,

Verfe ytb, — And the firfl beail was like a
Hon, and the fecond beaft like a calf, and the
third beaft had a face as a man, and the fourth
beaft was like a flying eagle.

In this beautiful hieroglyphic, the charader of
the gofpel miniilers during four fucceflive periods
from the days of the apoHles to I he fijial judge-
ment is drawn ia features the moil juH and
Uriking.

The firll living creature ** was like a lion/' A
lion, the boldell and moll couragsons of animals, is
the fymbol of boUneis and courage. Hence this
fymbol lignifies that boldneis and courage were to
be the inoH firiking feature of the cbarader of the
gofpel miaidry daring the ^rfl period. Accor-
dingly,

t$6 A COMMENTARY Ch. IV.

dingly, the mofl undaunted courage, in fadl, mark-
ed the charadler of the apoftles and firft teachers of
Chriftianity, for the lirll century of the ChriRian
church.

The fecondwas hke a calf, or young ox. The ox,
who of all animals bears the yoke with the greateO;
patience and perfeverance, is the fymbol of pa-
tience under laboxir and fuffering. In this fymbol
the ox is young, (a calf), to lliew that the character
of patience under fuftering Ihould mark the gofpel
miniilry at an early period ; and that thefe fuffer-
ings, and that patience under them fhould conti-
nue long. For a young ox, in the ordinary (iourfe
of things, will live longer than an old one. The pe-
riod in which patience under labour and fuffering
was the character of the gofpel miniflry, commen-
ced about the beginning of the fecond century, and
continued to the time of the Reformation in the
fixteenth century. Every perfon acquainted with
the hiftory of the church, mull fee how much the
gofpel miniflry was marked by patience under fuf-
ferings, during the long fpace of fourteen hundred
years.

The third "had a face as a man.*' Man is an intel-
ligent and rational creature ; and, by the degree of
his intelledlual and rational powers honourably dif-
tinguifhed from the other inhabitants of this earth.
•' God teacheth us more than the beafts of the
" earth, and maketh us wifer than the fowls of hea-

Ver. 7. ON THE REVELATION. 1 37

ven. In thefe refped:s he far excells the lion, the
calf, and the eagle ; Hence the face of a man is
the fymbol of knowledge and reafoning. This
third period of the gofpel miniftry was to be diftin-
guifhed for knowledge and reafoning. This pe-
riod commenced at the time of the R.'?formation ia
the fixteenth century, and ftiall run down to the
two thoufandth year of Chrill: ; at which time a
glorious period of purity, peace, profperity and tri-
umph to the church of Chriil Ihall commence, as
Ihall be fliewn in the commentary on chap. xx.
I, — 7. We live near the middle of this period.

Hath not the gofpel miniftry, in fad, been m.ark-
ed and diilinguiflied in this period by know-
ledge and reafoning. Since its commencement
all the tribe of acute deiflical writers have
arifen ; let any man read with candour and atten-
tion the maliy able anfwers which have been made
to them by the friends of revelation, let him read
the different books which have been written in dif-
ferent parts of the world on the fubjed: of theolo-
gy, and deny, if he can, that knowledge and rea-
foning are the ftriking features in the character of
the gofpel miniftry in this period.

That the gofpel miniftry Ihall fUll more be dif-
tinguiftied for knowledge and reafoning during the
two hundred years of this period, which are yet to
come, is highly probable from this hieroglyphic,
and from what hath already happened to verify

Vol. I. S this

138 A COMMENTARY Ch. IV.

this interpretation of it for the two hundred years
that are pad.

*• The fourth was hke a flying eagle.'* Of all
fowls, the eagle is mod diftinguiflied for the acute-
nel's and flrength of its fight, the height of its flight,
and the length of its life. Hence an eagle is thefym-
bol of clear and quick preception, elevated affec-
tions, and longevity. Thefe are the three qualities
which Ihall form the charadler of the gofpel mini-
llry in the fourth period. This period Ihall com-
mence in the year of Chrifl 2000, when the mille-
nium foretold in ch. xx. fhall begin. The time and
nature of which fliall be explained and eflablifhed
in the commentary on that chapter, on principles
quite different from the dreams of enthufiafm. This
period Ihall run down to the end of the world, in one
fenfe, fhall run unto, and continue for ever in the
heavenly flate. Then a kind of intuitive knowledge,
asahigherkindofitjfliallfucceedandfuperfede the
reafoning of the preceding period. The affedions
of the minifters of the gofpel fhall then be placed on
every objecl in the proportion of its own worth, and
the nearnefs of the relation in which it ftands to
them ; and confequently chiefly on truth, on vir-
tue, on Chrifl, on God ; and in one word, on the
things which are above. This fhall be a long pe-
riod. It fliall continue to the end of the world, nay,
it fliall mark the charader of the church of Chrifl
for ever in heaven. Then Clu-ifUans fhallfee no more

darkly

Ver. 7. ON THE REVELATION. I39.

darkly as through a glafs, but as it were face to face.
Then they fliall not know as now by parts, ftep by
ilep, as they difcover truth in the reafoning way ;
but even as alfo they are known, at one glance in
the intuitive way. Then thofe things which are
in part fliall be done away, and thofe things which
are perfed fliall come. Then their efleem and
love fliall be placed properly on every objedl, and
fupremely on God.

Let us here paufe a little, to contemplate and adore
that divine wifdom andgoodnefs, which hath given
thefe charaders to the gofpel miniflry ; and that
knowledge, which hath fo exadlly predided them fo
many hundred years ago. With what wifdom and
goodnefs is every one of thefe charaders adapted
to the realflate of the world, and of the church of
Chrifl, in the period to which it was appropriated.

In the firit period when the Roman empire ruled
the world, an empire, at that time, highly diflin-
guilhed for its courage, and by its courage car-
rying its dominion to the greatefl extent ; an em-
pire which refpeded courage above every other
virtue fo much, that in the Latin language of
that period, the word (virtus^ which we tranflate
virtue, fignilied military courage; what charac-
ter of the gofpel could fo much catch the atten-
tion, command the refped, and obtain the recep-
tion of fuch a people, as that of courage and bold-
S 2 nefs?

140 A COMMENTARY Cll. IV.

nefs ? Or what character could be more fit to give
the infant Chriftian church a footing in the world?
In the fecond period, in which learning, liberty,
and rehgion were buried deep under the rubbifli
of the uncultivated manners of barbarous nations,
and of the grofs fupcrftitions and painful penances
of the dark ages ; what character of the gofpel mi-
niflry could be fo fuitable to fuch times, as pa-
tience under fuflering; or what fo necefTary to pre-
ferve a feed to ferve God, as fuch patience under fo
long and cruel perfecutions? To have reafoned with
men in thefe dark ages; as the gofpel miniflry hath
done in this third period, would have ferved no
good purpofe whatever, becaufe they could not
have underftood their reafonings. To have difco-
vered the fame forvvardnefs and courage which
marked the miniflry of the iirft period, would have
drawn total deftruclion upon them, from men of
fuch barbarous ignorance and manners. In a pe-
riod, in which the grofs ignorance, fuperflition and
enthufiafm of the times made the votaries of the
church of Rome fubmit to the moft painful volun-
tary fufierings and penances ; and in which the
patient endurance of thefe was extolled as one of
the highefl virtues of religion ; patience in the gof-
pel miniflry under their involuntary fufferings,
had a natural tendency to attraft the notice, and
even to command the refped of men of fuch ha-
bits. And accordingly it did fo, infomuch that

the

Ver. 7. ON THE REVELATION. I4I

the patient fufFerings of many of the martyrs, was
the means of converting their perfecutors. Hence,
that the blood of the martyrs is the feed of the
church, hath been proverbial for a long time.

In the third period, in which, at the glorious
asra of the Reformation, learning, liberty, and re-
ligion rofe together from that rubbifh under which
they had lain long deep buried ; and have ever iince
become ftronger and flronger together, and are
daily extending their range ; how fit is the cha-
rader of knowledge and reafoning in the gofpel
miniftry I In an enlightened age men will not em-
brace religion, on account of either the boldnefs or
patience of its teachers. They muft be fliewn the
truth, excellency, and utility of its doctrines, and
the ftrength of its evidence, by its teachers, before
they will embrace that religion, which hke all true
religion calls upon men " to prove all things, and
*' to hold fall only that which is good," and to give
a reafon of the faith and hope that is in them. In.
an enlightened age too, there will be lefs occafion
for patience ; becaufe in proportion as learning and
liberty increafe, perfecution for confcience fake
fhall decreafe. New improvements in learning,
liberty, and religion, in their influence on human
character, are fimilar to new improvements of eve-
ry kind. At firft, they lead many of the firft ad-
venturers into dangerous errors, by which the very
ends they purfue are defeated. When firfl rifmg

from

142 A COMMENTARY Cll, IV.

from ignorance, men embrace fcholaftic and child-
ifh diftindtions for true learning ; when b|;;eaking
the yoke of flavery, they miftake hcentioufnefs
for liberty ; and when fliaking ofFthe fetters of fa-
perftition, they embrace fcepjticifm for philofophy ;
and an impious kind of deifm for that Chriftianity,
which, " by honouring the Son, honoureth the Fa-
** ther alfo ;" — how very fit to fuch a ftate of the
world and of religion are reafon and knowledge in
the gofpel miniftry, in order to combat, anfwer,
and remove fuch errors fo inimical to learning,
liberty, and religion ?

In the fourth period, in which " all the king-
*' doms of the world fliall become the kingdom of
*' our God, and of his Chrift;" in which the gofpel
of Jefus Iliali appear in this world in a Itate of pu-
rity, peace, and triumph, far furpaffing thofe of a-
ny ftate in which it hath yet appeared ; what cha-
rader of the gofpel miniftry can be fo fuitable to
fuch a period, as clear and inftantaneous percep-
tions and elevated affections ? When all fliall know-
God from the highefl to the lowcft ; when the law
of God fliall be written upon their hearts, and God
Ihall be their God, and they fliall be his people ;
there will be little occafion for reafoning. The
truth fliall then need only to be ftated, in order to
be underftood and believed. When the affedions
of men fliall be fo well regulated, what can be
fnore fit in thofe who lead their devotions*

^han

Ver. 7, ON THE REVELATION'. I43

dian to raife their affedlions to God and the
things which are above? That fpirituahty, eleva-
tion and ardour of afFeclion, which in the preient
age, would be looked upon by many as enthufiafm,
would fall quite Ihort of that refinement and ele-
vation of affedion which is fuited to that period,
in which tlie kingdom of God, which is not meats
and drinks, but trtiths and righteoufnefs and
peace and joy fhall come.

This defcription of thegofpelminiftry, v/as drawn
by John in the year of Chrift ninety-five ; it is now
the year 1790; and the fad for near feventeen
hundred years hath exadly correfponded to that
defcription. Such an exadl correfpondence be-
tween the predidions and the events, in fo many
different periods, for fo long a courfe of time, and
in circumflances, which could not poffibly have
been planned, forfeen, nor brought about by any
created being, at once prove the infpiration of
this book, God's perfect fore-knowledge of future
events, even the moft contingent, in the Uridei]:
confillency with the liberty of man as a moral a-
gent, the fuperintindency of divine providence,
God's moral government of the world, and his par-
ticular care of the church of Chrift.

Verfe Sth, — And the four beads had each
of them* fix wings about him; and they were

full

144 a" commentary Ch. IV.

full of eyes within, and they reft not day and
night, faying. Holy, holy, holy Lord God
Almighty, which was, and is, and is to
come.

Every one of tbefe living creatures had fix
wings, like the feraphim mentioned in Ifaiah vi. 2.
3. " Above it itood the feraphim, each one had
" fix wings, with twain he covered his face, and
*' with twain he covered his feet, and with twain
*' he did fly. And one cried to another holy, holy,
" holy is the Lord of holts, the whole earth is fall
" of his glory." As in the feraphim, thefe fix wings
ferved two purpofes, firft to cover their faces and
their feet, that is to exprefs their reverence and
humihty before God, and fecond to fly, that is to
exprefs their readinefs and expedition in obeying
the commands of God ; they here fignify that re-
verence and humility in the fight of God, and that
readinefs and expedition in the execution of the
Divine will, which mark the charader of the mi-
ll ifters of the gofpel.

They are full of eyes within. In verfe 6. they
are reprefented as full of eyes before, to perceive
the commands of God, and behind, to infped: their
flocks; and here within, in order to look to them-
felves. They do not fatisfy themfelves with the
fpeculative knowledge of religion, whilflj;hey have
not felt its power. They do not condudl the wor-

fliip

Ver. 8. ON the revelation. 145

Ihip of their congregations, merely becanfe it is
their office to do fo ; but they fpeak becaufe they
beheve. As exhorted in i Tim. iv. 16. " They
" take heed to themfelves and to their dodlrine ;
" they continue in them, that in doing this they
" may fave themfelves, and them that hear
" them.'* '^

" And they reft not day and night." The
words r^ fiot are a wrong tranflation of the origi-
nal Kai dyd?ra.v(riv ova 'ix^"^^^' ^^ '^^^ tranflation they
imply fome degree of wearinefs or pain ; for to one
or moft commonly to both of thefe is .reft oppofed.
But, in the Greek language, they are oppofed to
mere cefiation ; which ceflation, inftead of imply-
ing reft from labour, toil, wearinefs or pain, might
as well fignify (as it does here) the interruption of
fuch adive employments as are confiftent with and
even produdive of real joys. The meaning of
them would have been better exprefled thus :
*' They ftop not,'* or, " they intermit not." That
is, they are continually employed and delighted in
adoring and praifing the moral and natural perfec-
tions of God. His moral perfections are all com-
prehended under his fuperlative holinefs, and his
natural perfections under his felf-exiftence, omni-
potence and eternity. Their adorations are direct-
ed firft to his moral perfections, becaufe natural
perfections, though they might fill their minds with
awe and even dread, are rendered truly am.iable

Vol. L T and

1^6 A COMMENTARY Ch. IV.

and adorable only when they are under the direc-
tion of thofe which are moral ; and alfo becaufe,
to thofe who are living creatures, who are fpiri-
tually alive, the perfedl holincfs of God is the moll
adorable of all perfedions.

By their not intermitting day nor night, it is
not meant, th.Vt they are adually employed every
m.oment either in private and fecret devotions, or
in conducling the public devotions of the church:
Of none of thefe are they negligent ; but only
that, even when they are not adlually engaged in
thefe, their minds are habitually imprelTed with
fuitable fentiments of the greatnefs, the goodnefs
and the holinefs of God. This is to have the fear
of the Lord ever before their eyes ; to wait on God
all the day, to pray without cealing, and to rejoice
evermore.

Verjes ()th^ i oth, 1 1 th. — And v^^hen thofe

beads give glory, and honour, and thanks to

him that fat on the throne, who liveth for e-

ver and ever, the four and twenty elders

fall down before him that fat on the throne,

and worfhip him that liveth for ever and e-

ver, and call their crowns before the throne,

faying, Thou art worthy O Lord to receive

glory, and honour, and powder; for thou haft

created all things, and for thy pleafure they

are, and were created.

' The

Ver. 9, lO, II. ON THE REVELATION. I47

The four living creatures, the minifters of the
gofpel, are reprefented as conducting the worlhip of
the Chriftian church, typified by the twenty four
elders. The whole church, confiding of minifi:ers
and people, join in worfhipping God only, and in
adoring and praifing him as the Creator and Prefer-
ver of all, and the Author of every blefling and
honour, temporal and fpiritual, which they pofTefs.
They therefore afcribe to him all the glory, honour,
and power, of every great and good thing which
they have either perceived or enjoyed.

T 2 CHAP

148 A COMMENTARY Ch. V.

CHAP. V.

Verfe ijl\ A N D I faw in the right hand of
J^ him that fat on the throne^
a book written within, and on the back fide,
fealed with feven feals.

This book was in the form of the antient rollso
Though the rolls were frequently, like this book,
written within and on the back fide ; yet, as they
were rolled round a piece of timber and fealed at
the end, though detached words were feen, as
feveral words could not be feen irf their regular or-
der, it was impoffible to p-erceive the meaning of
a fingle fentence, while the roll was wrapped
round the piece of timber and fealed at the end.
Let any perfon wrap a roll of paper round a piece
of timber, in the way in which thefe antient rolls
wer,e wrapped, and he fhall find it impoffible for
him to read a fingle fentence o( it, though written
on the back fide as • well as withm. hi Ezek. ii.
9. 10. a roll of a book is faid to be written with-
in and without.

The hieroglyphic in this verfe is a very fingular
and uncommon one. A book received from God is
the fy mbol of a revelation from God committed to

writing.

Ver. I. ON THE REVELATION. I49

writing, Jer. xxxvi. 2. Ezek. ii. 9. But as this book
IS ft ill in the hand of God, and fealed with feven
feals, its contents are known-to none but G»d.

The book too is written within and on the back
fide, that is, it is entirely filled up. No new reve-
lation is to be added to it. This looks like a pa-
radoxical hieroglyphic, a complete revelation com-
mitted to writing, to which nothing is to be added ;
and yet known to God only. This book is fealed
with feven feals. Probably thefe feals were not all
fixed at the end of the roll ; but every one of them
at a different part of it, in the following manner:
So much of the roll was wrapped round the piece
of timber, and then a feal was placed upon it ; fo
much more, and then a fecond feal; fo much more,
aiid then a third feal ; and fo on until all the fe-
ven feals were placed upon it at proper diftances ;
and the feventh feal was placed upon and clofed
Vip the end Qf the roll.

When the feal, which is at the end of the roll,
which, in the opening is called ,the firft feal, is o-
pened, and fo much of the roll is unwrapped as is
contained between that one and the fecond feal,
the contents of that firft part of the roll may be
feen and read. In like manner, the fecond is o-
pened, and fo on to the feventh.

This book is faid to be fealed with feven feals,
becaufe it is divided into feven diftincl predidions,
as fliall appear in the opening of thefe kvtn feals.

Thi?

I50- A COMMENTARY Ch. V.

This number has alfo a reference to the feven a-
ges, into which the greateft part of the duration of
the world is divided, as fliall afterwards appear
when 1 confider thefe ages. Seven, too, the fyn^ol
of perfection, fignifies that this book was fo per-
fedtly fealed up, before the days of the apoftle
John, that no creature could open it, and look
into its contents.

But Avhat is the particular book which exactly
correfpondsto all the parrs of this paradoxical hiero-
glyphic ? It is the book of the prophecies of Da-
niel fo far as it relates to the Roman empire, under
its heathen and papal heads, and to the church of
Chrift ; particularly chap. vii. 7, — 28. and chap,
xii.' In thefe paflages are contained all the predic-
tions, which are more fully illuflrated in the
whole book of the Revelation, from the beginning
of chap. vi. to the end of the book, as fhall appear
as we proceed in the commentary. Hence as no-
thing is added to it, in this lafl; written revelation
of God's will, it agrees to the firft character of the
book in this verfe, that it is written within and on
the back fide.

It is alfo a book, for it was a written revelation
from God in the days of Daniel, many hundred
years, before John faw this vifion. But though it
was a revelation from God committed to writing ;
yet it was in the days of John ftill a fealed book in
the hand of God. Neither Daniel himfelf nor a-

ny

Ver. I. ON THE REVELATION. 151

ny other man or creature knew its meaning Da-
niel not onjy tells us that he knew not the mean-
ing of the things which he faw and wrote in his
book, but that by the divine command they were
fealed up, and were to continue fo until the time
of the gofpel difpenfation. He thus expreffes him-
felf, chap. xii. 8, 9. " And I heard but underilood
*' not: then faid 1, O my Lord, what fliail be the
♦' end of thefe things? And he faid, go thy way
*' Daniel : for the words are clofedup and fealed iill
" the time of the end. The time of the end, which
is frequently mentioned in facred writing, fignifies
the fame thing with thofe expreilioMs, which alfo
frequently occur in facred fcripture, the lajl thnes^
and the fullnefs of times. Ail thefe fignify the
time of the gofpel difpenfation, which commen-
ced with the refurredion of Chriil from tlie dead,
and ends with the confummation of all things, or
Chrift's dehvering up the mediatorial kingdom un-
to God the Father. This period is ftiled the lafl
times, the fulncfs of times, and the time of the end,
becaufe, though there were feveral times or difpen-
fations of religion, before it, fuch as firit that of
Adam in paradife, fecond the patriarchical difpen-
fation, and third the Mofaic difpenfation ; there
fhall be no difpenfation of revealed religion, in this
world, after it. 'This difpenfation is the time of
the end.

This book is in the right hand of him who fat on
the throne. The right hand is theVymbol of wif-

doni

152 A COMMENTARY Ch. V '

dom, dexterity, and pov/er. By this fymbol it is
declared that all tlie things predicted in this book
are diflared by the unerring wilclom, and, in Ipite of
alloppolition, fhall be exactly iicconiplilhed by the
almighty power of God. In fadt, thefe parts of the
prophecy of Daniel remained fealed up, until the
timer of the gofpel difpenfation, -when the book of
tlie Revelation was written by John, unJer the in-
fpiration of the Holy Spirit, in order to open up
the fealed bvook of Daniel.

Ver/e zd, — And I faw a ftrong angel pro-
"Claiming with a loud voice, Who is worthy to
open the book, and to ioofb the feals tliereof ?

An angel fignifies a meflenger of God to men,
whether that mcffenger is one of the celeflial fpi-
rits, one of the fons of men, or a particular event
in the courfe of his providence.

The angel mentioned here, appears to me, to
have been the prophet Daniel, He w^as fo fre-
quently employed as a meflenger of God to men,
that he might well have been (tiled an angel. He
anxioufly deflred to know the meaning of thefe
fealed vifions, chap. xii. 8, 9. He fays " And I '
" heard, but I underftood not; then fuid I, O my
" Lord, what fhall be the end of thefe things ?
" And he faid, go thy way Daniel ; for the words

" are

Ver. 2. On THE REVELATION. 7 Z.%

*' are clofed up, and fealed till the time of the
" end."

Daniel is filled a ftrong or powerful angel, becaufe
he was great and powerful at the court of the kings
of Babylon, becaufe he was powerful as an angel
or meffenger of God, having, in his prophecies pub-
liflied to men many great and interefting events.
The appellation ottfirong is emphatically given to
him, Daniel x. 9. " And faid, O man greatly be-
*' loved, fear not, peace be unto thee, hejlrong,
*' yea be Jlrong. ^ And when he had fpoken to
*' me I was ftrengthened, and faid. Let my Lord
*' fpeak for thou haft ftrengthened me " He is
ftiled a ftrong angel here, cfpecially with refped:
to the loudnefs of the voice, with which he made
this proclamation. A loud voice is expreflive of
the ftrength and earneftnefs of him who fpeaks,
tends to roufe the attention of the hearers and can
be heard by many of them and at a great diftance.
Accordingly thefe prophecies of Daniel, were
what he defired earneftly to know, they roufed the
attention of mankind ; and though pubUftied ma-
ny hundred years before the days of John, yet du-
ring all that time, no man was able to unfold their
true meaning,

Verfes 3^, 4//?. — And no man in heaven,

nor in the earth ; neither under the earth,

was able to open the book, neither to look

Vol, L U thereon.

134 A COMMENTARY Ch. V-

thereon. And I wept much becaufe no man
was found worthy to open and to read the
book, neither to look thereon.

The word cv^e\( which is tranflated no man, fig-,
nifies no being or no per Jon. There is no word in
the original which correfponds to man. The
meaning of it is, that no created being, in what-
ever part of the univerfe he dwells, was able to o-
pen the feals, which were put upon this book, and
to explain the true meaning of thefe fhort but
comprehenfive hints of Daniel. The apoftle John
'was much diftrelTed, at ttie thought that no perfon
could open up the true meaning of thefe prophe-
cies.

Verfes $th^ 6th, jth. — And one of the elders
faid unto me, weep not : behold the lion of
the tribe of Judah, the root of David, hath
prevailed to open the book, and to loofe the
feven feals thereof. And 1 beheld, and lo, in
the midft of the throne, and of the four
beafts, and in the midft of the elders, ftootl a
lamb as it had been (lain, having feven horns,
and feven eyes, which are the feven fpirits of
God fent forth into all the earth. And he
came and took the book out of the right hand
of him that fat upon the throne.

While

Ver. 5, 6, 7. on the revelation, 155

While the mind of John was thus diftrefled, he
was informed by one of the elders, that a particu-
lar perfon, well known by the title of the Lion of
the tribe of Judah, and the Root of David, had
prevailed to open the book and to loofe all the
feven feals. Thefe names are both given to Chrift,
Genef. xlix. 9, 10. Ifaiah xi. i, — 10. Thus it was
declared to John, that Jefus Chrift, fhould fully
open up the meaning of thefe prophecies, under
the gofpel difpenfation.

That^ mTglit not miflake the perfon, who was
to unravel thefe myfteries, Ji^a is Ihewn him by vi-
iion, ver. 6. ; of whom he received information by an
audible voice, ver. 5. It is not uncommon in prophe-
tic writings, to give two accounts of the fame perfon
or tlHng, different in their circumftances, buc ex-
adly the fame in their fubftance. This frequent-
ly happens in the book of the Revelation. Indeed
it feems to be, almoll, an eflentiai part of the con-
ftruclion of prophetic writings. Thefe writings are
neceflarily, dark and myderious for the reafons af-
ligned in the commentary on chap. i. When, in
fuch writings, two different defcriptions of the fame
perfon or thing exacliy agree in fubftance, fuch
an agreement, if not a full proof, is at iealt a very
ftrong prefumpdon, that the meaning which we af-
fix to both is the right one, and the one intended.
Such an agreement in fubitance, aflfords a proof ve-
ry fmiilar to that which atifes from two witnelTes,
. U 2 having

156 A COMMENTARY Ch. V.

having deponed to the lame flids, but in expref-
fions different from each other : W'lich is much
flronger evidence than that which arifes from two
witneffes having deponed to a number of intricate
fadls, in the very fame exprefTions.

John faw a lamb, as it were flain. Jefus Chriil: is
fliled a lamb, John i. 29, — 36. Acls viii. 3. i Pet. i.
19. Chrifl is fo wellknuwn in Scripture by the ap-
pellation of a lamb ilain for us, that this fymbol as
clearly iignifies Jefus Chrift, as if his name had
flood in its place. This lamb is faid to have fe-
ven horns and feven eyes, which we are told is the
hieroglyphic for the Holy Spirit. The feveii eyes
iignify his perfedl knowledge and wifdom, and the
feven horns his divine power. Thefe influences ojf
the Holy Spirit proceeding from Chriil, and extend-
ing overall the earth, form a beautiful defcription
of Chrift, now in heaven in his ftate of exaltation.
It was not till he had been flain and had rifen vic-
. torious from the grave, that he faid to his apoftles
Matth. xxviii. lu, 19. "All power is given unto
*' me in heaven and earth, go ye, therefore, and
" teach all nations." It was not till he was jufl; a-
bout to afcend into heaven, that he faid unto them,
Adls i. 8. " Ye fliall receive power after that the
" Holy Ghofl; is come upon you, and ye fliall be
" witneflTes unto me, both in Jerufalem, and in all
" Judea, and in Samaria, and unto the uttermofl:
*' parts of the earth." It was not until Chriil; af-

c ended

Ver. 5, 6, 7. ON the revelation, 157

cended unto heaven, that the apoflles, A£ts ii. 4.
" were all filled with the Holy Ghoil, and began
" to fpeak with other tongues, as the Spirit gave
*' them utterance.

The Lamb ftood in the fpace between the throne
and the four living creatures, which fpace was alfo
between the throne and the elders. By this ftation
he is reprefented as the Mediator between God and
the Chriilian church. Both miniiliers and people
have accefs to the throne of God only through the
mediation of Ghrift, i Tim. ii. 5. "For there is one
" God, and one Mediator between God and men,
" the man Ghriil Jefus.'* i John ii. i. " We have
" an Advocate with the Father, Jefus Chrifl t'hc
" righteous." Heb. vii, 25. " Wherefore he is al-
" fo able to fave them unto the uttermoft, that
" come unto God by him, feeing he ever liveth to
*' make intercellion for them."

Jefus received the fealed book from God in order
to open it to the Chriflian church. Hence this
book is entitled chap. i. verfe i. " The Revelation
*' of Jefus Chriil, which God gave unto him, to
*' fliew unto his fervants the things which mull
*' fhortly come to pais."

Verfes Sth^ gthy i otb, — And when he had
taken the book, the four beafts, and four
and twenty elders fell down before the

Lamb,

15.8 A COMMENTARY Ch. V.

Lamb, having every oae of them harps,
and golden vials fall of odours, which are
the prayers of the faints. And they fung
a new fong, faying, thou art worthy to take
the book, and to open the feals thereof: for
thou waft (lain, and haft redeemed us to God
by thy blood, out of every kindred, and
tongue, and people, and nation ; and haft
made us unto our God kings and priefts :
and we fhall reign on the earth.

The minifters and people of the church of Chrifl
are reprefented as worlliipping Chrifl,. by prayers,
and fongs of praife, in which they exprefs their
warm gratitude to him for revealing to them, the
will of God, and particularly for the revelation
contained in this book. This book as a revelation
from God is a fubjed of praife to true Chriftians in
every age, however much it is treated with ne-
gled:, contempt, and fometimes with ridicule, by
fome who call themfelves Chiillians. It Ihall gra-
dually become more and more a fubjeel of praife
to the church of Chrill as that period approaches,
when they fhall reign on the earth.

Chrill: is reprefented, as true God, and true man.
Firft as true God, becaufe the whole Chriltian
church, reprefented by tlie four living creatures,
aad the four and twenty eiders, pay religious wor-

lliip

"Ver. 8, 9, lo. on the revelation. 159

fliip to him, by prayer and praife. They fall down
before the Lamb, having every one of them harps,
the fymbol of facred mufic and praife, and golden
vials full of odours, which are their own prayers ;
for they are faints. As religious worfliip is thus
paid to him, he mufl be God, for in many o'het
parts of facred fcripture, and repeatedly in this
book, God is declared to be the fole objecl of all
religious worihip ; and reafon approves of the de-
claration.

And fecond, as true man, for he was flain, and
hath redeemed the church of God by his blood out
of every kindred, tongue, people, and nation. If
he had not been man he could not have been
flain, his blood could not have been Ihed.

Chriftians fing that by the blood of Chrifl they
are redeemed and made priefts unto God. It is
this blood which expiates their guilt ; it is this
which gives them a right to approach unto God,
in ads of devotion, through the mediation of Chrifl
only, without the intervention of the high priell
under the law. They have now near accefs to
God, through the blood of Chrift, and therefore
are ftiled priefts unto God, Heb. x. ii, — 22,

Chriftians fmg, " We fhall reign on the earth."
This part of their new fong refers to that trium-
phant ftate of the church of Chrift on earth def-
cribed in chap. xx. which fhall commence about
the year of Chrift 2000, and which fhall be ex-
plained

l6o A COMMENTARY Ch. V.

plained in the commentary on that chapter. Par-
ticularly it refers to what is faid chap. xx. 6.
"They fhall be priefts of God, and of Chrift, and
" they fliall reign with him a thoufand years."

This fong of thankfgiving is fung by the living
creatures and elders only, the miniflers and peo-
ple of the ('hriflian church only, becaufe it con-
tains^rounds of praife in which they are deeply in*
tereded ; but in which angels have no private in-
tereft. They fing of him, who "took not on him
*' the nature of angels;" what angels for that rea-
fon, could not fmg; "Thou wall flain, and haft
" redeemed us to God, by thy blood, out of every
"kindred, and tongue, and people, and nation, and
t'balimade us unto our God kings and priefts,
*' and we fhall reign on the earth."

If any thing more, than was formerly faid, were
neceflary to lliew tha,t the four living creatures,
and the four and twenty elders fignify the mini-
nifters and people in the church of Chrift, thofe
who are Chriftians indeed, whom the Lord know-
cth .to be his ; the words of this fong put the
meaning of thefe fymbolsout of all doubt. What
.beings in the whde univerfe, except true Chrif-
tians, could fmg and fay in truth to Chrift, " Thou
/' waft flain, and haft redeemed us to God by thy
" blood out of every kindred, and tongue, and
" people, and nation, and haft made us, unto our

" Goc

Ver. II, 12. ON THE REVELATION, l6l

^'' God, kings and priefts." And every true Chrif-
tian without exception can fay this in truth.

By this fong of the minifters and people in the
church of Chrift, referring to the millenium ftate
of the church on earth, it is lignified, that they
Ihall be inftruments under God of bringing about
that Itate ; and that that ftate when it comes fhall
be peculiarly joyful to them.

Ver/es iith, i2th. — And I beheld, and I
heard the voice of many, angels round about
the throne, and the bealls and the elders :
and the number of them ^as ten thoufand
times ten thoufand, and thoufands of thou-
fands ; faying with a loud voice, Worthy is
the Lamb that was flain, to receive power,
and riches, and wifdom, and ftrength, and
honour, and glory, and blefling.

A very great number of angels now join with the
Chriftian church, in finging a fong of praife to
Chrift, in which angels can join. Thefe are real
angels, celeftial fpirits, who attend the throne of
God, and execute the divine commands. Angels
join in worlhipping Chrift. This is fit, the intel-
ligent creature ought to worlhip its Creator. And
Chrift is the Creator of angels, as well as of men,
CololT. i. 1 6, 1 7. " By him were all things created

Vol. L X '' that

lOl A COMMENTARY Ch. V.

" that are in heaven and in earth, vifible and invifi-
" ble, whether they be thrones,or dominion?, or prin-

" cipalities, or powers : all things were created by
" him, and for him. And he is before all things,
'^ and by him all things conlift.'* This they are
exprcfsly commanded to do by the divine authori-
rity of God the Father, Heb. i. 6. " And again,
" when he bringeth in the Firft Begotten unto
" the world, he faith, And let all the angels of
" God worfliip him."

Though angels have no private interelt in the re-
demption of mankind ^y the blood of Chrill, and
therefore cannot join with the church of Chrift in
linging " he hath redeemed us by his blood ;'* yet
they defire to look unto thefe things, rejoice at the
repentance of a linner, and are miniflering fpirits,
fent forth to miniiter to them, who fhall be the
heivs of ialvation, i Pet. i. 12. Luke xv. 10. Heb.
i. 14. Hence they are ever ready to join, and can
join with the church of Chrifl in truth, in iinging,
" Worthy is the Lamb that Vv'as flain, to receive
*' power, and riches, and wifdom, and ftrength,
" and honour, and glory, and blefling." The ex-
cellency of all thefe qualities they can perceive in
Chrill;, as clearly, if not more clearly than men
can do in their prefent. Hate ; and for thefe tliey are
ever ready to praife liim. By this fong it is intima-
ted that thefe o.ualities in Chrill Ihall be illuftriouf-
]y difplayed by tlie chain of events, predicT;ed in

this

Ver. It, 12. ON THE REVELATION. 163

this book, which he hath opened, and efpecially
by the great one of the coming of his kingdom,
to which all the previous events lead. Then it
fhall appear, not only to the church of Chriil, not
only to the holy angels, but to the world at large,
that Chrill is poflTelfed of fupreme authority, the
King of kings and Lord of Lords, that he bellows
the true riches, and that even temporal bleilings as
well, as fpiricual are at his difpofal, that his wif-
dom is unerring, his ftreng;;h almighty, that every
revolution in the world and in the Chriftian church,
illuftrates his honour and glory, and that ail bief-
fing and true happinefs is derived from him.

By angels joining in this fong, it is intimated,
that angels Iball be active inftruments in the hand
of God in bringing about theie events, efpecially,
that illuilrious one, the coming of the kingdom of
God.

Ver/es i^th, 14/^. — And every creature
which is heaven, and on the earth, and un-
der the earth, and fuch as are in the fea, and
all that are in them, heard I faying, Bleffing,
and honour, and glory, and power be unto
Him that fitteth upon the throne, and unto
the Lamb for ever and ever. And the four
beafts faid, Amen. And the four and twen-
X 2 tj

164 A COMMENTARY eh. V.

ty elders fell down and worflilpped Kim that
livetli for ever and ever.

All the creatures of God rational and irrational,
animate and inanimate, celeftial or terreftrial, u-
Tiite in finging a fong to Him that iitteth upon the
throne and to Chrift, in which they can all join.
It is not meant that the inanimate and irrational
creatures of God can praife him with intention fo
as to worfliip him ; but only that a9 inflruments in
his hands, without knowing what they are doing, or
why they are doing it, they fhall all unite in bring-
ing about the events predicted in this bo6k, and e-
fpecially that diftinguiihed one by which Chriftians
fliall be brought to reign with Chriil on earth ; in
fuch a way as Ihall reflect the higheft praife on
God the Father, and the Son. It is thus, Pfalm
xix. J, — 4. that "The heavens declare the glory
" of God : and the firmament ftieweth his handy
•' work. That day unto day uttereth fpeech, and
" night unto night teacheth knowledge. That
" there is no fpeech nor language where their
" voice is not heard. That their line is gone out
" through all the earth, and their words to the end
" of the world."

As ihall be fliewn in its proper place, it is high-
ly probable, that during the millenium ftate, the
different climates fliall be much more mild, and
there fliall be fewer ftorms, tempefts, and earth-
quakes;

Ver. T3, 14. ON the revelation. 165

quakes ; that the brute creatures ft^all be much
more gentle and harmlefs to one another and to
man, mofl probably becaufe man will be much
more gentle and harmlefs to them, than all thefe
are in the prefent ftate of things. Ifaiah xi. 6,-r^g.
" The wolf alfo lliall dwell with the lamb, and the
" leopard fliall lie down with the kid : and the calf
'' and the young lion, and the fatling together,
" and a little child fhall lead them. And the
*' cow and the bear Ihall feed, their young ones
" fliall lie down together : and the lion fliall eat
*' ftraw like the ox. And the fucking child fliall
" play on the hole of the afp, and the weaned
" child fliall put his hand on the cockatrice den.
" They fliall not hurt or defl:roy in all my holy
" mountain : for the earth fliall be full of the know-
" ledge of the Lord, as the waters cover the fea."
It is, mod probably, in reference to the great
change for the better, which fliall take place at
that period, in the ftate of the air, and the fituation
and tempers of the brute creation, at a period which
may well be denominated the manifeftation of the
fons of God ; that the Apofl^le Paul gives the follow-
ing account of the ardent defires of the brute and
even inanimate creation for that period, Rom. viii.
19, — 22. " For the earnefl: expedation of the cvea-
*' ture waiteth for the manifeftation of the fjns of
*' God. For the creature was made fubje£l to va-
** nitv; not willingly, but by reafQn of him, who

*^ Iiath

$66 A COMMENTARY Ch. V.

V hath fubjedled the fame in hope : becaufe the
" creature itfelf alfofhall be delivered from thebon-
" dage of corruption, into the glorious liberty of
" the children of God. For we know that the
" whole creation groaneth, and travelleth in pain
" together until now."

One can fcarce conceive a greater difplay of
" bleffing, and honour, and glory, and power" in
the Divine Governor of the world, than that which
fuch a wonderful and happy change in the animate
and inanimate creatures, would exhibit.

To all thefe fongs of praife the minifters of the
gofpel give their Amen ; in teftimony of their ar-
dent defires, that fuch a happy ilate of the church
•f Chrifl and of the world may come ; and of their
firm hope that it Ihall come, in the manner, and at
the time predided in this book ; for the opening
up of which, they, Chriiliaus, angels, and the
creatures of God at large are reprefented thus prai-
iing Chrift. All true Chriftians join in the Amen ;
and they worfliip the Lamb, which was llain, as
him who is now alive and liveth for ever ; and
who therefore can forfee all events, and acl at all
times.

CHAP.

Ver. I, 2. «N THE REVELATION. I67

CHAP. VI.
THE OPENING OF SIX OF THE SJElALS.

Verfes iji^ 2d, \ ND I faw when the Lamb
■^ opened one of the feals,

and I heard as it were the noife of thvinder, one
of the four beads, faying, Come and fee. Andl
faw, and behold, a white horfe ; and he that
fat on him had a bow, and a crown was given
unto him, and he went forth conquering, and
to conquer.

In vifion John faw Chrift opening the firfl; feal
of the book ; and at the lame time he heard a
voice, loud as thunder, calling unto him, Come and
fee, which was the voice of one of the living crea-
tures. By the call which one of the living crea-
tures gives to John to come and fee, is figniiied
that the minifters of the gofpel, in every period 'of
the church, dired the attention of men to this
book; and give them fuch views of it as tend to
ftrengthen their faith and patience, that, wdien
they direct the attention of men to this book,

it

1 68 A COMMENTARY Ch. VI.

it is by the appointment of God ; for their
voice is like the noife of thunder, which is the
fymbol of the voice of God, chap. i. 3. " Blefled is
*' he that readeth, and they that hear the words of
" this prophecy, and keep thofe things which are
*^ written therein."

When Chrift opened this firft feal, that part ot
the book or roll which occupied the fpace between
the firfl and the fecond feal was opened up, and
John faw upon it the following hieroglyphic ; the
pidure of a white horfe, with a rider upon him,
which rider had a bow in his hand, and a crown
upon his head. This picture was drawn in fuch a
manner, according to the rules of the fymbolical
language, as plainly to llievv that this rider was
conquering his enemies not only at the time of the
opening of that feal ; but that he fhall alfo con-
quer them more completely in a future and diflr.nt
periqd.

In the fymbolical language, a horfe and his ri-
der fignifies a difpenfation of divine providence. A
horfe is powerful, fwift, and majeftic ; and though
irrational, and an inferior inftrument, is conduded
by the rider to accomplifh his wife and ufeful pur-
pofes, without any intention or plan of his own.
In like manner, the difpenfations of divine provi-
dence are not only irrefiflible, but have a peculiar
dignity and majelty in them, to which the great-
fil plans of men bear no proportion. And in them

inferior

Yer. I, 2. ON THE REVELATION. l^p

inferior agents and inftruments are employed, ufed,
and diredled, by the invifible hand of God, which
holds the reins of the government of this world, to
accomplifh his great, wife, and good purpofes,
without any intention of their own/ The particu-
iar nature of the difpenfation is fpecified, by the
colour of the horfe, and the drefs, armour, arid ap-
pearance of the rider. This obfervation fhall be il-
luftrated in the commentary on the opening of
this and tlie three following feals, by which four
different horfes and riders are exhibited.

The hieroglyphic nqw under our view^ fignifies
the difpenfation of divine providence, with refped;
to the gofpel of Jefus, in its puref!: and moll profpe-
rous ftates on earth. For whitenefs is the fymbol
of purity, and the bow and the crown that of war
and vidory. Hence the rider on the white horfe
is faid to have gone forth conquering and to con-
quer. This hieroglyphic figniiies that, in that age
in which John faw the vifion, even the apolloiic
age, the church of Chriil faould appear in great
purity, and dignity, that, in a particular manner^
it fnouid be under the guidance of Chrift ; that it
fnould then make great conquells and extend its
fpiritual domhiion far and wide in.fpite of ail its e-
nemies. It farther fignifies thai, in a future and
diilant period, it fliould appear again in its original
purity under the! diredion of Chrift, and make riiil
greater conquefls and obtain greater triumphs; for
. Vol, I. Y the

J 70 A COMMENTARY Ch. VL

the rider on the whire horfe went forth, not only
conquering in the prefent, but alfo that he fhall
conquer in future. Accordingly chnp. xix. 1 1,
— 16 the rider on the white horfe is again intro-
duced in a moil triumphant Hate over all his ene-
mies. Having before that time conquered all his
enemies he hath, on his head, many crowns, as the
fymbol that he is then King of kings and Lord of
lords. That by the white horfe and his rider is
meant the purity and triumph of the church
of Chrift, (liall fully appear in the commentary
on that paflage.

The prophecy under this firft feal was ex-
actly fulfilled, in that purity of doftrine, holinefs
of life, and fimplicity of manners, for which Chrif«
tians were diflinguidied during the firft century of
the church ; and in that rapid progre fs, with
which, even in fo fliort a period, Chriftianity fpread
over almoft the whole then known world, not only
without the aid of worldly power, rank, riches, or
interell, but even in oppofition to all thefe, and al-
fo to the religious prejudices of both Jews and Gen-
tiles. In the apoftolic age the gofpel v/as preach- "
ed in Judea, Arabia, Pontus, x\fia, Capadocia, By-
thinia, Parthia, Media, Mefopotamia, Athens, iVIa-
cedonia, Galatia, Rome, Antioch, and many other
parts of the world as appears from facred fcripture.
And it very foon fpread to Africa, Spain, and Bri-
tain.

Language

Ver. I, 2. ON THE REVELATION. I7I

Language can fcarcely give a more minute, and
diftind account of the fulfillment of this prophecy,
than what is Hiidby MoHieim in his Church Hifto-
ry, vol. i. p. 27, 28. " When we confider the ra-
** pid progrefs of Ghriflianity among the Gentile
" nations, and the poor and feeble inllruments,
" by which this great and amazing event was im-
" mediately effecied, we muft naturally have re-
*' courfe to an omnipotent and invliible hand, as
" its true and proper caufe. For, unlefs we fuppofe
" here a divine interpofition, how was it poilible
" that men deilitute of all human aid, without cre-
" dit, or riches, learning or eloquence could, in fo
*' fhort a time, perfuade a conliderable part of man-
" kind to abandon the religion of their anceltors ?
*' How was it poilible that a handful of apoftles
*' who, as fifliermen and publicans, muft have been
*' contemned by their own nation, and as Jews
" muft have been odious to all others, could engage
" the learned and the mighty ; as well as the fmi-
" pie and thofe of low degree, to forfake their fa-
" voarite prejudices, and to embrace religion which
" was an enemy to their corrupt pailions ? And in-
*' deed, there were undoubted marks of a celeftial
*' power perpetually attending their miniftry.
" There was in their very language an incredible
" energy, and amazing power of fending light un-
•' to the underftanding, and conviclion unto the
*' heart. To this were added the commanding;
Y 3 iniluence

17-

A COMMENTARY Cll. VI.

*' influence of ftupenduous miracles, the fortel-

" ling of future events, the power of difcerning

*' the fecret thoughts and intentions of the heart,-

" a magnanimity fuperior to all difficulties, a con-

*' tempt of riches and honours, a ferene tranquilli-

" ty in the face of death, and an invincible pa-

*' tience under torments uill more dreadful than

" death itfelf ; and all this accompanied with lives

*' free from all llain, and adorned with the con-

" ftant praclice of fublime virtue. Thus were the

" meffengers of the Divine Saviour, the heralds of

" his fpiritual and immortal kingdom, furnifhed

" for their glorious work, as the unanimous voice

" of antient hiftory i'o loudly teftilie:i. The event

" fufFiciently declares this ; for without thefe re-

•' markable and extraordinary circumllances, no

" rational account can be given of the rapid pro-

" pagation of the gofpel throughout the world."

Verfes 3^, ^th.' — And when he had opened
the fecond feal, I heard the fecond bead fay.
Come and fee. And there went out another
horfe that was red : and power was given to
him that fat thereon, to take peace from the
earth, and that they fliould kill one another :
and there was given unto hi in a great fword.

When

Ver. 3, 4. ON the revelation. 173

When Chrid opened the fecond feal, fo much
more oT the roll, as was contained between the fe-
cond and third feal, was rolled off, and John faw,
drawn upon it, the picture of a red horfe, with a
rider upon him' holding a great fword in his hand.

This hieroglyphic was drawn in fuch a manner
as to intimate, that power was given to this rider
to take peace from the earth ; and that the inhabi-
tants of it ihould kill one another. The red colour
of this horfe, the great fword in the hand of the rider,
and the notes intimating that he was to take peace
from the earth /and that its inhabitants fhould kill
one another, are as plain a declaration, as could
be made in any language, that this hieroglyphic
iignifies that, during the period to which it refers,
there fliould be much perfecution and bioodfned
on the earth.

The earib is the fymbolical name for the Roman
empire. We {hall meet with this fymbol very fre-
quently in this book, and ftiall find it always ufed
for the Roman empire. In Luke ii. i. ^11 the
world is ufed to lignify the Roman empire : " And
*' it came to pafs in thofe days that there went forth
*' a decree from Caefar Auguflus, xh'&t all the world
" fliould be taxed." In this palTage, there can be no
doubt that, by all the world, is meant ail the Ro-
man empire, for the emperors of Rome-could never
impofe taxes beyond thehmits of the Koman em-

pire

174 A COMMENTARY Ch. VI.

pire, comprehending all the nations which were
tributary to it.

It will be proper that here, once for all, I explain
the principle on which the Roman empire is re-
prelented by this fymbol. The reafon why, hi
this book in particular, and in the writings of the
New Teftament in general, the Roman empire is
called the earth, is, that during the period in which
the New Tellament was written, and to which the
events predicted in this book relate, the Roman
empire was the only univerfal empire on earth
known m fcripture. And alfo becaufe it is ftiled
" The kingdom on earth,** by Daniel, whofe book
of prophecy is opened up in this book, and therefore
it is highly proper that the name given to the Ro-
man empire in the fliort predictions of Daniel, fhould
be preferved in tliis book, which may be confider-
ed as Chrift's cornmentary on Daniel's fealed book.
Daniel foretold four great monarchies under the
appellation of the kingdoms of the earthy and alfo
another and a fpiritval kingdom under the appel-
lation of the kingdom oi heaven, Dan. ii. 31, — 45.
He predicted thefe more fully in Dan. vii. 15, — 27.
which paflages the reader is defired to confult with
•attention. Of thefe four kingdoms he faith, "they
" fliall rule over all the earth. They fliall arife out
•' of the earth. And the fourth bead Iliall be the
" fourth kingdom upon earth.'* Of the other and
fpiritual kingdom he faith, " And in the days of

" thefe

Ver. 3, 4» on the revelation". 175

*' thefe kings fhall the God o? heaven fet up a king-
*' dom. And the kingdom and dominion and the
" greatnefs of the kingdom under the whole heaven
" fhall be given to the people of the faints 'of the
" Moft High." Thefe four kingdoms on earth were
the AlTjrian, the Perfian, the Grecian, and the Ro-
man empires, Thefe followed each other in regular
fucceffion. And each of them, during the period
o'l its continuance, was Itiled the earth in fcrip-
ture. Thus a proclamation of Nebuchadnezar,
a king of the firfl of thefe, runs thus, Dan. iv. i.
" Nebuchadnezar the king, unto all people, na-
" tions and languages that dwell on all the earth.^*
Of a king of the fecond it is faid, Ezra i. 2. '- Thus
" faith Cyrus king of Perfia, The Lord God of hea-
*' ven hath given me all the kingdoms of the
*' earths Of the third, under the hieroglyphic of
a h'e goat, it is faid, Dan. viii. 5. '* And as I v/as con-
" fidering, behold a he goat came from the well in
" the face of the whole earth, Verfe 21. And the
" rough goat is the king of Grecia." Of the fourth
kingdom or Roman empire, it is faid, Dan. vii. 23.
*' The fourth beall fliall be the fourth kingdom
" upon earth. It is in reference to what is faid of
the fifth kingdom, as the kingdom which the God
ofheaven fhall fet up, that the real church of Chrfil
is, uniformly, filled the kingdom of heaven in the
writings of the New Teftament. And it is for the
(lime reafon that, in this book, heaven is the fjm-

■ bol

176 A COMMENTARY Ch. VI,

bol for the church for Chrifl, and earth is the fym-
bol for the Roman empire.

This hieroglyphic predicts bloody perfecutions,
to which Chriftians fhould be expofed in the Roman
empire. The rider on the red horfc fiiall take
peace from the earth or Pvoman empire, and they
fliall kill one another. Tlie contentions in v/hicli
the Roman empire fhould be engaged fliould not
be wars with a foreign enemy ; and thofe who
(liould be killed fhould not be lubjeds'of any 0-
ther kingdom on earth. The citizens of Rome
Ihould perfecute and kill thofe who were their fel-
low citizens.

Chi-iflians are here rcprefented as citizens of
Rome. Better citizens never were in the Roman
nor any other empire than the Chriftians of this
period were. They had learned from the united
precepts and example, of the Divine Author of
Chriltianity, to render unto God the things which
were God's, and unto Caefar the- things which were
Casfar's. The better Chriftian any man is, the
better fubjedl is he of that civil government, belts
form what it will, of which, in the courfe of divins
providence, he is placed as a citizen. WhiUl in
matters purejy religious, and. which arc not the
proper objefts of human authority, ho calls no
man mailer on earth ; in matters of a civil na^
ture, taught by the infpired and infallible ftan-
dardof fcripture, Rom. xiii. 5. " He is fubjedt not

•' only

Ver. 3, 4. ON TiiE revelation. 177

only for wrath but alfo for confcience fake, verfe 7,
*' He renders unto all their due, tribute to whom
*' tribute is due, cuftom to whom cuftom, fear to
" whom fear, honour to whom honour, t Pet. ii.
17, *' He fears God and honours the king." i Tim.
ii. 2, — 3. "He prays for kings and all in authority,
*' that Ghriilians may lead quiet and peaceable lives
" in all godlinefs and honefty ; for this is good and
*' acceptable in the fight of God, our Saviour, who
" will have all men to be faved and to come to the
*' knov/ledge of the truth."

As Chriftians could, with a good confcience,
acknowledge themfelves citizens of Rome in its
heathen Hate, and did a^ properly as fuch in all
matters merely civil, they are not diftinguifned,
in this book, from the other citizens of Rome, by
a particular name, fo long as the empire conti-
nued heathen. But whenever the empire became
papal, Chriftians are diftinguiilied, in this book,
from the citizens or rather votaries of Rome,
Then the former are uniformly filled faijits, and
the latter tbem that dwell upon the earth. And^e
kingdom of the former is called heaven, and IJpt
of the latter the earth, as fnall appear as Vv'e pro-,
ceed. After the Roman empire became papal,
as its conftitution was then partly of the civil and
partly of the religious kindj Chriftians could not
acknowledge themfelves citizens of that empire.

Vol. I. Z without.

178 A COMMENTARY ' Ch. VI.

without giving up their religious principles to
mere human authority.

If we look into the hillory of the church of
Chrift, and of the Roman empire, immediately
after the expiration of the period predided under
the firfl; feal, we fhall find that the hieroglyphic
under the fecond feal was mod exactly fulfilled in
the bloody perfecutions, which were inflicted up-
on Chriftians by the Roman emperors Trajan, A-
drian, Ai^toninus Pius, Marcus Antoninus, and
Severus, from the beginning to the end of the fe-
cond century of the Chriltian church.

Under this feal, mod probably, is alfo included
the perfecution by the emperor Domitian in the
end of the firft century. The account of thefe
perfecutions is too long to be tranfcribed into this
commentary. Bat the reader will fee it at full
length, in Moflieim*s Church Hiftory, vol. 1, from
page 76, — 80.

It IS faid, *' that they fliould kill one another."
By this expreflion it is predicted, that the citizens
.pf Rome themfelves fiiould perfecute and kill the
^hiiflians their fellow citizens, even when the em-
perors were not violent in commanding them to
perfecute. This part of the prediction was as ex-
iidtly accomplilhed as the other parts |of it : For
frequently, in the fecond century, when there
%ver(; no edids of the emperors or fenate of Rome
commanding them to perfecute the Chrillians, the

people

Ver. 3, 4. ON the revelation. jyg

people and the priefts, of their own accord, per-
lecuted them m the mofl tumultuous, barbarous,
and cruel manner.

A very few excerpts from the hillory of that
century will fliew the mofl minute fulfillment of
this predidlion, Moflieim Hift. vol. i. p. 76. " In
*' the beginning of this century, (the fecond),
*' there were no laws in force againll the Chriftians;
** for the fcnate had annulled the cruel edicts of
" Nero, and Nervahad abrogated the fanguinary
" laws of his predeceflbr Domitian. But, notwith-
*' ftanding this, a horrid cuftom prevailed of per-
" fccuting the Chriilians, and even of putting them
** to death, as often as a bloody prieflhood, or an
" outrageous populace fet on by them, demanded
" their deftrudion. Hence it happened that even
" under the reign of the good Trajan^popular tu-
*' mults, and feditions were raifed among the Chrif-
*' tians, many of whom fell vidims to the rage of a
" mercilefs multitude. Such were the riotous pro-
" ceedings that happened in Bithinia, under the
" adminilUation of Pliny the younger, who, upon
" that occalion, wrote to the emperor to know in
" what manner he was to condud himfelf towards
" the Chriftians." The anfwer which he received
from Trajan amounted to this ; " that the Chrif-
"" tians were not to be officioufiy fought after : but
" that fuch, as were accufed and convided of an
*' adherence to Chriflianity, were to be put to
7. 2 " deatij,

l8o A COMMENTARY Ch. VI.

"death, as kicked citizens, if they did not re-
*' turn to the' religion of their anceilors.

Page 78. 'The emperor Marcus Antoninus if-
*' fued out againft the Chrifiians, whom he regard-
" ed as a vain, obftinate and vicious fet of men, e-
" dicls, which, upon the whole, were very unjuft,
" though we do not knov% at this diftance of time,
*' their particular contents. In confcquence of
" their imperial edicts, the judges and magiftrates
" received the accufations, which even flaves and
" the vilcfl of the perjured rabble brought againft
" the followers of Jefus; and the Chrifiians were
*' put to the moil cruel tortures, and were con-
" demned to meet death in the moll barbarous
" forms, notwithflanding theii- perfecl innocence,
*' and their perfevering, and folemn denial of the
*' horrid crimes laid to their charge. The imperial
" edids were fo pofitive and exprefs againfl inflic-
*^ ting punifnment upon fuch of the Chrifiians as
*^ were guilty of no crime, that the corrupt judges,
*' who, through motives of intereH or popularity,
*' defired their deftruclion, were obliged to fubcrn
•' falfe accufers to charge them with actions that
** might bring them within the reach of the laws.
" Hence mrjiy fell vidims to cruel fupenlition and
" popular fury, feponded by the corruption of a
" wicked magiHracy, and the connivance of a
" prnice, who with refpe6l to one let of men, forgot
" the principles and clemency which directed his

'* conduct

Ver. 5, 6, ON the revelation." 181

*' condud towards all others. Among thefe vie-
*' tims there were many men of illuftrious piety,
" and fome of eminent learning and abihties, fuch
" as the holy and venerable Polycarp Bifliop of
" Smyrna, and Juftin Martyr, [0 defervedly reno'.vn-
•* ed for his erudition and philofophy. 'Many
" churches, particularly thofe of Lyons and Vienne
*- were almofl entirely deftroyed during this vio-
"Jent perfecution, which raged in the year
*' 177. and will be an indelible ilain upon the
" memory of the prince by whofe order it was
" carried on."

Verfes ^th^ 6tb, — And when he had opened
the third feal, I heard the third beaft fay.
Come, and fee, And I beheld, and lo, a black
horfe ; and he that fat on him had a pair of
balances in his hand. And I heard a voice
in the midft: of the fourbeafts fay, A meafure
of wheat for a penny, and three meafures of
barley for a penny ; and fee thou hurt net
the oil and the wine.

When the third feal v;as opened, and 10 much
of the roil as was contained betwetn the third and
fourth feal rolled ofiVJohn faw, upon it, the picture
of a black horfe, with a rider upon him holding a
pair of balances in liis hand. And, at tht^ fa.ne

time.

iZl A COMMENTARY Ca, VI.

time, he heard a voice, in the midfl of the four li-
ving creatures, faying, " A meafure of wheat foi: a
*' penny, and three mcafurcs of barley for a pen-
•' ny ; and fee thou hurt not the oil and the wine.*'

In the fymbolical language, this hieroglyphic
lignifies a great famine. The black colour is the
fymbol of famine, becaufe famine deftroys the rud-
dy complexion, and gives the countenance a dark
pale look, Lam. v. lo. " Our ik'in was black like aa
** oven, becaufe ofthe terrible famine." Toeat bread
by weight or meafure is the fymbol for fcarcity of
food, Ezek.iv. 16, 17. " Moreover he faid unto me,
*' Son of man, behold I will break the llaff of bread
" in Jerufalem, and they fnall eat bread by weight
•* and with care ; and they fliall drink water by
" meafure and with aftonifliment : that they may
" want bread and water, and be aftonifhed one with
*' another, and confume away for their iniquity."

The meafure of wheat is in the original the
chaenix ; and the penny is the denarius. The for-
mer was the ordinary allowance of corn for a la-
bouring man's food for a day, and the latter was
his ordinary wages for a day. By the exprelTion
therefore " a meafure of wheat for a penny," it is
intimated that the famine fliould be fo great, that
all the exertions* and induftry of men fnould be
fcarcely fuflicient to procure them daily fub-
fiftence.

Perhaps

Ver. 5, 6, on the revelation. 183

Perhaps fome perfons, unacquainted with the
Hebrew and Greek languages, comparing the ex-
preffion here, with the account which Elifhah
gives of a great plenty, 2 Kings vii. i. " To mor-
*' row about this time Iliall a meafure of fine flour
" be fold for a fliekel, and two meafures of barley
" for a fnekel, in the gate of Samaria," may confi-
der the expreflion now under our view as a predic-
tion not of fcarcity, but of plenty. All the difficulty,
doubt, or miftake in this matter arifes from our
tranflation. The word which is tranflated meafure
in 2 Kings vii. i. fignifies, and indeed is, in the
Hebrew language, tbefeab, a particular vefTel, a-
bout fix times as large as the chtEnix, the particu-
lar yeflel mentioned in the original, and tranflated
meafure in this palTage now under our view. The
word in the original, which is tranflated penny, is
the denarius. The fiiekel is a piece of money a
little more than three times the value of the dena-
rius or penny. All this mufl; be very clear to e-
very perfon acquainted with the Hebrew and
Greek languages, the contents of antient meafures.
and the value of ancient coins. Hence as xhQfeab
is fix times as large as the chcdnix, and the fhekel
three times as valuable as the denarius; the mea-
fure of wheat mentioned by John, mufl; have been
twice as dear as the meafure of fine flour mention-
ed by Elifliah. But the difference between the
prices will appear fl:ill greater Vv'hen we remember

that

I §4 A COMMENTARY Ch. VI.

that Elifhah gives the price of fine flour, and John
that of wheat only, which is far from being fo fpe-
cifically valuable as fine flour. This therefore muil
be an account of a famine ; for whenever wheat,
or the ordinary food of any country rifes to double
its ordinary price, no man will doubt that there is
then a. famine in that country. When to this efti-
mate of the price of the chcenix of wheat, we add
the black colour of the horfe and the pair of ba-
lances in the hand of the rider, the meaning of
the hieroglyphic becomes as plain as if the word
famine had been put in its place.

No hurt was to be done to the wine and the oil.
That is, though there was to be a famine of the ne-
ceflTaries of life, yet feveral of the comforts of life
Ihould be continued in plenty.

According to the idiom of the fymbolical lan-
guage, intelledtual, moral, and fpiritual objedls are
fignified by material and vifible ones, which bear
fome kind of refemblancc to them. Thus the food
of the body is the fymbol of the food of the mind.
Hence the famine defcribed in thefe verfes figni-
fies a famine of the ordinary fpiritual food of Chri-
flians ; a famine ot the word of God and of the ex-
ternal ordinances of religion. But, whiiit there
was to be a great fcarcity of thcfe, the ordinary
fpiritual' food of v hriftians, there v/as to be no di-
minution of the gracious influences of divine grace,
reprefented by the oil and the wine, Pfalm civ. 15.

" And

Ver. 5, 6. ON the revelation, i 85

*' And wine that maketh glad the heart of man,
*' and oil to make his face to fliine." Like wine and
oil, it is the influence of divine grace upon the foul,
which gives true joy to the heart, and ferenity to
the countenance. Without this no external means
can be of avail for thefe important purpofes, and
this, of itfelf will fupply their place, when for
wife purpofes they are withdrawn by God. From
the ufes of wine and oil, in the confecrations and
facrifices under the Mofaic difpenfation, it abun-
dantly appears that they were the appointed fym-
bols of the grace of God.

This prophecy was moil exactly fulfilled in the
perfections of Chrillians under the emperors Se-
veruSjMaximian, Gallus, Volufianus, Valerian, Gal-
lienus, Claudius, and Aurelian ; during the whole
of the third century, as appears from Mofheim's
Church Hill. Vol. i. from page 126, to page 129.
And alfo under the emperor Dioclefian in the year
303. The chief force of all thefe perfecutions was
direded againilthe minillers of religion, the facred
fcriptures and other books of Chriitians, and their
afferablics for public worlhip; by which means
there was a very great famine of the word. Un-
der thefe perfecutions, the fortitude and ferenity of
the Chrillians were fo great, as fully to prove,
that, though deprived of the outward means of
knowledge and grace, they felt no diminution of
the inward aids and confolations of Chrifiianity.

Vol. L a a The

1 86 A COMMENTARY Ch. VI.

The following paflage, from the hiftory of the

period to which this feal refers, will fhew howex-

adly it was fulfilled in the famine of the word. Mo-

fheim's Church Hift. Vol. i. page 164. " Diode-

*• fian, however, flood for fome time unmoved by

*' the treacherous arts of a felfifh and fuperftitious

" priefthood, who, when they perceived the ill fuc-

" cefs of their cruel efforts, addrefied themfelves

'^ to Maximinus Galerius, one of the Caelars, inor-

" der to accomplilli their unrighteous purpofes.

" This jirince, whofe grofs ignorance of every thing

" but military aflairs was accompanied with a

*' fierce and lavage temper, was a proper inftru-

" ment for executing their defigns Set on there-

*' fore by the malicious infinuations of the Hea-

*' then priefts, the fuggefhions of a fuperftitious

** mother, and the ferocity of his own natural dif-

" pofitions, he folicited Dioclefian with fuch inde-

•' fatigable importunity, in fuch an urgent manner,

*' for an edict againft the Chriftians, that he at

" length obtained his horrid purpofe. For in the

*' year 303, when this emperor was at Nicomedia,

*' an order was obtained to pull down the churches

" of the Chriftians, to burn all their books and

" writings, and to take from them all their

" civil rights and privileges", and render them

*' incapable of any honours or civil promotions.

•' This hrft edift, though rigorous and fevere, ex-

•' tended not to the lives of the Chriftians, for Dio-

•' clefian

Ver. 7, 8. on the revelation, 187

*' clefian was extremely averfe to lld,ughter and
" bloodflied ; it was however deflruclive to many
" of them, particularly to thofe who refufed to de-
" liver the facred books into the hands of the ma-
•' giftrates. Many Chriilians, therefore, and among
" them feveral biftiops and prelbyters. feeing the
" confequences of this refufal, delivered up all the
** rehgious books and other facred things which
" were in their poilefTion, in order to fave their lives.
" ' 1 his conduct was highly condemned by the moil
" Heady and refolute Chriilians, who looked upon
•' this compliance as facriiegious, and branded
" thofe who were guilty of it with the ignominious
" appellation of traditors.

Verfes ^tb^ Sth. — And when he had opened
the fourth feal, I heard the voice of the fourth
beaft fay, Come and fee. And I looked, and
behold a pale horfe ; and his name that fat
on him v\ras Death, and Hell followed with
him. : and power was given unto them, over
the fourth part of the earth, to kill with
Avord, and with hunger, and with death, and
with the beads of the earth.

When Chrift opened this feal, fo much of the

roll as v/as contained between the fourth and the.

fifth feal was rolled off; and John faw upon it the

A 0. z pidure

1 88 A COMMENTARY Cll. VI .

pifture of a pale hoiTe, and a rider upon him, whofe
name was Death, and the fymbol for the grave
followed with him. "a^>?? the word tranilated hell^
lignifies the grave. He \v;'s at the fame time in-
formed, that power was given unto them over the
fourth part of the earth, to kill with fword, and
with hunger, and with death, and with the beads
of the earth.

By the pale colour of the horfe, the name of the
rider Death, his follower the grave, and the expla-
natory note bearing that power was given unto
them to kili< it is plainly declared that the perfe-
cution, predicted by this hieroglyphic, was to be
one in which fuch great numbers of Chriftians
fhould be killed by the fword, hunger, and favage
bealls, that Death, if turned into a perfon and ap~
pearing among men, could not have killed them in
greater numbers. And that the burials of them
Ihould be fo frequent, that the graves might well
be reprefented as always open to receive their
dead bodies. This perfecution was to extend over
a fourth part of the earth, that is of the Roman
empire.

At the time to which this feal relates, the Ro-
man empire, then very extenhve, was divided into
four parts, and governed by two emperors and two
Cacfars. By a fourth part, therefore, of the empire,
^ to be underftood fo much of it as was under the

juriCdiOion

Ver. 7, 8. ON the revelation. 189

jurifdidion of one of thefe four rulers ; though the
territory, over which each of thein ruled, might not
be of the fame extent.

By looking into the hiilory of the Chriftian
church, and of the Roman empire, immediately
after the period of the third feal, we fhall fee the
prediclions under this one exadlly accompliflied-
In the beginning of the fourth century of the
church Maximian Hercules was emperor in
the weft, and Conftantius, the father of Con-
ftantine the great, was Coefar or governor of
Britain, Dioclefian was emperor in the. eaft, and
Maximian Galerius, Csefar in the eaft. In a
fliort time, Galerius obliging Diocleiian^and Maxi-
mian Hercules to refign the purple, declared him-
felf fole emperor of the eaft, while the adminiftra-
tion of the weftern provinces was ftill in the hands
of Conftantius. During thefe reigns, which were
from about the year of Chrrft 300 to the year 31 r,
the perfecutions againft the Chriftians werey.carried
to the moft barbarous and fhocking height in the
eaftern part of the empire, firft under Dioclefian,
and after his abdication, under Galerius.

A? the perfecution predided under this feal was
to extend, not over the whole, but only over a part
of the Roman empire, the accomplifiiment of this
c'lrcumjlance muft ftrongly ftrlke every candid
mind. For, notwithftanding all the violence of
Dioclefian and Galerius againft the Chriftians in

the

IpO A COMMENTARY Ch. VI.

the eafl: ; Conllantius not only did not perfecute,
but even countenanced them in the weflern provin-
cos of the empire. — That the Chrillians were, at
this period, countenanced in the weftern part of
the empire by Conftantius, Moflieim declares,
Hiji. vol. i. p. 163. with whom Eufebius agrees,
Book viii. chap. 13. and alfo Gibbon vol. ii.
p. 282, — 393. "Dioclefian though much addicled
" to fuperflition, did not ho-wever entertain any
*• averlion to the Chriftians : and Conftantius Clo-
•' rus, who following the didates of right reafon a-
*' lone in (he worfliip of the Deity, had abandoned
" the abfurdities of poletheifm, treated them with
*' condefcenfion and benevolence. This alarmed
" the pagan priefts, whofe interefts were fo clofely
" conneded with the continuance of the ancient
*' fuperftitions, and who apprehended, not without
" reafon, that to their great detriment, the Chrif-
" tian religion would become daily more univerfal
♦' and triumphant throughout the empire. Under
*' thefe anxious fears of the downfall of their au-
*' thority, they addreffed themfelves to Dioclefian,
" whom they knew to be of a timorous and credu-
" lous difpofition, and by liclitious oracles, and o-
" ther fuch peiiidious ftratagems, endeavoured to
*' engage him to perfecute the Chriilians."

The numbers that were killed in this perfecu-
tion were aftonifliingly great. In fome places the
blood of the ilain itfelf made little brooks^ and co-
loured

Ver. 7, 8. ON THE REVELATION. I9I

loured large rivers. EuTebius fays, that he hath feen
the adlors of that perfecution ib fatigued, and their
fwords fo blunted with killing the Chriftians, that
they were obliged to be relieved by frefti perfons.
Fox Mar. p. iot,. Eufeb. Hijl. 1. viii, c. 9, 10. 11, a 2.

At this time, there was alfo a great licknefs and
mortality in the Roman empire, fo that from the
mortality, (Death), and the perfecution, men died
fafter than the living could bury them ; by which
means, dogs were fo accuftomed to eat dead mens
flefh, that they became a terror to the living left
they fliould eat them alfo. Eufeb. HiJl. 1. viii. c. 10.
Well then might this horfe be pale, his rider
Death, and the grave following him.

The Chriftians were killed by being drawn a-
funder by horfes, cloven by trees, caft to wild
beafts, fent to fea in boats without any provifion.
There was an emulation among their perfecutors,
who might invent the moft torturing deaths to
Chriftians, Fox's Tables, Eufeb. Hift. 1. 8.

Eachard defcribe^s the different modes, by which
Chriftians were put to death in this perfecution
under Dioclefian and his fucceflbr Galerus, almoft
in the very words of this prophecy. In the prophe-
cy it is faid, " And power was given them to
" kill with fvvord and with hunger, and with

" death, and with the beafts of the earth.

And Eachard fays, Rom. Hijl. vol. ii. p. 533. "As
" this was the laft perfecution, fo it was the moft

" fevere

JgZ A COMMENTARY Ch. VI.

" fevere of all others, like the laft efforts of an ex-
" piring enemy, who ufes his utmofl: power and
" ftreiigth to give a parting blow. It were endlefs,
'* and almoft incredible, to enumerate the varie-
*' ty of fufferers and torments ; it is fufficient to ob-
*' ferve, in this place, that they w^re fcourged to
" death, had their flefli torn off with pinchers, and
" mangled with broken pots, were cafl to lions, ty-
*' gers, and other wild beads, were burned, be-
*' headed, crucified, thrown into the fea, torn in
*' pieces by the diftorted boughs of trees, roafled by
" gentle fires, and holes made in their bodies for
" melted lead to be poured into their bowels.
•* This perfecution lafled ten years under Diocle-
" lian and fome of his fuccelTors ; and the incredi-
" ble number of Chriflians which fuffered death
" and puniQiment, made them conclude that
" they had completed their work. And in an an-
" cient infcription, they tell the world that they
*' had effaced the name and fuperftition of the
" Chriflians, and had reftored and propagated the
"' worfhip of the Gods."

How exactly this perfecution correfponded to
the predidion in thefe verfes is abundantly clear
from Moflieim's i//,/?. vol. i., from page 164, to 166.
Of thefe three pages 1 fhall tranfcribe only two
fhort paragraphs. Page 165. "In the fecond
"year of this horrible perfecution, the 3C4th
" of the Chriflian acra, a fourth edidl was pub-

" lifhed

Ver. 7, 8. on the revel AfioN. 193

" lifhed by Dioclefian, at the inftigation of Ga-
•' lerius, and the other inveterate enemies of the
*' Chriftian name. By it the magiftrates were or-
*' dered and commiflioned to force all Chriftians,
" without diilindlion of rank or fex, to facrifice to
" the gods, and were authorifed to employ all forts
" of torments in order to drive them to this ad of
*' apollacy. The diligence and zeal of the Roman
*' magiftrates, in the execution of this inhuman e-
" did, had like to have proved fatal to the Chriftian
" caufe. — This revolution reflored peace to the
" uhriftians, who lived in the weftern provinces,
" under the adminillration of Conftantius ; vvhilft
" thofe of the eaft, under the tyranny of Galerius,
" had their fufferings and calamities dreadfully
" augmented,"

Fer/es gth, loih^ 1 1//^— And whenhe had 0-
pened the fifth feal I faw under the altar, the
fouls of them that were ilain for the word of
God, and for the tefUmony which they held.
And they cried with a loud voice, faying.
How long, O Lord, holy and true, doll thou
not judge and avenge our blood on them that
dwell on the earth ? And white robes were
given unto every one of them, and it was faid
unto them, that they fhould rell yet for a lit-
tle feafon, until their fellow fervants alfo,.and

Vol. L B b their

194 A COMMENTARY Ch. VI

their brethren, that fhould be killed as they
were, fhould be fulfilled.

The hieroglyphics under the three precedingfeals
predicted the many, long, and levere perfecutions,
which Chriftians were to fufFer under the heathen
emperors in the fecond and third centuries, and in
a part of the fourth, and which they have according-
ly fufTered in the times and manner foretold. The
lafl of thefe hieroglyphics reprefented thefe perfe-
cutions brought to the height, and Chriftians almoft
totally killed and extirpated from the earth by
th'-m. Under fuch a vifion, John might have
been ready to have defpaired for ever of the Chrif-
tian church. And thofe few Chriftians, who fur-
vived thefe perfecutions, might have been apt to
conclude, from the profperity of the Roman em-
pire, notwithftanding all its cruelties to the Chrif-
tians, that certainly Chriftianity was not rVoin God;
elfe he would have avenged upon their perfccutors
the injuftice done to his religion and woribippers.
At this very crifis, and when it was natural to fup-
pofe that fuch wfis the flate of their minds, Chrift
opens the fifth feal. And that part of the book,
which was contained between the fifth and fixth
feal was rolled olf.

On looking into this part of the b(i)ok, John faw
the picture of an altar, fuch as tiiat, on which fa-

crifices

Ver. 9, 10, ii. on the revelation. 195

crifices w6re offered under the Mofaic diipenfa-
tion. Under this altar he Taw the pkT:ure of fome
refined creatures ; whorn, by certam explanatory
notes, he knew to be the fouls of them that were
flain for the word of God, and for the teftimony
which they held; and who, he underftood, were
crying with a loud voice, " How long, O Lord, ho«
•' ly and true, doH thou not judge and avenge our
" blood on them that dwell on the earth." rie
faw alfo the pidure of white robes given unuo
them, and underftood that it was faid unto them,
that they fliould reft yet for a lirtle feafon.

Nothing can be more clear, than that thefe ver-
fes refer to thofe, who hud fuffered as martyrs for
Chrift under the Heathen emperors, as predicted
under the three preceding feals. After death and
the grave had killed their bodies, John was in-
formed, by Chriit, that their fouls were ftill alive in
a feparate ftate. Their perfecutors had killed their
bodies, but after that, they had no more that they
could do. The fword, hunger, mortality, wild
beafts, death and the grave, have no power over
their immortal fouls, thefe iurvive the body, and
are happy with the Lord in the heavenly paradife.
Their perfecutors, that they might apologife to
the world ; and perhaps, to their own hearts, for
murdering them, have reprefented them as fedi-
tious and turbulent perfons, who turn the world
upfide down, and who vv^ere juftly punifhed with
B b 2 death

196 A COMMENTARY Ch. VI.

death, as pefts to civil fociety. But John was in-
formed, by him who knew beft, that the re^l caufe
for which they flew them, was their fteady attach-
ment to the word of God, infpired Icripture as the
only infallible ftandard of their faith, worfhip, and
obedience, in every part of religion, and not only
for profefling their faith in God, -their faith in Je-
fus as the Chrifl and the Son of God, their faith in
facred fcripture, as the word of God, and the only
infallible flandard of faith, worlliip, aiid obedience ;
but alfo for holding fall that profellion and tefli-
mony, when forbidden to do fo by the Roman em-
perors. And hence, inilead of having been put to
death as evil doers, that God, who perfeclly knows
the hearts of them, and of their perfecutors, confi-
ders them as vidims to him. This is intimated by
their being under the altar.

The blood of t|^e facrifice, the blood of every
beail is ftiled its life, in fcripture. The blood of
the calf or bullock offered, under the law, for a
fm-offering or a burnt-offering was poured at the
foot of the altar. Lev. viii. 15. and ix. 9. Hence
the blood poured at the bottom of the altar, is the
fymbol, which fignifies that the foul of the true
worfliipper is purified and devoted to God.

Thefe martyrs are vidims to their attachment
to the will and worfhip of the true God. Had they
given up their bibles, profeffed to believe the po-
lytheifm of Rome, denied Jefus to be the Chrift
and the Son of God, and facrificed to the gods,

thei<.

Ver. 9, 10, ii. on the revelation, 197

their blood would not have been Ihed by their in-
human, tyrannical, and impious perfecutors. It
feems to be an eflential part in the conftitution of
God's moral government of the world, that the
vengeance of heaven fliall follow thofe men ; who,
with malevolent hearts, imbrue their hands in the
blood of their fellow men The voice of Abel's blood
cried to God, from the ground, for vengeance on
the guilty head of Cain. This is the exprefs declara-
tion of God, Gen. ix. 5, 6. " And furely your blood
** of your lives will I require: at the hand of eve-
*' ry beafl will 1 require it ; and at the hand of
•' man, at the hand of every man's brother will I
" require the life of man. Whofo fneddeth man's
" blood, by man fhall his blood be Ihed : for in
" the image of God made he man."

When innocent blood is flied not by individuals
merely, but by communities of men ; it feems Lobe
peculiarly. fit that vengeance fho'dd be taken on
thele communities in this world in the courfe of di-
vine providence, independent of that account, which
every guilty individual mull give for himfelf at the
bar of God. As it is only in this world, that commu-
nities exift in their coUedive capacity, it is in this
world only that they can be punifhed in their pub-
lic charader. When Pilate, after he had condemn-
ed Jefus, took water, Vv-allied his hands, and de-
clared that he was innocent of the blood of that
juft perfon ; the whole multitude of the people* of

the

XpS A COMMENTARY Ch. VI.

the Jews faid, let h's blood be upon us and our
children.. The hiftory of the Jews, clearly fhews,
that the vengeance of Heaven hath come upon
them as a people or collective body, for the blood
of the juft one. Their city, temple, and kingdom,
have all been deflroyed, with evident marks of di-
vine difpleafure, and they have long been fcattered
through every kingdom of the world, while they
have no kingdom of their own. Great is the guilt
of fhedding any innocent blood.

The highell degree of guilt of this kind, was
that of tliofe who fhed the blood of Jefus, the juil
One. Next to this is that of thofe who have llied
the blood of faints for their fteady attachment to
the word of God, and to the teflimony of Jefus. As
ib many thoufands of faints were flain in the moll:
barbarous and fhocking manner, for the word of
God, and for the teftimony, which they held, by
the emperors, fenate, and people of Rome, during
a part of the firfl, the wiiolc of the fecond and
third, and a part of the fourth century, moft cer-
tainly fo much innocent blood mult call for divine
vengeance upon that people and empire.

We are not to fuppofe, that the departed fouls of
the martyrs entertained any ^-evenge or malice a-
gainft their perfecutors. Even in this world, in
which they were much lefs perfed than they are
in the future flate, they forgave their perfecutors,
and even prayed to God for pardon, repentance,

and

Ver. 9, 10, 1 1. on the revelation. ' 199

and happinefs to them ; it is not, therefore, ever to
be fuppofed that revenge now dwells in their puri-
fied breafts in heaven Every real ( ihriftian learns,
from the higheil authority and example, to forgive
his enemies, and to pray for their pardon. For he
who faid, " If ye forgive not men their trefpalTes,
" neither will your heavenly Father forgive your
" trefpaiTes," with his lafl breath, prayed for his
murderers, " Father forgive them, for they know
" not whatthey do." In Rom xii. 19, — 21. we have
the great precept of the gofpei on this matter, on
which the Chriftian ads. *' Dearly beloved, a^
" venge not yourf-^lves, but rather give place to
" wrath ; for it is written, vengeance is mine ; I
*' will repay, faith the Lord. Therefore, if thine
*' enemy hunger, feed him ; if he third, give him
•* drink : for in fo doing, thou flialt heap coal$
" of fire upon his head. Be not overcome of evil,
" but overcome evil with good." But though they
entertain no revenge againft their perfecutors;
their innocent blood calls for vengeance; while
their hearts pray for pardon. The righteous Judge
of the world will avenge the caufe of innocence, of
truth, and of his church. Vengeance is his, he
will repay.

They are faid to call with a loud voice, becaufe
at the period of this f-al, the year 311, the Chriftian
iihurch had iuffered fo much and io long, and was
thereby brought fo low, th^t it appeared, to even

the:

200 A COMMENTARY Ch VI.

the befl Chriftians, that it could not long furvive,
■unlefs heaven fliauld foo-i interpofe to puaifh and
crufli its enemies. Vt the fame time, (hey leave [he
time and manner of vengeance to the wife deter-
mination ol God only, fayuig, " How long I" This
vengeance flows from his holiuefs and truth, two
effenria! attributes of God, on which the Christian
depends, for the final \i:lory of the Chriftlan
church over all her enemies. Br caufe God is ho-
ly, he will runifh, in the fittelt time, thofe who
are polluted by fliedding inn-cent blood. Becauf^
God is true, and hath faid clearly and repeatedly,
in facred fcripture, that at the h^nd of every man's
brother, will he require the life of man, and that
w^hofoever fheddeth man's blood, by man Ihall his
blood be flied ; thofe (hall be puniflied by him
who have flied the blood of martyrs for the word
of God. Becaufe God is holy, becaufe he is true,
and hath promifed that the gates of hell fhall not
prevail againfl his church ; therefore, the kingdom
of God, which is righteoufnefs, fhall never be over-
thrown by all the policy and power of the devil
and of all his angels, whether fpiritual or incar-
nate.

The blood of the martyrs is to be avenged on
them that dwell on the earth ; that is, according
to the interpretation given of the earth in the
fourth verfe, on the people of Rome, the rulers and
citizens of that great empire. As we proceed in

this

Ver, 9, 10, ir. on the revelation. 2or

this book, we fliall find the fame expreffion uni-
formly and frequently ufed to fignify the Roman
people. On whom, in confiftency with the holi-
nefs and truth of God, ought their blood to be a-
venged, if not on that people who flied it?

The fouls of the martyrs cried. Doit thou not
judge and avenge our blood? This judgement and
vengeance do not refer to the final judgement,
when God ftiall judge all men as individuals, in
righteoufnefs, according to their works, and Ihall
denounce the irrevocable fentence of condemna-
tion on the wicked : But it refers to a public and
llriking approbation, in this prefent world, which
God fhall give to the Chriftian religion and all its
true votaries, in the courfe of his providential go-
vernment of the world, at a period about two hun-
dred years diftant from the prefent year; and to a
condemnation and overthrow equally public and
ItrikiMg, which he fliall then pafs and inflid upon
the Roman empire, in its laft form of government,
as guilty of the blood of faints, and a pubhc ene-
my of all thofe whofe rehgion is modelled on the
word of God.

This judgement and vengeance are mentioned
in chap. xiv. 6, — 8. xviii. 20. and xix. 2. in which
laft paflage it is faid of God, *' For true and righ-
" teous are his judgements, for he hath judged the
*' great whore, which did corrupt the earth with

Vol- I„ C c " her

202 A COMMENTARY Ch. Vf.

" her fornications, and hath avenged the blood of
" his fervants at her hand."

All thefe pafTages, as fliall be fhewn in the com-
mentary upon them, refer to that great and final
overthrow of the Roman empire, under its lafh head,
the papal one, which fliall manifeft the vengeance
of heaven on thatperfecuting empire, for the blood
of the fervants of God ; and which fhall be as it
were the paffing and publiihing this judgement or
fentence of God; that the religion which is taught
in the facred fcriptures is the religion from God,
and that thofe who have adhered to the bible as
the flandard of their faith, worfhip, and practice,
are the true worfliippers of God.

Until the fall of papal Rome, all the votaries of
Rome give their teftimony as witnelTes, that the
Roman catholic religion is* the true religion, and
that the church of Rome is the church of God.

Until that time, all real Chriftians give their tef-
timony as witnefles, that that is the true religion
which is taught in the facred fcriptures, and that
all thofe individuals, in whatever country or age
they live, whofe faith, worfliip, and obedience are
ftrictly modelled on the word of God, all thofe
whom the Lord knoweth to be his, and who nam-
ing the name of Chrill depart from evil, are the
church of God. Until that time the great caufe is,
as it were under trial. While the trial is going
on, fome are taking one fide, and others another, as

is

Ver. 9, 10, IT. ON the revelAtiok. 203

is the cafe in all trials, in which many are mifled
by their prejudices, paffions, or interefts, fome are
faying, that the witnefles for Popery are attefting
the truth, and others, that the witnelTes for the
word of God are atteding the truth. During all
this time, the fupreme and infalUble Judge, the
Lord holy and true, hath not given the public fen-
tence or judgement in the caufe : but at that day,
wdien pnpal Rome (hall be finally overthrown, and
when all the kingdoms of the world ihall become
the kingdom of our God, and of his Chrirt, the
judgement of God, fliall, in the courfe of divine
providence, be publicly pafled againft the king-
dom and church of Rome, and in favours of that
religion which is delineated in the facred fcrip-
tures. Then it fliall appear to the whole world,
and even to their keeneft enemies, that all true
Chriftians however perfecuted, and defamed as he-
retics by the church of Rome, were true witnef-
fes, fince the infallible Judge hath decided the
great caufe of religion exactly in terms of their tef-
timony.

It is in reference to this judgement, that du-
ring the whole time from the rife to the final 0-
verthrow of the papal kingdom, true Chrifiians are
called God's two witnejfes in chap. xi. of this book ;
and that the overthrow of papal Rome, and the
commencement of the reign of the Chriftian
church on earth is (tiled God's Judgement, as in the
C c 2 paflages

204 A COMMENTARY Ch. VI.

paflages already cited. The vengeance and
judgement therefore, which are mentioned in the
verfes now under our view, are that judgement,
which fliall be given in favours of that rehgion,
for which thofe martyrs fell, who were ilain for the
word of God; and that vengeance which fhall fall
upon that perfecuting kingdom, which flew them,
when all the kingdoms of the world Avail become
the kiugdom of Chrift ; and when the Roman
name, kingdom, power, and religion fliall be de-
ll royed for ever.

It is moft probable, that the Chriftians who liv-
ed about the time to which this feal refers, ima-
gined, that the time of this judgement was juft at
hand. But the anfwer given in verfe ii. telli
them, that their blood was not to be avenged on
the Roman people, until others, who might juftly
be called their fellow fervants, and their brethren,
fhould be killed as they were : but, in the mean
time, white robes fliould be given to every one of
them, and they fhould reft. This anfwer is a clear
prediction of the perfecutions of Chriftians by Pa-
pal Rome. Thofe who were to be flain, were to
be the fervants of God, as well as thofe Chriftians
who were flain by Heathen Rome ; they were to
be their brethren, fons of God as well as they
were.

This judgement and vengeance was not to come
upon the Roman people, until all thefe perfecu-
tions.

Ver. 9, 10, ii. on the revelation. 205

tions, which have begun long ago, under Papal
Rome fhould be fulfilled, that is, finifhed. The rea-
fon of this delay is obvious. Till then their ini-
quity was not filled up, and God does not deftroy
any individual, or kingdom, till their iniquity is
filled up. This judgement, as fliall be fhewn in
the proper place, is to deflroy the Roman govern-
ment, and for ever to blot its name from among
the kingdoms of the world; and therefore it could
not be brought upon it, fo long as one fervant of
God, whom that people were to flay, had not fal-
len by their bloody hands. But the martyrs, who
were flain by Heathen Rome, fhould reil in the
mean time. They fiiould be perfedly happy in
their departed and feparate fl;ate. They flioul4
reft from all their labours, trials, and fuflTerings,
and their works fiiould follow them. In the hea-
venly ftate, they Vv'ill enjoy all that pure and ex-
alted happinefs, which, when freed from every ex-
ternal inconvenience, and bleffed with every ex-
ternal advantage, accords to the nature of the
fpirits of juft men made perfe(51:.

They not only reft, but white robes are alfo
given to them. The white robes were given unto
them, ?,t the period of time to which this feal re-
fers. White robes, as was formerly fiievvn, are
the fymbol for the righteoufnefs of faints. Thk
is exprefly faid to be its fignification, chap. xix. 8„
Thefe martyrs were faidto be holy perfons, (faints),

l;)efore

206 A COMMENTARY Ch. VI.

before they were flain. True Chriftians knew them
to be holy ; but their perfecutors afperfed them
as enemies to the gods, and pefts to fociety. Hence,
when it is faid that white robes were given unto
them, the meaning of it is, that their characters
Ihall be cleared up, that their memory fliall be
held in great refpecl, even by the Roman people;
and by them, the greateft refpecl: fnall be paid to
their memories, as of faints who had fallen mar-
tyrs to the truth.

This predidion hath been mod exactly fulfilled.
In the year 325, Conilantine the Great, the firlt
Chriftian emperor, was veiled with the fole go-
vernment of the Roman empire. Under his reign,
the higheft refpedl was paid to the memory of thofe
martyrs who had been flain, for the word of God,
by his predecelTors, and even by his immediate
ones. Ever fince that time, the higheft refpecl
hath been paid to the memory of thefe martyrs,
by the people and church of Rome.

Whilft Papal Rome hath fulfilled, and ftill is ful-
filling, the one part of this prediction, by killing
the feivants of God, and the brethren of thefe
Chrillians, who were martyrs under the Heathen
emperors; flie hath fulfilled, and ftill is fulfilling,
the other part of it, by paying the higheft lionour
and refpecl to the memory of thefe martyrs. How
exadly does the conduct of Rome refemble that
of the Scribes and Pharifees, to whom Chrift faid,

Matth.

Ver. 9, 10, ii. on the revelation. 207

Matth. xxiii. 29, — 32, " Wo unto you Scribes and
" Pharifees, hypocrites, for ye build the tombs of
" the prophets, and garnifh the fepulchres of the
" righteous, and fay, If we had been in the days of
*' our fathers, we would not have been partakers
" with them in the blood of the prophets. Wherefore,
" ye be witnefles unto yourfelves, that ye are the
•* children of them who killed the prophets. Fill
" ye up therefore the meafure of your fathers."
Read alfo verfes 3^, — 38.

I cannot pafs over this feal, without making the
following obfervations. — This book was written by
John, about the year of Chrifl 95. I" that year
he foretold, in thefe verfes, that many martyrs
Ihould be flain by the Roman emperors, in the
Heathen ftate of Rome, that many fhould be flain
by Papal Rome ; and that whilft Papal Rome was
flaying the Chriftians, flie fliould exprefs the high-
eft refpect for the memory of thofe Chriftian mar-
tyrs, who had been flain by Heathen Rome. Thefe
prophecies have been fulfilled, and ftill are fulfil-
ling, in a moft exa6l manner, at the diftance of
many hundred years. The men who have been
fulfilling them, aft a part, the moft inconfiftent
and abfurd, whilft at the fame time, they a£t free-
ly, and without any conftraint upon their moral
powers. What can be more inconfiftent and ab-
furd, than for the fame fociety of men, at the fame
time, to pay the greateft refpecl, and even fome-

thing

208 A COMMENTARY Ch. VI.

thing too like religious worfhip, to thofe Chriftians,
who were ilain as martyrs for the word of God, by
the Heathen emperors, whilft they are flaying
Chriftians for the fame attachment to tlie word of
God ; Chriftians, who in every refpeft are the fel-
low fervants and the brerhreu of thofe martyrs
whofe departed fpirics they almoft adore? Of this
incunfiftency and abfurdity the church of Rome
hcith long been guilty. It is very difficult to de-
termine, whether their zeal for perfecuting the
living, or for canonizing the dead faints is the
greateft.

In thefe events broujiht about by the condud of
moral agents, in thefe events, which equally mark
liberty of will, and inconfiftency of conduct in thefe
agents, let us read the following important truths;
that John was guided by the unerring Spirit of
God, in writing this book ; that all things, even
thofe which are moft clofely conneded with the
conduct and intentions of moral agents are clear-
ly forefeen by God ; that God governs the world ;
that the foreknowledge of God, and his moral go-
vernment of the world, do not interfere with, nor
reftrain the moral powers of men ; and that the
very fpirit of prophecy is to give teftimony to Chrill
and Chriftianity.

Verfes 12th, 13//^, 14/^, 15/^ i6th, 17/^.—
And I beheld, when he had opened the fixth

feal.

Ver. 12, 13, &C. ON THE REVELATION. 209

feal, and lo, there was a great earthquake,
and the fun became black as flickcloth of hair,
and the moon became as blood ; and the ftars
of heaven fell unto the earth, even as a fig-
tree cafteth her untimely figs, when llie is
fliaken of a mighty wind : and the heaven
departed as a fcroil when it is rolled toge-
ther ; and every mountain and ifland were
moved out of their places : and the kings of
the earth, and the great men, and the rich
men, and the chief captains, and the mighty
]nen, and every bond man, and every free
man, hid themfelves in the dens, and in the
rocks of the mountains : and faid to the
mountains and the rocks, fall onus, and hide
us from the face of Him that fitteth on the
throne, and from the wrath of the Lamb :
for the great day of his wrath is come ; and
who ihall be able to (land ?

When Jefus opened tlie fixth feal, and rolled off
fo much of the book as was contained between
the 6th and 7th feals, John faw the following hie-
roglyphic painted upon it. He faw an earthquake
and a violent (term, which affedtcd both the earth,
fun, moon, and flars, and he faw the kings of the
earth, the great men, and the mean men, hiding

Vol.. I. D d themfelves

2I* A COMMFNTARY Ch. VI.

themfelves from it in the dens and rocks of the
mountains. By explanatory notes, it was fhewn,
that they were calling upon the rocks and moun-
tains to fall upon them, and hide them aot only
from the ftorra, but alfo from the caufe of it, the
wrath of him who litteth upon the throne, and of
the Lamb ; for they were convinced that the
great day of the wrath of the Lamb was come,
and that none fhould be able to withfland him.

In the fymbolical language, an earthquake al-
ways lignifies a revolution in the political and mo-
ral world. What more natural reprefentation
can there be of the changes, which a revolution
makes in the moral and political world, and the
violence with which they are brought about, than
thofe changes which an earthquake produces in
the ftate and appearance of the natural world,
and the violent and irreliftible manner in which
thefe are produced. In this book, we meet with
an earthquake, chap. viii. 5. xi. 13, 11, 19. andxvi.
1 8. In every one of thefe pafTages, as well as in
the one now under our view, it lignifies a revolu-
tion in the moral and political world, as fliall clear-
ly appear in the commentary upon them. The
fymbolical language is fb regular, and the meaning
of every fymbol is i"o fixed and determinate, that not
only this fymbol, but alfo every other one preferves
its proper meaning, wherever it occurs through the
whole book, which iliall appear as we proceed. It

may

Ver. 12, I3,&c. on the revelation. 211

may not be improper to obferve, that that unifor-
mity of lignification of the fame fy/mbol, which
runs through the whole of this book, is a ftrong
proof, that the lignification given to them is the
right one.

When the revolution is to be brought about by
wars and bloodfhed, then the earthquake is ac-
companied with a great ftorm, as it is in this hie-
roglyphic. In it there is a very particular enu-
meration of circumftances, which clearly point out
the nature and extent of this revolution, and the
perfons who fhall be chieliy hurt by it.

The violence of the wars, and the great efFu-
lion of blood, by which the revolution fliould be
brought about, are fignified by the fun becoming
black, the moon like blood, the liars of heaven fal-
ling to the earth, and the heaven departing as a
fcroll.

*' Every mountain and iiland were moved out
'' of their places." This revolution Ihall noi be con-
fined to the continent, the feat of empire alone ;
nor to one or many of the illands, which are its
provinces ; but lliall extend over the whole em-
pire, and all its provinces.

" And the kings of the earth, &c." — It was for-
merly fhewn, that in this book, the earth fignifies
the Roman empire. Therefore, the kings of the
earth are the Roman emperors. They, and all the
other defcriptions of men enumerated in verfe 1 5t*h,
D d 2 which

212 A COMMENTARY Ch. VI.

which .correfpond to the various defcriptions of
men in the Roman empire, from the emperors
down to the bond men or Haves, by which lafl def-
cription, the boafled hbcrty of Rome was difgrac-
ed, fhould be all fo terrified at this revolution,
that many of them fhould prefer death, even
when inflided by tlieir own hands, to a fubraiffion
to that great revolution. Tliey Ihould be afraid
of him that fitteih upon the throne, that is God,
and of the wrath of the Lamb, that is Chrill.

That great fuccefs which, at this revolu-
tion, fliould attend Chriftianity and Chriftians,
who had been perfecuted by them for a long-
time, fhould convince them that the great day
of Chrift's wrath was come, and that none of
his enemies fliould be able to Hand before him.
When they fliould fee Chriftianity and Chriftians,
who had been. perfecuted for above two hundred
years, by all the force of the Roman empire, and
m their opinion, deftroyed and buried, nevermore
to rife again, in lefs than twenty years revive, ex-
pel heathenifm from Rome, and reign over the
empire, they Hiould recognize the hand of God ;
but confcious of their' accumulated guilt, and of
the defperate wickednefs and hardnefs of their
hearts, they fliould, in defpair, whh for death, and
forae of them fliculd even inflict it upon them-
felves. 1 bey flTould then link into defpair, be-
califc they Ihould be convinced that it would be

impofhble

VeV. 12, 13, &C. ON THE REVELATION. 11^

impoffible for them to refift that divine power of
Chrift, which fhould, with fuch eafe, banifli hea-
thenifm from, and cftablifli Chriftianity in Rome,
in fpite of the united efforts of emperors, priefis,
people, civil magillrates, military officers, free citi-
zens, and bond flaves.

This.prediclion, in all its parts, was moll exa£l-
ly accompliflied in that great revolution, which
took place in the Roman empire, when it was
changed from Heathen to Chriftian, mider Con-
ftantine the Great, the fuR Chriftian emperor of
Rome. The great and various ftruggles and civil
wars, by which this revolution in the emph'e was
brought about, began in the three hundredth and
fixth year of the Chriftian aera. This was the ve-
ry year at which the events predicted under the
fourth feal ended.

The fifth feal did not take up any period of
time, as muft be evident from its nature, as alrea-
dy explained. Hence the events predicled under
this fixth feal, in courfe of time muft follow *clofc
upon thofe predided under the fourth feal. This
great revolution w^as completed in the year 325 of
the Chriftian sera, when Conftantme came to the
fole governme^nt of the empire, on the death of Li-
cinius. The various ftruggles and civil wars which
took place during thefe twenty years, the vexa-
tion, diftrefs, defpair,. deaths, and even felf-murders
of the Heathen emperors in that period, the extent

of

tl4 A COMMENTARY Ch. VL

of this revolution over the whole empire, includ-
ing all itsprovinces however diftant, the legal and
fpirited abolition of the heathen worfhip and tem-
ples, the legal eltablifhment of the Chriftian reli-
gion, the proviiion made for its minifters, and the
very great public countenance given to ^ hriftians,
through the whole empire, by the emperor Con-
flantine upon this revolution, are the moll; minute,
exact, and flriking accomplifhmentsof the predic-
tions under this feal. Were it not a fad quite in-
conteflible, that thefe predictions were written and
publifhed by John above two liundred years before
that revolution, the enemies of revelation, would
have been apt to have faid, that they were hiftori-
cal and not prophetical, having been written af-
ter the event.

The hillory of this great revolution is fo particu-
larly noticed by all the hiftorians of that period ci-
vil and eccleliaftic, and isfo generally,! had almoft
faid univerfally, knov;n, that it is unnecefTary to
tranfcribe much of the hiflory of that revolution,
and of the circumftances which accompanied it,
in order to prove their conformity to, and accom-
plilliment of the predictions under this feal. I fhall
therefore infert only a very few paiTages from the
hiftorians of that period. Mojheim, vol. i. page 106.
*' The divine providence, however, was preparing
** more ferene and happy days for the church. In
" order to this, it confounded the fchemes of Ga-

** lerius.

Ver. 12, 13, &C. ON THE REVEtATlON, 215

" lerius, and brought his counfels to nothing. la
" the year 306, Conftantius Ghlorus dying in Bri-
" tain, the army falut?d, with the title of Auguf*
" tus, his fon Conftantine, furnamed afterwards
" the Great, on account of his illuftrious exploits,
** and forced him to accept the purple. This pro-
" ceeding, which mull have flung the tyrant Ga-
" lerius to the heart, he was, neverthelefs, obliged
" to bear with patience, and even to confirm with
•* the outward marks of his approbation. Soon
**• after, a civil war broke out, the occafion of
" which was as follows : Maximian Galerius, in-
" wardly enraged at the el^dion of Conftantine by
" the foldiers, fent him indeed the purple, but gave
" him only the title of Casfar, and created Severus
" emperor. Maxentius the fon o£ Maximian Her-
** culeus, and fon-in-law to Galerius, provoked at
** the preference given to Severus, ailumed the
" imperial dignity, and found the lefs difficulty in
" making good this ufurpation, that the Roman
" people hoped, by this means, to deliver thera-
" felves from the unfupportable tyranny of Gaie-
«' rius. Having caufed himfelf to be proclaimed
" emperor, he chofe his father Maximian for his
" colleague, who receiving the 1 purple from
" the hands of his fon, was univerfally acknov/-
" ledged in that character by the Senate and peo-
" pie of Rome. Amidil all thefe troubles and cora-
" motions Conftantine, beyond all human expec-
tation.

2l6 A COMMENTARY Cll. VI.

" tat ion, 5iiade his way to tlie imperial throne.

Page i66. " At length Maxiniian Galerius, who
*' had been the author of their (i. e. the Chriitkins)
" heavieft calamities, being brought to the brink
*' of the grave, by a molt dreadful and lingering
" difeafe, whofe complicated horrors no language
•' can exprefs, publiflied in the year 311a folemn
*' edict, ordering the perfecution to ceafe, and re-
" floring fieedom and repofe to the Chriftians, a-
*' gainil whom he had exercifed fuch unheard of
" cruelties."

Pages 166 and 167. *' After the death of Gale-
" rius, his dominions fell into the hands of Maxi-
" mian and Licinius, who divided between them
*' the provinces he had poflefTed. At the fame
" time,. Maxentius, who had ufurped the govern-
" ment of Africa and Italy, determined to make
'* war on Conllantine, who was now mafler of
" Spain, and the Gauls, and this with the ambitious
** view of reducing under his dominion the whole
'* weilern empire. Conllantine apprized of this
" defign, marched with a part of his army into I-
" taly, gave battle to Maxentius at a fmali dillance
" from Rome, and defeated totally that abomina-
*' ble tyrant, who, in his precipitate flight, fell in-
♦' to the Tyber and was drowned. After this vie-
" tory, which happened in the year 312, Con-
♦' ftantine and his colleague Licinius, inuncdiately
*' granted to the Chriftians, a full pov/er of living

according

Ver. 12, 13, &c« on the revelation. 217

" according to their own laws an^ inftitiuions ;
" which power was fpecified ftill more clearly in
" another edidt drawn up at Milan in the follow-
" ing year. Maximin indeed, who ruled in the
" eaft, was preparing new calamities for the Chrif-
*' tians, and threatening alfo with deftruclion the
" weftern emperors. But his projeds were difcon-
" certed by the vidlory which Licihiiis gained o-
*' ver his army, and through diftradion and defpair
" he ended his life by poifon in the year 313."

Eachard, in his Roman Hijl. p. 550. fays of
Maximin. " In the eaft, Maximin revoked the li-
*' ))erties granted the Chriftians, makes war with
" Lieinius, but being defeated with great llaughter
" of his numerous army, puts many priefts and
" foothfayers to death as cheats. Not long after,
" as he was endeavouring to try the event of a fe-
*' cond battle, he was ftruck with a violent diftem-
" per, with intolerable pains and torments snl over
" his body, he wafted to nothing, became quite
" blind, and died raging and in defpair : confefling
*' upon his death bed, that all this wasbut a juft
" puniftiment upon him, for his fpiteful and viru-
*' lent proceedings againft Chrift and his religion.'*

Laclantius has thefe remarkable words, page 49.
*' Cum jam terrae marique perterreretur, nee ullum
'' fperaret refugium, angore animi ac metu, con-
" fugit ad rhortem, quaft ad remedium malorum
•'• qu^ Deus jn caput ejus ingeftit." " Nov/ when
Vox., h j£. e '- hgr

21 8 A COMMENTARY Ch. VL

" he was teruified both by fea and land, and could
" hope for no refuge from the vexation and fear of
** his mind, he flew to death, as to the cure of the
" evils which God had brought upon his head."
And fo taking poifon, he died in that miferable
manner. Is not this to call upon the rocks and
mountains to fall upon them, and to hide them
from the face of him who fitteth upon the throne,
and from the wrath of the Lamb ? Are not the
kings of the earth alTrighted and in defpiir ? iVlof-
heim Hijl. Vol. i p. j 70. " The joy with which
" the Chridians were elated on account of the fa-
." vourable edidts of Jonftantine and Licinius was
*' foon interrupted by the war which broke out
" between thefe two princes. Licinius being de-
*' feated in a pitched battle in the year 314, made
*• a treaty of peace with Conflantine, and obferved
*' it during the fpace of nine years. But his turbu-
" lent fpirit rendered him an enemy to repofe ; and
" his natural violence, feconded, and ftill further
" incenfed, by the fuggeftions of the Heathen
" prieils, armed him againft Conltantine, in the
" year 324, for the fecond time. During this war,
*' he endeavoured to engage in his caufe all thofe
" who remained attached to the ancient fuperfti-
" tion, that thus he might opprefs his adverfary
*' with numbers ; and, in order to this, he perfecu-
•' ted the Chriftians in a cruel manner, and put to
•* death many of their biHiops, after trying them

with

Ver. 12, 13, &C. ON THE REVELATION. 219

** with torments of the mod barbarous nature.
" But all his enterprizes proved abortive; for af-
" ter feveral battles fought without fuccefs, he was
" reduced to the neceflity of throwing himfelf at the
" vidor's feet, and imploring his clemency, which,
*' however, he did not long enjoy, for he was ftrang-
" led by the order of Conilantine, in the year 325.
" Afi-er the death of Licinius, the empire was rul-
" ed by Conilantine alone, until his death; and the
" Chriftian caufe experienced, in its happy progrefs,
" the effecls of his aufpicious adminiflration. This
" zealous prince employed all therefourcesofhisge-
" nius, all the authority of his laws, and all the engaf-
" ing charms of his munificence and liberality, to
" efface by degrees the fuperftitions of pa,G:anifm,
" and to propagate Chriftianity in every corner of
*' the Roman empire. He had learned, no doubt,
" from the dilturbances continually excited by Li-
" cinius, that neither himfelf, nor the empire could
*' enjoy a fixed flate of tranquillity and fafety, as
" long as the antient faperftition fubfifted ; and
'* therefore, from this period, he openly oppofed
" the facred rites of Paganifm, as a religion detri-
" mental to the interefts of the ftate."

c % CHAK

22© A COMMENTARY Ch. VII.

CHAP. VIL
t
VISION II.

Verfi ij}, A ND after thefe things, I fav*?
■^ -^ four angels (landing on the
four corners of the earth, holding the four
winds of the earth, that the wind fhould not
blow on the earth, nor on the fea, nor on any
tree-

The whole book was opened in the preceding
chapter, except fo much of it as was contained be-
tween the feventh feal and the end of it. A great
part of the book is contained under the feventh
feal, as fhall appear, when the whole hieroglyphics
contained under that feal fall to be explained.

As the ftate of the Roman empire, and of the
Ghriftian church, fliould be very diiferent in the
period of the feventh feal, from what it was in the
period of the fix preceding feals, the vifion contain-
ed in this feventh chapter, is thrown in between
the end of the fixth and the opening of the feventh
feal, as a kmd of interlude, in order to give us a
comprehenfive view of tljie ftate ^ the Ghriftian

church

Ver. I. ON TK£ REVELATION. 221

church during the approaching period of the fe-
venth feal, and to prepare Chriltians for the new
kinds df trials to which they Ihouid be expofed in
that period.

This viiion John faw, " after thefe things."
This vifion refers to events, vhich were to take
place in regular fucctin.-.n auer thofe predided
under the fix feals in the preceding chapter. And,
confequentlj, the firft of them w^as to commence
immediately after the eftablifliment of the Chrif.
tian church in the Roman empire, at the revolu-
tion under Conllantine the Great.

John faw four angels, (landing on the four cor-
ners of the earth. An angel, as was formerly
ihewn, fignifies any mefienger of God commiliion^
ed to execute any of his purpofes, in the govern-
ment of the world, whether that meflenger be one
of the heavenly fpirits, one of the fons of men, or
a particular event in the courfe of divine provi-
dence. In this viiion, they appear to be four men.

They ftand on the four corners of the earth ; that
is, their influence fuall extend over every corner
of the Roman empire. And in particular, they
{hall hold the four winds of the earth, that the
wind fhould not blow on the earth, nor on the fea,
nor on any tree. By this hieroglyphic, it is predic-
ted, that thefe four men Ihall be the inftruments,
in the hand of God, for preferving an univerfal
•elm and peace over the whole empire.

As

222 A COMMENTARY Ch. VII.

As the earth fic^nifies the Roman empire, fo the
fea, in the fymbolical language, lignifies a flufhuat-
ing and difTolved Hate of government. It figni-
fies a multitude of people like the drops of water,
which make up the fea, but like thefe drops not
connedled together, but eafily diflblved, fluduat-
ing, and frequently changing their places. We
meet with this fymbol, chap. x. i. and xiii. i. In
both which places, it lignifies a diflblved and fluc-
tuating date of civil government, as fliall be fliewn,
in the commentary on them, particularly on the
laft of them. This fymbol is ufed to flgnify the
fame thing by Daniel, chap vii. 2, 3. In this ver'e,
it fignifies, that though the Roman empire feemed to
be diflblved, as every government is, when a revolu-
tion is taking place in it ; thefe four men fliould
be the inftruments of bringing about and preferv-
ing a profound peace and calm in the empire, not-
withllanding the late diirolved flate of govern-
BQent.

Trees are the produce of the earth, hence they
flgnify the temporal interefts of the Roman em-
pire. The fame fymbol occurs, chap. ix. 14. and
there has the fame fignification. This peace fliall
be fo great, that none of the temporal intcrefts of
the empire fliall be hurt during its continuance.
This predidion was exadly fulfilled in that period
of the hiftory of the Roman empire, and of the
Chriftian church, which immediately followed the

revolutioa

Ver. t. ON THE REVELATION. 223

revolution that took place in both under Conflan-
tine. The profound and univerfal peace and calm,
which took place in the Roman empire, and among
Chriftians, commenced in the year 325, when Con-
ftantine the Great became fole emperor of Rome
and terminated in the year 340, wh^n the civil war
broke out between Conftantine the Second, and
Conllans, two of the fons of Conftantine. The
four angels who were the inftruments, under God,
of prefervdng this calm and peace, were Conitan-
tine the Great, who reigned over the whole em-
pire from the year 325 to the year 337, and his
three fons, Conftantine the Second, Conftantius,
and Conftans, who together ruled over the whole
empire, each of the three having his own particular
divifion of it, till the year v 40, when Conftantine
the Second loft his life. 1 he hiftory of thefe events
will fall more properly to be produced in the com-
mentary on the two following verfes, in which fome
other ftriking circumftances, in the hiftory of thefe
four perfons (angels) are predicted.

Verjes 2d, 3^. — And I faw another angel a~
fcending from the ealt, having the feal of the
living God : and he cried with a loud voice to
the four angels, to v^hom it was given to hurt
the earth and the fea, faying, Hurt' not the
&arth, neither the lea, nor the trees, till we

have

414 A COMMENTARY Ch. VIL

have fealed the fervants of our God in their
foreheads.

John, at the fame time, faw another angel af-
cending from the eaft. This other angel was
Chrift, as fhall be fhewn, after the other fymbols
contained in thefe two verfes are explained. —
Chrift had in his hand the feal ot the living God.
Paul gives an exad: and full defcription of the feal
of God, in 2 Tim. ii. 19. " Neverthelefs, the foun-
•• dation of God ftandeth fure, having this feal,
*• The Lord knoweth them that are his. And let
•' every one, that nameth the name of Chrift, de-
•* part from iniquity."

He wab going to feal the fervants of God in their
foreheads, with this feal. When the Haves, the
cattle, or any of the property of men are in dan-
ger of being loft, they imprefs their particular
mark or feal upon them, by which they may know
thtmto be theirs, wherever they may be fcattered,
or however much they may be mixed with thofe
which belong to other perfons. The fervants of
God are true Chrifcians, thofe who regulate their
faith, worfhip, and obedience, by the commands of
God, and not by the commandments of men taught
as dodrines. The application of this feal to Chrif-
tians, fignifies a fituation and time of danger, in
which they lliall be fo mixed among the fervants
of men, and of Satai^ that this leul of God fhall be

neceCary

Ver. 2, 3. ON THE REVELATION. 12^

neceflary to diftinguifh them from, and to keep
them from being loft among them.

The feal of the living God hath two inferiptions
upon it, which at once mark the real charader of
every true Chriftian, and hinder him from being
loft from among the fheep of God, however long
and far he hath wandered in the wildernefs. The
iirft is, " The Lord knoweth them that are his fer-
" vants." There never was, there is not, and there
never fliall be one fingle true fervant of God,
whom the Lord does not perfectly know to be his.
Their charatlers may be miftaken, or mifrepre-
fented by men, but whether they live in the buf-
tie of adive life, or in the moft lonely retirement;
whether they are of high rank, or are deftined to
move in the loweft ranks of life ; whether they arc
the citizens of this country, or the Haves of that ;
whether they live within the pale of this or that
particular church, the Lord will never miftake
their true characler, ov^'look one of them, nor
claim as his own any one who is not his in reality,
and on whom this mark is not to be tomid. The fe-
cond is, " And let every one that nameth the name
*' of Chrift, depart from iniquity." They all right-
ly believe in Chrift : They entertain thofe juft
views of him which correfpond to his real natures
and charader, and to the account given of him in
fciipture ; and they openly profefs that faith.
They gradually depart farther and farther, not
Vw. L F i fuim

226 A COMMENTARY Ch. Vlf.

from this or that particular vice oniv, butfrom e-
very thing that is iniquity or fin. They believe in
Chrift, and their faith does not make them conti-
nue in fin, but on the contrary, it makes them de-
part from iniquity. They depart from iniquity, and
their good works inilead of fuperfeding, flow from
and ftrengrhen their faith in Chvift. They make
perpetual progrefs in liolineis in this world, but
they arrive not at fpotlefs perfedion in it ; for while
they arc on this fide of the grave, they fliil feel
fome evil in themfelves from which they depart.
By the former mark their falvation is fure. None
can be finally loft, whom the Lord knows to be
his. It is not polTible to deceive the eled to their
final deftrudlion. By the latter, they are prepared
for heaven, they may derive comfort to themfelves in
this world, and in many inflances, may be known
to be the fervants of God by the difcerning part of
mankind. Through faith in Chrift, their iniqui-
ties are forgiven ; by departing from iniquity, they
are made meet for the inheritance of the faints in
liglit. From perceiving that in their ov^^n charac;-
ter, faith in Chrift is«<?onne6ted with a gradual de-
parture from iniquity, they have the beft grounds
to truft that they are of the number of thofe
whom the Lord knows to be his fervants. By con-
necting faith in Chrift v\dth holinefs of life, and
fuch a holinefs, too, as fully proves the neceflity of
a Saviour, and clothes them v^•iLh humility, fincei

they

Ver. 2, 3. . ON THE REVELATION. 227

they Hill feel fome evil in them from which to de-
part, and by conne£lin^ holinefs of life with faith
in Chrift, they afford the moil unequivocal proof
to the difcerning part of mankind that they are
the fervants of God.

Thefe fervants of God are fealed in their fore-
heads. They are not afhamed of their mailer, nor
afraid to profefs themfelves his worlhippers and
fervants. Their facred regard to the commands of
God, their firm faith in Ghrill, and their improving
holinefs of life, diilinguiih them from the men of
the world, the flaves of fm and Satan.

It was given to the four ang-els to hurt the earth
and the fea. It is thus predicled, that Gonilantine
and his three fons, who fhould preferve fo profound
a peace in the Roman empire, fiiould foon after hurt
the empire, and draw much evil upon it out of the
late revolution. But they are prohibited from
hurting the earth, till Chrill lliould have fealed the
fervants of God. By this part of the hieroglyphic,
the commencement of the period, when theChrif-
tian church fhould be reprefented by the fealed fer-
vants of God, is marked. — It fliould be in that time,
when the lliort calm in the empire under Gonilan-
tine and his three fons, (liould happen, that is, be-
tween the years 325 and 3, o. The termination
of the period is fixed, as Ihall appear in the com-
mentary on the 9th, and fome following verfes of
this chapter, to the commencement of the mille-
F f 2 niura

azS A COMMENTARY Ch. Vlt.

nium flate of the church, which, in its proper place,
fhall be fhewn to be the year of Chrift 2000.

The account given of the angel afcending from the
eaft, in the verfes now under our view, accords to
none but Chrift, and exactly correfponds to him,
whereby it is evident that this angel is Chrift. He
afcends from the eaft. Chrift firft appeared in the
eaft, in the land of Judea, and from thence the
knowledge of him and his religion travelled to the
weftern parts of the world. He commands the o-
ther four angels. There is no intimation of any
power delegated to him ; whilft they evidently
a£l in confequence of a delegated power : " to
" whom it was £-it}efi to hurt the earth and the fea."
He, as fupreme Lord and Governor of the world,
commands ; and they, as inferior agents, act fo far
as they are commanded, permitted, and empower-
ed. Even when Chrift appeared in human nature,
his characT:er as the divine Governor of the world,
was marked by giving his commands, not from a
delegated, but from an inherent, proper, and fu-
preme power. It was thus, that the manner in
which he performed his miracles, was diftinguilhed
from that in which the prophets and apoftles
wrought theirs. *' He feals the fervants of God."
Who, except Chrift, -could know all thofe who are
the fervants of God, who really do believe in him,
Sjnd who are careful to depart from iniquity ? Such

knowledge

Ver. 2, 3. ON THE REVELATION. 229

knowledge furpafTes all angelic, all created facul-
ties, and accords to divine perfections only.

From the hiflory of the Chriftian church, and of
the Roman empire, it clearly appears, that Con-
llantine and his three fons, who were the four
emperors, who preferved the univerfal calm and
peace in the empire, were the very four to whom
it was given to hurt the earth and the fea, and
who, in fadl, difturbed the peace of the Roman
empire, and of the Chriftian church. By his
well intended, but ill-judged munilicence to the
Chriftian church, and by thofe alterations in its go-
vernment,by which he brought it to a nearer refem-
blance to the civil conftitution of the ftate, Con-
ftantine the Great, laid the foundation of all that
huge fuperftru(5ture of the Roman hierarchy, which
was piled up under his fucceftbrs, and of all thofe
religious contefts, by which the peace of the church
and of the empire was fo often difturbed. The three
fons of Conftantine, afraid of tiie brothers and ne-
phews of the late emperor, and diftatisfted with
their own fhares of the empire, foon difturbed the
empire with hot civil wars, and bloody maflacres.
Thefe fads are fully authenticated by Mofheim,
Hijl. Vol. i. pages 170, 171. "After the death of
" Conftantine, which happened in the year 337,
" his three fons, Conftantine Second, Conftantius,
" and Conftans, were, in confequence of his ap-
*' pointment, put in pofteilion of the empire,

'' and

230 A COMMENTARY Ch. Vll.

*' and were all fainted emperors and Augufli by
" the Roman fenate. There were yet living two
*' brothers of the late emperor, viz. Conftantius
" Dalmatius, and Julius Conilantius, and they had
" feveral fons. Thefe, the fons of Conftantine or-
*' dered to be put to death, lead their ambitious
" views fliould excite troubles in the empire, and
" they all fell vidims to this barbarous order, qx-
" cept Gallus and Julian, the fons of Julius Con-
** ftantius, the latter of whom rofe afterwards to the
" imperial dignity, The dominions allotted to
" Conftantine, were Britain, Gaul, and Spain ; but
*• he did not poflefs them long, for having made
*' himfelf mafter, by force, of feveral places belqng-
*' ing to Conftans, this occafioned a war between
" the two brothers, in tJhe year 340, in which Coa-
*' ftantine loft his life. Conftans, who hud receiv-
•' ed, at firft, for his portion, lllyricum, Italy, and
" Africa, added now t'he dominions of the deccaf-
" ed prince to his own, and thus became fole ijaaf-
*' terof allthe weftern provinces. He remained in
" pQiTeffion of this vai^ territory, until the year
" 350. when he was cruelly aftTiillinated by the 01;-
♦' ders of Mdgnetius, w 'ho had revolted, and. declar-
" ed himfelf emperor. Magnetius, in his turn met
*' with the fate he defe.rved ; tranfported with rage
** and defpair at his ill fuccefs in the war aguinft
" Conftantius, and apprehending the moft terrible
♦' and ignominious death from the juft: relentmeot

•'of

Ver. 2, 3. ON THE REVELATION. S^l

" of the conqueror, he laid violent hands upon
" himfelf. Thus Condantius, who had before this
*' poflefled the provinces of Aiia, Syria, and Egypt,
** became in the year 353 fole lord of the Roman
•' empire,whichheraleduntiltheyear36i, when he
*' died at Mopfuerne, on the borders of Cilicia, as he
" was marching againft Julian None of thefe three
" brothers poITeffed the fpirit and genius of their
" father. They all indeed followed his example
*' continuing to abrogate and efface the antient fu-
" perditions of the Romans, and other idolatrous
" nations, and to accelerate the progrefs of the
*' Chriftian religion through the empire."

Pages 181, 182. "The rights and privileges of
" the feveral ecclefiaftical orders were, however,
*' gradually changed and diminiihed from the
" time that the church began to be torn with divi-
** lions, and agitated with thofe violent dilTentions
" and tumults, to which the elcdion of bilhor^ the
" diverfity of religious opinions, and other tilings
*' of a like nature, too frequently gave rife. In
*' thefe religious quarrels, the weaker generally
" fled to the court for protedion and fuccour, and
A' thereby furnifhed the emperors with a favourable
" opportunity of fetting limits to the power of the
•' biihops, of infringing the liberties of the people,
" anid of modifying in various ways, the antient
" cuftoms according to their pleafure, And in-
*' deed, even the bifliops themfdves, whofe opu-
lence

^32 A COMMENTARY Ch. VIL

" lence and authority were confiderably increaf-
" ed fince the time of Conftantine, began to in-
" troduce gradually innovations into the forms
" of ecclefiaftical difcipline, and to change the
*' government of the church. The firll fiep vi^as,
*' an entire exclufion of the people from all
" parts in the adminiilration of ecclefiaftical af-
" fairs ; and afterwards they, by degrees, diveft-
" ed even the prefbyters of their antient privi-
*' leges and primitive authority, that they might
" have no importunate protefters to controul their
*' ambition, or oppofe their proceedings ; and prin-
" cipally, that they might either ingrofs to them-
" felves, or diftribute as they thought proper the
" poffellions and revenues of the church. Hence
*' it came to pafs, that at the conclufion of this cen-
*' tury, (the 4th), there remained no more than a
*' mere fliadow of the antient government of the
*' church. Many of the privileges, which had
*' formerly belonged to the prefbyters and people,
" were ufurped by the bifliops ; and many of the
" rights which had been formerly vefted in the u-
*' niverfal church, were transferred to the empe-
*' rors, and fubordinate officers and magift rates. .
Page 182. parag. 3. "Conftantine the Great, in
*' order to prevent civil commotions, and to fix his
*' authority upon folid and ft able foundations,
*' made feveral changes, not only in the laws of
**' the empire, but ullb in the form of the -Roman

government.

Ver. 2, 3. ON THE REVELATION. 23J

" government. And, as there were many impor-
*' tant reafons which induced him to fuit the ad-
" miniftration of the church to thefe changes in
" the civil conllitution, this necelTarily introduced
** among the bifhops new degrees of eminence and
" rank." Then to the end of that paragraph are
enumerated the various ranks introduced among the
clergy at this time, viz. Patriarchs, Exarchs, Arch-
bifliops, Sue.

Pages 206, 207. *' No fooner had Conllantine
" the Great abohfhed the fuperftitions of his ancef-
'^' tors, than magnificent churches were every
" where eredted for the Chriftians, which were
*' richly adorned with pictures and images, and
*' bore a ftriking refemblance of the Pagan tem-
" pies, both in their outward and inward form,
** Of thefe churches, feme were built over the
*' tombs of martyrs, and were frequented only at
" ftated times, while others were fet apart for the
" ordinary alfemblies of Chrillians in divine wor-
" lliip. The former were called Marty ria, from
" the places where they were erecled, and the
" latter Tituli. Both of them were confecrated
" v/ith great pomp, and with certain rules bor-
" rowed moftly from the antient laws of the Roman
" pontiffs. But our wonder will not ceafe here,
*' it will rather be augmented, when we learn,
" that at this time, it was looked upon as an eflen-
' tiaJ part of religion to have in every country a;

'^ot. h G g znulritud^

234 A COMMENTARY Ch. VIL

*' multitude of churches; and hence the true and
" only origin of what is called the right of patro-
" nage, which was introduced among Chriftians
" with no other view, than to encourage the opu-
•' lent to ered a great number of churches, by giv-
" ing them the privilege x)f appointing the minif-
*' ters that were to officiate in them. This was a
" new inftance of that fervile imitaiion of the an-
" tient fuperftitions which reigned at this time ; for
" it was a very common notion among the people
" of old, that nations and provinces were happy
" and free from danger, in proportion to the num-
*' ber of fanes and temples w^hich they confecrat-
" ed to the worfliip of gods and heroes, whofe pro-
" tedion and fuccour could not fail, as it was
" thought, to be fhed abundantly upon thofe who
" worfhipped them with fuch zeal, and honoured
" them with fo many marks of veneration and ref-
" ped. The Chriftians unhappily contraded the
"i^me erroneous way of thinking. The greater
" the number of temples was, which they ereded
" in honour of Cbtift and his chofen friends and
" followers, the more fanguine did their expec-
*' tations grow of powerful fuccours from them, and
" of a peculiar intereft in the divine protedion.
"They were 'fo weak as to imagine, that God,
" Chriil, and celeftial inteUigcnces, were delighted
" with thefc m.aiks andtedimonics of refped, which
** captivace the hcaits of wretched mortals."

Vsvfes

Ver. 4, 5, &c. on the revelation. 235

Verfes /^th, 5th, 6th, yth, Stb. — And I heard
the number of them which were fealed ; and
there were fealed an hundred and forty and
four thoufand of all the tribes of the children
of Ifrael. Of the tribe of Judah were fealed
twelve thoufand. Of the tribe of Reuben
were fealed twelve thoufand. Of the tribe of
Gad were fealed twelve thoufand. Of the
tribe of ^''fer were fealed twelve thoufand.
Of the tribe of Nephthalim were fealed twelve
thoufand. Of the tribe of ManalTes were
fealed twelve thoufand. C f the tribe ofvSi-
meon were fealed twelve thoufand. Of the
tribe of Levi were fealed twelve thoufand.
Of the tribe of ifachar were fealed twelve
thoufand. Of the tribe of Zabulun were
fealed twelve thoufand. Of the tribe of Jo-
feph were fealed twelve thoufand. Of the
tribe of Benjamin were fealed twelve thou-
fand.

In thefe verfes, we have an account of the fer-
vants of God who were fealed. They are faid to
be of the twelve tribes of Ifrael. Ifraei was of old
the people or church of God. During the time
that Ifrael was the church of God,- the limits of
Jiis church were comparatively very contradled.
G g a Hence

236 A COMMENTARY Ch. VH.

Hence, Ifrael is the fymbol for the Chriflian
church during its comparatively contracted ftate,
previous to the millennium llate, when Jew and
Gentile fhall be brought into the Chriilian church,
and when all the kingdoms of the world Ihall be-
come the kingdom of our God and of his Chrift,
Rom. ix. 6. " They are not all Ifrael who are of If-
** rael." Rom. xxviii. 29. •' He is not a Jew,
•• which is one outwardly; but he is a Jevr, which
" is one inwardly."

That thefe twelve tribes, do not here fignify li-
terally the twelve tribes of Ifrael, but fymboiically
Chriilian churches, appears not only from the lan-
guage of prophecy, which is fymbolical; not only
from the conneclion of the following and preceding
parts of this vifion ; but alfo from this circum-
flance, that the twelve tribes, enumerated in thefe
verfes, do not correfpond, either in all the particu-
lar tribes, or in the arrangement of them, to the
twelve tribes of Ift-ael, among whom the land of
Canaan was divided. In that partition, Reuben
was named firfl, becaufe he was the oldeii. Here
Judah is named firft, becaufe the tribes of Ifrael
reprefentChriftian churches, and Chrift, their head,
and from whom they derive the name of Chriftian,
came of the tribe of Judah. In the partition of the
land of Canaan, Levi had no portion, exceptir.g
only the Levitical cities and their fuburbs, becaufe
Levi was towaitonthe altar, and to live by the altar.
■ " E'lt

Ver. 4, 5, &c. on the revelation. 237

But here Levi is mentioned as a tribe-, becaufe the
Levites, or priefts under the law, are the properfym-
bolicalreprefentatives of Chriftians, who are deno-
minated priefts unto God, and who look not for
a temporal, but a fpiritual inheritance.

As the two fons of Jofeph were ranked among
the tribes of Ifrael, in place of their father, and as
Levi is mentioned here, there would have been thir-
teen tribes, if one of the antient tribes of Ifrael
had not been omitted in the verfes now under our
view : But the tribe of Dan is omitted here. And
the leaving out of this particular tribe, ferves ftill
farther to confirm the interpretation given of this
fymbol. For Dan very early went in quefl of a
worldly inheritance, out of his proper diftridt ; and
apoftatifed to idolatry, as is narrated, with many
particular and ftriking circumftances, throughout
the whole xviii. chapter of the book of Judges.
He was therefore an improper reprefentative of a
Chriftian church, and rather a reprefentative of an
Antichriflian one, by his fondnefs for a woildly in-
heritance, and his pronenefs to idolatry. Of all
the tribes of Ifrael, only one is omitted ; and that
one had apoftatifed to idolatry. And though there
are fome fervants of Godfealed in every one of the
other twelve tribes, no whole tribe is fealed.

Twelve thoufand are fealed out of every tribe.
We are not to imagine,that the exadlfame number
of individuals ihall be fealed in every tribe or Chrif-
tian

238 A COMMENTA.RY Ch. VH.

tian church ; nor that the precife number of twelve
thoufand fhall be fealed in any one of them. That
number, like the other parts of the hieroglyphic, is
fymbolical. It is made up of the number twelve
niultiphed into a thoufand. Twelve is taken from
the twelve apollles, on whofe dodrines the Chrif-
tian church is built ; and the thoufand is taken
from the thoufand years, in which the fervants of
God (hall reign with Chrifl: on earth, chap. xx. 4,
6. which is the mdlenium ftate of the church.
Hence the twelve thoufand fealed ones are alhhofe
individual Chriftians in every particular church,
whofe religion is modelled on the dodlrines of the
apollles of Jefus, who, in fome degree, refemble the
purity of the worOiippers of God in the millenium
ilate, and alfoin the internal joys of religion, in fome
degree partake of their happinefs. They are thofe
perfons, who under God, are the inftruments, in e-
yery preceding age, of bringing about that ilate.
Accordingly, when the millennium ftate is introdu-
ced in this bookjthefe fealed onts again appear ia
the precife fame number of 144000, chap. xiv. i.
And in chap. xxi. 16, 17. the dimeniions of the
v»'alls and city of the new Jerufalem, the fymbol
of the millennium ftate, is made up of the fame
numbers, and refers to the fame perfons, as fliall be
fhewn in the commentary.

Thefe 144000 fealed fervants. of God, out of the
twelve tribes, fignify, th^t from the time in which

Chriftianitv

Ver. 4, 5, &c. on THfi revelation'. 239

Chiiftianity was eflablifhed by law, in the 'fourth
century, to the commencement of the millennium,
in the year of Chriil 2000, the true church ofChrift
on earth, fhall not be any one conftituted church
vifible to the world; but fhall confift of many in-
dividual Chriftians, whom the Lord knows to be
his fervants, and who naming the name of Chrift,
depart from iniquity, in many diiferent churches.
That this is the real ftate of the church of Chrift
during that period, is evident from fome follow-
ing vifions, as fliall be ihewn in the commentary
upon them.

Not only is the general number of all the fealed
ones mentioned; but ajfo, the particular number
of thofe who were fealed in each tribe. By this
minutenefs it is intimated, that not one real Chrif-
tian fhall efcape the notice of God, and that the
providence and grace of God fhall not be awanting
to a fmgle one of them.

This reprefentationof the church of Chrift during
this period, e5iaclly correfponds to what every can-
did and intelligent obferver of what palTes in the
world, muft perceive to be in fad the ftate of the
Chriftian church during this time. Since the
days of Conftantine, where has there been a vifi-
ble conftituted church, modelled in every part up-
on the divine ftandard of infpired fcripture ? Since
the firft three centuries of the Chriftian sera, no
fuch vifible conftituted church hjBkppcared ;

^|P and

^40 A COMMENTARY Ch. Vlt.

and the world hath no reafon to hope to fee ano-
ther fuch, until the millennium, when the king-
dom of God fhall come, and his will ihall be done
on earth, as it is in heaven. And where is the
Chriftian church, built upon the foundation laid
by Chrili and his apoftles, though the whole fu-
perftriacture is not, in every part, executed upon
the divine plan, in which there are not mahy indivi-
dual true Chriflians, many honeft and good men,
many whom the Lord knows to be his fervants, and
who name the name of Chrift, and depart from i-
niquity ?

Let this lituation of the church of Chrift give a
check to bigotry, and let it teach us mutual chari-
ty and forbearance. Let us diveft ourfelves of that
bigotry, which makes fome men conlider none as
Chriflians, except thofe, who are members of the
fame church or fed with themfelves. While fuch
men fay, " I am of Paul, 1 am of Apollos, I am of
" Cephas," let us fay, we are of Chrift. And let
us love with brotherly affedion, all who in linceri-
ty love our Lord Jefus Chrift ; though they and
we may be members of very differently conftituted
churches. Let the imperfedions, which are to be
found in every conftituted church, teach mutual
forbearance to them all. Let the many wife and
good individuals, which are to be found in every
one of them, teach us mutual charity and brother-
ly ufTeolijjgd^ Let us efteem and love every good

man.

'•

Ver. 9, lo, &c. on the revelation. 241

man. Let us regard as the fealed fervants of God,
all whom the Lord knows to be his, all who narne
the name of Chrift, and depart from iniquity, fo
far as we can know them to be fuch, in whatever
conflituted church they worfliip and ferve God. Let
the many imperfe^lions which Hill cleave to every
conflituted church in the world, and on account of
which there are fo many oppofing churches and
fe6ls in it, make us look back with refped on the
grand fimplicity of the Apoilolic church; and for-
ward with hope and exultation to that glorious
period, when in this world there fliall be one
fold and one fhepherd ; when all jaring and con-
rending churches and feds, not even the Jewifli
one excepted, having become of one faith, one
heart, and one way, ihall be included in one pure
univerfal, and triumphant church.

Ver/es ^th, loth^ 11 thy 12th. — After this I
beheld, and lo. a great multitude, which no
man could number, of all nations and kin-
dreds, and people, and tongues, ftood before
the throne, and before the Lamb, clothed
with whiie robes, and palms in their hands;
and cried with a loud voice, faying, Salvation
to our God which fitteth upon the throne,
and unto the Lamb. And all the angels ftood
round about the throne, and about the elders.

Vol. h H h and

242 A COMMENTARY Ch. VII.

and the four beafts, and fell before the
throne on their faces, and worfliipped God,
faying, Amen : Bleffing, and glory, and wif-
dom, and thankfgiving, and honour, and pow-
er, and might be unto our God for ever and
ever. Amen.

This fecond part of the thu-d vifion reprefents an
enlarged and glorious ftate of the Chrillian church,
which fliall fucceed immediately to the preceding
one reprefented by the fealed fervants of God.
Through the whole of this book the clofe fuccef-
fion of one event to another is always exprelled by
this phrafe " After thefe things," as in verfe ill.
" After this," as in this verfe,

In this hieroglyphic the fervants of God are
not reprefented as fcattered individuals known to
God in each tribe of Ifrael ; but as a great multi-
tude, which no man could number, of all nations,
and kindreds, and people, and tongues. They are
not mereiy known to God ; but they publicly
Hand before, that is, worlhip God and Chrilt. They
are viiible by their garb, their white robes. They
are no longer in a perfecuted ftate, or in a Hate of
warfare ; but they are in a ftate of vidory and tri-
umph ; for they have palms in their hands, the
fymbols of victory and triumph, and the fongs
which they ling are exprellions of triumph. They
afcribe their deliverance from, and vidory over

ail

Ver. 9, 10, &c. on the revelation, 243

all their enemies to the providence of God and
the grace of Chrifl. Then alfo all the angels, that
is, not merely the heavenly intelligences, but alfo
all the events in the providence of God by which
this glorious revolution in the church of Chrift hath
been brought about," fhall illuftriouily difplay and
ling the glory of the divine perfedions, efpecially
as exerted in the moral government of the world.
At that glorious period it lliall be fully manifefled,
that all thefe events in providence received their
direction from God, were brought to pafs chiefly for
the good of the Chrifhian church ; and that every
one^of them obeyed the divine appointment.

This glorious period fhall commence about the
year of Chriil 2000, and fliali continue for a thou-
fand years. It is particularly predicted and def-
cribed in chapters xx, xxi, and xxii. It is unne-
celTary, and perhaps improper, to explain that pe-
riod more fully in this place. For the vifion in this
chapter is only the general introdudion, in pro-
phetic language, to the two ftates of the Chriftiaii
church, more fully predided and defcribed in the
following parts of this book. The hrfi: part of the
vifion, that of the fealed fervants of God, is the in-
trodudion to the perfecuted and militant itate of
the church, which is fully predided in chapters
viii, ix, xi. xii. and xiii. And the fecond part, of
the innumerable multitude of all nations with
palms in their hands, is^the introdudion to the en-
H h 2 larged.

^44 A COMMENTARY Ch. VIL

larged, pure, glorious, and triuirphant flate of the
church for a thoufand years on earth, which is
predicled anddeicribed i . chap, xx, xxi, andxxii.
The commentary upon an inrrodu(5lion, hke anin-
troduclion itfelf, ought to be general.

Verfes lyh^ i^th^\yJj^ iSth, lyfh. — And
'one of the elders anfwered. faying unto me,
What are thefe which are arrayed in white
robes ? and whence came they ? And I faid
unto him, Sir, thou knowefl. And he faid
unto me, Thefe are they which came out of
great tribulation, and have walhed their
robes, and made them white in the blood of
the Lamb. Therefore are they before the
throne of God, and {crve him day and night
in his temple : and he that fitteth on the
throne fliall dwell among them. They fliall
hunger no more, neither thirft any more,
neither fliall the fun light en them, nor any
heat. For the Lamb, which is in the midfl
of the throne fliall feed them, and fhall lead
them unto living fountains of waters ; and
God fliall wipe away all tears from their
eyes.

One of the elders is introduced to explain to John
who are the perfons repreiinted by the innumera-
ble.

Ver. 13, 14, &C. ON THE REVELATION. 245

ble multitude clothed in white robes, mentioned
in verfe pth. Such explanations are frequent in

all prophetic writings, as keys to open them.

They are commonly made by fome perfon who
had appeared in a former vifion, or in a former
part of the fame vifion, who is introduced again
for the purpofe of explaining that part which is '
dark We frequently meet with fuch perfons in
th- prophecies of Daniel and Ezekiel, and alfo in
this book. Thefe perfons may be confidered ?s a
part of the fcenery of the vifion. This perfon is
one of the twenty-four elders who fat around the
throne of God, and who are the reprefentatives of
the people in the Chriftian church- In chap. v. 5.
one of thefe elders is alfo introduced, to give a piece
of very important information. Probably there is
fomething more than the mere fcenery in the in-
troduclion of one of the elders in both thefe places.
It feems to imply alfo in it, thdt in many of thofe
things which are dark, many private Chrifiians are
fully as ready as even the minillers of the gofpel
ar**, to underftand the myllerics, and to trufi. in the
primUes of rhe gofpel. Facl, 1 believe ^ hath of-
ten verified this obfervation ; and if it were for e-
dification, many good reafons might be ailigned
why it is fo.

The elder informs John, that thefe clothed in
white robes are thofe who had come out of great
tribulation. This the Chrnlian church may well

• be

24^ A COMMENTARY Ch. VII,

be faid to have done, when that happy period fliall
come, when after all her long and cruel fufFerings
under Heathen and under Papal Rome, flie fliall
enjoy, as a church, a Hate of great peace, purity,
and triumph after the fall of Papal Rome.

" Their robes are made white in the blood of the
" Lamb." White robes are the clothing of mar-
tyrs, chap. vi. II. White linen is the righteouf-
nefs of faints, chap. xix. 8. ,That righteoufnefs is
of two kinds. Fiift, the righteoufnefs of juftifica-
tion, by which the guilt of their fins is expiated,
and they are delivered from thofe punifhments
which are due to them for their fins, as offences a-
gainfh God their righteous Sovereign. And fecond,
the righteoufnefs of fanclification, by which they
are recovered from the depravity of fin, their na-
ture is renewed after the image of God, in know-
ledge, righteoufnefs, and true holinefs, and at laft
perfected; and they are freed from thoie internal
miferies, which are the natural confequences of mo^
ral depravity, and are qualified for enjoying in every
fiage of their exifience, that happinefs which ac-
cords to human nature in its reditude, and always
in a degree proportioned to the degree of their ap-
proach to that rectitude. Thefe two kinds of righ-
teoufnefs are infeparable in the character of every
faint of God. There never was a faint of God who
was not both jufiified and fanctified. A finner
who is not jufiified muft be condemned. And an

unfiinclified

Ver. 13, I4»^<^'- on the revelation. ciiy

iiniandified faint is a perfedt contradidion in
terms, Rom. viii. i. " There is no condemnation
♦' to them who are in Chrilljefus." But then " they
" walk not after the flefli, but after the Spirit,"
Titus ii. II, — 12. "The grace of God, which
" brings falvation, teaches lis to deny ungodlinefs
" and worldly lufts, and to hve foberly, righteouily,
" and godly, in this prefent woild,'* Rom. vi. i , i.
*' What ihall we fay then? fliall we continue in
" fin, that grace may abound ? God forbid : how
' " fliall we that arc dead to fm live any ionger
" therein?" Both thefe kinds of righteoufnefs are
iiacefl'ary for the enjoyment ofhappinefs. With^
out the former, man would be liable to the puniih-
ments which divine juftice would inflict upon him
as a linner againft God. Without the latter, he
would want the mental fenfes in their proper ilate,
for perceiving and enjoying the proper objects of
human happinefs. Both thefe kinds of righteouf-
'nefs the faints derive from the blood of Chrift. It
is by the atonement which he offered, when he
filed his blood on the crols, and died the jull for
the unjuft, that he might bring them unto God,
that he expiated their guilt, and took away their
fms, by the one facrifice of himfelf. It is by the
agency of his Spirit, the obedience of his precepts,
the obfervance of his ordinances, and the belief of
his doctrines, particularly the dodrine of that
great atonement for fm, which he made by his

blood,

248 A COMMENTARY CIl. VII.

blood, that the internal righteoufnefs of fandifica-
tion is begun, carried on and perfected in them,
1 Corin i, 30. " But of him are ye in Chrift Jefus,
" who of God is made unto us wifdom and righ-
" teoufnefs, and fanctification, and redemption,
verfe 31. " That according as it is written, He that
*' glorieth, let him glory in the Lord."

They ferve God in his temple. The taberna-
cle was the ftated place of public vvorfliip among
the Jews, fo long as they were in the wildernefs,
and in an unfettled Hate ; and the temple was the
Hated place of public worfhip among them, when
they were fettled in the land of Canaan. Hence
the tabernacle is the fymbol for the church of
Chrift in its perfecuted, unfettled, and wildernefs
(late, chap. xiii. 6. And the temple is that for
the church of Chrift in the ftate of purity, vido-
ry, and eftabliihment to which it iliall be raifed
during the thoufand years mentioned in chap. xx.
It is thus ufed chap. xi. 19. and xv. 8. This expref-
lion therefore is a plain declaration, that this part of
this vifion refers to that glorious ftate of the church
of Chrift. The fame is predided by all the follow-
ing expreilijns. The lubftance of all which exprcf-
fions, and many of the very fmie words we meet
with in the defcripdon of that ftate, chap xxi. 24.
and xxii. i , 2. to the commentary on which paflages
the reader is referred.

CHAP.

Vcr. I. ON THE REVILATION. ?4|^

CHAP. VIIL
VISION III.

Verfe \fi. A ND when he had opened the
^ ^ feventh feal, there was fi-
lence in heaven about the fpace of half an
hour.

The fixth feal, opened in chap vL 12, — 17. prCf.
dided the revolution, which took place in the Ro-
man empire, and in the Chriftian church in the
days of Conftantine the Great, and brought the hif-
torical events down to the year of Chrift 325,
What is contained in chap vii. is only an intro-
duction to what fcUjAS in this book, and therefore
takes up no rime in the hillorical events. Hence
the events predicted under the fevenih f-al, mud
commence at the time in which thofe predided
under the fixth one ended, >hich Was the year
325. The opening of the feventh feal introduced
the feven trumpers. Indeed the oprning of that
feal lays open all the fubfequent part of the fealed
book of Daniel's prophecies.

Vox.. L I i The

'i^O A COMMlNtAR? Ch. VIlI.

The book or roll which the Lamb opened was
fealed with feven Teals. As the fird fix feals have
been opened already, when the fevenrh is opened,
the vvhole book is laid open. Accordingly this
part of the book, which was contained between the
leventh feal and the end of it, is called an opened
book in chap. x. i, 2 as Ihall be (hewn in the
commentary ■ and it is reprefented in that chap-
ter as contciining all the fubfequcnt prophecies,
which are drawn out at full length in this book.

Here heaven is the fymbol for the church of
Chrift. It was formerly ihewn upon what princi-
ples it is that eatih is the fymbol for the Roman
empire, and heaven for the church of, Chrift. By
this fymbol, the church of Chrift is not only figni-
fied in this prophetic book, but alfo very frequenti-
iy in other parts of the New Teftament, Matth.
iii. 2. in the i 3th chapter of Matthew's gofpel, the
church of Chrift is ftiled the kingdom of heaven
no iefs than feven times. Sometimes in this book
heaven is ufed, not fymbolicdlly but literally, for
the heavenly ftate or eteroal manfions ofperfed:
and perpetual purity and blifs. W hen it fignifies
that itate, and when it figniii^s the church of Chrift
on earth is as eafil)- and cleaily known in this book
from the context, as it is in other parts of the New
Teftament, when the term kingdom of heaven
fij,nifie# the one of thefe ftates, and when it figni-
fies tiie other. Hence, by filence in heaven for a-

boiit

Ver. I. ON THE REVELATION. 2$t

bout half an hour, is figni^ed a very fhort time of
peace and calm in the church of Chrift. A day
is the fymbol for an year, as (hall be fhewn when
that fymbol occurs. Upon the principle of that
fymbol, ha]f an hour would be the fymbol for a
week. But here the time is not determinate and
precife. ifis not Md for half an hour, but nbout the
/pace of half an hour-, hence, without fixing the
time precifely, this fymbol reprefents it as very
lliort.

In the beginning of the preceding chapter a
calm in the earth, the Roman empire, waN predic-
ted. In this verie a calm, but a very fhort one in
heaven, the Chriftian church, is predicted. Tuis
fhort filence is faid to be in the church, becaufe
the peace and calm was to be fnorter in the church
than that which was to be in the empire; and alfo
becaufe the difturbances and contentions by which
this filence was to be in^^errupted, and which are
predided by the firft trumpet, are of a religious
kind.^nd in the church, This filence, or calm in
the church, took place when ConftantinetheGreat,
on the death of Licinius, became fole emperor, and
eflabliflied Chriflianiry in the empire in the year
325. But that calm was very fhort. For in that
very year the Arian herefy fo much dilhirbed the
church, that the emperor was obliged to call the
council of Nice, in order to put an end to thefe
I i 3 religious

^5* •*■ COMMENTARY Ch Vlll.

religious heats and contentions, which this council
attempted in vain.

Verfe 2 /.-And 1 iaw the feven angels
•which flood before God j and to them were
given fcven trumpets.

When the feventh feal was opened, the whole of
the roll or book from that feal to the eud of it
was rolled off: and John law drawn up )n it lev en
angels wiih feven trumpets, who introduce all the
following predidions m this book, as fhuli appear
as we proceed.

The feven angels to whom the feven trumpets
are given, lignify th- feven difpenfations ot divine
providence, predicted by the feven trumpets. A
trumpet is intended for founding an alarm, and
giving warning of approaching danger. This ufc
of the trumpet is univerfally known, frequently
occurs in fcripture, and is particularly mentioned
in £zekiel xxxiii. 2, — 4. " Son of man fpcak to
" the children of thy pe )ple, and fay unto them,
" when I bring the fword upon a land, if the peo-
" pie of the land take a man of their coalts, and
" fet him for a watchman. If when he feeth the
" fword come upon the land, he blow the trum-
" pet and warn the people ; then whofoever hear-
" eth the found of the trumpet, and taketh not

warning.

Ver. 2. ON THE REVELATION. 253

" warning, if the fword come and take hini away,
" his blood ihall be upon his own head." Hence a
trumpet is the fymbol of a public warning or a-
larm given to a people by their watchman.

Thefe angels flood before God, received their in>-
ftrudions from him, and confequently ivere the
watchmen for the fealed fervants of God. There-
fore all the feven trumpets fignify feven great and
llriking difpenfations of divine providence, in-
tended to give warning to the people of God of the
various dangers, arifing from the corruptions of re-
ligion, to which they Ihould be expofed during a
period which commenced fti the year 325, and
ihall terminate in the year 2000; at which lall
year their dangers fliall end, and their triumphs
ihail commence.

Ferfss 3^, /^th — And another angel came
and ftood at the altar, having a golden cenfer,
and there was given unto him much incenfe,
that he fliould offer it with the prayers of all
faints, upon the golden altar which was before
the throne. And the fmoke of the incenfe
which came with the prayers of the faints,
jilcended up before God, out of the angels
hands«

This

254 A COMMENTTARY Ch. VIU.

This angel perfumes with incenfe the prayers of
all faints, and prefents them unto God. This is
the peculiar office of Chriil as the High Prieft, the
Intercefibr and Advocate of his people with God
the Father. He offers incenfe with the prayers of
all faints ; but none, except a divine perfon, can
know all without exception, who are faints. Hence
this Angel is Chrifl, who, as their IntercelTor and
Advocate with the Father, prefents the prayers of
all true Chriflians before the throne of God. And
thefe prayers when prefented by Chrifl are ac-
ceptable t»God. I Tim. ii. 5. " There is one God
" and one Me4iator between God and man, the man
*' Chrift Jefus." Heb. vii. 25. "Wherefore he is
" able alfo to f«n^e them, unto the uttermoft, that
" come unto God by him, feeing he ever liveth to
" make intercelHon for them."

The trumpets are about to open up moH: alarm-
ing, enfnaring, and dangerous difpenfations to
Chrifiians in thofe great and deep floods of errors,
which were to be let loofe upon the world by the
Papal hierarchy, and by Mahomet. When we
confider the art, the authority, and power of
thefe two arch deceivers, we are apt to ex«
claim, that if pofTible they would deceive the
very ele6t. In this fituation Chrifl is repre:-
fentei as intcrceeding in heaven for every faint
on earth, without one fingle exception ; and it is
declared by this hieroglyphic, that, by their pray-
ers,

Ver. 3, 4, ON THE REVELATION. 255

crs. prefented to God by him as their IntercelTor,
they fhall be preferved, fupported, and directed
under that long train of trials. As Chrift faid to
Peter when he was about to meet with a great
trial, he fays here to all his faints when about to
enter on the long train of trials predided under
the feven trumpets, Luke xxii. 31, 32. "Behold
" Satan hath defired to have you, that he may fift
•* you as wheat : But 1 have prayed for thee, that
** thy faith fail not."

Verfes j;th 6th, — And the angel took the
cenfer, and filled it with fire of the altar, and
call it into the earth ; and there were voices,
and thunderings, and iightenings, and an
earthquake. And the feven angels which had
the feven trumpets prepared themfelves to
found.

Firecafl upon the earth fignifies a flame, or hot
contention which was to be kiradlcd in the Roman
empire. This contention was to be of the rehgious
kind ; for the fae by which it was to be kindled was
taken from the altar. This fire was taken from the
altar, and was thrown upon the earth by the fame
angel, who in verfe 3d offered incenfe with the
prayers of all faints, to intimate to us, that no flame
or contention can arife ia the world, or in the

church.

7SS ' A COMMENTARY Ch. VUl.

church, without the knowledge and permiflion of
Chrift, and that it cannot burn to a greater extent
or height than he is pleaied to permit it. This
flame was to kindle up events, which like the voice
of God in the awful difpenfations of his providence
ought to alarm and warn mankind, particular-
ly the faints. Events which fhould appear in
thundering and lightenings, that is, in violent
contentions, quarrels, and wars; and in an earth-
quake, that is, in a revolution. There are voices,
thunderings, and lightenings, to fhew, that during
this period there (hall be many warnings, conten-
tions, and wars. But there is only one earth-
quake, to fhew that that period ihall be clofed
with a great revolution. That fuch fhall be the
cafe fhall appear in the commentary on the fe-
ven trumpets. Jufl. when the religious flame
was beginning to burn in the empire, the firfi: of
the difpenfations predided by the trumpets was
approaching, and the reft were to follow in fucceC.
fion.

Ver/f jfjp — The firft angel founded, and
there followed hail and fire mingled with
blood, and they were caR upon the earth ;
and the third part of trees was burnt up, and
ail gicen grafs was burnt up*

The

Ver. 7. ON THE REVELATION. CL^J

The firll event in the courfa of divine provi-
dence by which Chriftians fhall be warned of their
dangers, and of the corruptions which were com-
ing upon the world, fliould be a violent and hot
contention, exprefled by the fymbols of hail and
fire. This contention, though of a religious kind,
ihould be attended with bloodfhed, for the hail
and the fire were mingled with blood. This vio-
lent, hot, and bloody religious contention was to
rage in the Roman empire, for the hail, fire, and
blood were caft upon the earth. Though the
contentions lliould be of a religious kind, yet the
empire fliould be as much engaged in them and
difl:urbed by them as the church fliould be. By
this fl:orm nothing was to be hurt but the trees and
green grafs.

In the fymbolical language, we frequently meet
with trees, grafs, feas, rivers, fun, moon, and ftars.
All thefe terms occur in this and the five follow-
ing verfes. When any of thefe fymbols are ufed,
they always fignify fomething which bears the
fame relation to the fyflem treated of that thefe
things themfelves do to this folar fyfl:em, of which
this earth is a part. For infl.ance, if the fyilem
treated of is the Papal hierarchy, all thefe terms
have a reference to it. In this fenfe they are all
ufed in chap. xvi. If again the fyftem which
is treated of is the Chriilian church, which is the
cafe here under the trumpets, then all thefe terms

Vol, L K k have

258 A COMMENTARY Ch. VIII.

have a reference to that iyftem. The trees and
the grafs iignify fomething in the Chriftian church,
which refemble trees and grafs on the earth. The
fame obfervation applies to the feas, rivers, the
fun, moon, and flars. This mode of exprelTion is
not pecuhar to the fymboJicai language, it is com-
mon to it wrth ail other kinds of language. If a
perfon inhabiting this earth mentions the fun, e-
very perfon hearing him immediately underilands
it to be that fun which is the center of this folar
fyflem, and never imagines that he is fpeaking of
fome one of the fixed flars, as the fun and center of
fome other fyflem. If he fpeaks of the moon, e-
very one underftands it to be the moon which is a
fatellite of this earth, and not one of another pla-
net. If a perfon writing of the kingdom of Bri-
tain mentions the king, every one underllands the
king of Britain and no other king; but if another
writing of the kingdom of France mentions the
king, every one underftands the king of France
and no other king.

As this ftorm was to deftroy a third part of the
trees and of the green grafs, it was to do very con-
. fiderable hurt to the Chriilian church, and to fpcil
its beauty. But it was not to do fo much hurt to
it as would have been done to it, had its fountains,
rivers, and feas been rendered unfit for drink, to
be failed on, or to nourifli the fithes, or had its
fun, muun, and flars been darkened. As trees and

green

Ver. 7. ON THE REVELATION". 259

green grafs are both very ornamental and ufe-
ful upon the earth, hence by the burning of
the third part of the trees and grafs, is pre-
dided, that this religious contention fhould fpoil
the church of much of her beauty, and of many
things of great advantage to Chriftians. The pre-
didiion by this hieroglyphic was exadly fulfilled in
the rife of the Arian herefy, and in the hot and e-
ven bloody contentions which for a long time
were kept up in the church and in the empire, by
this herefy. This herefy denying the divinity of
Chriit, was firft broached in the reign of Conftan-
tine the Great, by Arius a prefoyter of Alexan-
dria. It foon obtained many powerful votaries,
and occafioned fuch violent contentions in the
church and empire, that Conltantine the Great was
obliged toaflemble the famous council of Nice in
Bythinia, in the year 325, in order to put an end to
this controverfy. In this council, after many keen
debates aiid violent efforts of the two parties, A-
rius was condemned, and Chrifl was declared to be
confubftantial, (hfxowioi;), or of the fame eifence with
the Father; the vanquiflied prefbyter was banifhed
among the lliyrians, and his followers were com-
pelled to give their aiTent to the creed or confef-
lion of faith corapofed by tliis council.

The council of Nice did not put an end to this

herefy, as was expected. On the contrary, this

controverfy threw the church into hot, violent,

K k 2 and

1.6o A COMMENTARY Ch. VIII.

and bloody contentions, f<ir the fpace of near two
hundred years. During that time, the church al-
ways rejecled Arianifm ; but fometimes the vota-
ries of the Niccne creed, and at other times thofe
of Arianifm had the fuppoit of the empire The
party who had the countenance of the ftate at the
time, perfecuted and baniilied the other. The
hiftory of the 4th, 5th, and 6th centuries is full of
the violent contentions in the church and the em-
pire, excited by Arianifm. Thus Moflieim, Hiyi.
Vol. i. page 218, "But notwithflanding all thefe
" determinations, the commotions excited by this
" controverfy remained yet in the minds of many,
*' and the fpirit of dilTention and controverfy tri-
" umphed both over the decrees of the council,
" and the authority of the emperor."

Page 220. "After the death of Conftantine the
" Great, one of his fons, Condantius, who in the di-
" vifion of the empire, became ruler of the eaft, was
*• warmly attached to the Arian party, whofe prin-
" ciples were alio zealoufly adopted by the emprefs,
" and indeed by the whole court. On the other
" hand, Conrtantine and Conftans emperors of the
" well maintained the decrees ofthe council of Nice,
"throughout all the provinces where their jurif-
*' diction extended. Hence arofe endlefs animofi-
" ties and feditions, treaclierous plots, and open
*' acls of injuflice ^nd violence between the two
" cntending parties. Council was uilcmbled a-

" gaiall

Ver. 7. ON THE REVELATION. 261

•• gainft council, and their jarring and contradic-
*' ting decrees fpread perplexity and confufion
" throughout the Chriftian world. In the year
" 350 Conftans was affailinated, and about two
" years after this, a great part of the weftern em-
" pire, particularly Rome and Italy fell into the
" hands of his brother Conftantius. This change
*' was extremely unfavourable to thofe who ad-
" heredto the decrees of the council of Nice. The
" emperor's attachment to the Arians animated
*' him againll their adverfaries, whom he involved
" in various troubles and calamities, and obliged
" many of them by threats and punilliments, to
" come over to the fed- which he eileemed and
" proteded. Among thefe forced profeyltes was
*' Liberius the Roman pontiff, who was compelled
" to embrace Arianifm in the year 357. The Ni-
" cene party meditated reprifals, and waited on-
" ly a convenient time, a fit place, and a proper
" occalion for executing their refentment. Thus,
" the hiflory of the church under Conftantius pre-
" fents to the reader a perpetual fcene of tumulc
" and violence, and the deplorable fpedlacle of a
" war carried on between brothers, without reli-
" gion, juftice, or humanity."

Pages 220, 221. parag. 15. "Theodofius the
" Great raifed the fecular arm againft the Arians
" with a terrible degree of violence, drove them
" from their churches, enaded laws whofe feveri^

"ty

262 A COMMENTARY Ch. VIII.

♦' ty expofed them to the greateft calamities, and
" rendered throughout his dominions, the decrees
*' of the councilor Nice triumphant over all oppo-
" fition ; fo that the public profeffion of the Arian
*' dodtrine was confined to the barbarous and un-
*' conquered nations, fuch as the Burgundians,
*' Goths, and Vandals. During this long and vio-
" lent contell between the Nicenians and Arians,
*' the attentive and impartial will acknowledge
*' that unjuflifiable meafures were taken, and great
" excefles committed on both (ides. The elForts
*' of the Arians to maintain their caufe would have
" been much more prejudicial to the church than
^' they were in efFe6l, had not the members of that
*' fed been divided among themfelves, and torn
" into fadlions, which regardedeach other with the
" bitterefl averlion." Of thefe the antient writers
make mention of above feven, but they may all be
ranked with great propriety unto the three clafles
of the Arians, Semiarians, and Eunomians.

In the 6th century, Moflieim after having de-
fcribed the profperiry and the decline of Arianifm,
fays Hiji. Vol. i. page 306. " One thing however
" is certain, and that is, that from this period the
" Arian feci declined apace, and could never after
" recover any degree of ftabiUty and confiftence."

If we confider either the nature of the Arian
herefy, as a denial of the divinity of Chrift, or the
great, long, and. bloody cuntentions which it oc-

cafioned

Ver. 7. ON THE REVELATION. 263

cafioned in the church and in the empire, ; more
efpecially when we take both into view, it will ap-
pear an event of that magnitude which accords to
the dignity of prophecy. If we compare all the
circumflances of the hillory of Arianifm with thofe
of the predidion under this firft trumpet, we muft
clearly perceive their moft minute and wonderful
agreement. This was indeed a violent, hot, and bloo-
dy ftorm, kindled at the altar, which fell with ven-
geance on the Roman empire. Though the church
condemned this herefy, though none of its ordi-
nances were corrupted by it, yet its beauty and u-
tility were much marred by it Ghriftians had
much reafon to be alarmed, when men calling
themfelves Chridians, Jude verfe 4th, " denied the
•' only Lord God and our Lord Jefus Chrift." And
2 Pet. ii. I. " denied the Lord that bought them."
When councils filling themfelves Chriftians, pafled
decrees directly oppolite to, and pcrfedlly incon-
liftent vv'ith each other; and when even thofe
who called themfelves the votaries of the gofpel of
peace, avowedly perfecuted for confcience fake.

Verfes Sth, gth. — And the fecond angel
founded, and as it were a great mountain
burning with fire, was cafh into the fea, and the
third part of the fea became blood : and the
third part of the creatures which were in the

fea,

264 A COMMENTARY Ch. VIII,

fea, and had life died ; and the third part of
the fliips were deflroyed.

A mountain, becaufe of its eminence above the
furroundingvallies, is the fymbol for a king. Thus
the king of Babylon is reprefented by a mountain,
Jeremiah li. 25. "Behold I am againft thee, O de-
" ftroying mountain, faith the Lord which deflroyed
" all the earth; Zechariah iv. 7. " Who art thou
" O great mountain ? Before Zerubabel thou fhalt
" become a plain."

This mountain is burning with fire, to fignify
that the king fhall be furioufly enraged. This
burning mountain is caft into the fea ; by which
the fea is fo corrupted and blocked up, that a great
proportion of the creatures which are in the fea
die, and many of the fhips which fail on it are
wrecked.

Though the fea has another figniiication, when
ufed individually and abfolutely, as in chap. x. 2.
xiii. I. which fhall be fliewn in the commentary on
thefe verfes, yet when taken relatively as a part of
a fyftem, as it is here and in chap. xvi. 3. it iigni-
fies fomething in that fyltem which bears fuch a
relation to the fyilem, and is of fuch ufe to the in-
habitants of it, as the fea on this earth bears to the
earth, and is of ufe to its inhabitants. The fame
pbfervation applies in this chapter and in chap.

xvi.

Ver. 8, 9. ON the revelation". 265

xvi. alfo to rivers, fountains of water, fun, moon,-
and ftars. The fyftem to which the trumpets re-
late, is the Chriflian church. Seas are of ufe to
the inhabitants of the different countries on this
earth, to import into them foreign goods and ad-
vantages, and to export to other countries the
commodities which their own produce. The plain
meaning of this hieroglyphic therefore is, that the
fecond alarm which fllall be given to Chriftians,
is that, after the rife of the Arian herefy, an
emperor of Rome fhall deprive the Chriftian
church of a great part of thofe advantages
which are of a foreign kind. Thefe, for in-
fiance, are what the church enjoys from the coun-
tenance and fupport of the civil magiftrate, from
human learning and philofophy, and from the faci-
lity with which, by means of thefe, it propagates
thofe dodrines, precepts, and ordinances which are
peculiarly its own, (as it were its own produce), to
diflant countries.

The event predided under the fuft trumpet,
commenced in the year 325. The one piedicted
under this fecond one, mull therefore fall at
fome fhort diflance of time poflerior to that
year.

Though the event piedicled under the firil
trumpet commenced in the year 325, it did not
terminate till the lixth century. The events pre-
dided by the trumpets follow each other in regu-

YoL. I. LI kr

266. A COMMENTARY Ch. VIII,

lar fucceflion, in refped of the times of their com-
mencement; though, as to the times of their termi-
nation, former trumpets frequently run many years
beyond the time of the commencement of follow-
ing ones. This is very different from the rule of
fuccefiion of the events predicled by the feals.
Thofe predided by every fubfequent feal, always
commenced after the termination of thofe predic-
ted by the preceding one. The reafon of this
difference is evidently founded in the nature of the
fymbolical language. When a feal is opened, all
that is contained in that part of the roll, which ex-
tends from that to the following feal, is laid open.
Hence, the opening of the following one muft un-
fold events pollerior to the lall of thofe which
were contained under the preceding feal. But a
trumpet is the fymbol of alarm ; and an alarm is
given not at the termination, but at the firlt ap-
pearance of danger. If therefore one alarming e-
vent commences before another, though the firfl
fliould be of a much longer duration, and ihould
not terminate fo foon as the fecond ; yet as the a-
larni was firft given by the one which commences
lirft, it is predided by the lirft trumpet : And if,
before this event is ended, another alarming e-
vent unconneded with it commences, this is pre-
dided by a fecond trumpet.

This fymbolical fignilication qI 2. trumpet, as giv-
ing an alarm at the commencement or firft ap-
pearance

Ver. 8, 9. ON the revelation. 267

pearance of every new danger, even when the pre-
ceding dangers are not fully removed, is exadly
ccrrefpondent to the founds of alarm, which a
watchman fet to watch a city or camp gives, by
blowing his trumpet. From this ufe of the trum-
pet this fymbol is taken. The centinel fet to
watch a befieged city, upon perceiving the ap-
proach of one detachment of the enemy's forces,
immediately founds an alarm. He does not wait
till that detachment have executed the purpofes
for which they were approaching the city. If he
did, neither he nor his trumpet could be of any
ufe to the befieged citizens.

At the firfl found of his trumpet, the citizens
take the alarm, many of them fally out and engage
the detachment of the enemy. In the mean time,
while they are engaged, the centinel perceives a
fecond detachment of the enemy approaching the
city, by another road; he blows his trumpet a fecond
time, the citizens are roufed by the fecond alarm, and
without waiting the end of the battle between the
firft detachment of the enemy and their fellow ci-
tizen:, a fecond divifion of them fallies out, attacks
the fecond detachment of the enemy, and probably
repulfes it, before the engagement with the fit fl di-
vifion is ended. By attending to this obfervation,
we fhall perceive the reaibn why the events predic-
ted by the tmmpets follow each other, in refpecl
of their commencement, not of their termination.
L 1 2 As

2 68 A COMMENTARY Cb. VUI.

As we proceed, we fliall find this to be uniformly
the cafe with all the trumpets.

The alarming event to the Chriftian«;, which this
fecond trumpet predicts, is the apoftacy ofthe empe-
ror Julian, and the coiifequences of that apoflacy.
In the year 38 i, Julian was declared fole emperor
of the whole Roman empire, on the death of Con-
ftantias, the laft of the fons of Conilantine the
Great. Though he had been educated in the prin-
ciples of Chriilianity, he apoftatifed from that reli-
gion, and employed all his efforts to reftore the ex-
piring fuperftitions of Polytheifai. He not only
deprived the Chrlflians of their civil eflablifliment,
but he alfo hindered them froni teaching philofo-
phy and the liberal arts, that thus he might bury
Chriftianity in the grofs ignorance of its vota-
ries.

Thus a prince or king raged againfl Chriilians,
as reprefented by a burning mountain. Thus
the mountain was caft into the fea, when, by the
fall of ih'u apoftate emperor from the Chrillian
faith, Chriilians were deprived of a great propor-
tion of their foreign advantages. x\ll the advan-
tages which aiife to Chriftiuns from a civil eilab-
liflunent, and from the knowledge of philofopby
and of the liberal arts, however valuable when
rightly ufed, are only foreign advantages. Chrii-
tianit^ in its purity, can exilt v.ithout them; and,
without them, Chriilians can enjoy the peculiar

and

Ver. 8, 9, ON the revelation. 26g

and native advantages of that divine religion. De-
prived of thefe, however, Chriftians have it not fo
much in their power to propagate their rehgion
to diftant countries. Thefe external advantages
are the feas to them, by which foreign commerce
is carried on.

The account which Mofheim gives of this event
correfponds with the moil minute exa(5lnefs to the
hieroglyphic under this fecond trumpet.

MoJJmm Hijl. Vol. i. pages 171, 172. " This
" flourifliing progrefs of the Ghriftian religion was
** greatly interrupted, and the church reduced to
" the brink of deftrucftion, when Julian the fon of
*' Julius Conflantius, and the only remaining
*' branch of the imperial family ^ was placed at the
'* head of affairs. This aclive and adventurous
*' prince, after having been declared emperor by the
** army in the year 380, in confequence of his ex-
" ploits among the Gauls, was, upon the death of
*■ ConftantiuSjthe year following, confirmed in the
'• undivided pofTeffion of the empire. No event
*' could be lefs favourable to the Chriftians. For
'• though he had been educated in the principles
" of Chriftianity, yet he apoilatifed from that di-
" vine religion, and employed all his efforts to re-
" flore the expiring fu perditions of Polytheifm to
" their former vigour, credit, and luflre. This ap.-)-
" ftacy of Julian from the gofpel of Chrift to the
'' worfhipof the gods,was owing partly to his averfion

to

270 A COMMENTARY Ch. VIlI.

" to the Conftantine family, who had imbrued their
" hands in the blood of his father, brother and kinf-
" men; and partly to tlie artifices of the Platonic
** philofophers, who abufed his credulity, and flat-
" tered his ambition, by fiditious miracles and pom-
" pons predidlions. It is true, this prince feemed a-
" verfe to the ufe of violence in propagating fuperfti-
" tion, and fuppreffingthe truth; nay, he carried the
" appearances of moderation and impartiality fo far,
" as to allow his fubje(fis a full power of judging for
" themfelves in religious matters, and of worfliip-
" ping the Deity in the manner they thought moll
"rational. But, under this mafk of moderation.
" he attacked Chriftianity with the utmoft bitter-
" nefs, and, at the fame time, with the mod con-
" fummate dexterity. By art and llratagem, he
" undermined the church; removing the privileges
" that were granted to Chrillians, and their fpiri-
" tual rulers; fliutting up the fchools in which they
" taught philofophy and the liberal arts ; encou-
" raging the fedaries and fchifmatics, who brought
" di{l:onour upon the gofpel b}'- their divifions ;
*' compoiing books againll the Chriftians; and uf-
" fing a variety of other means to bring the reli-
" gionofjefus to ruin and contempt. Julian ex-
*' tended his views yet fcirther, and was meditating
*' projeds of a itill more formidable nature againft
" the Chriftian church ; which would have felt,
" no doubt, the ftital and ruinous effeds of his in-

'• veterate

Ver. 8, 9' on the revelation. 271

*• veterate hatred, if he had returned vidorious
" from the Perfian war which he entered to imme-
" diately after his acceffionto the empire,"

The apoftacy of Jdian, with its confequences to
Chriftians, was an event of that magnitude which
accords to the dignity of prophecy ; and by which
the Chriliian church had good reafon to be alarm-
ed. The Chriftian church had been ellabhfhed by
law, for above fifty years, under the reigns of Con-
Itantine the Great and his three fons. It had en-
joyed not only protedtiori and civil eftablifhment,
but many privileges had been lavifhed upon it with
a profufe hand, by thefe emperors. During that pe-
riod, itis natural tofuppofe, that the Chriftians con-
cluded that the emperors fliould ever after proted
and countenance the church. When therefore the
emperor Julian not only withdrew his prote6iion,
but apoftatized from, and oppreffed the Chriftian
church, they would have been apt to have funk into
defpaif; and many of them might have been temp-
ted to have abandoned that church which they faw
abandoned, and again perfecuted by the lords of
the world, had it not been for the prediction of
the apoftacy of Julian, and its confequences, by
this trumpet. That event, as the accomplijljment of
this prediction, inftead of fliaking their faith and
patience, tended to ftrengthen and confirm them
both. It ferved to teach them that the revolu-
tions of empires are forefeen and overruled by that

God,

2^2 A COMMENTARY Cll. Vll.

God, who protedls truth and true rehgion ; that
the church of Chrift is not to depend upon civil e-
llablifliments for its exiflence, or even its profperi-
ty ; — that thefe fliall rife or fall as the purpofes of
the Hate, the policy of the rulers, or circumftances
often more fecret than the greateft of thefe fecrets
diredt ; while the church of Chrift, fupported by that
Being by whom kings reign, fliall ftand immove-
able as on a rock.

Verfes i oth, 1 1 th, — And the third angel
founded, and there fell a great ftar from hea-
ven, burning as it were a lamp, and it fell u-
pon the third part of the rivers, and upon the
fountains of waters : and the name of the
ftar is called Wormwood : and the third part
of the waters became wormwood, and many
of the men died of the waters, becaufe they
were made bitter.

The third great event by which the Chriftian
church ftiould be alarmed, is predicled by a great
ftar faUing from heaven. It was formerly fliewn,
that a ftar is the fymbol for a minifter of religion.
In chap. i. iq. it is exprefly faid, *' the feven ftars
" are the angels (i. e. minifters) of the feven
*' churches."

This

Ver. IQ, II, ON THE REVELATION. 273

This ftar is a great one, that is^ a minifter of reli-
gion highly elevated above others by his greatnefs.
This itar fell from Ifeaven, that is, from the church
of Chrift. He did not fall unto the earth, (the
B-oman empire), like the ftar chap, ix, i. but he
fell upon the rivers and fountains of waters. He
difturbed and interrupted that mutual, beneficial,
and comfortable incercourfe which different focie-
ties of Chrillians, in different parts of the Chriftian
church, had kept up with on^ another before his
fall, and he rendered the inftitutions of religion
hurtful to many of them.

Though this ftar fell fromheaATen, it did not lofe
its light. It burned as a lamp. It flione with a
greater blaze after, than it had done before its fall.
But its light, and thefource of its light, were very
different after its fall from what they had been be-
fore it. When a ftar in heaven, its light was de-
rived frc^m the fun, the fountain of light ; and
though its blaze was not fo great, its light was
much more pure, fteady, and extenfive. When fal-
len, its light was derived from a lire kindled on
this earth ; and, though its blaze was greater, like
that of a lamp, its light extended to a fmall dif-
tance only, and did not reach to heaven.

Though this diltinguifhed minuter of religion

was to lofe, by his fall, that genuine luflre of truth,

virtue, purity, and fimplicity, which the miniflers

^f the gofpef derive from Chrift, the Sun of righ-

M m teoufriefsy

274 A COMMENTARY Ch. VIIL

teoufnefs, the fountain of truth and purity ; yet he
was to fhine with that outward fhew of worldly
pomp, grandeur, and power, which is derived from
the vanity of this world, and which ftrikes world-
ly minded men with much more force than truth,
virtue, and Hmplicity of manners can do.

This ftar was called Worinwood. This is a ftirub
very bitter to the tafte, which communicates its
bitternefs to water, when it is infufed in it. It is
thus predided that the contentions ftirred up by
this fallen illuftrious minifter, fhould caufe fuch
bitternefs among different congregations of Chrif-
tians, as fhould deftroy, in many who bore the
Chriftian name, that love of truth, fupreme attach-
ment to Chrirt, fupreme love of God, fincere and
affedionate love of one another, which is the very
life of Chriftian s.

*' Many men died of the waters.'* In this book,
faints are diltinguilhed from vien, and from them
who dwell on the earth. Saints always fignify real
Chriftians ; they that dwell on the earth, citizens of
Rome ; and men, the men of the world at large.
The contentions to be ftirred up by this fallen tni-
nifter, fhould be of fuch a nature, as fliould not
pervert and deftroy real Chriftians, but as fhould
•hmder many profefhng Chriftians from learning
true religion, ard thus fliould kill them with fpi-
ritUcii death. And the contentions fliould run fo

high

Ver. 10, I r. ON THE REVELATION. 275

high, as to bring on wars, and even temporal dtath^
upon men.

This trumpet foretold, and was moft exadlly ful-
filled in the ambition, worldly power, and pre-
eminence of the bifhop of Conftantinople, and t^he
bitter confequences of that ambition. The ambi-
tion of this bifhop kindled up a hot contention be-
tween the eaftern and weftern bifliops, which ftir-
red up wars between them, and at laft entirely
feparated the eaftern from the weftern church.

This is the greateil feparation which ever took
place in the church, and it hath continued for the
greateft length of time. It took its rife, not from any
religious differences, but from the ambition of the
bifliops of Conftantinople and of Rome. Each
laid claim to fupremacy, neither would yield to the
other ; the eallern bifhops adhered to the bifhop
of Conftantinople, and the weftern to the bifhop
of Rome -, a feparation therefore of the eaftern and
weftern church v/as inevitable.

All the particulars of this predidlion are exatStly
accompli/lied, in the hiftory of the ambition of the
bifliop of Conftantinople, and of the feparation of
the eaftern, or Greek church, from the weftern, or
Latin church. This biftiop began to fall from the
purity of a minifter of Chrift's religion, very foon
after the apoftacy of Julian, which was predicled
by the preceding trumpet, a«d in the fame year

381.

M m s Of

276 ,^ A COMMENTARY Ch. VI IT,

Of this great event, Moflieim thus writes, Hifi.
Vol. I. page 185. " Accordingly, in a council held
*' at Conftantinople, in the year 381, by the au-
" thority of Theodofius the Great, the bifhop of
*' that city was, during the abfence of the bifhop of
" Alexandria, and againft the confent of the Ro-
" man prelate, placed by the third canon of that
" council, in the firfl rank after the biihop of
" Rome ; and confequently above thofe of Alexan-
" dria and Antioch. Nedarius was the firft bi*
" fliop, who enjoyed thefe new honours accumu-
■" lated upon the fee of Conftantinople. "

Page ib6. "This fudden revolution in the ec-
" cleliaftical government, and this unexpe6led pro-
*' motion of the biftiop of Byzantium (the antient
" name of Conftantinople) to a higher rank, to the
" detriment of other prelates of the firft eminence
*' in the church, were productive of the moft dif-
" agreeable effeds. For this promotion not only
" filled the bifnops of Alexandria with the bitter-
*' eft averfion to thofe of Conftantinople, but alfo
" excited tliofe deplorable contentions and dif-
" putes between thefe latter and the Roman pbn-
" tiffs, which were carried on for many ages with
" fuch Various fuccefs, and concluded at length in
" the entire feparation of the Latin and Greek
" churches."

Page 242. " To thefe lamentable evils were ad-
*:' ded the ambitious quarrels and the bitter animo-

" fities

Ver. lO, II. ON THE REVELATION. 2-^7

" fities that arofe among the patriarchs themfelves.
*' and which produced the mofl bloody wars, and
" the mofl deteftable and horrid crimes. The pa-
»' triarch of Conflantinople diftinguilhed himfelf in
" thefe odious contefts. Elated with the favour
" and proximity of the imperial court, he call a
" haughty eye on all fides, where any obje6ls were
*' to be found on which he might exercife his lord-
" ly ambition. On the one hand, he reduced un-
*' der his jurifdiclion the patriarchs of Alexandria
" and Antioch, as prelates only of the fecond or-
" der ; and, on the other hand, he invaded the dio-
*' cefe of the Roman pontiff, and fpoiled him of fe-
*' veral provinces."

Verfes iith^ i^ih. — -And the fourth angel
founded, and the thirds part of the fun was
fmltten, and the third part of the moon, and
the third part of the flars ; fo as the third part
of them was darkened, and the day fhone not
for a third part of it, and the night likewife.
And I beheld, and heard an angel flying
through the midft of heaven, faying with a
loud voice, Wo, wo, wo, to the inhabiters of
the earth, by reafon of the other voices of the
trumpet of the three angels which are yet to
found.

The

278 A COMMENTAJIY Ch. VIII.

The hieroglyphic contained in verfe 12th, figni-
iiesa ftate of great darknefs and ignorance. It is
not a ftate of total darknefs, it is not fo great as
ihall be under the next trumpet, when " the fun
" and the air Ihall be darkened ;" for only a
third parr of th-e fun, moon, and ftars, are darken-
ed.

In the natural world, light is conveyed to us
from three different objeds ; from the fun dircd:-
I7 as the fountain of light, and from the naoon and
flars by their refledion of the rays of the fun.
When a part of the fun is eclipfed, the day is duf-
ky and dark; and, when a part of the moon and of
the ftars is covered with clouds, the night be-
comes much darker than otherwife it would have
been.

In the Chriftian church, intelledual light or re-
ligious knowledge is derived from three fources cor-
refpondent to thefe. Firft, from the facred fcrip-
tures, the divine and direct fource of religious
truth; hence the fymbol for the facred fcriptures
is the fun. Secondly, from the poiitive inflitu-
tions or ordinances of religion, which, like the
moon, are fuited to a ftate of comparative dark-
nefs, and are fubject to change. They are not im-
mutable like thofe parts of religion which are mo-
xal. For them the moon is, therefore, the
fymbol. And thirdly, from the minifters of reli-
gion, li^nified by the ftars. Thus, by this trum-
pet

Ver. 12, 13. ON THE REVELATION. 279

pet it is predided, that fuch obfcurity fhould be
thrown over infpired fcripture, fuch corruption
Ihould be introduced into the ordinances of reli-
gion, and fo many of the minifters of religion
Ihould be fo ignorant of the true nature of the
Chriftian religion, that the church fhould in this
way be involved in great darknefs immediately
after the event prcditled by the third trumpet,
that is, about the end of the fourth century.

John was alfo informed, that the three remain-
ing trumpets fliould foretell three great and alarm-
ing events, full of wo andmifery to the inhabiters
of the earth, that is, to the citizens of the R ;man
empire. Thefe 'events full of wo to the citizens of
Rome, fhall be iliuftrated under the fifth, iixth, and
feventh trumpets, their proper places. Thefe are
indeed three great woes to them. They are all the
corruptions of Popery, the invafions of the Maho-
metans, and at lait the complete and final over-
throw of Papal Rome; as lliall be fhewn in the
commentary on the three lad trumpets.

Thefe three woes are, by a kind of anticipation,
thus foretold in general terms under this trumpet,
becaufe tbey fhali proceed from that grofs ignorance
and darknefs which is the fubjedl of this tiumpet.
Thefe woes, which lliall come upon the citizens of
Rome, are intimated to John by an angel flying
through the midft of heaven, (i. e. the church of
Chrift).

Though

3 So A COMMENTARY Ch. VIII.

• Though the people of Rome, though the men
of the world at large fliould not forefee the fatal
confequences of the obfcurity which fhould be
thrown upon facred fcripture by falfe interpreta-
tions, of the perverfion of the pofitive inftitutions
of religion, and of the ignorance and corruption
of the clergy ; yet true Chriftians, who are the
church of Chrill, fhould plainly forefee that many
fatal confequences fhould follow from fuch ignti-
rance, darknefs, and corruption. The predicliom
under this trumpet hath been fulfilled in that great
darknefs, ignorance, fuperftition, and corruption of
morals which began in the end of the fourth cen-
tury, and which prepared the world for the ambi-
tious projects of the bifhop of Rome, and for the
grofs errors and fuperflitions of Popery, which are
predicted under the next trumpet.

1 his ignorance, fuperftition, and corruption of
manners, which at this period had darkened only a
third part of the luminaries of the church, increaf-
ed until the people were prohibited to ufe the bi^
ble in a known tongue, and the ordinances of divine
inftitution were buried under the cumbrous load of
fuperftitious obfervances ; by which command-
ments of men, the law of God was made void, and
the minifters of religion became a difgrace, not
merely to the Chriftian profefiion, but alio to hu-
man nature, by tl^veir grofs ignorance and >ice.
This darknefs continued through all the dark a-

ges

Ver. 12, 13. ON THE REVELATION. 28 1

ges of the church, until at the dawn of the glo-
rious Reformation it began gradually to be difpel-

ied.

Of this ignorance, fuperftition, and corruption of
morals, Mofheim thus writes, Hifi. Vol. I. cent. 4.
page 191. After faying that the principles of the
Chriftian doctrine were explained and defended in
a manner thaf difcovered the greateil ignorance
and an utter confufion of ideas, he adds, "Nor did
"' the evil end here ; for thofe vain iidlions, which
" an attachment to the Platonic philofophy, and to
" popular opinions, had engaged the greateft part
« of the Chriftian dodors to adopt before the time
*' of Conftantine, were now confirmed, enkrged,
«' andembelliihed in various ways, From hence
" arofe that extravagant veneration for departed
*» faints, and thofe abfurd notions of a certain fire
^' deftined to purify feparate fouls, that now pre-
** vailed, and of which the public marks were e-
" very where to be feen. Hence alfo the celibacy
" of the priefts, the worfhip of images and relids,
" which in procefs of time almoft utterly defiroyed
" the Chriftian religion ; or, at leaft echpfed its luf-
'« tre, and corrupted • its very elTence in the mofi:
" deplorable manner. An enormous train of dif-
*' ferent fuperftitions were gradually fubftituted in
" the place of true rehgion and genuine piety.
" This odious revolution was owing to a variety of
" caufes. A ridiculous precipitation in receiving

Vol. I l^ «, " i^ew

a82 A COMMENTARY Ch. VllL

" new opinions, a prepofterous dcfire of imitating
" the Pagan rites, and of blending them with the
*' Chriflian worfliip, and that idle propenfity which
" the generality of mankind have towards a gau-
" dy and oftentatious religion, all contributed to e-
*' ftablifh the reign of fuperftition upon the ruins of
*' Chriftianity. Accordingly frequent pilgrimages
*' were undertaken to Paleftine, and to the tombs
" of the martyrs, as if there alone the facred princi-
" pies of virtue and the certain hope of falvation
" were to be acquired. The reins being once let
" loofe to fuperftition, which knows no bounds, ab-
" furd notions and idle ceremonies multiplied every
" day. Q^'antities of duft and earth brought from
" Paleftine, and other places remarkable for their,
" fuppoied fandity, were handed about as the mod
" powerful remedies againft the violence of wicked
" fpirits, and were fold and bought every where at
" enormous prices. The public proceffions and fup-
** plications, by which the Pagans endeavoured to
" appeafe their gods, were now adopted into the
" Chriftian worihip, and celebrated with great pomp
" and magnificence in feveral places. The virtues
*' that had formerly been afcribed to the Heathen
'* temples, to their luftrations, to the ftatues of their
♦' gods and heroes, were now attributed to Chrif-
*' tian churches, to water confecrated by certain
" forms cf prayer, and to thfe images of holy men.
*• And the fame privileges which the former enjoy-

" ed

Ver. 12, 13. ON THE REVELATION. 283

*' cd under the darknefs ofPagaiiifm, were confcr-
" red upon the latter under the light of the gof-
" pel ; or rather, under that cloud of fuperftition
" that was obfcuring its glory. It is true, that
" as yet images were not very common, nor were
" there any fiatues at all. But it is at the fame
" time as undoubtedly certain, as it is extravagant
" and monftrous, that the worfliip of the martyrs
" was modelled by degrees, according to the reli-
*' gious fervices that were paid to the gods before
*' the coming of Chrift."

Page 193. "The reft, after the example of O-
*' rigen, are laborious in the fearch of far fetched
" interpretations ; and pervert the interpretations
" of fcripture, which they but half underftand, by
'' applying them, or rather ftraining them, to mat-
" ters with which they have no conneclion. St.
" Auguflin and Tychonius endeavoured to eflab-
" lifh plain and wife rules for the interpretation of
" fcripture, but their efforts were unfuccefsful.
*' The dodlrines of Chriftianity had not a better
" fate, than the facred fcripture, from whence
" they were drawn. Origen was the great model,
" whom the moft eminent of the Chrifdan do(^ors
*' followed in their explications of the truths of the
*♦ gofpel ; which were, of confequence, e;xplained
*' according .to the rules of the Platonic philofophy,
*• as it was correded and modified by that learned
** father for the inilruftion of the youth.'*

N n a Page

284 A COMMENTARY Ch. VIII.

Page 203'. " When we cafl: an eye towards the
" lives and morals of Chriftians at this time, we
*.' find as formerly, a mixture of good and evil ;
" fome eminent for their piety, and others infa-
** mous for their crimes. The number however,
" of immoral and unworthy Chriftians began fo to
*' increafe, that the examples of real piety and vir-
" tue became extremely rare. When the terrors
" of perfecution were totally difpelled ; when the
" church, fecured from the efforts of its enemies,
*' enjoyed the fweets of profperity and peace ;
" when the nioft of the billiops exhibited to their
" flocks the contagious examples of arrogance,
" luxury, effeminancy, animofity and flrife, with
" other vices too numerous to mention ; when
" the inferior rulers and dodors of the church fell
*' into a flothful and opprobrious negligence of the
" duties of their refpective ftations, and employed
" in vain vvranglings and difputes, that zeal and at-
" tention, that were due to the culture of piety,
" and to the inftrudion of their people ; and when,
" to con:^plete the enormity of this horrid detail,
*' multitudes were drawn into the profeflion of
" Chriftiaiiity, not by the power of convidlion and
*' argument, but by the profpedt of gain and the
*' fearof punilhm.ent ; then indeed it was no won-
*' der that the church was contaminated with flioals
*' of profligate Chriftians, and that the virtuous
" few were, in a manner, opprefled and over-

" whelmed

Ver. 12, 13. ON THE REVELATION. ^Sj

" whelmed with the fuperior numbers of the wic-
*' ked and licentious. It is true, that the fame
" rigorous penitence which had taken place before
" Conftantine the Great, continued now in full
" force againil flagrant tranfgrelTors ; but when
" the reign of corruption becomes univerfal, the
" vigour of the law yields to its fway, and a weak
" execution defeats the purpofes of the moft falu-
" tary difcipline. Such was now unhappily the
" cafe : the age was finking daily from one pe-
" riod of corruption to another ; the great and the
" powerful finned with impunity ; and the obfcure
" and the indigent felt alone the feverity of the
" laws."

The barbarous nations which overfpread the Ro-
man empire in the fifth century, carried ignorance
and darknefs along with their conquefl;s ; and ba-
nifhed real fcience from the empire. Thus Mof-
heim writes, Hijl. Vol. i, page 237. " But the bar-
" barous nations v/hich either fpread defolation,
" or foL-med fettlements in the E.oman territories,
" checked the growth of thofe genial feeds which.
" the hands of fcience had fowed in more aufpi-
*' cious times. Thefe favage invaders, poflefled of
" no other ambition than that of conqueft, and
" looking upon military courage as the only fource
" of true virtue and folid glory, beheld of confe-
*' quence the arts and fciences with the utmoil
" contempt. Wherever therefore they extended

" their

*86 A COMMENTARY Ch. Villi

** their conquefts, ignorance and darknefs followed
•* their fteps, and the culture of the fciences waa
" confined to the priefts and monks alone. And
" even among thefe, learning degenerated from its
*' primitive luftre, and put on the moft unfeemly
" and fantaflic form. Amidll the fedudion of
" corrupt examples, the alarms of perpetual dan-
** ger, and the horrors and devaftations of war, the
*' facerdotal and monaflic orders loft gradually all
" tafte for folid fcience, in the place of which they
*' fubftituted a lifelefs fpedre, an enormous phan-
" tom of barbarous eruditioni"

CHAP.

Ver. I,— 12. ON THE REVEL ATIONo 287

CHAP. IX.

Verfcs ijly 2d, ,^d, j^th, sth, 6th, jth, Sth^
gth, loth, I ith, izth,

AND the fifth angel founded, and I faw
a ftar fall from heaven unto the earth ".
and to him was given the key of the bottom-
lefs pic. And he opened the bottomlefs pit,
and there arofe a fmoke out of the pit, as the
fmoke of a great furnace ; and the fun and
the air were darkened, by reafon of the fmoke
of the pit. And there came out of the fmoke
locuils upon the earth ; and unto them was
given power, as the fcorpions of the earth
have power. And it was commanded them
that they fhould not hurt the grafs of the
earth, neither any green thing, neither any
tree ; but only thofe men who have not
the feal of God in their foreheads. And
to them it was given that they fhould not
kill them, but that they fliould be tor-
mented five months \ and their torment
was as the torment of a fcorpion, when he

fcriketh

a88 A COMMENTARY Ch. IX,

flriketh a man. And in thofe days fhall
men feek death, and fliall not find it ; and
fhall defire to die, and death fhall flee
from them. And the fliapes of the locufls
were like unto horfes prepared unto battle ;
and on their heads were as it were crowns like
gold, and their faces were as the faces of men.
And they had hair as the hair of women, and
their teeth were as the teeth of lions And
they had breaft-plates, as it were breafl plates
of iron ; and the found of their wings was
as the found of chariots of many horfes
running to battle. And they had tails like un-
to fcorpions, and there were flings in their
tails : and their power was to hurt men five
months. And they had a king over them,
which is the angel of the bottomlefs pit,
whofe name in the Hebrew tongue is Abad-
don, but in the Greek tongue hath his name
Apollyon, One woe is paft and behold there
come two woes more hereafter.

This paflTage contains a large hieroglyphic made
up of many different parts, predidlive of the
ftate of the church of Rome for the fpace of 150
years.

Tlie

Ver. I,— 12. ON THE REVELATION. 289

The fifth great event by which Chriftians fliould
be alarmed, is reprefcnted by a ftar flUhng from
heaven to the earth. A minifter of rehgion fliould
fall from the church of Chvift ; but fhould ftill af-
ter his fall keep the name of, and be regarded as a
minifter of religion in the earth, that is, the Ro-
man empire. He fhould be the inftrument in the
hand of the devil of introducing into the world
that ignorance, error, fuperftition, and vice,
which are derived from hell ; which is lignified
by the key of the bottomlefs pit being given to
him. From that infernal fource of faliehood and
vice, fuch ignorance, error, and vice fliould a-
rife, by his inftrumentality, as fhould darken the
facred fcriptures, the fun of the Chriftian church;
and fliould corrupt and darken the very air, the
fpirit and genius of rehgion itfelf. During this
period, the bible fhould be gradually obfcured,
until it fhould be totally hid from the people ;
and the very fpirit and genius of rehgion fhould
• be the reverfe of what it formerly v/as. It was
once light, but now it fhall be darknefs.

Religion in its own nature, and as taught in
the facred fcriptures, is founded in the belief and
love of truth, and is produdivc of real hoiinefs :
" The fear of the Lord is wifdom, and to depart
*' from evil is underftanding " " He that cora-
" eth unto God mud believe that he is, and that
" he is the revvarder of them that diligently feek

Vol. L O o " him."

?.9® A COMMENTARY Ch. IX.

" him" " This a faithful faying, and thefe things
*' I will that thou afTirm conftantly, that they
*• who have believed in God might be careful to
" maintain good works.** But, in this period,
that which Ihould be called religion in the Roman
empire fliould be founded in ignorance and impli-
cit faith, and produdtive of fuperftitious obl'ervan-
ces inftead of true holinefs. Ignorance is the mo-
ther of that devotion.

From that ignorance and fuperftition a great
fwarm like locufts iliould overfpread the Roman
empire. They Ihould be like locufts for their
number, like fcorpions for their poifonous nature,
like horfes prepared to battle for their jEiercenefs.
On their heads were as it were crowns like gold,
to exprefs their grandeur and magnificence;
their faces were as men, to exprefs their policy
and worldly wifdom ; and their hair as the hair of
vvomen, to exprefs their enchanting charms.
Their teeth were as lions, to fignify their cruelty
and greedinefs of their prey. By their iron
breail-plates, it is figniiied that they fliould refill
all oppofition, for the time fpeciiied in this hiero-
glyphic. By the foynd or their wings, like the
found of chariots of many horfes running to bat-
tle, is lignified the loud clamour, great force, and
magnificence, with which they purfue all who
oppofe them. They had tails like fcorpions, and
ftings in their tails. It is by the {leaking of their

tails

Ver. I, — 12. ON THE REVEU.TION. 29I

tails in a particular way that moft of the brute
creatures exprefs their fawning. It is univerfally
known that in this way dogs fawn upon their
maflers : Hence the tails of animals, in the fym-
bolical language, fignify fawning, flattering, and
iniinuating manners. Here, and alfo in verfe
19th of this chapter, they fignify that infinuating
and fawning manner in which falfe doctrines
iliould be taught in this period. As they have
flings in their tails, thefe falfe do6trines, however
fmoothly inllilled, fliall poifon and vex the minds
of thofe v;ho fhall receive them.

In one thing they ditler widely from locufts.
" The locuils," as Agur obferves, Prov. xxx. 27.
" have no king; yet go they forth all of thern
" by bands." But thofe, - repijefented in this
hieroglyphic by locuds for their number, had a
king over them.

However numerous, artful, powerful, and fierce,
they have a monarch who reigns over them with
abfolute fway. This king is the angel of the bottom-
lefs pit. He is the fame perfon who is in verfe ift re-
prefented by a ftar fallen from heaven to the earth,
to whom the key of the bottomlefs pit is given ;
and who, in the fecond verfe, opens the bottom-
lefs pit, from which the fmoke arofe, out of which
the locufts came.

As flars in heaven fignify the angels, meffengers,

9r minif^ers, of the churches of God, fo the liar
O o 2 faileu

292 A COMMENTARY Ch. IX,

fallen from heaven to the earth, to whom is giv-
en the key of the bottomlefs pit, fignifieth the
angel or minifter of hell, who introduces into and
propagates in the world thofe errors, fuperftitiolis,
and vices, which are exprefsly called dodrines of
devik, I Tim. iv. i, — 3. " Now the fpirit fpeak-
" erh exprefsly that, in the latter times, fome fhall
" depart from the faith, giving head to feducing
" fpirits and dodrines of deVils, fpeaking lies in
*' hypocrify, having their confciences feared with
" a hot iron ; forbidding to marry, and com-
" manding to abftain from meats, which God
*' hath created to be received with thankfgiving
" of them who believe and know the truth.'*

His name is written both in the Hebrew and
Greek languages. In the • former he is called
Abaddon, which fignifies the Deftroyer; and in
the latter, Apollyon, which Signifies alfo the De-
ftroyer. This name is given him in both lan-
guages, to (hew us that it is not his real name, but
a fymbolical one, which is of a iignification very
fimilar to that of his real name.

This fymbolical name is of a fignification di~
redly oppofite to tl}at of the name given to the
Divine Author of our falvation, Matth. i. 21.
" Thou fhalt call his name Jefus, for he fhall fave
" his people frpm their fins." Jfjus in the He-
brew language fignifies a favlour, and Abaddon
in the fame language fignifies a dejlroyer. The

Deftroyer

Ver. I, — 12, ON THE REVELATION. 293

Deftroyeris dirediv oppofite to Jefus the Saviour;
but he who in his charader is diredly oppofite to
Jefus Chrift is the Antkhrijl.

In 2 Their, ii. 3. Antichrifl has the fame name
given him as in this hieroglyphic. He is called
the/on of perdition, the very fame Apollyon in the
Greek language which is applied to him here:
But that paflage in 2 TheiT. ii. i, — 12. fhall be
fully confide red when we come to chap, xiii.

Thefe locufts v/ere not, like the natural locufls,
to hurt the grafs of the earth, neither any green
thing, neither any tree, but only men. By this
part of the hieroglyphic it is declared that they
are not natural locufts, but only perfons fymboli-
cally reprefented by them. They were not to
hurt the faints, but they were to hurt the citizens
of the Roman empire. They were to hurt only
thofe men who have not the feal of God in their
forehead. All thofe fealed ones mentioned in
chap. vii. that is, all real Chriftians, whom the
Lord knows to be his, and who naming the name
of Chrift depart from iniquity, fhould receive no
real hurt from thefe locufts and fcorpions.

It was not the intention of thefe locufts to ab-
ftain from hurting the fealed fervants of O^Ql, nor
to hurt the citizens of Rome ; but they were com-
manded to do in fad: the very oppofite of what
they intended to do, and probably believed they
were doing. Their errors and vices ftiould be

overruled

294 A COMMENTARY Ch. IX.

overruled and reftrained by the unfeen fuperintend-
ing hand of Divine providence, fo as to fave from
their infedious influence all real Chriftians.

During this period, they Ihould have no power
to kill men ; but they fhould vex and torment
them in fuch a manner as to render life itfeif a
burden to them ; and to make them even wiQi for
death, rather than live in fucb torment.

This particular power of tormenting men v:ii
granted to them for the fpace of five months. This
period of five months is infeparably connedled
with two things : Firft, with the power granted to
the locufls to torment men, as didinguilhed from
and oppofedto thepowerof killing them, verfe 5th,
And fecond, with the charader of their king as aftar
or minifler of religion, as diftinguiflied from and
oppofed to his charadler as a bead of prey or tem-
poral king, ver. lo, li. But v.'hat period of time
is fignified by five months, and when do thefe five
months commence and terminate? Without a pre-
cife anfwer to each of thefe quellions, the time of
five months mentioned in this hieroglyphic cannot
convey any information to our minds. A precife
and determinate anfwer may be given to them
both. In the fymbolical, which is the language of
prophecy, five months fignify 150 years. Thefe
150 years were to commence at the time the flar
fhould fall from heaven to the earth, and at the

^time,

Ver. I, — 12, ON THE REVELATION. 29^

time when the locufls Ihould receive power to tor-
ment men, which two events fhould be contem-
poraneous.

Having thus Bxed their commencemejit, it
muft be evident that their termination mud be juft
150 years after that time. But their termina-
tion is fixed alfo by two contemporaneous events.
The one is the time when thefe locults jQiall have
power not only to torment, but alfo to kill men ;
and the other is when their king fhould not only
be a ftar but alfo a beafl of prey. The firit of thefe
events being fixed for the commencement, and the
laft for the termination of the five months ; if it
fliall appear from the hiftory of thefe events that
there were exadly 150 years between them, that
fadl muft prove that this account of the time figni-
fied by the fyrabol^i'<? months^ is the right one.

As wefhall frequently meet with predictions of
times in this book, as the right knowledge of iho.
fymbolical or prophetic manner of expreffing time?
is one of the beft helps to underftand this book,
and every other prophetic book in v/hich periods
of time are mentioned ; and as this is the firil place
in which a period of time is mentioned in this book,
it will be necefiary and proper that 1 here explain the
nature of the fy mbolical language relative to time.

It was formerly fhewn in what manner, in that
language, intelledual, moral, and fpiritual objedls
are fignified by material and vifibie ones. Bur.

fometimes

296 A COMMENTARY Ch. iXo

fometimes it is neceflliry to reprefent an objefl by
a fymbol of the fame fpecies with the thing figni-
fied bv that fymbol. In particular this is the cafe
with time. Of abfolute time our idea is as inade-
quate and confufed as it is of eternity, which pro-
bably is the bed expreffion for abfolute time. Our
idea of time therefore, fo far as it is adequate and
diftindl, is of relative time. And this idea is form-
ed by fome meafare of a certain definite propor-
tion of time. The moft natural meafare of rela-
tive time, and which all nations have adopted, is
the circuit of this globe from one point in the ec-
liptic until it returns to the fame point, by which
a folar year is m.eafured. This, as being a kind of
natural, or at lead univerfal meafure of time, is cal-
led a time in the fymbolical language. It is thus
ufed in chap. xii. 14. and in Daniel vii. 25. Thus
a time fignifies a year, not a natural nor civil
year, but a prophetic year, that is, a year confifl-
ing of 360 proplietic days. When any thing is re.
prefentedby a fymbol of the fame kind with itfelf,
the greater is always reprefented by the lelTer. The
leafon of this is, that the fymbolical language,
when written in its proper charafters, was a kind of
painting or drawing, and that the pictures might be
contained in any cou'venient bounds in the books
written in that language, it was neceifary that they
fhould always be much lefs than the things they
reprefented. Kence in the fpoken fymbolical lan-
guage.

Ver. I, — 12. ON THE REVILATIOIT. 297

guag«, the fymbol is always the leller, and is cal-
led the lefTer; and the thing Signified i^ the greater,
and is called the greater, whenever the fymbol
and the thing fignified are of the fame fpecies.
Thus, if one city is reprefented by another, a
fmall city is the fymbolof a larger city. Thus an-
cient Babylon, for her idolatry, luxury, and oppref-
fion of the people of God, was the fymbol of Papal
Rome Thus chap xiv 8. Rome is called Baby-
lon that great city, and chap. xvii. 5. Babylon the
great, to fhew that it is not antient Babylon which
is meant, but the city and empire of which antient
Babylon was the fymbol. Thus, with refpecl to
time, a day is the fymbol for a year, becaufe both
of them are meafured by the revolutions of the
fame planet ; the former by its diurnal, and the
latter by its annual revolurionj and as the former
is the lefTer, it is, according to the idiom of that lan-
guage, the fymbol of the latter, which is the great-
er. Accordingly, in lacred fcripture we are re-
peatedly told, that a day {ignifics a year in pro-
phetic language. Numbers xiv. 34. " \fter the
" number of the days in which ye fearched the
" land, even forty days, each day for a year,
" fhall ye bear your iniquities, even forty years,
" £zek. iv. 4, — 6. " Lie thou aifo upon, thy
*' left fide, and lay the iniquities of the houfe of If-
*' rael upon it, according to the number of the days
" that thou flialt lie upon it, thou flialt bear their
"Vol, I- \ P p " iniquity.

29S A COMMENTARY Ch. IX.

" iniquity. For I have laid upon tli?e the years of
" their iniquity, according to the number of the
*' days, three hundred and ninety days ; fo flialt
" thou bear the iniquity of the houfe of Ifrael.
" And when thou haft accomphfhed them, lie a-
*' gain on thy right iide, and thou fhalt bear the i-
*' niquity of the houfe of Judah forty days : I have
*' appointed thee each day for a year." Hence in
this language a week containing feven days is the
fymbol for feven years. Dan. ix. 4. The famous
prophecy of feventy weeks is 490 years, and in fadl,
was accompliilied in that time Hence too, a
month confifting of thirty days is the fymbol for
thirty years. The year antiently was divided into
twelve months, and every month into thirty days ;
fo that the year confilled of three hundred and
Cxty days, as Sir ifaac Newton fliews in his chro-
nology. That this is the year which is ufed in this
book, in the prophetic parts of it, is evident from
chap. xii. 6. 14. and chap xiii. 5. In all thefe paf-
fages, the identical fame period of time, as fhall be
fhewn in the commentary on them, is exprefled in
the firft by days, in the fecond by years, and in the
third by months, in fuch a manner as to prove
that in this book every year contains twelve
months, and every month contains thirty days.
In the firll of thefe, that period is faid to be 1260
days; in the fecond a time and times and half a
time, that is, three years and an half; and in the

third

Ver. I,— »2. ON THE REVELATION. 299

third, forty-two months. But when each year con-
tains twelve months, three years and an half make
up juft 42 months ; and when each month con-
tains 30 days, the 42 months make up exadlly
1260 days. Hence the five months in this hiero-
glyphic are five times 30 years, that is, 15©
years.

But it -is alfo necelTary, that it be ftiewn when
the exprellions of time are to be taken fymboli-
cally, and when hterally ; that is^ when a day fig-
nifies a year, and when it fignifies only twenty-
four hours, when a month fignifies thirty years,
and when it fignifies only thirty days. If there were
no fixed rule by which to know when the expref-
fions of time are to be taken in the one fenfe, and
when in the other, they could ferve no good pur-
pofe whatever, and confufion would be the confe-
quence of ufing them at all. To remove this dif-
ficulty, let the following rule be attended to:
When the paflage in which any of thefe expref-
fions occur, is not in the fymbolical language,
then thefe exprefiions are to be taken literally.
But if the paffage is in the fymbolical language,
then they muft be taken fymbolically. In no in-
fi:ance muft we deviate from this rule, unlefs when
a plain diredion or injundion for that deviation is
given in the paflage itfelf, by which a meaning
different from its ordinary one is put upon the ex-
preffion. An inftance of this commanded devia-
P p 2 tion

Od A COMMENTARY Ch IX.

tion occurs in chap. xiii. i8. where it is faid,
" For it is the number of a man, and his number is
" 666 :" By being informed that this is the num-
ber of a man, we are told that it is not the num-
ber of a prophet, or in other words, that it is fuch a
number as men ordinarily ufe, (a literal one), not
fuch as prophets ufe, (a fymbolical one). But this
Xhall be more fully explained in the commentary
on ihat verfe.

All prophetic writings are interfperfed with paf-
fages explanatory of the highly fymbolical parts
of the books. Thefe are the proper keys to the
prophecy. They frequently occur in this book,
which fliall appear as we proceed. All expref-
lions of time ufed in thefe explanatory pafTages, and
indeed all the terras ufsd in them mud be taken li-
terally, otherwiie they could not ferve the purpofe
of explaining the fymbolical parts of the book.

This long and minute predidion hath been ex-
a£lly fulfilled in all irs parts, in the fupremacy of
the Roman pontiff; in the great fwarms of falfe
dodrines, and of monks, which like locuils over-
fpread the Roman empire, at the time he aflumed
that fupremacy; and in that vexation and diltur-
bunce which the Roman pontiff, and the differejit
orders of nionks under his command, caufed in
the empire, by daily grafping at more power.

In the >ear 6c6, Phocas the emperor conferred
the title oi Univeiiai JBiliiop upon the Roman pon-
tiff.

Ver. X, 12. ON THE REVELATION. 3OI

tiff, Boniface III. At this time the papal fuprc-
macy was introduced. ISow the bifhop of Rome
fell from that purity, that equality of rank among
the niinifters of religion, and that fimplicity of
manners which accord to the fcriptural charader
of a minillerin heaven, (the church of Chrift), and
affumed that power, pre-eminence, and pomp,
in which the miniflers of the Roman church have
lince Hione in the Papal fee. At this time, the or-
ders of monks increafed like fwarms oflocufts.
Thefe monks were the tools of the Roman pontiff.
However various their orJers were, tliey all paid
unlimited obedience to his commands. By grafp-
ing at fupreme authority, the Roman pontiff ex-
cited many violent contentions and quarrels be-
tween him and iiis army of monks, and the em-
perors and biihops. Thefe monks too, by their
infinuating arts mifled many into the dangerous
errors and hurtful practices, which they taught
and exemplified. But they could not lead into de-
ftrudive errors any of thofe fealed ones who were
the true fervants of God.

The wifdom, the policy, the infinuating arts,
the cruelties, the intrepidity, and grandeur of the
Roman pontiff, with the different religious orders
under his command, exactly correfpond to the
particular parts of this prophetic hieroglyphic.
By their do£lrines, the very nature of religion was
obfcurcd and changed, the fun and the air of it

were

302 A COMMENTARY Ch. IX.

were darkened. During the fpace of 150 years
the Roman pontiff, notwithftanding all his great-
liefs, pomp, and power, continued in the fole cha*
radler of a ftar, that is of a minifter of religion.
It was in the year 756 that, by the famous grant
of Pepin king of France, he became alfo a tempo-
ral prince. In this laft charadler he is predicted
in chap. xiii. under the fymbol of a bead, (9>f/>/c>').
But, from the year 606, when he became univer-
falor fupreme biftiop, to the year 736, when he be-
came alfo a temporal prince, was exadly 150 years.
During this period, too, he with all his tribes of
monks greatly diiturbed and vexed the emperors
and citizens of Rome, but they had no power of
killing any till thefe 150 years were expn-ed.
Verfe 5. " And to them it was given that they
" Ihould not kill them, but thj^t they (hould be
** tormented ^-z;^ months.''' It was not till the Ro-
man pontift' became alfo a temporal prince {anno
756) that he- affumed and exerted the power of
delivering heretics over to the civil magiftrate to
be put to death.

Of thefe events Moflieim thus writes, Hijl^
vol. I. page 320, " The dilputes about pre-emi-
*' nence, that had fo long fubliiled between the
" bilhops of Rome and Conllantmopie, proceeded
" in this century (the 7th) to fuch violent lengths,
" as laid the foundation of that deplorable Ichifm
" which afterwards feparated the Greek and La-

" tin

Ver, I,— 12. ON THE REVELATIONT. 303

" tin churches. The rroft learned writers, and
" thofe who are moft remarkable for their know-
" ledge of antiquity, are generally agreed, that
" Boniface III. engaged Phocas, that abominable
** tyrant, who waded to the imperial throne through
*♦ the blood of the emperor Mauritius, to take
" from the bifliop of Conftantinople the title of
" oecumenical or univerfal bifhop, and to confer
" it upon the Roman pontiff. They relate this
" however upon the fole authority of Baronius,
*' for none of the antient writei-s have men-
" tioned it. If indeed we are to give credit to
" Anaftalius and Paul Deacon, fomething .like
" what we have related was tranfacled by Phocas j
" for, when the bilhops of Conftantinople main-
*' tained that their church was not only equal in
" dignity and authority to that of Rome, but alfo
" the head of all the Chriftian churches, this ty-
•' rant oppofed their preteniions, and granted the
" pre-eminence to the church of Rome; and thus
" was the papal fupremacy firll introduced. The
" Roman pontiffs ufed all forts of methods to main-
" tain and enlarge the authority and pre-eminence
•' which they had acquired by a grant from the moft
" odious tyrant that ever difgraced the annals of
" hiftory."

Page 321. *' The progrefs of vice among the
*' fubordinate rulers and minifters of the church
" was, at this time truly deplorable; neither bi*

304 ^ COMMENTARY Gh. IX.

•• Ihops, preflbyters, deacon?, nor even the cloifter-
•^ ed monks, were exempt from the general con-
" tagion, as appears from the unanimous confef-
" fion of all the writers of this century (the 7th)
" that are worthy of credit. In thofe very places
♦* that were confecrated to the advancement of
" piety and the fervice of God, there was little elfe
** to be (een than ghoftly ambition, infatiable a-
*' varice, pious frauds, intolerable pride, and a fu«
*• perftitious contempt of the natural rights of the
•' people, with many other vices ftill more enormous.
♦* There reigned alfo, in many places, the moll bit-
" ter diffentions between the bifliops and the
" monks. 1 he former had employed the greedy
**^ hands of the latter to augment the epifcopal
•* treafure, and to draw contributions from all parts
** to fupport them in their luxury and the in-
** dulgence of their lulls. The monks, perceiving
** this, and alfo unwilling to ferve the bifhops in
•* fuch a difhonourable character, fled for refuge
** to the emperors and princes, under whofe civil
** jurifdidion they lived ; and afterwards, for their
** further fecurity, had recourfe to the protection
" of the Roman pontiff' This protection they
"readily obtained; and the imperious pontiffs,
*' always fond of exerting their authority, excmpt-
*' ed by degrees the monaltic orders from the ju-
" nfdiclion of the biitiops. The monks, m return
" for this important iervice, devoted themlelves

" wholly

Ver. I. — 12, ON THE REVELATIOK. 3615

" wholly to advance the interefts, and to main-=
" tain the dignity of the bifhop of Rome. They
" made his caufe their own, and reprefented him
•' as a fort of god to the ignorant multitude, over
" whom they had gained a prodigious afcendant,
" by the notion that generally prevailed of the
" fanclity of the monadic orders.— In the mean
" time, the monks were every where in high re-
" pute, and their caufe was accompanied with the
" moil furprifmg fuccefe, particularly among the
" Latins, through the protedion and favour of the
" Roman pontiif, and their Pharifaical afFedatiori
" of uncommon piety and devotion."

Page 324. " In this barbarous age, religion lay
^expiring under a motely and enormous heap of
" fuperftitious inventions, and had neither the cou-
*' rage nor the force to raife hei head, or to difplay
♦' her native charms to a darkened and dtluded
" world. In the eurlielt periods of the church, the
" worfhip of Chrillians was cr^nfined to the one fu-
" preme God, and his Son Jcfus Chrifl : but the
" Chriilians i>f this ct:n:ury mulriplied the objeds
" of their devotion, and paid homage to the re-
*' mains of the true crofs, to the images of faintsj
" and to bones whole real owners were ejttremely
" dubious. Thepnmiiive Chrillians, id order to ex-
*' cite men to a courfe of piety and virtue, fet before
*' them that heavenly flare, and taofe niartfions of
*♦ mifery whiph the gofpel hath revealed as the dif-

JO^ A COMMENTARY Ch. iX.

*' ferent portions of the righteous and the wicked :
•' while the Chriftians of this century (the 7th)
" talked of nothing elfe bur a certain fire which ef-
*' faced the ftains of vice, and purified f )uls from
" their corruption. The .former taught, that
*' Chrift by bis fufferings and death had made a-
" tonement fjr the fins of mortals; the latter feem-
*■■ ed, by their fuperrfitious dodrines,- to exclude
" from the kingdom of heaven fuch as had not
*' contributed by their offerings to augment the
" riches of the clergy or the church. The former
" were only fludious to attain to virtuous iimpli-
" city of life and manners, and employed their
*' principal zeal and diligence in the culture of
*' true and genuine pieiy; while the latter placed
" the whole' of religion in external rites and bodily
" exercifes. The methods alfo of folving the diffi-
*' culties and diffipating the doubts that often a-
*' rife in inquifidve minds, were of a piece with the
" reft of the fuperilitious fyftem that now prevail-
*' ed. The two great and irrefillible arguments^
" againit all doubts, were the authority of
" the church, and the working of miracles : and
"the produdliun of ihefe prodigies required no
•' exir?iordinary degree of dexterity in an age of
*' fuch grois and univerfal ignorance."

It was in the end of the year 755, oa- the begin-
ning of the year 756, that Pepin king of France
made the fuuiuus graaC of Rome and fome neigh-
bouring

Ver. I, — 12. ON THE REVELATION. 307

bouring cities to Pope Stephen II. and his
fucceflbrs ; in confequence of which, he and they
became temporal princes. From the year 606, in
which the bifliop of Rome became univerfal bi-
Ihop, to the year 756, when he became a temporal
prince, is exadly 150 years, the five months in
this prophecy. Of this event, thofe acquainted
with the Latin language may fee a full and parti-
cular account in Sigonius de regno Italia, pages
79, 80, under the year 71,5 and 736.

On this fubjecl Moflieim thus writes, Hijl. vol.
I. pages 353, 354. " Nay, one of thefe monarchs,
" named Aiftulphas, carried his views ftill farther.
" Elated with thefe new acceffions to his domi-
" nions, he meditated the conqueft of Rome and
" its territories ; and formed the ambitious pro-
" jeft of reducing all Italy under the yoke of the
*' Lombards. The- terrified pontiff, Stephen 11. ad-
*' dreffes himfelf to his powerful patron and pro-
" teclor Pepin, reprefents to him his deplorable con-
" dition, and implores his affiftance. The French
" monarch embarks with zeal in the caufe of
•• the fuppliant pontiff'; crolTestheAlps, A. D. 754
*' with a numerous army ; and having defeated
*' Aiflulphus, obliged him by folemn treaty to de-
" liver up to the fee of Rome the Exarchate of Ra-
" venna, Pentopolis, and all the cities, caftles, and
*' territories which he had feized in the Roman
*' dukedom. It was not, however, long before the
Q^q 2 " Lombard

308 A COMMENTARY Ch- IX.

" Lombard prince violated, without any remorfe,an
" engagement which he had entered into with re-
** ludance. In the year 755 he laid Hege to
" Rome for the fecond time, but was again oblige4
" to fue for peace by the viclorioiis arms of Pepin,
*• who returned into Italy, and forcing the Lom-
*' bard to execute the treaty he had fo audacioufly
** violated, made a new grant of the Exarchate
" and of Pentopolis to the Roman pontiff, and his
" fucceffors in the apoftolic fee of Peter. And
" thus was the bifhop of Rome raifed to the rank of
" a temporal prince.''^

In how ftrikinga manner is the period of i 50 years
accompliflied in terms of the prophecy ? If Aillul-
phus the Lombard prince had not violated the fo-
lemn treaty which he entered into with Pepin in
the 754, nor returned and laid fiege to Rome a
fecond time in the year 755, the bifliop of Rome
would have been made a temporal prince more
than a full year before the predicted time was
come. But the purpofes of heaven, and the pre-
didions of God. mufl be minutely accomphflied in
fpite of all oppofition. Inflruments Ihall never be
wanting to accomplifli them. The very wrath of
man fliall thus be made to praife God, and the re-
mainder of his wrath he fliall rcflrain. Aiftulpi^us
vented his wrath againilRome until the 150 years
were accompliflied, but he vented it no longer.

Though

YqX. I, 12. ON THE REVELATION. 309

Though he knew not what he was doing, and
though he was a£ling with very different views, he
he was the inltrument under God of prevencingthe
Pope from becoming a temporal prince until the
150 years were expired; and when the predidled
time was come, he could prevent him no longer,
though he would as willingly as ever have done it.
One of the three woes denounced in verfe 13th of
the preceding chapter againll the inhabitants of
the earth, the citizens of the Roman empire, is pall
in the events by which the prediclions under the
fifth trumpet were accomplifhed. Thefe events
were produdive of much vexation and trouble to
the citizens of Rome at the time, and they are the
fources from which much greater troubles Ihali
flow in future. Two of thefe woes ilill remain, and
they fliall be denounced by the fixth and feventh
trumpets.

Verfes i^th, i^fh, i ^th, i6th, lyth, iSth^
i^th, 20th, 1 ifl. — And the fixth angel found-
ed, and i heard a voice from the four horns
of the golden altar, which is before God,
faying to the fixth angel which had the trum-
pet, Loofe the four angels which are bound
in the great river Euphrates. And the four
angels were loofed, which were prepared for
an hour, and a day, and a month, and a year,

310 A COMMENTARY Ch. IX.

for to flay the third part of men. ^nd the
number of the army of the horfemen were
two hundred thoufand thoufand: and I
heard the number of them. And thus I faw
the horfes in the vifion, and them that fat on
them, having bread plates of fire, and of ja-
cincft, and brimftone : and the heads of the
horfes were as thehea'.is of Rons ; and out of
their mouths ifTued fire, and fmoke, and
brimftone. By thefe three was the third part
of men killed, by the fire, by the fmoke, and
by the brimftone which ifTued out of their
mouths. Tor their power is in their mouths
and in their tails : for their tails were like
unto ferpents, and had heads, and with them
they do hurt. And the reft of the men which
were not killed by thefe plagues, yet repented
not of the works of their hands, that they
fliould not worfliip devils, and idols of gold
and filver, and brafs and flone and of wood :
which neither can fee, nor hear, nor walk :
neither repented they of their murders, nor of
their forceries, nor of their fornication, nor
of their thefts.

The

Ver. I'^, 21. ON THE REVELATION. 3IJ

The hieroglyphic under the fixrh trumpet is in-
troduced by a voice from the four horns of the
golden altar, which was before God. Upon the
horns of the golden altar Aaron was to make a-
tonement once in the year, Exod xxx. lo. Hence
the voice from the horns of this altar fignifies,
that the judgements denounced on the citizens of
Kome by this trumpet, are a punifhment, and^s
it were a facrifice of atonement for their national
idolatry and iuperftitions. The hieroglyphic con-
tained in thefe verfes intimates, that in the period
contained under this trumpet, a command from
God, in the couiTe of his providence, fhould be
given to loofe four angels, that is, four meifengers
and minifters of the divine will, whofe relidence
Ihould be on the fide of the river Euphrates. And
that thefe four inilruments of the divine willlliould
accordingly be let loofe for the fpace of 39 1 years
and 15 days. In the fymbolical language, a day
is one year a month is 30 years, a year is 360
years, and an hjur, the ai^h part of a year, is 15
days; all which added together, make up 391
years and 15 days.

Thefe meflengers of divine providence fhould
flay a great number of the citizens of Rome.
They fliould lead forth to the field of battle very
large and numerous armies of horfemen. The
number of their cavaLy fiiouid be very remarka-
ble for its gieatnefs. Hence" in verfe iGih, John

iirll

312 A COMMENTARY Ch. IX.

firft fays that the number of them were two hun-
dred thoufand thoufand, and next, that he heard
the number of them.

Both the horfes and the horfemen Ihould be ve-
ry fierce and warhke. The breaft-plates of fire,
jacin(^, and brimftone, fignify, that the colour of
the breaft-plates (hould be that which is made up
by a mixture of flame and fmolce. Fire is red, ja-
cind blue, and brimftone yellow. The mixture of
.thefe three colours is precifely that of the fire and
fmoke mixed together, which is emitted from a
mufket or cannon when it is fired off. By this
colour of the breaft-plate, it is fignified, that thefe
horfemen fhould be armed with offenfive rather
than defenfive armour, and the terriblenefs of their
appearance is fignified.

It is alfo faid, that out of the mouths of the hor-
fes ifllied fire, and fmoke, and brimftone. Thefe
three epithets, like the three colours of the breaft-
plates, probably intimate that thefe horfemen
ihould ufe fire arms, at leaft in their lateft attacks
upon the empire : A confiderable quantity of
brimftone is ufed in the compofition of gunpowder ;
and fire, and fmoke, with the fmell of brimftone, is
a moft natural fymbol of the appearance of the
mouth of a gun when it is difchargcd. That thefe
three fignify deftrudlive weapons, is ftiU farther
evident from verfe^ 1 8th, in which it is faid, " by
*' thefe three was the third part of men killed, bj

*' the

Vei. 13,-21. ON THE REVELATION. 313

"" the fire, and by the fmoke, and by the brim-
" ftone which iflued out of their mouths."

In the early periods of the world, fire arms were
unknown. The offenfive weapons by which men
attacked one another in their wars, were the fling
and the ftone, the bow and the arrow, the javelin,
the dart, the fword, and the fpear. During the pe-
riods in which thefe were the only offenfive wea-
pons, certain defenfive ones were alfo in ufe. Of
thefe, the breaft plate was a confiderable one.
After the invention and ufe of fire arms, the an-
tient coat of mail being found not to be proof a-
gainft powder and ball, was therefore laid a-
fide.

Fire arms were not invented for feveral hundred
years after the date of this book. But John, guided
by that Divine Spirit, to whom all times and things
paft, prefent, and future are ever prefent ; in this
hieroglyphic foretells the ufe of fire arms by thofe
armies defcribed in it, in their lateft engagements
with the European powers ; and alfo, that when
thefe fhould be invented, the ufe of breaft-plates or
defenfive weapons fiiould ceafe.

Thefe armies Ihould kill a great proportion of
the citizens of Rome, but they fhould not diffolve
their empire. They Ihould deftroy them in two
ways. Firft, by their mouths ; by which, like
lions and other beafts of prey, they Ihould, with o-
pen force and violence, deftoy and kill a great

Vol. L R r number

514 A COMxMENTARY Ch. IX.

number of the citizens of Rome. And fecondly, by
their tails ; by their fawning and flattery, by
which they inflill their falfe doctrines into their
minds.

Their tails are different from thofe of all others,
except fome of the mofl monftrous ferpents, for
their tails had heads : that is, in their religious
fyftem they fliould conned: infmuating manners
with open violence and bodily force. Thefe qua-
lities feidom metre in the fame character; their
connection is unnatural, but not more fo than
that of the parts which make up its fy mbol in this
hieroglyphic ; " for their tails were like unto fer-
" pents and had heads, and with them they do
" hurt."

Thefe armies of horfemen fhould appear not on-
ly as warriors, but alfo as teachers of religion.
They fliould teach their fyftem of religion not on-
ly by the moft inlintiating manners, artfully ad-
drefhng the ruhng pallions and prejudices of men ;
but when fuch artful methods proved unfuccefsful,
they fliould propagate their religion by the edge
of the fword, with all the force and violence of
war.

In the 20th and 2ifl verfes, we are informed
vhat effedts thefe calamities, by which a third part
of (the men) the citizens of Rome, Ihould be kil-
led, fliould have upon the reft of (the men) the ci-
tizens of Rome, who fhould farvive the 391 years

of

Ver. 13, 21. ON THE REVELATION. 3J

of tliefe dreadful calamities. — Judgements are in-
Aided on men for aggravated wickednefs, and they
ought to lead them to repentance. Theyfomc-
times accomplifli this beneficial purpofe, but this
iliould not be the cafe with the Roman people un-
der thefe calamities. *' The reft of the men re-
" pented not." Their fins are particularly enu-
merated, even thofe to which the citizens of Rome
fliould be addicted, and by which their charadler
fliould be marked at the time to which this pre-
didion relates. That they fhould continue in the
pradice of thefe, after the expiration of this pe-
riod ; notwithftanding all thofe wars, in which fo
great a proportion of their fellow citizens fnould
be killed.

The firfi: of thefe is idolatry. Their idolatry is
very particularly defcribed, as confifting in the
worfhip of demons or departed fpirits, idols of gold,
and of filver, brafs, ftone, and wood. The abfur-
dity and impiety of fuch idolatry, are expreflfed by
a declaration that thefe idols can neither fee, nor
hear, nor walk. The reft are their murders, their
forceries or magical tricks, by which, under the
name of miracles, they fliould impofe on the igno-
rant, the weak, and the prejudiced ; their forni-
cation; and their theft, by which, without giving
value for it, they fliould artfully feize on the pro-
perty of others.

The great events predicted under this trumpet,

were the long and dcftrudive wars brought upon

1^ r % the

31 6 A COMMENTARY Ch. IX.

the Roman empire by the Turks, the rife and pro-
grefs of the Mahometan religion, and the conti-
nuance of the church of Rome, after all thsfe ca-
lamities, in all that idolatry, and in all thofe vices
enumerated in thefe verfes, which marked their
character in that period in which they were har-
rafled by the Turkifli arms.

The various circumftances which attended thefe
events, exactly correfponded to thofe enumerated
in this hieroglyphical predidion. The relidence
of thefe Turkifh armies was upon the banks of
the river Euphrates. This great river was the
boundary between them and the Roman empire.
In the year 606, Mahomet began to pretend to
revelation. From that time till the year 622, he
formed his plan in a very fecret manner in a cave
near Mecca, and began to execute it in a private
and peaceable, but artful manner, in that town and
its neighbourhood, in the year 622, he fled for
fear of his life from the people of Mecca, enraged
at him for his impollure, to Medina, then called
Yatreb. From this flight of Mahomet, the hegira
or computation of time among the Mahometans be-
gins. Now it was that he told his difciples, that his
religion was not to be propagated by difputing, but
by fighting. Till the year 631 he was employed in
propagating his religion through Arabia ; and in
fubduing and uniting under his government, in one
great empire, all the icattered tribes of the Arabs.

Having

Ver. 13, — 21. OM THE REVSIATION. 317

Having founded a new religion and a very exten-
five empire, in the fpace of twenty three years,
he died the next year.

On the death of its founder, the Saracen empire
ivas in forae danger by a competition for the fac-
ceffion. But Abubeker fuppreffed feverai rebel-
lions, and fucceeded to Mahomet. In his fliort
reign of two years and a few months, he took feve-
rai towns belonging to the Greek emperor. He
was fucceeded by Omar, and Omar was fucceeded
by Othman. Under thefe heads of the Saracen
empire, a great part of the eaflern empire was
conquered ; but the weftern empire had hitherto
efcaped the invafions of thefe fierce and numerous
warriors. On the death of Othman, about the
year 655, a quarrel about the fucceffion railed np
intelline wars among the Saracens, by which a Hop
was put to all their foreign invalions. They were
thus bound up by their inteftine divilions and quar-
rels, during the reigns of Yefid, Moawiah the fe-
cond, Marwan, and Abdomehc, Caliphs of the Sa-
racens, for above forty years.

Thefe four caliphs were the four angels bound
on the river Euphrates. They were the heads of
thofe Saracens, who were the angels or melTengers"
of divine vengeance to the Roman empire, and
they were bound on the banks of the Euphrates, by
the chains of their own intelline divifions. It is
thus, by the fuperintendency of his providence, over

evefi

$l8 A COJVIMENTARy Cll. IX.

even the pafllons of men, "that God binds and loof-
es the warriors at his pleafare. " Surely the wrath
*' of man praifes God, and the remainder of his
" wrath he reftrains."

Near the end of the feventh century, moil pro-
bably about the year 699, the Saracens invaded
the weftern parts of Europe. We are alTured by
authentic hiftory, that they carried their invafions
into Spain in the year 714. For the period of
three hundred and ninety one years, the Saracens
harralTed the weftern parts of Europe in the mod
diflrefling manner, and poirelTed themfelves of a
great part of Spain, France, Italy, and Sicily.
Their invafions did not receive a full check, nor
were they repulfed from Sicily, the laft of their fet-
tlements :n Europe, until the year 1090 ; which
is exaclly 391 years from the year 699, the time
of their firft invafion of the weftern parts of Eu-
rope.

Had hiftorians been fuiTiciently precife in fixing
the exa6l day of the firft invalion of the Vv^eftern
world by the Saracens, and of their complete ex-
puifion from it ; moft certainly it would have ap-
peared that the period of their invafions of the
weftern world was exacftly three hundred and
ninety one years and fifteen days. Days are as
clearly forefeen by God as years, and that fame ir-
refiftible and almighty hand which loofed the ar-
mies of the Saracens on a fixed day, could bind

them

Ver. 13, — 21. ON THE REVELATION. 319

them on a fixed day. He who fays to the raging
fea, (Job xxxviii. 1 1.) " Hitherto Ihalt thou come,
*' but no farther ; and here ihall thy proud waves
" be flayed ;" with equal eafe, Pfalm Ixv. 7.
*' itilleth the noife of the feas, the noife of their
" waves, and the tumult of the people.*' He does
both without any miraculous interpolition, by the
fuperintendency of his providence over-ruling ordi-
nary means and fecond caufes.

Thefe armies which ifTued from the other fide of
the Euphrates into the weftern parts of Europe,
probably are ftiled four angels, not only becaufe
they were bound up by their inteiline divilions, du-
ring the reigns of four "caliphs ; but alfo, becaufe
during the period of 39 \ years, the fame people in
confequence of certain revolutions among them,
were known by the following /oz/r diftindl names,
the Arabs, the Saracens, the Turks, and the Otto-
man empire. The armies which they led into the
field, were remarkable for their number; and
chiefly for their cavalry ; and the Turks were e-
qually remarkable for their own fiercenefs, and that
of their horfes.

In thefe wars, they killed prodigious numbers of
the inhabitants of the weftern world. And they
raged againft them, chiefly on account of their i-
dolatry. Thefe warriors along with their arms
carried the Mahometan religion into the Roman
empire. That religion they propagated both by

the

32a A COMMENTARY Ch. IX.

the 1110(1 infinuating and artful adtlrefs, and alfo by
the edge of the fword. At the time of thefe inva-
sions, the church of Rome was remarkable for the
invocation of faints, the worlliipping of images, her
pretenfions to (feigned) miracles, and the vices of
her clergy. Notwithftanding all that Rome fuf-
fered from the Turks, fhe continued afterwards in
the pradlice of the fame idolatry and vices.

Of thefe events, a full account is given in
Prideaux's life of Mahomet, Ockley's hiftory of the
Saracens, Mariana's hiftory of Spain, and Mezerai's
hiftory of France, which hiftories the learned can
confult. Indeed thefe events are almoft univerfally
known. For the information of thofe who are not
much acquainted with hiftory, I fliall tranfcribe a
few paflages from Moflieim's Church Hiftory, in
which the chief of thefe events are narrated.

Vol. I. page 31^. " But a new and moft powerful
" enemy to the Chriftian caufe ftarted up in Arabia,
*' A. D. 642, under the reign of Heraclius. This was
" Mahomet, an ilhterate man, but endowed by na-
" ture with the moft flowing and attractive elo-
•' quence, and with a vaft and penetrating genius ;
" diftinguiftied alfo by the advantages he derived
" from the place of his birth, which added luftre
" to his name and his undertaking. This adven-
*' turous impoftor declared publicly, that he was
*• commiirioned by God to deftroy poletheifm and
♦* idolatry, and then to reform firft the religion of

the

Ver. 13,-21. ON THE REVELATIOI^. 32:

*' the Arabians, and afterwards the Jewifli and
•' Chriilian worflilp. For thefepurpofes he delivered
•' a new law, which is known by the name of the
" Koran or Alkoran, and having gained feveral
" viclories over his enemies, he compelled an in-
" credible number of perfons, both in Arabia and
*' the neighbouring nations to receive his doclrines,
" and to range themfelves under his ftandards. E-
" lated with this rapid and unexpeded fuccefs, he
'' extended yet farther his ambitious views, and
'' formed the vail and arduous proje6t of founding
" an empire. Here again fuccefs crowned his adven-
" turous efforts, and his plan v/as executed with
" fuch intrepidity and impudence, that he died
" mafler of all Arabia, befides feveral adjacent pro-
" vinces."

Page 316. "After the death of Mahomet,
*' which happened A. D. 632, his followers led
" on by an amazing intrepidity and a fanatical
" fury, and affifled, as we have alrisady obferved,
" by thofe Ghriftians whom the Greeks had treat-
" ed with fuch feverity, extended their conquells
" beyond the limits of Arabia, and fubdued Syria^
" Perfia, Egypt, and other countries under their
'' dominion. — The progrefs however of this tri-
" iimphant fed received a confiderable check by
•■' the civil diffent ion's which arofe among them im-
•■' mediately after the death of Mahomet."

Page 345. " In the year 714, the Saracens

■' croiTed the fea wliich feparates Spain from Af-

y ^. 1. S s rica.

32 2 A COMMENTARY Ch. iX.

" rica, difperfed the army of Roderic king of the
" Spanifli Goths, whofe defeat was principally
" due to the treachery of their general Julian,
** and made themfelves mailers of the greateft
•* part of the territories of this vanquifhed prince,
" About the fame time, the empire of the Vifigoths,
" which had fubfifled in Spain, above three hun-
" dred years, was totally overturned by thefe fierce
" andfavage invaders, who alfotookpofTeflionof all
*' the maritime coafts of Gaul from the Pyrenean
" mountains to the river Rhone, from whence
" they made frequent excurlions, and ravaged
" the neighbouring countries with fire and fword.
" The rapid progrefs of thefe bold invaders was,
" indeed, checked by Charles Martel, who gained
" a fignal vidory over them, in a bloody adion,
" near the city of Poitiers, A. D. 732. But the
" vanquifhed fpoilers foon recovered their flrength
*' and their ferocity, and returned with new vio-
" lence to their devaftations. This engaged
" Charlemagne to lead a formidable army into
" Spain, with a defign to deliver that whole
" country from the opprefUve yoke of the Sara-
*' cens; but, this grand enterprize, though it did
" not entirely mifcarry, was not, however, at-
*' tended with the fignal fuccefs, that was ex-
" peeled from it. The inroads of this warlike
" people, were felt by many of the weflern pro-
" vinces, belides thofe of France and Spain.

Several

\'er. 13, — 21. ON THE REVELATION. 323

" Several parts of Italy fufFered from their incur-
" fions ; the ifland of Sardinia was reduced under
*' their yoke, and Sicily was ravaged and oppreffed
" by them in the moft inhuman manner. Hence
*' the Chriflian religion, in Spain and Sardinia,
" fuffered inexpreffibly under thefe violent u-
** furpers."

Page 381. " The Saracens had now (in the
•' 9th century) extended their ufurpations, with
" an amizing fuccefs. Mailers of Alia, a few
" provinces excepted, they puflied their conquells
" to the extremities of India, and obliged the
" greateft part of Africa to receive their yoke ;
" nor were their cnterprizes, in the weft, without
" efled, fince Spain and Sardinia fubmitted to
*' their arms, and fell under their dominion.
" But their conquefts did not end here ; for, in
" the year 827, by the treafon of Euphemius,
"" they made themfelves mafters of the rich and
" fertile iiland of Sicily ; and, towards the con-
'* clufion of this century, the Alia tic Saracens
" feized upon feveral citiesof Calabria, and fpread
" the terror of their victorious arms, even to the
" very walls of Rome, while Crete, Corfica, and
*' other adjacent iflands were either joined to
" their poireilions or laid wafte by their incur-
" fions."

Page ^6y, " Sicily had been groaning under

^* T.he dominion of the Saracens lince the 9th

S s 2 '* centurv

3^4 A COMMENTARY Cll. l]\.

" century, nor bad the repeated attempts of the

? Greeks and Lathis to difpoflefs them of that

" rich and fertile country, been hitherto crowned

" wkh the defired fuccefs. But, in this century

" the face of affairs changed entirely in that if-

," land; for in the year 1059, R^hert Guifcard,

" who had formed a fettlement in Italy, at the

" head of a Norman colony, and was afterwards

" created Duke of Apulia, encouraged by the

" exhortation of the Roman pontiff, Nicholas II.

" and feconded by the alliftance of his brother

" " Roger, attacked with the greateft vigour and

" intrepidity the Saracens in Sicily ;, nor did

" this latterflieathe the victorious fword, before

" he had rendered himfelf mafler of that ifland;

" and cleared it abfolutely of its former tyrants.

" As foon as this great work was accompliflied,

" which was rot before the year 1090, Count Ro-

*' ger, not only reftored to its former glory and

" lurtre the Chriflian religion, which had been

" almoil to::alIy extinguiflied under the Saracen

" yoke, but alfo ellabliflied bifliopricks, &:c.

" throughout that province,"

Page 476. " 1 he Saracens in Spain, oppofed

*' the progrefs ofthegofpcl, in a ditTerent, vet

" Hill more pernicious way. They ufed all forts

" of methods to allure the Chrillians into the

" profeflion of Mahometanifm, alliances of mar-

" riage, advantageous contracls, flattering rc-

" wards

Ver. 13, — 21. ON THE REVELATION. 325

" wards were employed to feduce, them with too
" much fuccefs, for great numbers fell into thefe
" fatal fnares, and apoitatized from the truth.*'

During the whole period of this trumpet, from
the feventh to the eleventh century, the church
of Rome was ftrongly marked by all that idola-
try and fuperilition, and all thefe vices mention-
ed in verfes, 20 and 21, as the reader will fee, at
great length by looking, into Moftieim's Church
Hiflory on thefe centuries. From that hiftory
1 iliall ex trad only a few fhort palTages.

Century 7th, page 324. " In the earlier
" periods of the church, the worfhip of Chrillians
" was confined to the one fupreme God, and his
" fon Jefus Chrift ; but the Chriftians of this cen-
" tury multiplied the objects of their devotion,
" and paid homage to the remains of the true
" crofs, to the images of faints, and to bones,
" whofe real owners were extremely dubious."

Century 8, page 342. " The many and ftu-
*' pendous miracles, which are faid to have been
*' wrought by the Chriftian miffionaries, who
" were lent to convert the barbarous nations
•' have loft, in our times, the credit they obtained
" in former times. The corrupt difcipline, that
- then prevailed, admitted of thofe fallacious
' (tratagems, which are very improperly called
■' pious frauds ; nor did the heralds of the gofpei

think it at all unlawful to terrify or allure to

" the

yzG A COMMENTARY Ch. IX.

*« the profeffion of Chriftianity, by fiditious pro-
** digies, thofe obdurate hearts, which they could
" not fubdue by reafon and argument '*

Century 8, page 368. " Of all the controver-
" fies, which agitated and perplexed the Chriftian
" church, during this century, that which arofe
'• concerning the worfliip of images in Greece,
" and was carried from thence into both the eaft-
*' ern and weftern provinces, was the moft unhap-
" py and pernicious in its confequences."

Century 9th, page 389. " The impiety and
*' licentioufnefs of the greateft part of the clergy
*' arofe at this time to an enormous height, and
" ftand upon record, in the unanimous complaints
*' of the moft candid and impartial writers of the

" century. In the weftern provinces, the

*' bifhops were become voluptuous and effemi-
*' nate to a very high degree. They pafied their
" lives amidft the fplendour of colirts, and the
" pleafures of a luxurious indolence, which cor-
" rupted their tafte, extihguilhed their zeal, and
" rendered them uncapable of performing the fo-
" lemn duties of their function ; while the infe-
'' riour clergy were funk in licentioufnefs, mind[-
" ed nothing but fenfual gratifications, and in-
" feded with the moft heinous vices, the flock,
'•' whom it was the very bufinefs of their miniftry
"to preferve or deliver from the contagion of
" iniquity.'*

Cent.

Ver. 13, 21. ON THE REVELATICN. 327

Cent. ix. page 402. "The ignorance and cor-
" ruption that difhonoured the Chriftian church in
" this century, were great beyond meafure; and
*' were there no other examples of their enormity
" upon record than the fingle inflance of that ftu-
^' pid veneration that was paid to the bones and
" carcafes of departed faints, this would be fuffi-
" cient to convince us of the deplorable progrefs
" of fuperftition. This idolatrous devotion was
*' now confidered as the moil facred and momen-
" tous branch of religion, nor did any one
" dare to entertain the fmalleft hopes of finding
*' the Deity propitious before they had aflured
" themfelves of the protedion and interceffion of
•' fome one or other of the faintly order."

Cent. X. page 446. " To thofe who conlider the
" primitive dignity and the folemn nature of the
" minifterial charader, the corruptions of the cler-
" gy muft appear deplorable beyond all expref-
" fion. Thefe corruptions were mounted to the
*' mofh enormous height in that diftant period of
" the church, which we have now before us. Both
" in the eaftern and weilern provinces, the clergy
" were, for the moft part, compofed of a mod
" v/orthlefs fet of men, fliamefully illiterate and
" flupid, ignorant, more efpecially in religious
" matters, equally enflaved to fenfuality and fu-
" perdition, and capable of the moil abominable
" and flagitious deeds."

323 A COMlvIENTARY Ch. IX,

Page 452. " Befides the reproach ofthegrofT-
" eft ignorance which the Latin clergy in this cen-
" tury fo juftly deferve, they were alfo chargea-
" ble in a very heinous degree with two other o-
" dious and enormous vices, even concubinage
** and fimony, which the greateft part of the
" WTiters of thefe unhappy times acknowledge
" and deplore. As to the tirft of thefe vices, it was
" pradifed too openly to admit of any doubt."

Such is the juft but horrid pidure which the
hiftorians have drawn of the idolatries, fuperfti-
ticns and vices of the church of Rome, during the
period of the fixth trumpet. If John had lived in
that period, and written the hiftory of that church
in it, he would not have exprefled it in more exact
and comprehenfive terms than he has done in the
prophecy contained in verfes 20 and 21, which was
written fix hundred years before the commence-
ment of that period. John adds, that they repent-
ed not of their idolatry, nor of their vices. Whoever
looks into the hiftory of that church, in every
age from that period to the prefent one, fhall find
this predidion exadly accompliftied. The fad is
fo WjcU known, that it fcarcely ftands in need of
proof. I ftiall therefore produce only a very few
paftages from the hiftory of the i ith and 12th cen-
turies, the times immediately fucceding the termi-
nation of this period. Thofe who wifti for farther

fatisfadion.

Ver. Ig, — 21. ON THE REVELATION. 329

fatisfadion, will obtain it by confulting the hil-
torians in the following centuries.

Moflieim Hift. cent. xi. p. 485. " The records of
*' this century loudly complain of the vices that
" reigned among the rulers of the church, and in ge-
" neral among all the facerdotal orders; they alfo de-
" plore that univerfal decay of piety and difcipline
" that was the confequence of this corruption in a
*' fet of men who were bound to fupport by their
*' example, their authority, and their inftrudlion,
" the facred interefts of religion and virtue. The
" weftern biihops were no fooner elevated to the
" rank of dukes, counts, and nobles, and enrich-
" ed with ample territories, than they gave them-
*' felves up entirely to the dominion of pleafure and
" ambition, and wholly employed in difplaying
*' the magnificence of their temporal ftations, fre-
" quented the courts of princes, accompanied al-
" ways with a fplendid train of attendants and
" domefticS. The inferior orders of the clergy
" were alfo licentious in their own way, few of
*' them preferved any remains of piety and virtue,
" we might add, of decency and dil'cretion. While
" their rulers were wallowing in luxury, and bafk-
" ing in the beams of worldly pomp and fplendour,
*' they were indulging themfelves without the lead
" fenfe of fliame, in fraudulent practices, in im-
" pure and lafcivious gratifications, and even in the
*' commiflion of the mofl flagitious crimes.

Vol. I. ■ T t Page

33^ A COMMENTARY Ch. IX.

Page 525. " It is not necellary to draw at fall
" length the hideous porriait of the religion of this
*' age. It may eafily be imagined that its features
" were full of deformity, when we confider that
" its guardians were equally deftitute of knowledge
*' and virtue, and that the heads and rulers of the
'' Cliriftian church, inllcadof exhibiting models of
*' piety, held forth in their conduct fcandalous ex-
*' amplcs of the moil flagitious crimes. The peo-
*' pie were funk in the grolTeft fuperftition, and em-
*' ployed all their zeal in the worfliip of images
*' and relids, and in the performance of a trifling
*' round of ceremonies, which were impofed up-
*' on them by the tyranny of a defpotic piieil-
" hood."

Cent xii. page 571. " Wherever we turn our
" eyes among the various ranks and orders of the
*' clergy, we perceive in this century the moft fla-
•' grant marks of licentioufnefs and fraud, igno-
" ranee, and luxury, and other vices whole perni-
*' cious efleds were deeply felt both in church and
** Hate. If we except a very fmall number who
" retained a fenfe of the fandity of their vocation-,
*' and lamented the corruption and degeneracy of
*' their order, it may be faid with refpect to the reft,
•' that their whole buflnefs was to fatisfy their lufts,
" to multiply their privileges by grafping perpe-
*' tually at new honours anddiftinolions, to increafe

" tlicif

Ver. 13, 21. ON THE REVELATION. 33 1

*' their opulence, to diminifli the authority, and to
" encroach upon the privileges of princes and ma-
" giftrates, and negleding entirely the interefts of
" religion and the care of fouls, to live in eafe and
" pleafure, and to draw cut their days in an un-
" manly and luxurious indolence.

Page 593. " When we confider the multitude
" of caufes which united their influence in obfcur-
" ing the luftre of genuine Chriftianity, and cor-
" rupting it by a profane mixture of the inven-
^* tions of fuperftitious and defigning men with
*' its pure and fublime doclrines, it will appear fur-
" prifmgthat the religion of Jefus was not totally
" extinguiflied. All orders contributed, though
*' in different ways, to corrupt the native purity of
" religion. The Roman pontiffs led the way, they
*' would not fuffer any docT:rines that had the
" fmallell tendency to diminifli their defj^^otic au-
" thority; but obliged the public teachers to in-
*' terpret the precepts of Chrillianity in fuch a
" manner as to render them fubfervient to the fup»
*' port of Papal dominion and tyranny. This or-
" der was fo much the more terrible, in that
"fuch as refufed to comply with it, and to force
*' the words of fcripture into fignifications totally
" oppohte to the intention of its divine Author ;
*' fuch, in a word, as had the courage to place the
" authority of the gofpel above that of the Roman
T t 3 " pontiffs,

332 A COMMENTARY Ch. IX.

" pontiffs, and to confider it as the fupreme rule of
*' their conduct, were anfwered with the formida-
" ble arguments of fire and fword, and received
" death in the moft cruel forms, as the fruit cf
•* their lihcerity and refolution."

CHAP.

Ver, i: on th? revelation. 33,^

CHAP. X.
VISION IV.

Verfes ly?, 2^, 3^. A ^^ ^ ^^"^ another
• -^ ^ mighty angel come
down from heaven,clothed with a cloud, and a
rainbow was upon his head, and his face was
as it were the fun, and his feet as pillars of
fire. And he had in his hand a little book o-*
pen : and he fet his right foot upon the fea,
and his left foot on the earth. And he cried
with a loud voice, as when a lion roareth :
and when he had cried^ feven thunders ut-
tered their voices.

This chapter and the following one to verfe
r3th, contain an account of the fourth viuon which
John faw. In the following part of this book are
recorded the prophecies which were contained in
that part of the book which Chrifl: opened, which
extends from the feventh feal to the end of the roll.
And this chapter is an introdudion to that part of
jhis book.

334 A COtHMENTARY Ch. X.

The angel whom John faw here, is Jefus ChriH
the angel of the covenant All the lines in this
hieroglyphic unite in forming the true features of
his character: and they form features which can
agree to no other charadler.

He is ftiled a " mighty or powerful angel." In
his divine nature, Chrifl: is omnipotent; and in his
mediatorial character, " all power in heaven and in
" earth is given unto him.'* He comes down from
heaven, " for verily the Word was made tiefh, and
" dwelt among us.'*

He is "clothed with a cloud," becaufe the Chrif-
tian church, the myftical body of Chrift Ihall be
under a thick cloud, during the long period of Pa-
pal tyranny, for 1 243 years; to which thii chap-
ter is an introdudion.

*' A rainbow was upon his head," to fignify,
that the church (hould not be totally drowned by
the deluge which fhould proceed from that cloud,
but that Chrift Ihould remember his covenant,
•' that his church is built upon a rock, and that the
" gates of hell fliall never prevail againft it."

" His face wasas it were the fun." All created an^
gels are like the ftars only, becaufe their light or
knowledge is derived fromGod,rhecenterand fource
of allintelligence and wildom; but Chrift is like the
fun, his luftre is underived, it is inherent, becaufe
he i-s divine. " \\''e beheld his glory, the glory as

♦' of

Ver. 1,2,3. ON THE REVELATION. 3g5

" of the only begotten of the Father, full of grace
" and truth."

" And his feet as pillars of fire," to mark the
perfect parity of his fteps, even in the moil trying
iitLiations in this world. In chap, i r 5. it is faid
of Chrift, that " his feet are like unto fine brafs, as
" if they burned in a furnace ;" and in verfe i6th,
" his countenance was as the fun fliineth in his
" ftrength." Thefe are two of the fymbols in this
hieroglyphic.

He is faid to "cry as a lion roreth." A beaft of
prey is the hieroglyphic for a temporal king or king-
dom. The lion is the king of the forcft ; hence, it is
the fymbol of Chrift in the character of the tem-
poral governor of the world. " Tfie king of kings
*' and Lord of Lords." The angel mentioned in this
chapter is lliled a ftrong angel, and is faid to cry
with a loud voice like a lion, alfo, to fhew that
he is the fame p.erfonage who in chap, v and 5, is
filled, " The lion of the tribe of Juda," to whom
the fealed book was delivered, and who opened
it ; and, that the little book now in his hand is
the lad part of that fame book.

" He had in his hand, a little book open.'*^
The word, which in our tranflation is open, is,
in the original o-MuyyAyov, which fignifies opened.
By this expreflion, it is intimated that this little
book had not been dehvered open to this angel
originally; but that it had been opened by

him.

33^ A COMMENTARY Ch. X,

him, before the time John faw it in his hand,
m this fourth vifion. In a former vifion, chap. v.
John faw a book in the hand of God, written
within, and on the back fide, and fealed with
feven feals : be faw Jefus Chrift, ftiled the lion of
the tribe of Juda, receive the book from the
hand of God, and he was afllired that none but
Jefus could open that book ; and, that he both
could and would open it. In chap. vi. he informs
lis that Jefus opened fix of the feals of that book ;'
and he tells us what was contained under each
of thefe feals. In chap. viii. he informed us that
he opened the feventh leal, but he hath not yet
told us all that is contained under that feal.
Hence, the ht'tle boek opened in the hand of
Chrifl:, is that part of the large book, which he.
received, as in chap. v. and which he had opened
as in chap vi. and viii, which comprehends the
whole of that part of the roll, that extends from
the feventh feal to the end of the roll.

It was formerly fliewn that the book fealed
with feven feals, was the prophecy concerning
the rife, height, and downfal of the Roman em-
pire under all its various forms of government,
and the fuiferings and triumph of the church of
Chriil in this world ; the outlines of which Da-
niel had drawn in his prophecies ; but, which he
was commanded to feal up to the time of the
end. But many of thefe things have not yet

been

Ver. I, 2, 3, ON THE REVELATION. 337

been revealed under the firft fix feals ; whereas,
they follow hi their regular order in the follow-
ing chapters of this book. And thefe chapters
are the things which are contained in this open-
ed book, both of which fliall appear as we pro-
ceed*. Hence, this little opened book is that part,
of the roll, which v/as unfolded by the opening
of the feventh feal.

•' He fet his right foot upon the fea, and his
-' left foot upon the earth." The fea is the fymbol
for great multitudes of people, in a fludtuating
and unfetlled Hate, and the earth is the fymbol
for the Roman empire, as was formerly fiiewn.
When a man walks or leaps, his right foot is
placed before his left, is the firft which is lifted
up; and, confequently is the firft, which is put
down again upon the ground. By Chrift's fetting his
right foot upon the fea, and his left fopt upon the
earth, it is declared that the fcene of the events
to which this chapter is introductory fliall be firil
a fliicluating and unfettled ftate, and feCondly, a
fettled and, regularly conftituted ftate of the wef-
tern world. The fuft of thefe was that, in which
the Roman empire, overrun and overturned by
the irruption of the barbarous nations, was dif-
folved, for a conliderable time, and the inhabi-
tants of the weftern world were in a mod flu6lu-
atmg and unfettled (late. And the fecond was
that, in which the Roman empire was reftored
Vol. 1. U u and

3D

8 A COMMENTARY Ch. X.

and renewed under the papal, the laft of the fe-
ven forms of Roman government.

In the firft of thefe fituations, the weftern
world was at the commencement of the fixth trum-
pet, and indeed from the fifth century, to the
year 756. Upon the laft of thefe, the Roman
empire entered in that year, in which it hath ftill
continued, and fliall continue until the 1243
years from the year 756 fhall be accomplifhed.
Thefe things fliall be clearly fliewn in the expli-
cation of the particular predidions in the follow-
ing chapters, to which this, exprefled in general
terms, is only introdudory.

" Seven thunders uttered theirvoices." Thun-
ders and lightnings fignify violent and deftruftive
wars. The wars carried on by the Turks, under
the fixth trumpet were violent, continued long,
and were carried to the very foot of the walls of
Rome : Rome itfelf, in the period referred to in
this hieroglyphic, fell into the hands of the bar-
barians, and ceafed to be the feat of government.
That proud city, which had long been regarded
as the miflrefs of the world, was reduced to the
humiliating fituation of a fmall dukedom under
the authority of the Exarchate of Ravenna, on
which accounts thefe wars were, with propriety
reprefented by thunders. When fo many bar-
barous nations overran and overturned the Ro-
man empire, and when the city of Rome itfelf

ceafed

Ver. 4,-7. ON THE REVELATION. 339

ceafed to be a feat of government, it was natural
for thofe, who lived in thefe days, to conclude
that- the laft revolution of the Roman empire had
taken place, and that Rome fhould no more
be named among the kingdoms of the world.
They certainly did not entertain the leafl: expec-
tation that flie {hould rife again in a new form, to
be a more imperious miftrefs of the world, than
Ihe had ever formerly been in the days of her
greateft power, pomp and glory. But he, by
whom kings reign, forefaw that this was not to be
the final overthrow of Rome, and therefore, did
not allow his prophet John, to write down at
this time, the voices of thefe thunders.

Verfes ^th, ^thy 6th, nth, " And when the
feven thunders had uttered their voices, I was
about to write : and I heard a voice
from heaven, faying unto me. Seal up
thofe things which the feven thunders ut-
tered, and write them not. And the an-
gel which 1 faw fland upon the fea, and up-
on the earth, lifted up his hand to heaven,
and fware by him that liveth for ever and
ever, who created heaven, and the things
that therein are, and the earth, and the
things that therein are, and the fea and the
things which are therein, that there fliould
be time no longer ; but in^ the days of the

voice

340 A COMMENTARY Ch, X,

voice of the feventli angel, when he fliall
begin to found, the myftery of God fliould
be finiflied, as lie hath declared to his fer-
vants the prophets."

The thunders are called feven, to fignifv that
the wars predicted by them fliould be complete,
fuch as finifli. For that is the fymbolical mean-
ing of feven. Tnefe wars, in one fenfe complet-
ed the overthrow of Rome, in its heathen itate ;
and, in another fenfe they were the types oi^
thofe wars which, under the feventli trumpet
lliall complete its final overthrow.

" I was about to write." By this exprellion,
John declares that he confidered thefe thunders
as the whc4e thunders foretold chap. viii. 5.
which were to be accompanied with lightnings
rrnd an earthquake, and was jufl about to write
them down accordingly. In this way, John fore-
tells, what the opinion of men in general fliould
be of thefe wars, when they fliould happen. When
they fliould fee Rome overthrown by them ;
they fliould conclude that it is the lall revolution of
Rome ; and, that the empire Qiould rife no more.
Such in facT: was the cfMiclufion many drew from
tliefe incurfions of the barbarous nations, which
p'ut an end to the Pvoman government under its
iixth head, that of the emperors.

There have not been wanting fome, who in lat-

tCi

Ver. 4, — 7. o>f the revelation". 341

ter times have reprefented that overthrow of
Rome as the one foretold in this book, bj the o-
verthrow of the lall head of Rom.an government,
that thus they might fcreen the head of Papal go-
vernment. The entertaining, or at leaft publifli-
ing this opinion, is a confirmation of the truth of
this prophecy, fmce it is intimated in thefe words
of John, that they fliould do fj. But the follow-
ing parts of this paiTage declare, that fach an opi-
nion is erroneous, for the total and final overthrow
of Rome was to be long pofterior to the time when
the imperial government fliould be dedroyed by
thefe wars of the barbarous nations.

•' And I heard a voice from heaven," 8zc. Thefe
wars however deftruftive to the imp*erial govern-
ment of Rome, fliould not be the wars which fliall
finally overthrow the Roman empire in that lafi
head of it, which, fo far as Rome is concerned, is
the principal object of this prophecy. It fliall be.
overthrown by wars, of which, in many refpects,
thefe are ftriking types. The armies who diilolv-
ed the Roman empire in its imperial ftate, firfi
came from the other fide of the Euphrates, chap,
ix. 1 4, and thefe which fliall finally overthrow'
Pvome in its Papal flate, fliall alfo come from the
other fide of the Euphrates, chap. xvi. 12, — 21,
Thofe armies totally dedroyed the Roman empire
under its imperial form, and thefe fliall totally de-
flroy ir under its papal form. Imperial Rom^ was

defiroyed

34^ A COMMENTARY Ch. X.

deftroyed by thofe inen, upon whom in the pride
of her civil elevation fhe looked down with con-
tempt as barbarians ; and Papal Rome fhall be fi-
nally overthrown by thofe men, upon whom in her
religious pride and vain infallibility, fhe had look-
ed down as barbarians, (heretics), in point of reli-
gion.

But the refemblance of thefe wars to thofe by
which Papal Rome fnall be finally overthrown,
Ihall be more evident, when the time for that
great event fhall come. When that time fhall
come, and when the great antitype of thefe fealed
thunders or wars fhall appear, is declared in ver-
fes 5th, 6th, and yth.

A wrong tranflation of the lafl claufe of verfe
6th hath rendered the true meaning of thefe ver-
fes undifcoverable by thofe perfons who are unac-
quainted with the Greek language. In our tranf-
lation is is faid, " That there fhould be time no
*' longer." The words in the original are, or/ x/""«^
c-Jjt £>«< irt. The real meaning of which is, " That
•* the time fhall not he yet.'' Jefus having com-
manded John to feal up thefe thunders, and not to
W' rite them down as a predidion of the final over-
throw of Rome, affigns as the reafon of this prohi-
bition, that the time of its final overthrow fliall not
be yet, but that it fliould come when the feventh
angel fhould found his trumpet. Thus, Chrift in
the molt folemn manner declared, that the time of

the

Ver. 4, — 7. ON the revelation. 343

the final overthrow of Rome Ihould not be at the
period when the imperial government ceafed. In
predicting this, he folemnly appeals to the true
God, " to him that liveth for ever and ever, who
" created heaven and the things that therein are,
" the earth and the things that therein are, and
" the fea and the things which are therein."

By the manner of this appeal to God, he inti-
mates the following things. Firft, th^t when im-
perial Rome Ihall be totally overthrown by the
barbarous nations, it fhall be exceedingly difficult
to convince men, that Rome is not then finally o-
verthrown. Such a folemn alTeveration is ufed
only when men will not credit a limple alTertion,
Second, the certainty and truth of this prediclion :
for an oath is the lafl thing to which men refort, to
make witnefTes tell the truth. Third, however dif-
ficult it may be, and to men it may appear impolli-
ble, thatPvome Ihould rife again, after having been
buried fo long and fo deep under her own ruins, and
iliould after all be overthrown with a much more
terrible deftru£lion ; yet all thefe difficulties fliould
Jieither prevent nor retard the accomplifhment of
this prediclion. For it was made in the name, and
fiiall be accompliflied by the power of him who
is prefent at all times and in all places, who creat-
ed the heaven, the earth, the feas and the fullnefs
thereof. Certainly he, who raifed Rome from the
narrow and rude foundation laid by Romulus and

Remus

344 ^ COMMZNTARY Ch» X«

Remus to the height of her mipeiial gieatiiefs, and
who completely overthrew her by the incurlions of
the barbarous nations, could raife her from theft;
ruins to the fummit of Papal magnificence and au-
thority, and as eafily overthrow her at the found
of the trumpet of the feventS angel, never to rife
jnore. lie who made worlds out of nothing, andean
by dilTolving their elements make them torufliinto
their original chaos, can never be at a lofs to raife
Papal Rome out of the long mouldered dull of im-
perial Rome, and in his appointed time diiTolve Pa-
pal Rome, never more to be reftored. He who
liveth for ever ^nd ever can exert as great power
in any future time, and in any place, as he hath
exerted in any time that is paft.

Let it be obferved here, that it is Chrift that
raifed Rome from her ruins, preferves her Hill from
final deftruction, and fliall preferve her till the days
of the voice of the feventh angel. For it was he who
fware', " that the time of her final overthrow fiiould
" not be yet." If he had not mad-* this declara-
tion, file mufi have finally perifiied when over-
thrown by the barbarous nations. But the fimie
interpofition of Chrifi ^vhich hath certainly reviv-
ed^ and which ftill preferves her, fiiall as certain-
ly overthrow her at the predicted time. Ye vo-
taries of Rome I learn hence no more to rage a-
gainfi Chriit and his true worfiiippers, for to him
vou are indebted for all thofe tilings. in wliich you

glory,

Ver. 4, — 7. ON the revelation. 349

glory, and for your very exigence as a hierarchy.
If he had not hfted up his hand to heaven, and de-
clared that the time of your deftriiction Ihould not
be yet, all the powers of hell and earth could not
have revived or fupported you. Learn too to kifs
the Son lead he be angry, and ye perifli when he
lliall lift up his rod of iron. Ye Froteilant Chrif-
tians, who have fometimes more zeal than know-
ledge, think it not ftrange that Rome {till conti-
nues. Who can totally overthrow her, fo long as
that divine Jefus who preferves you preferves her
alfo ? Though you cannot now fee all the rea-
fons why Chrift preferves Papal Romefo long, you
may be certain that they are good ones, for he al-
ways adls on the beft reafons. Imitate not that
church, in attempting to deftroy her by fire and
fword. You can no more deftroy her till the days of
the voice of the feventh angel, than flie can at any
time deftroy the church of Chrift ; and for the
fame reafon, becaufe Chrift hath fworn that the
time of her deftrudtion is not yet. Remember
too, that the weapons of your warfare are not car-
nal but fpiritual. While you put on the whole de-
fenfive armour of God, of which you have an in-
ventory in Ephefians vi. 14,-— 17. lift up no other
offenlive weapon againft Rome, or all your other
fpiritual enemies, than the fword of the Spirit,
which is the word of God. Indulge not a fecret
wifti that fire may come down from heaven and
deftroy thefe men, leaft Chrift Ihould rebuke you
Vol. I. X X as

34^ A COMMENTARY Cll. X,

as Hg once did two of his difciples, when they aik-
ed permiflio.n from him to call down fire from hea-
ven to deftroy the Samaritan idolaters for rejecting
Chrift, and for their averfion to Jerufalem, fay-
ing unto them, " Ye know not what man-
" ner of fpirit ye are of; for the Son of man is
" not come to deftroy men's lives, but to fave
" them." — Let us now return to the narrative.

When the imperial government was overthrown,
Rome ceafed for fome hundred years to be a feat
of government, and for all that time was not rank-
ed among the kingdoms of the world. During that,
time, the men of the world concluded that it
fliould never more rife to the rank of a kingdom.
But Jefus folemnly foretold that it fhould, and his
words cannot fail Since that time, Rome became
again the feat of government, and for a long time
under the Papal head, fwayed a more extenfive
and defpotic fceptre than ever imperial Home had
done in all her boafted greatnefs. Rome ftill ex-
ifts as a kingdom, and is ftill the feat of govern-
ment, for the time fixed by Ghrift for her final o-
verthrow is not yet come. That time, Chrift tells
us, fliall not come till the feventh angel founds
his trumpet.

What period of time correfponds to the days of
the feventh angel, fhall be lliewn in its proper
place in the commentary on chap. xi. 15, — 19.
Let it be obfervcd only here in general, that it is

yet

Ver. 4, — 7. ON the revelatioi?. 347

yet above 200 years to that time. Hence Rome is
not yet overthrown, and fhall not be till that time
come.

In the days of the feventh angel, the thunders
which are now fealed up fhall be loofed from their
feal. Then the wars which Ihall finally over-
throw Rome fhall arife ; and the kings of the call
fliall crofs the Euphrates, to execute the judge-
ments of God upon Papal Rome. Accordingly,
chap. xi. 19. under the feventh trumpet it is faid,
" There were lightenings, and voices, and thun-
** derings, and an earthquake, and great hail."

It is faid, that "when the feventh angel fliall be-
gin to found, the rayftery of God fhall be finilbed."
in I Corinthians ii. 7, — 1 6. that true religion of Je-
fus, which the Spirit of God only efFedlually teaches
to the mind, and the true nature and excellency of
which thofe only perceive who are renewed in the
fpirit of their minds, by the Spirit of God, is filled
a myflery. In Rom. xi. 25, — 36. the infidelity of
the Jews, the bringing in of the fullnefs of the
Gentiles, and the converfion of the Jews, are ilil-
ed a myftery. In 2 ThefT. ii. 7. all that ambition,
fuperftition, and tyranny, which characlerife the
Papal hierarchy, ar e filled a myilery. All thefe
are comprehended under the myilery of God ;
as is evident from thofe things which are actually
unfolded under the feventh trumpet, chap. xi.
J15, — 19. All thefe are great myileries. They
X X 2 are

348 A COMMENTARY Ch. X.

are declared to be niyfteries by God himfelf, in
the facred fcriptures. They are great myfteries
under the moral government of God. That a re-
ligion fo true, fo pure, fo excellent as the Chriftian,
fhouid be negledled, mifunderftood, and defpifed
by fo many; that fo few, comparatively fpeaking,
ihould be renewed by the Spirit of God in the
fpiril of their minds; that the Jews, the antient
people of God, fliould remain fo long in a flate of
infidelity ; that thofe who profefs a great regard
for Mofes^and the prophets fliould not believe in
Jefus, of Vvhom Mofes and the prophets teftified ;
that they fliould for fo long a time remain diftincl
from all the nations of the earth, and yet live in
no country as a diftincl nation ; that it fliould be
fo many hundred years before all the Gentile na-
tions fliould be converted to that divine religion,
whofe very doctrines prove it to be of God, and
which calls upon men only to be wife, to be good,
and to be happy, whilft it offers them the beft
means and aids for becoming fo ; that fuch a hie-
rarchy of fuperftition, icblatry, worldly pomp, and
perlecution as the church of Rome exhibits,
fliould arife in the world, bear the name of Chrif-
tian, and continue for fo many hundred years ;
that after fo many hundred years, the overthrow
of that hierarchy, the bringing in of the fullnefs
of the Gentiles, the converfion of the Jews, and
that uncommonly great influence of the Spirit of

God

Ver. 4,-7. ON THE REVELATION. 349

God upon the minds of men, in renewing them,
making them clearly perceive the truth and ex- /
cellency of the gofpel of Jefiis and heartily em-
brace it, fliould all happen at the fame time, are ^
great niyfteries. Thefe are myfteries under the
moral government of God. Thefe are myfteries,
at many of the reafons of which we might hazard
many probable conjedures, if to do fo were right ;
but all the reafons of which fnall fully appear to no
man, until the days of the voice of the feventh angel,
when this rayftery of God fhail be finifhed. When
Antichrift fhall be finally overthrown, when the fuU-
nefs of the Gentiles fhali be brought in, the Jews,
feeing that Cinift's kingdom is triumphant over
4he Roman empire and all the other kingdoms of
the world, fhall receive him as their fpiritualking;
and v/hen the religion of Jefus, in its fcriptural
and divine purity, fnall become univerfal and tri-
umphant in the world, then fhall it clearly appear,
that ail thefe myfteries arofe from the w'ifeft and
beft reafons. Then fhall the contemplation of,
thefe prediclions and events improve the heads
and the hearts of men, and fill their mouths with
fongs of praife to that God, all whole works, even
the moft myfterious, are done in wifdom.

That the myftery of God fliould not be finifli-
ed till the voice of the feventh angel, is a declara«
tion exadly agreeable to the predidions of the pro-
phets who wrote on this fubjed, before John wrote

this

350 A COMMENTARY Ch. X.

this book. Thus, Daniel chap. vii. 23, — 27. ex-
prelly declares, that it (hall be a time and times
and half a time, from the day in which the faints
of the Moll: High Ihall be delivered into the hands
of the laft head of the Roman government, to the
day, in which the myftery of God fhall be finifli-
ed, that is, the fpace of i 243 years. It Ihall after-
wards be ftiewn in its proper place, that that fpace
of time fliall rim down exadly to the days of the
voice of thefeventh angel. The fame thing is fore-
told by the apoftle Paul in Rom. xi. 25, — 26. and in
2 Thcffii. I, — 10. Let us here obferve and admire
the exad correfpondence among the writers of fa-
cred fcripture ; a correfpondence which proves, that
tht-y all wrote under the infpiration of the fame
unerring fpirit of God; a correfpondence, which,
by comparing one of them with another, leads
the candid and ftudious mind to their real mean-
ing.

Ver/es Sth^ 9/^, joth. — And the voice
which I heard fronci heaven, fpake unto me
again, and faid, Go, and take the little book
which is open in the hand of the angel
which ftandeth upon the fea, and upon the
earth. And I went unto the angel, and faid
unto hin>, Give me the Httle book. And he
faid unto me, Take it, and eat it up 5 and it

fhall

Ver. 8, — 10. on the revelation. 351

fhall make thy belly bitter, but it fliall be in
thy mouth fvveet as honey. And 1 took the
little book out of the angel's hand, and ate it
up ; and it was in my mouth fweet as ho-
ney : and as foon as 1 had eaten it, my belly
was bitter.

John is commanded to take the little opened
book which is in the hand of Chriil, and eat it up.
And he takes it, and eats it wholly up As the
food of the body muft be eaten before it can af-
ford any nourifliment to the body ; hence, to llore
up and digeft knowledge in the mind, which is the
food of the foul, is expreffed in the fymbolical lan-
guage by eating. This fymbol is very common in
prophetic writings, and its meaning is uniformly
the fame. To eat words, is to know their mean-
ing, flore them up in our memory, and apply them
to their proper ufe. Jerem. xv. 16. " Thy words
" were found, and I did eat them." To eat a roll
or book, is to ftudy it diligently, ftore up its mean-
ing in our memory, and digeft it fully : iizek. iii.
I. *' Moreover he faid unto me, Son of man, eat
" that thou findeft ; eat this roll, and go and fpeak
•' unto the houfe of Ifrael."

When all the fix preceeding feals were open-
ed in their order, John faw what was written up-
on thofe parts of the roll, which were unfolded

by

352 A COMMENTARY Ch. X.

by the opening of thefe feals, and he related ex-
actly what he had feen written upon them.
When this feventh feal was opened, he read and
confidered this little book, digefted fully its mean-
ing, and narrated the contents of it, at great
length, in fymbolical language, in many of the
following chapters of this book.

V/hen he eat this book, it was fweet as honey
in his mouth ; but it was afterwards bitter in his
belly. The acquifition of knowledge' is pleafant.
There is a natural curiofity in man, which makes
him pry into futurity with keennefs and pleafure,
and renders every difcovery pleafant at firft,
merely becaufe it is new. Great are the charrns
of novelty to a mind fo conftituted, that what it
knows bears little proportion to what it knows
not. But, after it is attained, the knowledge of
futurity is often diRrelTing to the mind. The
knowledge of all the calamities and viciflitudcs
of his life at one view, before they adually ap-
proached him, w'ould diftrefs and overwhelm the
llrongeil of men. The foreknowledge of the
v/ickednefs which, to fuch a degree, and for fo
great a length of time, fhould prevail in the
world, under the reign of fuperdition, idolatry,
and tyranny, of the perfecutions and calamities,
to which the faints, of whom the world was not
worthy, fliould be expofed fo long, muft certain-
ly imbitter and diftrefs the mind of John. The

publication

Ver. 8, — lo. ©n the revelation. 353

publication of truth, alfo, is often the occafion of
imeafinefs to the publiflier. Men blinded by pre-
judice, guided by worldly intereft, and flitiiulated
by paffion, too often treat their bed friends as
their enemies ; for telling them the truth. A
Paul was obliged, Gull iv. xvi, thus, to exclaim,
*' Am 1 therefore become your enemy, becaufe I
" tell you the truth."

In particular, the writing of the things contain-
ed in that little book or roll, which John (tored up
in his mind, Ihould draw much odium upon his
memory ; and lead many to call in queftion his
infpiration, rather than admit the truth of pro-
phecies, which draw their true character in thofe
deformed features, which fo exadly agree to the
life. And he, who, having with pleafure to him-
felf ftudied and digefted them, fliall be fo honelt,
fo bold, and fo friendly as to explain in clear and
unequivocal terms, their true meaning, mud draw
upon himfelf much odium and mifreprefentation
from thofe, who are painted in certain colours in
this book. Though, with the benevolence of a
Chrillian, he fhould tell them the truth from the
bed motives, and Ihould pray as well as write for
their bell intereft ; milled by prejudice ; world-
ly intereft or paffion. they would treat him as an
enemy. They would thus afford him another op-
portunity of imitating the mafter whom he leives,
who when reviled, reviled not agam, and who

Vol. I. y y prayed

354 A COMMENTARY Ch. X.

prayed for his unprovoked and relentlefs foes,
" Father forgive them, for they know not what
they do,'* But none of thefe confiderations muft
hinder John from prophecying, nor his commen-
tators from explaining unpalatable truths. For
Chriil, notwithftanding that bitternefs, commands
him to prophecy again.

Verfe nth. — And he faid unto me, thou
muft prophecy again before many peoples,
and nations, and tongues, and kings.

In the preceding part of this book, John had
prophecied before one great people only ; the
Romans, Tiiey were the mailers of the then
known world. At leafl, the Roman empire was
the only monarchy, known in prophecy, at that
time, exifling in the world. It was the fourth
beaft in Daniel's prophecy. But, in the periods
to which the following parts of this book relate,
the ftate of the world fhould be very different.
It was not to conlift of one univerfal empire, like
the antient Roman ; called in this book the earth ;
nor, was it like the -firft incurfions ot the barba-
rous nations, to be in fo unfettled and fluduating
a Hate, as to be denominated the fea. But it
fhould conlift of many difiind and cftablifhed na-
tions and kingdoms independent of each other;

whofa

Ver. I r. on the revelati on. 355

whofe inhabitants fhould fpeak different langua-
ges.

This ftate of the world, in this period of its
hiftory, was predided by Daniel, in that fhort
iketch which he drew of this book, Dan. vii. 24,
" And the ten horns out of this kingdom are ten
" kings that fhall arife." Thefe many peoples, and
nations, and tongues, and kings, did in fad arife
at the time the laft head of Roman government,
the papal, took for its feat, the ancient city of
Rome. Europe hath ever lince that day, been
divided ; and flill is divided into many peoples,
and nations, and tongues, and kings. Their lan-
guages, and the conftitutions of their governments
are as different, as the defcriptions of them in
this verfe are. The form of government of
fome of them is republican, ililed peoples; of
fome monarchical, ftiled kings ; and of others mix-
ed, ftiled nations; and the languages which
they fpeak, differ more from one another than
their forms of government do. To all thefe mo-
dern European kingdoms, the predictions in the
following part of the book, relate in certain ref-
pedts, as fhall appear as we proceed, fo that, on
this account, John is faid to prophecy before
them.

CHAP.

35^ A COMMENTARY Ch. XL

CHAP. XI.

VISION V.

Verfes^ ly?, 2d, . A ND there was given mc
^ ^ a reed like unto a rod ;
and the angel flood, faying, Rife, and meafure
the temple of God, and the altar, and them
that worfhip therein. But the court which
is without the temple, leave out, and meafure
it not ; for it is given unto the Gentiles : and
the holy city fhall they tread under foot for-
ty and two months.

This chapter, by the fymbols of meafuring the
temple, of the two vvitnefles prophecying in fack-
cloth 1260 days, of the Gentiles treading the holy
city under their feet 42 months ; of the beaft af.
cending out of the bottomlefs pit, making war
with the two witnefles, and of the opening of the
temple of God in heaven, prefents us with a very
comprehenfive view of the fituation of Chrift's
church, for the fpace of 1243 years.

The temple was the flated place of public worfliip

among

Ver. I', i, ON the revelation. 357

among the Jews.— -Jerufalem, the city in which this
temple flood, and to which the tribes of Ifrael went
up three times in the year, to worfliip God at their
great feafts, was therefore ftiled the holy or con-
fecrated city. Hence, in the fymbolical language
the temple fignifies the true church of God, and
Jerufalem or the holy city, the external and even
civil privileges, which are fometimes conned:cd with
it; but of which it may be deprived without any
eflential hurt being done to its real nature.

By John's meafuring the temple ofGod,andthe
altar, and them that worfliip therein, whdft he is
commanded to leave out the court that is without
the temple, it is predided that, during the period
of the 42 months mentioned in thefe verfes, God
fliall have a church and true worfliippers in the
world; and though with them, the eflentials of
religion fliall be found, they fliall appear.outward-
ly fmall and mean, when compared with the ex-
tent and grandeur of a certain church, which
fliall arife, in the world, at the commencement of
that period, and fliall continue to the end of it.

In the inner court of the temple, itood the altar
of burnt offering, in that court, the priefts offered
facrifice, and the Levites performed their ofBces.
The next court was the court of Ifrael, into which
every Ifraelite who was purified, had a right of
admiflion, and none except Ifraelites could be ad-
mitted, And the outer court was the court of

the

5S8 A COMMENTARY Ch. XI.

the Gentiles, into which the Gentiles were allowed
to enter. Hence, though the temple, the altar,
and they that worfhip therein, are fmall and few,
when compared with the outer court, the holy
city, and the Gentiles, yet thefe are the fymbols
of the 'rue church, of the right worfliip, and of the
true worlliippersof God. John did not meafure any
of the moft magnificent heathen temples, but on-
ly, the temple of God. He thus fhewed that this
church lliould not confift of commandments of
men taught as dudrines; fhould not be diftin-
guilhed by thofe gaudy outward ornaments,
which accord to the littlenefs of human genius,
and to the undue influence, which, in his prefcnt
depraved ftate, the bodily faculties of man have
over his fpiritual ones in the matters of religion,
but, which are quite beneath the greatnefs and
fpirituality of the divine nature, and of that wor-
fliip which accords to God as the pure and per-
fed fpirit.

The altar was none of thofe on which the vota-
ries of the Heathen deities offered facriiice, it was
the altar which ftood in the temple of God. For
the votaries of this church fliall hope for the pardon
of their fins, not in confequence of fuch things as
facrifices of the mafs, penances, the interceflion of
departed, or the prayers of furviving faints, to
waft them through purgatory with a gentle gale ;
but only in confequence of the facrifice of Chrift

the

Ver. 1,2. ON THE REVELATION. 359

the Lamb of God, which taketh away the fins of
the world. They know, that *' Ghrift died, the
** juft for the unjaft, that he might bring us unto
*' God ;" — " that as there is one God, fo there is
" only one Mediator between God and men, the
" man Chrill Jefus ;" — " that there is no falvatioii
*' in any other, no other name given under heaven
*' among men, whereby we can be faved but the
*' name of Jefus ;" — " and that he is able to fave
" unto the uttermoft all who come unto God
*' through him, feeing he ever liveth to make inter-
•' ceffion for them."

" And them that worfliip therein " Before the
altar none worfhipped but the priefts and the Le-
vites. In the temple none woriliipped but the If-
raelites who were puriiied. The worfhippers whom
John marked out by this fymbol, are thofe, who
in the language of the New TeRament are ililed
kings and priefts unto God, and Ifraelites indeed,
in whom there is no guile. They are fuch, who
far from fatisfying themfelves with a name to live
whilft they are dead, far from amufmg themfelves
with the vain parade of empty fhew in matters of
religion, believe, efleem, love, and obey the truth;
pradife virtue in all its branches, as it refpeds God,
their neighbour, and themfelves; worfliip God in
fpirit and in trutl^ through the mediation of
Ghrift ; walk before the Searcher of hearts with
uprightnefs of heart; in the honeft and diligent ufe

of

3^0 A COMMENTARY Ch, X.

of every means of knowledge and grace which
God places within the reach of their power; im-
plore and depend upon the bleffing of God, and a-
gency of his Spirit, to work in them both to will
and to do of his good pleafure, and in every fitua-
tion enjoy God aS their chief good.

Whilft this comparatively fmall church and thefe
few worfliippersare meafared oifand marked out as
his inheritance, an inheritance, of which devils and
wicked men for 1243 years, fliall attempt in vain
to rob him with facrilegious hands, a church of
much greater extent and outward fliew lliall a^
rife in the world.

He is commanded to leave out the court which
is without the temple, " for it is given to the Gen-
" tiles: and the holy city fliall they tread under foot
" 42 months." By the Gentiles, is meant the church,
of Rome. The votaries of this church are called
Gentiles, in oip-poiition tothetrue worfhippers of God,
who in the fymbolical language are called Jews.
While the true worfiiippers of God, like the Jews
of old, make the oracles of God the fole flandard of
their religion and vv'orfhip ; the votaries of that
church, like the Gentiles, regulate their religion
and worfliip by antient cuftoms, the prejudices of
the vulgar, and the didates of their priefts. Par-
ticularly, they are called Gentiles on account of
the external flievv and pomp of their worfliip,
•and of thofe fupeilhtions and ceremonies which

that

Ver. I, 2: on the reVelAtIon. 36 1

that church hath in fad borrowed from the
Gentile or Heathen worfhip. Every one acquaint-
ed with the heathen theology, and with the
fuperftitions of that church, muft clearly perceive
that the latter are derived from the former. This
may not only be deduced from hillorians of efla-
b] idled chara£ler, but it is alfo exprelly aflerted by
them. ■

Thus Mofheim, Church Hijl. Cent. iv. vol. L
page 191. "A ridiculous precipitation in receiv-
" ing new opinions, a prepoiterdus defire of imitat-
" ing the Pagan rites, and of blending them with
" the Chriilian worfhip, and that idle propenfity
" which the generality of mankind have towards
" a gaudy and oftentatious religion, all contribut-
" ed to eftablifb the reign of fuperftition on the
" ruins of Chriilianity. — The public proceffions
*' and fuperftitions, by which the Pagans endea-
*' voured to appeafe their gods, were now adopted
'* into the Chriilian worfhip, and celebrated with
" great pomp and magnificence in feveral places.
*' The virtufs that had been formerly afcribed to
" the Heathen temples, to their luftrations, to the
*' flatues of their gods and heroes, were now attri-
" buted to Chriilian churches, to water confecrat-
*' ed by certain forms of prayer, and to the images
" of holy men. And the fame privileges that the
" former enjoyed under the darknefs of Pagamfni
" were conferred upon the latter under th^ light:'

Vol. I. Z z '* ot'

62 A,C0MM£NTAR7 Cll. XL

" of the gofpel, or rather under the cloud of fu-
*' perdition that was obfcuring its glory. It is
" true, that as yet images were not very common,
*' nor were there any ftatues at all. But it is at
" the fame time as undoubtedly certain, as it is
" extravagant and monflrous, that the worlhip of
*' the martyrs was modelled by degrees, accord-
" ing to the religious fervices that were paid to the
" gods before the coming of ChEill/'

Cent. V. page 249. •' As there were none in
" thefe times to hinder the Chriftians from retain-
" ing the opinions of their Pagan anceftors con-
" cerning departed fouls, heroes, demons, temples,
" and fuch like matters, and even tranferring them
" into their religious fervices ; and as, inilead of
" entirely abolifliing the rites and infiitutions of
" antient times, thefe infiitutions were flill obferv-
" ed, with fome flight alterations; all this fvvelled,
" of necelTity, the torrent of fuperftition, and de-
" formed the beauty of the Chriftian religion and
*' worlliip with thofe corrupt remains of Pagani/7/1
" which Hill fubfift in a certain church. It will not
" be improper to obferve here, that the famous
*' Paga7i dodrine concerning the purification of
" departed fouls by means of a certain kind of
" fire, was more amply explained and confirmed
*' now, than it had formerly been. Every body
*' knows, that this dodrine. proved an inexhaufl:i-
" ble fource of riches to the clergy through the

" fucceeding

Ver. I, 2. ON THE REVEL A.TION. 363

'* fucceeding ages, and that it ftill enriches the
" Romifli church with its nutricious flreams."

The church of Rome are with pecuHar proprie-
ty ftiled Gentiles, in the period of time to which
this prediction relates, for that is the one in
which the Pope was vefled with a temporal domi-
nion in Rome, and, as the lafl head of Roman go-
vernment, came in the place of the Heathen em-
perors ; the period, during which, in this book he
is reprefented by the hieroglyphic of a ravenous
bead, chap. xiii. the fymbol of a temporal king-
dom.

It will appear, that the holy city which the
church ofRomefhall tread under foot for 42
months, fhall at the end of that period be refcued
from their hands, and meafured off to the true
worOiippers of God as certainly as the temple was
at the beginning of that period. This will be
fhewn in the commentary on chap. xxi. 10, —
21. Upon the principles eftablifned in the com-
mentary on chap. ix. 5. the forty-two months here,
are 42 prophetic months, that is, 1260 years. But
as each ofthefe years conlifts of twelve months, and
each ofthefe months of 30 days, each year muft
contain 36P days, which is five days and fome frac-
tions lefs than the folar year, which hath for a con-
liderable time alfo been the civil year. There-
fore five times 1260 days, which is 6300 days
or 1,7 folar years, mufl be deduced ftom the 1 260
Z z 2 years,

364 A COMMENTARY Ch. XI.

years, hy which they will be reduced to 1 243 folar
years, theexaft time reprefented by the fy mbolical
number of 4; months. During that long period of
time, the church of Rome fliall appear in great
outward pomp and grandeur, and extend over a
great part of the world, whilit the church of Chriil
during the fame period, blefied with all the elTen-
tials of true religion, fliall be ftripped of outward
magnificence And during that period, the church
of Rome Ihail be veiled with a temporal as v/ell as
an eccleliailic jurifdiction.

But when did thefe 42 months commence ? They
commenced at the time the church of Rome was
veiled with a temporal dominion, and the Popes
received the fceptre of the Heathen emperors, as
their piedecelTors in the government of Rome.
This fhall be fhevvn in its proper place, from a pre-
di(5lion in chap, xiii. i 8. to have been the year of
Chritl 756. And it (ball be fhewn from authentic
hiftory,that in that very year Pepin king of France
granted to the Pope and his fucceiibrs the tem-
poral dominion of Rome, under the name of the
patrimony of St. Peter.

For the i o ;4 years of.that time which is paft, the
church of Chrift and the church of Rome have ap-
peared exa£ily in the Ikuutions in which they are
reprefented in this hieroglyphic. And we have
no reafon to doubt, that thofe who fhall live at the
end of that period fliall fee that this predidion
hath been as exactly fulfilled in the lall 209 years

of

Ver. 1,2. ON THE REVELATION". 3^5

of the period, as it has already been in the firfti 034
years of it.

This relative fituation of the church of Chrifl
and of the church of Rome, the former worfhip-
ping God in fpirit and in truth, according to the
ordinances of divine inftitution, without external
pomp and fhevv, the latter regulating their wor-
Ihip by many Heathenifli rites with great out-
ward pomp and fhew, the former perfecuted, and
the latter perfecuting it for the period of i 243 years,
commencing in the year of Chrift 750, and confe-
quently ending in the year 1 999, is reprefented by
five different hieroglyphics in this, the 12th and
1 3th chapters of this book, and the precife fame
period of time fixed in every one of them, though
moilly in different expreffions.

In this verfe, it is reprefented by the Gentiles
treading the holy city under their foot for 4 2 months ;
— In the third verfe, by Chrift's two witnefles
prophefying in fackcloth for 1260 days ; — in chap.
xii. 6. by the woman fed in the wildernefs 1 265 days ;
— in chap. xii. i 4. by the woman nourilhed in the
wildernefs for a time and times and half a time,
that is, for three years and an half; — and in chap,
xiii. 5. by pov/er given to the Bead to continue 42
months. The fmalleft attention may fatisfy every
candid perfon, that all thefe five denominations of
time fignify the fame precife length of time. For
three years and an half, each year confifling of 12
months, are exadly 42 months. And 42 months,

each

S^^ A COMMENTARY Ch. XI.

each month confiding of 30 days, are exadly 1260
days. As we proceed it lliall appear, that all thefe
different hieroglyphics refer to the relative fitua-
tionsofthe church of Chrift and of the church of
Rome in the fame period of time, but in different
points of view.

Verfes 3^^, — i^th. And I will give power
unto my two witnefTes, and they fhall
prophecy a thoufand, two hundred and
threelcore days, clo':hed in fackcloth.
Thefe are the two olive trees, and the
two candlefticks {landing before the God
of the earth. And if any man will
hurt them, fire proceedeth out of their
mouth, and devoureth their enemies ; and
if any man will hurt them, he muft in this
manner be killed. Thefe have power to
fliut heaven, that it rain not in the days of
their prophecy ; and have povv-^er over waters
to turn them unto blood, and to fmite the
earth with all plagues, as often as they
will. And, when they fliall have fi-
nifhed their tcflimony, the beafl that afcend-
^th out of the bottomlefs pit, fhall make war
againft them, and fliall overcome them, and
kill them. And their dead bodies fhall lie

in

Yer. 3, — 14. ON THE REVH.AT101?. 367

in the flreet of the great city, which fpiri-
tually is called Sodom and Egypt, where alfo
our Lord was crucified. And they of the
people, and kindreds, and tongues, and na-
tions, fhall fee their dead bodies three days
and a half, and fliall not fufFer their dead bo-
dies to be put in graves. And they that
dwell upon the earth fhall rejoice over them,
and make merry, and (hall fend gifts unto
one another; beqaufe thefe two prophets
tormented them, who dwelt on the earth.
And^fcer three days and an half, the fpi-
rit of life from God entered into them ;
and they ftood upon their feet, and great
fear fell upon them who faw them. And
they heard a great voice from heaven, fay-
ing unto them, Come up hither. And
they afcended up to heaven in a cloud, and
their enemies beheld them. And the lame
hour was there a great earthquake, and the
tenth part of the city fell, and in the earth-
quake were flain of men, feven thoufand :
and the remnant were affrighted, and gave
glory to the God of heaven : The fecond wo
is pad, and behold, the third wo cometh
quickly.

The

368 A COMMENTARY Ch. XI.

The period of this prediclion is the fame with
that of the lad one. It is for 1260 days, equal to
the 42 months at 30 days in each month, that is
1243 ^^^^^ years. It is the relative fituation of
the fame parties which is reprefented ; but, in a
did'erent point of view. The two witneffes of
Chrill prophefying in fackcloth, are the fymbol
for the church of Chrifl: in a perfecuted and
mourning ftate. The beaft that afcendeth out of
the bottomlefs pit, is the fymbol of the papal hi-
erarchy during the period in which the temporal
and the ecclefiaftic powers were united in it. A
full account of the beaft will be given in its pro-
per place in the commentary, on chap. xiii.

It is faid. that this beaft afcendeth, not that it
afcended, nor that it fliall afcend ; to intimate
that its rife ftiall be contemporary with that of
the witnefles prophefying in fackcloth. That
beaft makes war againft them, and kills them;
but they rife again.

In the former hieroglyphic, the church of Chrift
is reprefented as ftrippedof all outward grandeur ;
and the church of Rome, as adorned in a pom-
pous and magnificent manner. In this, the
church of Chrift is reprefented as bearing tefti-
mony to the truth, though her votaries are few
and perfecuted, and the church of Rome is re-
prefented as perfecuting her ; and for a fliort
time apparently overcoming her; but yet fhe

rifet

Ver. 3, — 14. ON the revel ATIO^?■.' 369

rifes again, and, by her rife, the limits of the pa-
pal kingdom are greatly contracted.

The lead attention to the different' parts of this
hieroglyphic, may fiitisFy any perfon that they
are not any two individual perfons, who are
i-neant by thefe two witneiTes ; firft, becaufe no
two perfons have ever lived fo long as 1 243 years,
the time they arefaid to prophecy; and fecondly,
becaufe it is not to be fnppofed that any indivi-
dual perfons fhall rife to life and vigour again, af-
ter they have been expofed dead, on an open
flreet, for three days and an half, which, as fliall
be Ihewn, is three folar years and an half.

It is the mighty angel mentioned in the pre-
ceding chapter, who ftill fpeaks in this, and who
calls thefe two witneiTes Ins witnefles: But, it
was (hewn that this mighty angel is Chrift ;
hence, thefe are his two witnefles, and from him
they derive the po.wei- by which they are ena-
bled to prophecy fo long, in fo trying a lituation.
It is by faith in him, by the fuperintendency of
his providence, by the influence of his gofpel, and
by the agency of his fpirit, that he giveth them
this power. Chriilians, in that period, are called
Chrift's witnefles, becaufe they bear teftimony to
the truth as it is in Jefus, and to Jefus himfelf,
that he is the Chrift, and the Son of God. Like
honeft witnefl^es, they declare the truth, the
whole truth, and nothing but the truth. An

Vol, I. 3 A honeft

37* • A COMMENTARY Ch. XI.

honeft witnefs will declare neither his own con-
jedures, nor the hearfays of others, but only thofe
fads which he hath perceived himfelf. In like
manner Chrillians, as witnelTes to the truth, nei-
ther believe nor profefs, as articles of their faith,
their own conjedtures and fancies, nor the mere
commandments of men ; but they believe and
profefs as fuch all thofe truths, and only thofe,
which they perceive to be taught in the facred
fcriptures, the word of God. They dare not add
to them, nor take from them. They have not
the impious vanity to imagine that they can im-
prove the oracles of God, by human additions.
Nor are they influenced by that worfe than
childifh cunning, which makes too many think
that it is unfafe or imprudent to profefs or to
teach, what the unerring wifdom of God thought
lit to reveal ; and, to reveal without any of thofe
cautions, which httle minds too often falfely call
prudence. Like the apoftles of Chiift, Ads, xs. 27.
" They Ihun not to declare all the counfel of
" God." Thus, chap. vi. 9. thefe martyrs or wit-
nelTes, who were flain, are faid to have been ilain,
" for the word of God, and for the teilimony
" which they held."

For the fpace of 1243 years, commencing in
the year 756, all true Chriftians are ftilcd, as in
this hieroglyphic, witneffes or martyrs ; for the
vvord martyr is the one in the original, which

here

Ver. 3, — 14. ON the revelation. 371

here and in every other place, is tranflated wit'
nefs ; as all acquainted with the Greek language
know. It is not in fuffering but in witneffing
for the truth, that the effence of martyrdom con-
fifts. It is a fteady and open attachment to the
word of God and to the teftimonyof Jefus. Though
a man fhould give his body to be burned, and
have not this teftimony, it profiteth him nothing.
And he, who firmly believes, and uniformly pro-
fefles and obeys the truth as it is in Jefus, in this
period, is a martyr of Chrift, though he fhould ne-
ver be called, in the courfe of divine provi-
dence, to feal that teftimony with his blood, pro-
vided he is one who would do fo, if God in his
providence fliould call him to fuffer for the truth.
In this period Chriftians are ftiled witneifes,
chiefly, becaufe their fituation, during the 1 243
years of it, compared with that of the Chriftians
who fhall live in the world after that period, is
like that of honeft witneifes, during the depend-
ance of a long, intricate, and important trial in a
caufe of great confequence, in which the paffions
of many parties and their adherents are deeply
engaged ; compared with the fituation of thefe
fame witnefTes, after a final fentence hath been
palTed in the caufe, in the moft exadt conformity
to their depofitions, by a judge of fuch eftabhfhed
charader for abihties, attention, and integrity, as
to convince all men of the juftice of his fentence ;
3 A 2 or.

372 A COMMENTARY Ch. XL

or, at leafl, completely to filence the few, who
will not yield to convidion. During the depend-
ance of the trial, though thefe witneiTes are fully
fatisfied in their own minds, that they have told
the truth, and concealed no part of it ; and,
knovyng the charader of the judge, are perfect-
ly confident that his judgement fnall correfpond
to their teftimony ; yet, by thofe perfons intereft-
ed in a contrary decifion, and by the great miulti-
tude who in moll cafes form opinions without
examining the cafe, and deliver thefe with that
confidence for which their ignorance only hin-
ders them to blufh, they are fomctimes reprefent-
ed as ignorant fools, and fometimes as artful and
perjured knaves. Some take one fide of the
quellion, and others the other. Thofe, who em-
brace the wrong fide, commonly mifreprefent the
characlers of the witnefles, and of thofe who em-
brace the right fide. It is not reafon, a (ouwl
judgement, and a well informed underflanding,
which make mei! take the wrong fide in any cafe;
but, it is prejudice, private interefi, or paffion,
and in many cafes, all the three ; and thefe never
fail to make them rail againft and mifreprefent all
who take the oppofite fide. But, w hen the final
judgement fliall be given in terms of their evi-
dence, then, the general opinion fiiall change,
and thefe witnefles will be treated with that ref-
pecl, which is due to their upright and well-in-
formed.

Ver. 3, — 14. CN the revelation. 373

formed, but injured charaders ; while the unjuft
afperfions, which the partifans of the other fide
threw upon them, Ihall rebound upon their ow^n
heads, with double juftice and double vengeance.
This is the view of the comparative fituation
of the church of Chriil and of the church of
Rome, which is given in this book and in the pro-
phecies of Daniel, which are, by it, unfolded Du-
ring this period, Chriftians are like witneffes; they
declare the truth as in the prefence of God and ac-
countable to him. They are mifreprefented by thofe
whofe prejudices, worldly interefts, and paffions,
engage them on the iide of error. They are cal-
led heretics, weak men, wild men, fools, artful hy-
pocrites. As bad things are faid of them as were
faid of Chrift himfelf, and the children of the devil
could pronounce nothing worfe, nor could the devil
himfelf with^U his (kill and malice didate any thing
worfe. Some take one fide of the quellion, and
others take the other. Some, with thefe witneiTes,
fay, that that fyftem of religion which is taught
in the facred icriptures alone, is the religion of
Jefus, the kingdom of God ; that kingdom which
is not meats and drinks, but righteoufnels and
peace, and joy ill the Holy Ghofl ; whilil great
multitudes fay, that that religion which is taught
in the church of Rome is the true religion of Je-
fus, the kingdom of God. From the commence-
ment of this period to the prefent day, fuch hath

been

^^4 "*■ COMMENTARY Ch. XI.

been the conclud of the votaries of both churches,
and fuch fhall be their conduct to the end of it.
But when at the end of it, the Papal hierarchy
lliall be completely and finally overthrown ; and
all the kingdoms of the world fhall become the
kingdom of our God and of his Chrift, then the
decifive judgement of God, the fole objeclofall
religious worfliip, and the only infallible Judge of
controverfies, fhall fliew to the whole world, that
thefe witnefTes have through the whole of that pe-
riod declared the truth. Thus, in the fymbolical
or prophetic language, the end of this period when
the Papal hierarchy fhall be finally overthrown,
and the Chriftian church eftablirtied in purity,
peace, and triumph, over the whole w^orld, is fliled
th^ judgement of God. Chap. xiv. 7. " Fear God
*' and give glory to him, for the hour of his
" judgement is come." Chap. xx. 4. '* And I faw
•' thrones, and they fat upon them, and judge-
" ment was given unto them." Chap. xix. 2. "For
" true and righteous are his judgements ; for he
" hath judged the great whore, which did cor-
" rupt the earth with her fornications, and hath
" avenged the blood of his faints at her hands."
See alfo Daniel vii. 23, — 27.

Thefe witnefTes are Hvo, not to fignify any two
particular perfons, or any two churches, but to fig-
nify, firft, that during this period the votaries of
Chriftianity fliould be comparatively few; and fe-

condly,

Ver. 3, 14. ©N THE REVEL/^TION. 3^5

condly, that they fliould be fufficient to bear evi-
dence to the truth of Chriftianity. Two is a very
fmail number ; but the concurring teilimony of
two good witnelTcs is as legal and fufficient evi-
dence as that of 200, or any given num'^er.

During that period, the witnefles for the truth
as it is in Chrift (hould be few, but ftrll they (hould
be a fufficient number to atteil and prove it. We
are not to fuppofe that true Chriftians, reprefented
by thefe two witnefles, were to be equally few du-
ing the whole of this period. The contrary is e-
vident from the hieroglyphic. At firft their num-
ber and power is greater ; gradually they become
lefs ; then they increafe again, and eontinue to in-
creafe to the end of the period. At firll their power
is marked in ftrong terms, verfes 4th, 5th, aad 6th;
their number and power greatly diminilh ; they
are killed ; they lie dead three days and an
half, verfes 7th, 8th, 9th, and loth; then they
greatly increafe, and go on increaling to the end.
They become alive, ftand on their feet, and a«
fcend to heaven in a cloud, verfes nth, 12th.

Thefe witneffes are to prophefy 1260 days in
fackcloth. They are faid to prophefy, not becaufe
they fhall predict new and diftant events in confe-
quence of the power of divine infpiration upon
their minds, but becaufe in confequence of that
information which they have received from God
through the means of the facred fcriptures, and the

gracioqa

37^ A COMMENTARY Ch. XI.

gracious and ordinary illumination of their minds
by his Spirit qualifying them for perceiving the
true meaning of fcripture, they firmly believe and
openly profefs that God will judge and avenge his
church even in this world ; that the religion which
is from God cannot be overthi-own by men and
devils: and that Chrift's kingdom fliali undoubted-
ly come at the time and in the manner predided
in the facred fcriptures. Like thofe of the pro-
phets of God, their declarations will be defpifedby
many as idle dreams, and they lliall be hated and
perfecuted.

*' Clothed in fackcloth." The period of their
prophefying Ihall be one of perfecution gnd
mourning. But at the end of the 1243 years, all
their declarations and hopes fliall be fully accom-
pliflied, and the days of their mourning fliall end
for ever.

They are denominated "The two olive trees
" and the two candlefticks (landing before the
** God of all the earth." In the fymbolical lan-
guage, cand^-'^.Lks lignify churches, chap. i. 20.
" And the feven candlefticks v;hich thou faweft,
" are the feven churches." The lamps which
burn in thefe candlefticks muft be fupphed with
oil. Thelargeft quantity of oil would be exhauft-
cd by long and conftant confumption. Hence,
as oil is made of olives, ohve trees are neceifary to
i'upply, by their annual crops, the annual wafte of

oil

Ver. 3, — 14. ON THE REVELATION. 37/

oil in the lamps by burning. The two olive trees
therefore fignify, that that God, who in the courfe
of his providence preferves the vegetable life, and
by the growth of vegetables fupplies that vege-
table food which is conftantly needed for the pre-
fervation of man and bealt, fhall, by his provi-
dence and grace, effecftually provide for the fiip-
port, illumination, and comfort of his church du-
ring this period, in fpite of all the power, cunning,
and malice of Rome.

1 hey are faid to ftand before the God of all the
earth, becaufe they do not lignify any particular
conllituted churches, but becaufe they lignify the
church univerfal, the true Catholic church which
confifts of every individual perfon, of whatever
outvA^ard or viiible church he may be through the
whole earth, whom God knows to be his true
worfhipper and fervant, and who names the name
of Chrifl: and departs from evil

Such in the fymbolical language is the m.eaning
of two candlefticks and two olive trees {landing
before the God o/all the earth, when ufed abK)lute-
ly, and without any other reference than that
which by the term two is evidently made to the
two witneffes mentioned in the preceding verfe, of
whom it is faid, *' thefe are the two candlefticks and
the two olive trees." But they are here'ufed in
reference to, and as a citation from, f)mo well
known writing, in which mention is made of two

Vol. I. 3 B . candlellicks

378 A COMMENTARY CIl. XI,

canclletlicks and two olive trees (landing before
the God of all the earth.

This writing is the prophecy of Zechari-
ah, chapters i. ii. iii. iv. efpecially chapter iv.
which the reader is dtfired to perufe with
particular attention. Thefe were Zerubabel the
fon of Shealtiel, the prince of the captivity, the
perfon who as their governor returned at the head
of the Jews from the Babyloniih captivity, and
Jolhua the high prieft ; who in the lad verfe of the
fouith chapter are called "the two anointed ones
" that Hand by the Lord of the whole earth."
Among the Jews, kings and prieils were inaugurat-
ed by being anointed with oil ; herice Zerubabel
as the prince, and Jolhua as the high prieft of the
Jews at that time, are called the two anointed
ones, becaufe they had been admitted into their
ofiices by the anointing with oil. The tw^o to-
gether are fymbols for Chriftians, who are kings
and priefts unto God, and whofe very name Chrif-
tiaji fignifies anointed. It is borrowed from the
name ofChrift, which is anointed, and which was
given to him as the Lord's anointed Prophet,
Pried, and King, the whole anointed offices being
united in pcrfeclion in his peifon. Zerubabel
and Jofliua were the two perfons who had the di-
redion in rebuilding the temple and repairing the
city of Jerufalem after the Babylonifh captivity,
when Jerufalem had long been troden under foot

by

Ver. 3,— 14. ON THE REVELATION. 379

by the Gentiles. They met with great oppoildon
in this work from thofe who were the fervants, and
in the pay of the king of Babylon, A ftop was
thus for fome time put to the work by that king,
and the molt unjull and malevolent afperfions were
thrown out againlt Jerufalem, her kings, and her
citizens, by the tools of Babylon. In this fitua-
tion, an end feemed to be put to the building, and
^^n'ubabel and Jofliua were derided by many for
their zeal for Jerufalem, and their confident hopes
of feeing the houfe of God rebuilt, and Jerufa-
lem repaired, notwithftanding the oppofition of
Babylon. At this time, the prophets Haggai and
Zechariah were fent by God to encourage thefe
two perfons, and to alTure them that the work
fhould again be begun, and that they two whofe
hands had laid the foundation of the temple, Ihould
live to fee it finilhed. Accordingly, the buildmg was
begun by Zerubabel and Jofliua, notwithftand-
ing the prohibition of the king of Babylon ; and
when the officers of that king came to put a ilop
to the work, they with the Jews who adhered to
them, would not defift; but faid to them, (£zra
chap. V. 11.) " We are the fervants of the God of
" heaven and earth, and build the houfe that was
*' builded thefe many years ago, which a great king
" of Ifrael builded and fet up." Atlaft, in a man-
ner quite unexpedted, and in which the overruHng
hand c*f God was very evident, King Darius not
3 B 2 only

ki.

380 A COMMENTARY Ch. XI.

only permitted them to build, but alio furniflied
them with the things neceirary for carrying on
the work. And the building was finiflied under
the direction and in the days of Zerubabel and
Jofbua, in the lixth year of the reign of Darius.

The hiftory of thefefads is contained, at confi-
derable length in the book of Ezra, chap. i. ii. iii.
iv. V. and vi. Thefe chapters well merit the ferious
perufal of the reader as containing, at once, a ve-
ry diftind hiftory of a moft extraordinary and im-
portant event relative to the Jewifli nation, and a
moft ftriking type of the Chriftian church, during
this period of the two witnefles for 1 243 years.

There is fomething remarkable and ftrikmg in
the names of thefe two perfons, who conduced
the rebuilding of the temple at Jerufalem. Every
one acquainted with the Old Teftament muft
have perceived, that names are given neither to
perfons nor things at random, but are expreft^ve
of their natures, characters, oftices, or nfes. In
the Hebrew language, in which th^y are written,
Joftiua is the fame with Jefus, and both fignify a
Saviour ; and Zerubabel fignifies the oppofer of
Babel or Babylon. In the book of the Revelation,
Babylon is a fymbol for Papal Rome, the Anti-
chriil ; but the oppofer of, or the oppolite to Anti-
chrift is Chrift. Thus Zerubabel and Joftiua, in
the very import of the names, reprefent the myfti-
c-d body of Chrift during the period of Papal

power ; —

Ver. 3, 14. ON THE REVELATION. 381

power • — thofe chriftians, who like Zerubabel and
Jolliua, adhere to the word of God, and oppofe
the power and idolatry of B^bylni the great, and
who, like them are kings and prielis unto God.

From this hiilory of Zerubabel and Jofhua, the
two candlefticks and the two olive trees, which fland
by the Lord of the whole earth, it will be evident
.wliat is meant by ftiling the two witnefTes, the
two candlefticks and the two olive trees. In this
period, Chrillians are kings and priefts unto God,
they Hand by the God of the whole earth ; adhere
to the word of God and, the teftimony of Jefus ;
are engaged in a war againft Papal Rome ; fliall
be few in number; fliall be treated with derifion,
for attempting to build up the church of God in
oppofition to that power, which rules over the
kings of the earth; fhallbe brought fo low, at one
time, that the work of building the church of
God ihali appear to be entirely ftopped : But fup-
ported, not by might, not by power, but by the
fpirit of the Lord of hofts, they fhall be aflifted,
in a remarkable manner, in building up the houfe
of God, and from unexpeded quarters, even by
temporal kings ; and they fliall thus continue
witneffes for the truth, to the end of this period
when the temple Ihall be opened, and the church
of Chrift (hall appear in great fplendour and glory.
Thefe witnefles are laid to fend fire out of their
mouths to devour thofe, who intentionally hurt

them,

382 A COMMENTARY Ch. XI.

them, and to have power to fmite the earth with
all plagues, &c. They Hiall not fight againft
their enemies with military weapons, but with
fpiritual w^eapons. However, nmch they fhall be
defpifed by the votaries of Rome, many great and
ftriking judgements and plagues ihall be brought
upon the Roman empire, (the earth) in the courfe
of Divine providence, for the injuries done to thefe
ChriHians by the Papal hierarchy. Thefe plagues
iliall be poured out upon the votaries of Rome, in
this period, on that account, and in the moll Ilrik-
ing correfpondence to the injuries, which in that
period they do to the Chriftian church. But this
will more clearly appear in the commentary, on
the pouring out the feven vials full of the feven
laft plagues, in chap. xvi.

With refpecl to their power of turning waters
into blood, it is faid in chap. xvi. 4, 5 " And
" the third angel poured out his vial upon the
" rivers and fountains of water ; and they became
" blood. And 1 heard the angel of the waters fay,
" Thou art righteous O Lord, which art and waft
*' and fhall be, becaufe thou halt judged thus :
" For they have fhed the blood of faints and pro-
" phets, and thou haft giyen them blood to drink,
" for they are worthy."

Whilft they are perfcdling their teftimony, the
beaft which is defcribed in chap. xiii. and which
rifeth out of the bottomlefs pit, Ihall make war

againft

Ver. 3, 14. ON the revelation. 383

againft them and fhall overcome them. A beaft
of prey fignifies a temporal kingdom, as fliall be -^
fully fhewn in the commentary on chap. xiii. This /

temporal kingdom iliall perfecute the Chriftians ; '
fliall in all appearance dellroy them ; and fhall in-
ftilt their dead bodies. By the great city which
is fpiritually called Sodom and Egypt, is meant the
city of Rome. This city is compared to Sodom
for its fenfuaiity, and for its final overthrow in
which the hand of God fliall be evident, and from
which it fliall never more life ; and to Egypt for
its luxury, idolatry, and perfecution of the peo-
ple of God. This word v;hich is tranflated the
Jtreet of the great city is 7rKxrua<; in the original,
which fignifies breadth or extent, ad ought to have
been tranflated " through the whole extent of the
great city." The city does not fignify the city of
Rome ftriclly taken, but that government which
the city of Rome poiiefled over fo great a part of
the world. Hence, the c^ead bodies lying through
the whole extent of the city, fignifies that, at a
particular time in this period, Chriftians fliould ap-
pear to be totally deftroyed through every part of the
world over which the territory of Rome extended.
In this refpecl, it is faid of the extent of this city,
that our Lord was crucified there. For though he
was crucified at Jerufalem, yet that city was then
within the extent of the Roman empire, and it wa s
bj Pilate, the Romi.n governor over the conquer-
ed

384 A COMMENTARY Ch. XI,

ed province of Judea, that the unjuft fentence of
crucifixionMvas pafTed on Jefas.

For tliree days and an half, that is, for three
yearo and an half, Chriftians fliall appear to be
thus totally overcome, and the different people,
kindreds, tongues and nations, which, at that
time, Qiall inhabit the extent of the Roman em-
pire, (hall fee them thus opprelTed, fliall all join
in opprefling them, and fhall exprefs their rage
even againit their lifelefs corps. This apparent
univerfal, and final deftrudion of thofe who had
borne tcftimony to the word of God and to Jefus,
fhall fill the citizens of Rome, (them who dwell
upon the earth), with inch great and univerfal
joy, that, in the moft hearty and explicit manner,
they fhall congratulate each other, on the deftruc-
tion of thofe who tormented them.

In three years and an half, after the votaries of
Rome fhall think that Chriftians are totally dcf-
troyed, they fliall arife in fuch an unexpecicd
manner and time, and with fuch renewed vigour
and courage, as diall clearly prove a Divine inter-
pofition in their favour, and the power of that re-
ligion within them which is the fpiritual life of
man, the life derived from the fpuit of God, and
confining in the refcmblance of the Divine hfe.
This renewed vigour fhall fill the fpedators witli
great fear.

For a confiderable time before this revival, Chrif-

tian3

Ver. 3, — 14. ON THE REVELATION. 385

tians fnall appear as fcattered individuals, and for
a lliort time fhall fcarcely be found as individuals;
but at that time, they fhall appear in fuch num-
bers, and meet with fuch countenance from civil
powers, that thev fliall afcend up to heaven ; that
is, appear in the form of a conftituted church.
As many imperfeclions fhall cleave to that church
for a confiderable time ; as it fhall meet with much
oppofition and many difficulties ; and as, during
the whole remainder of this period, its purity and
luftre fliall be far inferior to thofe, to which the
church of Chrifl fhall arrive in the fucceeding pe-
riod, it is faid to afcend to heaven in a cloud.
Their appearance now fliall be fuch as fhall be vi-
fible to their enemies.

For the preceding three years and an half, their
enemies thought that there was not a Angle Chrif-
tian in the world ; they imagined that they had
totally dcflroyed them by fire and fword : But
even then there were fome true Chridians in the
world, fome fcattered individuals marked with this
feal of God, " that God knew them to be his, and
" that they named the name of Chriil and departed
*' from evil ;" but now when they fhall appear as a
couflituted and eflabhfhed church, they fliall be
vilible to their very enemies, and an unpleafant
fight to them.

In the fame hour that Chriftians fhall revive
and appear as a conftituted church, there fliall be

Vol. I. 3 C a

386 A COMMENTARY" Ch. XI.

a great earthquake, that is, a great revolution in
the Roman empire. The effeds of that revolu-
tiiii are enumerated. Firlt, " the tenth part of
" the city fell." In chap. xvi. 18, 19, 20, 21.
we Ihali meet with an earthquake, in which the
whole city and all the cities of the nations Ihall
fall. That revolution fliall happen at the end of
this period, when Babylon the great fhall fall.
But the one mentioned in this palTage, was to
take place, not long after the middle of this pe-
riod, and in it only a tenth part of the city, that
is, of the Roman empire, lliould fall, or revolt from
the obedience of Papal Rome. Whether by the
tenth part of the city, a precife tenth part of the
Roman empire is meant, or whether the tenth
part is a fymbolical expreffion borrowed from the
law of tithes among the Jews is not very clear to
me ; but which ever of thefe is the meaning of
the phrafe, the import of the prediftion will be
very nearly the fame. If the firft of thefe is the
fenfe of the expreffion, then it is a predidion
that that revolution fliall not overthrow the whole
of the Roman empire, but that only a tenth part
of it fliall then revolt from the Papal dominion.
If the fecond is its meaning, then it is a predidion
that that part of the Roman empire, which fliall
then revolt may be compared to the tithes under
the law ; firll, becaufe it is nearly a tenth part ©f
the whole empire ; and fccondJy, becaufe it is, in

confequence

Ver. 3, — 14. ON the revelation. 387

confequence of this tribute acknowledging the fo-
vereignty of God, that the reft of the empire is
perferved to its poffeflbr ; and third, becaufe that
fame God who had taken away the tenth, can
take away the whole when he pleafes.

Secondly, in the earthquake were flain of men
feven thoufand. This revolution fliould not be
brought about without war and bloodfned, and
feven thoufand of the votaries of Rome fhould be
flain in thefe wars. The number feven fignifies
what is complete or perfed. Seven thoufands,
therefore, may probably fignify fomany thoufands
as fhall completely bring about this revolution.
As one plague after another was brought upon
the Egyptians and Pharaoh, until he was oblig-
ed to acknowledge the finger of God, and, how-
ever unwilling, to give way to that revolution by
which the Ifraelites were dehvered from flavery ;
fo thoufand after thoufand of the votaries of Rome
jfliall be flain, until the Roman government fliall
give way to the revolution, and allow the Clirif-
tians a peaceable civil and religious cftabliflmientj
totally independuit of Papal tyranny. And,

Thirdly, the remnant were aflrighted and gave
glory to the God of heaven. The pov/er and ty-
ranny of Papal Rome was fo great, before this
revolution, that the Papal hierarchy a6ted as if it
feared neither God nor man. It would make con-
hellions to none 3 it thundered its anathemas a-
3 G 2 gainft

3^8 A C0*1MENTARY Ch. XL

gainft the devoted heads of the greateft kings and
emperors, tumbled them from their thrones, and
diflblved the allegiance of their fubjeds. But,
at this revolution Papal Rome fhould be afraid ;
fliould not dare to infult, nor even to engage in
war any longer thofe who fhould revolt from her ;
but fhould exprefs her fear by concluding a peace
with thofe whom fhe hated. By this fear thus ex-
preiTedjflie fhould involuntarily but iliuflriouflydif-
play the glory of that God whofe kingdom is (hea-
ven) the Ch"iilian church. Confidering the power
and infolence of Rome at that time, it is not eafy
to fuppofe a greater difplay of the glory of God,
than that nine tenths of that empire, with the
Pope at their head, fhould be fo afraid of the tenth
part, which was revolted, as to make a peace
with them, and, contrary to their ftrongeft incli-
nation, &\\o\v them a religious eftabliiliment.

Allthefe prcdiclions have been moil exadly ful-
filled in the hiiloiy of the church of Chrill, from
the year 756 to the prefent tim.e, fo far as the time
for their fulfillment is yet come. As this period
commenced in the year 756, and is to continue
for 1243 years, it mull rundown to the year 1999,
which is 2og years beyond the prefent 1790. In
the year 756, the Pope was veiled by Pepin king
of France v. ith the temporal dominion of Rome,
under the name of the patrimony of St Peter.
Notwithilanding the power and influence of Rome,

there

Ver. 3, — 14. ON the revelation. 389

there have been fome ever fince that time to wit-
nefs for the religion and divinity of Chrill as they
are taught in the word of God. Even in commu-
nion with the church of Rome, there were many
individuals, from the beginning of that period to
the twelfth century, who adhered to the word of
God and to the teftimony of Jefus, oppofed the
fuperftitions of the church of Rome, and loudly
called for a reformation of that church, in its doc-
trine, v/orfhip, difcipline, head and members, at
the rifque of excommunication, and even of life it-
felf. In the twelfth century, about the year 1 1 80,
thofe who in communion with the church of Rome
had witneffed for the truth, and had in vain ftrug-
gledfor a reformation of that church, were oblig-
ed to withdraw from its communion. Then they
retired to the vallies of Piedmont fituated between
the Alps and the Pyrenees, by which almoft inac-
ceffible mountains their retreat in thefe vallies
was rendered more fafe. There they met with
much countenance and protedion from the Earl
ofThouloufe, in whofe principality they lived.
They were univerfally known by the name of
Waldenfes from Peter Waldo, a very conii-
fiderable merchant in Lyons, who went out at
their head to this retreat from Papal tyranny and
fuperftition. In thefe vallies they increafed to
the number of many thoufands. The church of
Home began to be alarmed, at their numbers,

principles,

39^ A COMMENTARY Ch. XI.

principles, and worfliip, and therefore Pope In-
nocent III. exerted himfelf to the utmoft, either
to bring them to the fubjedion of the church of
Rome, or to deftroy them. The former, after ma-
ny artful and threatening attempts, he found im-
poflible ; for they were determined rather to feal
their teftimony to the truth with their blood, than
embrace thofe fuperftitions of Rome, which they
believed in their confcience to be inconfiflent with
the dodrine, worfhip, and difcipline taught in
the word of God. He therefore not only appoint-
ed legates to preach againll them, but excited the
fecular princes and common people to deftroy
them. He publifhed a croifade againft them,
which occafioned a long war between Simon Earl
Montfort General of the Crofsbearers, and the
Count of Thouloufe their defender. This war was
oarried on with a perfidy, a barbarity, and a pro-
iufion of human blood, in fupport of the Pope's
authority, and in defence of idolatrous worfhip
and dodlrine, the very recital of which by the hif-
torians of thefe wars, muft fill the mind of every
unprejudiced reader with horror and deteftation,
-and oblige hnTi to exclaim, " Is that the religion
" of truth and peace, which is propagated by fuch
*' deceit and bloodflied as muft fhock Heathens,
'^ and even barbarians I"

In the I 3th century, Dominic a Spaniard by
birth, a man of a fiery and impetuous temper,

the

Ver. 3, — 14: ON the revelation. 391

the founder of that infernal court of the inqulfi-
tion, which is too well known, and whofe forms of
judicature are too deftrudive of the natural, the
civil, and the religious rights of mankind to be
defcribed here, attacked the Waldenfes, and on
them wrecked the firft fury of the inquilitors,
Befides the Waldenfes, feveral of whom, notwith-
ftanding the molt cruel and long perfecutions a-
gainft them, continued until Luther's days in
the 1 6th century, there were many others in dif-
ferent parts of the world who were witnefles for
the truth. In particular, the famous John Wick-
lifFe, an Englilliman, a dodor and profeflbr of
divinity at Oxford, taught the religion of the
bible in oppofition to the fuperftitions of Po-
pery; exhorted the people to ftudy the fa-
cred fcriptures ; and alfo tranllated into the En-
glifh language thofe divine books, to render the
knowledge of them more univerfal. For his at-
tachment to the truth, Wicklifte was profecuted
with the utmoft keennefs and violence at the
court of Pope Gregory XI. This imminent dan-
ger he efcaped by the intereft of the Duke of
Lancafter, andfome other Englifh peers, who had
a high regard for him. He left many followers
in England and other countries. In Bohemia, the
famous John Hufs and Jerome of Prague, and their
followers, appeared in the 15th century.

In.

^^2 A COMMENTARY Ch. XL

In the beginning of the 1 6th century, Luther^
Philip Melandhon, Martin Buccer, John Calvin,
Zuinglius, .^^colampadius, and the other illuf-
trious reformers appeared; to 'whom the world
hath beenfo much indebted for the revival of reli-
gion, learning, and liberty. To every one who
wifhes well to religion, learning, and liberty, the
memory of thefe illuftrious men will ever be dear,

Thefe reformers were fupported by many Ger-
man princes; but the Pope and the Emperor
refolving their deflruclion, recourfe was had to
arms, and the war commonly known by the name
of Sraalcad began. After many engagements,
and many negociations between the Emperor and
the Pope on one fide, and the Reformers on the o-
ther, matters were brought to that fituation that
the Reformers not only appeared to be defeated,
but, which was worfe, feemed to withhold their
teftimony for the truth againft the fuperftitions of
Popery. Maurice Duke of Saxony proved per-
fidious to the Proteftants, and invaded the electo-
ral dominions of his uncle John Frederick, while
that worthy prince was maintaining againft the
Emperor the facred caufe of religion and liberty.

In April 15^7, the army of John Frederick, E-
ledor of Saxony, was defeated by that of the Em-
peror, and he himfelf taken prifoner. Philip
Landgrave of Helfe, the other chief of the Prote-
ilants, throwing himfelf on the mercy of the Em-
peror,

Ver. 3, 14. ON THE REVEJLATION. 39J

peror, was detained a prifonerby a fcandalous vio-
lation of a folemn convention. The Protefters
and Reformers with great reludance, however,
acquiefced for a time in a certain formulary, as a
rule of faith and worlhip, called the interim^
drawn up by order of the Emperor, as a rule to
both the votaries of Rome and the Reformers, un-
til the matter fhould be decided by a general
council. Pope Julius III. at the importunate fo-
licitations of the Emperor, confented to the affem-
bling a council at Trent for that purpofe. In a
diet of the empire, which was held at Augfburg
in 1 55 1, the greateft part of the princes gave their
confent to the convocation of this council. By
acquiefcing in the interim, as a rule of faith and
v^'orlhip, in which none of the errors of Popery
were rejeded, but fome of them only foftened in
the mode of expreflion; and by confenting to have
their differences determined by a council called by
the Pope, and with himfelf or his legate at its head;
they ceafed to»bear witnefs againll the Papal hie-
rarchy.

Now it was that the two witneffes were dead ;
now, for the fxrft time, like dead perfons, they
ceafe to bear witnefs to the truth, and to oppofe
the Papal hierarchy. But thefe witneffes thus
filenced, thus dead as witneffes, rofe to life again,
to the great aftonifliment and terror of their ene-
mies, at the end of three years and an half, as pre-
VoL. I. 3 D didei

394 A cjmmentary Ch. Xf.

dieted ill vcnc ii. That very Maurice, formerly
Duke, now Eledor of Saxony, who had acted fo
perfidious and unjuH; a part to the proteftant -re-
formers, forry for his former conducl, entered in-
to a confederacy againil the emperor, marched a
powerful army againil him in the year 1552, with
fuch allonilliing rapidity and valour, that he fur-
prized Charles at Infpruck, where he lay with a
handful of troops in the utmoft fecurity. Alarm-
ed and dejecled to the highell degree by this fud-
den and unforfeen event, the emperor was willing
to make peace on almofl; any conditions. Thus
terrified, he, in a little time, not only concluded
at PafTau the famous treaty of pacification with
the Proteflants, but alfo promifed to affemble, in
the fpace of iix months, a diet in which all the
tumults and diilentions, that had been occalioned
by a variety of fentiments in religious matters,
fhould be removed.

The f^u'ther account of this diet cannot be ex-
prciled in better terms than thofe, in which the
hiftory of it is given by Moilieim, Hifl. vol. ii.
pages G6, and 67, — "The troubles of Germany
" with feveral other incidents, rendered it impof-
" fible to aflemble the diet, which the emperor
" had promifed at the pacification of PalTau, fo
<• foon. as the period mentioned in the articles of
" that treaty. , This famous diet met, however,
*' at Augiburg in the year 1555, was opened by

Ferdinand

Ver. 3, — 14. ON the revelation. 305

" Ferdinand in the name of the emperor, and ter-
" minated there deplorable fcenes of bloodilied,
*' defolation, and difcord, that had fo long afilidted
" both church and (late : by that religious peace,
*' as it is commonly called, which fecuredtothe
*' Protellants the free exercife of their religion, and
*' eltabhfhed this ineftimable liberty upon the
*' firmed foundations. For after various debates,
*' the following memorable acls were palTeS 011
*' the 25th September : That the proteftants, who
" followed the confeflion of Augfburg, fhould be
*' for the future confidered as entirety exempt
" from the jurisdiclion of the Roman pontiff, and
*' from the authority and fuperintendency of the
" billiops ; that they were left at perfecl liberty
" to enact laws for themfelves, relating t9 their
"religious fentiments, difcipline and worfliip ;
" that all the inhabitants of the German empire
*' fliould be allowed to judge for themfelves in reli-
" gious matters, and to join themfelves tq that
" church, whofedodrine andworfhip they tliought
*' the pureft, and the moft conibnant to the fpirit
" of true Chriftianity ; and that all thofe who
" fnould injure or perfecute any perfon under reli-
" gious pretexts, and on account of their opinions,
*' fliould be declared and proceeded againft as pub-
" he enemies of the empire, invaders of its Hber-
" ty and difturbers of its peace. The difficulties
" that vfere to be furmounted, before this equitable
3 D 2 decifion

396 A COMMENTARY Ch. XI.

" deciiion could be procured, the tedious delibera-
" tions, the warm debates, the violent animofities
" and bloody wars, that were neceffary to engage
" the greatefl part of the German ftates, to confent
" to conditions fo agreeable to the dictates of right
" reafon, as well as to the facred injunctions of
" the gofpel, Ihew us, in a fliocking and glaring
" point of light, the ignorance and fuperflition of
*' thefe miferable times, and Hand upon record as
" one of the molt evident proofs of the neceflity of
*' the Reformation."

That the time, when the Proteftants, after ha-
ving fubfcribed the interim, agreed to the convo-
cation of a general council was the year 155 1, is
evident from Mofheim, Hiji. vol. ii. page 64,
" The greatefl part of the princes gave their con-
" fent to the convocation of this council, to which
" alfo Maurice elector of Saxony fubmitted upon
" certain conditions. The emperor then conclud-
" ed the diet in the year 1 55 1 ."

From the end of the 155 1, to about the middle
of the 1555, is juft three years and an half. In
the 1552, the emperor had promifcd that the diet
at Augfliurg fhould be held in fix months, which
would have been about two years fooner than the
predicted time, for the two witneffes to arife to life
and Hand on their feet. But that God who, with-
out human perception or intention, can, and does
overrule all ciicumUances, to accomplilli the pur-

pofes

Ver. 3, 14. ON THE REVELATION. 397

pofes of his will in the government of the world,
fo overruled the difturbances and other circum-
fiances in the empire, that that diet could not be
held, and in fa6l was not held until the year
1555, when the three years and an half, in which
the witnefles were lilent, were completed.

Now it was that Chriftians flood upon their
feet; now it w^as that they obtained at once a civil
and a religious ellabhfhment, independent of
Rome. Formerly fcattered individuals, they now
appear, fince the diet of Auglburgh in 1555, an
ellablifhed and vifible church. In confequence of
the many imperfedlions which then cleaved and flill
cleave to that church, and the many difficulties
it has flill to encounter, it is faid to be under a
cloud. Among all the reformed churches, it will
not be eafy to find one fo perfedlly conformable
to the model of Chrifl's church as given in facred
fcript'ure, or to that pure form in which it fhall
appear at the end of this period, or fo totally free
from contempt and injuries that it cannot be faid
that a cloud hangs over it. And probably there
are few reformed churches in which, notwith^
Handing the thicker or thinner cloud which hangs
over them, there are not many individual perfons
who are real Chriftians, God's fealed ones, whom
he knows to be his, who name the name of Chriit
and depart from evil.

The

593 A COMMENTARY Ch. XI.

The Reformation was brought about by wars,
in which many thoufands of the votaries of Rome
were llain, and by which the Pope and his adhe-
rents were intimidated. At the Reformation, fo ma-
ny kingdoms fliook off their fubjeclion to Rome,
that a tenth part of the Roman empire rebelled.
For inilance, England, Scotland, Ireland, many
German principalities, Switzerland, Holland, and
many other parts of the weftern world, at this
time fhdok^off their fubjedion to Rome, both in
civil and religious matters. Thus a great revolu-
tion took place. In confenting to allow the Pro-
teftants a civil and a religious eftablifliment inde-
pendent of Papal Rome, that hierarchy declared
how much it was afraid, and it gave glory to that
God who by fuch weak and unlikely inftruments,
and in fpite of fuch powerful and keen enemies,
had reftored, eflabliflied, and fupported his church
in the world.

From the Reformation to the prefent day, the
Chriflians have appeared in the form of eftablifn-
ed churches, but churches neither fo pure nor fo
profperous that it can be faid that no cloud hangs
over them. From that day to this, there have
been witneffes for the truth as it is in Jefus, whom
neither favours nor frowns have been able to per-
vert or lilence.

Thcfe fads are all recorded by MoQieim in his
hiflory, Dupin in his hiltory on thefe centuries,
Jean Paul Perriii in his hiflory of the Waldenfes,

the

Yer. 3, — 14. on the revela.tion. 399

the illuilrious hiftorian of our own country,
Di Robertfon, in his hiftory of Charles the Fifth,
Emperor of Germany, and Sleidan's hiilory of the
Reformation. The accounts of them given by thefe
hiftorians are too long to be tranfcribed into this
commentary ; to thefe hiftories I mud therefore
refer my readers. But for the information of thofe
who have not accefs to them, I ihall tranfcribe a
very fev/of thefe paiTages from Mofheim's Church
Hiilory.

Moflieim, H'l/l. vol. i. cent. xi. page 525. " Not-
" withftanding all this, we find from the time of
" Gregory VII. feveral proofs of the zealous ef-
*' forts of thofe, who are generally called by the
" Proteltants, the Wit7ieJJes of the Truth, by whom
" are meant, fuch pious and judicious Chrifiians as
" adhered to the pure religion of the gofpel, and
'* remained uncorrupted amidil the growth of fu-
" perftition, who deplored the miferable ftate to
*' which Chriftianity was reduced by the altera-
" tion of its divine dodlrines, and the vices of its
" profligate minifters, who oppofed with vigour the
" tyrranic ambition both of the lordly pontiff and
" afpii-ing biiliops ; and in fome provinces pri-
" vately, in others openly, attempted the reforma-
" tion of a corrupt and idolatrous church, and of
'' a barbarous and fuperftitious age. This was in-
" deed bearing witnefs to the truth in the noblefc
*' manner, and it was principally in Italy and

France

40P A COMMENTARY Ch. XL

*' France that the marks of this heroic piety were
" exhibited."

Vol. i. page 615. cent. xii. " Of all the feds
*' that were in this century, none was more dif-
" tinguifhed by the reputation it acquired by the
" multitude of its votaries, and the teftimony
" which its bittereft enemies bore to the probity
" and innocence of its members, than that of the
** Waldenfes, fo called from their parent and foun-
" der Peter Waldus. — The origin of this famous
" fed: was as follows. Peter an opulent merchant
" of Lyons, furnamed Valdenfis or Vahdifius from
" Vaux or Waldum, a town in the marquifate of
" Lyons, being extremely zealous for the advancc-
" ment of true piety and Chriftian knowledge,
" employed a certain prieft about the year 1 1 60
" in tranflating from Latin into French the four
" Gofpels, with other books of holy fcripture, and
*' the moit remarkable fentences of the antient
" doctors, which were fo highly elteemed in this
" century. But no fooner had he perufed thefe
" facred books with a proper degree of attention,
•' than he perceived that the religion which was
•' now taught in the Roman church differed totally
" from that which was originally inculcated by
" Chrift and his apoftles. Struck with this glaring
" contradiction between the dodlrines of the pontiffs
" and the truths of the gofpel, and animated with
*' a pious zeal for promoting his own falvation

and

Ver. 3, — 14. ON THE REVELATION. 40I

*' and that of others, he abandoned his mercantile
" vocation, diftributcd his riches among rhe poor;
*' forming an aflbciation with other pious men
*' who had adopted his fentiments and his turn of
" devotion, he began in the year i i 80 to afTume
" the charaderof a public teacher, and to inilrudt
" the multitude in the dodrines and precepts of
" Chriflianity. The archbifhop of Lyons, and the
*' other rulers of the church in that province op-
*' pofed with vigour this new dodlor in the exer«
♦' cife of his minillry. But their oppofition was
" unfuccefsful; for the purity and fimplicity of
" that religion which thefe good men taught, the
" fpotlefs innocence that Ihone forth in their lives
" and adions, and the noble contempt of riches
" and honours which wasconfpicuous in the whole
*' of their condud and converfation, appeared fo
*' engaging to all fuch as had any fenfe of true
" piety, that the number of their difciples and
" followers increafed from day to day. They ac-
•* cordingly formed religious alTemblies, flrft in
" France, and afterwards in Lombardy ; from
•• whence they propagated their fed throughout
*• the other provinces of Europe with an incredi-
" ble rapidity, and with fuch invincible fortitude,
" that neither fire nor fword, nor the mod cruel
" inventions of mercilefs perfecution could damp
" their zeal or entirely ruin their caufe. The at-
" tempts of Peter Waldus and his followers were
Vol, I. 3 E neither

40* A COMMENTARY Ch. XI.

-" neither employed nor defigned to introduce
" new dodrines into the church, nor to propofe
*• new articles of finth to Chriftians. All they aim-
" ed at, was to reduce the form of ecclefiaftical go-
*• vernment, and the lives and manners both of the
" clergy and people, to that amiable fimplicity
" and that primitive fanclity that characlcrifed
" the apoftolic age, and which appear fo ftrongly
" recommended in the precepts and injunctions of
" the divine Author of our holy religion."

Vol. i page 704, cent. xv. " In England and
*' Scotland, the difciples of WicklifFe, whom the
*' multitude had fligmatifed with the odious title
'* of Lollards, continued to inveigh againft the
*• defpotic laws of the pontiffs, and the licentious
" manners of the clergy. The Waldenfes, though
" perfecuted and opprefled on all fides, and from
*' every quarter, raifed their voices, even in the
" remote vallies and lurking places, whither they
" were driven by the violence of their enemies,
*' and called aloud for fuccour to the expiring
" caufe of rehgion and virtue."

From the prefent day to the year 1999, the end
of this period, the church of Chrid fliali continue
not merely as fcatered individuals, but alfo as a
conftituted and vifible church. Its imperfcdions
and troubles, during that time, fhall Hievv that
a cloud hangs over it. Since the reformation in
the fixteenth century, all things fhall go on fo

much

Ver. 3, — 14. ON THE REVELATION. 403

much in a regular and gradual courfe, that none
of the imperfections which cleave to the church,
and none of the troubles to which it fhall be ex-
pofed, fliall bring about another revolution in it
.until the end of that period.

It is highly probable that the limits of the Chrif-
tian church fliall be enlarged, and that the
clouds of imperfedions and troubles which hang
over it fliail become thinner with a motion accele-
rated in proportion as the end of this period ap-
proaches. At the end of it, there fhall be a great
and glorious revolution to the church of Chrift,
and a total overthrow of the Papal hierarchy.

In chap. viii. 13. three woes were denounced
upon the votaries and citizens of Rome, (the in-
iiabiters of the earth.) In chap. ix. the fifth and
fixth angel predicted two of them. We are now
alTured that the fecond wo is paft, and that the
third wo cometh quickly. Tax'^, the word in the
original which is tranflated quickly, does not fig-
nify foon or immediately after the fecond wo, but
it iigniiies fuddenly or unexpededly and rapidly.
It fignifies that that wo fliall come at an unexped-
ed hour ; that the complete deliverance of the
church, and overthrow of Antichrift fliall come
at an unexpeded hour; like a thief in the night.
The predidion of this revolution is contained in
this chapter from verfe 15th to the end of it.

3 E 2 Ver/a

404 A COMMENTARY Ch. XI.

Verfes i^th, i6/^, lyth, iSth, igtb. — And
the feventh angel founded, and there were
great voices in heaven, faying, The kingdoms
of this world are become the kingdoms of
our Lord, and of his Chrift, and he fhall
reign for ever and ever. And the four and
twenty elders, which fat before God on their
feats, fell upon their faces and worfhipped
God, faying, We give thee thanks, O Lord
God Almighty, which art, and waft, and
art to come ; becaufe thou haft taken to thee
thy great power, and haft reigned. And the
nations were angry, and thy wrath is come,
and the time of the dead, that they iliould be
judged, and that thou (liouldeft give reward
unto thy fervants the prophets, and to the
faints, and them that fear thy name, fmall
and great, and fhouldeft deftroy them which
deftroy the earth. And the temple of God
was opened in heaven, and there was feen in
his temple, the ark of his teftament : And
there were lightnings, and voices, and thun-
derings, and an earthquake, and great hail.

This feventh angel Ihall found in the year 1999.
In chap. X. 7. John is commanded to feal up

the

Ver. 15, — 19. ON THE REVELATION. 405

the feven, that is, the complete and final thunders
or wars, " for the time for them is not yet : But
" in the days of the voice of the feventh angel,
*' when he fhall begin to found, the rayflery of
" God Hiall be finifhed." The finifhing of that
myftery, which confifts in the downfal of Anti-
chrift, and in the bringing in the fulnefs of the
Gentiles, with God's antient people the Jews, to the
purity of the Chriftian faith, cannot take place fo
long as the church of Chrifl; is like two witnejQTes
prophefying in fackcloth, as the bead makes war
with them, as the church is like the temple and
the altar only, whilfl the outer court is left out,
and the holy city is given to the Gentiles ; but all
thefe are to continue for 12^3 years, after the
year 756, which runs down to the year 1999:
hence the feventh angel, who introduces all thefe
events, which finilh the myftery of God, cannot
found until that year.

This feventh angel who founds the feventh
trumpet, is cotemporary with the feventh angel,
who pours out the feventh vial, as in chap. xvi.
17. — 21. That they are cotemporary, and that
they both predidl events, which lliall happen in
the year 1999, ^"^ which fliall be completed in
the end of that year, Ihall be fully fliewn in the
commentary on chapters xiii. and xvi. Let it
only be obferved here, that they both predid e-
vents, which, in their own nature, muft be co-
temporary.

406 A COMMENTARY Ch. XI.

temporary. The feventh trumpet foretels the
complete trhimph of Chrift's church ; and the
feventh vial foretels the final downfal of Anti-
chrift. The one of thefe cannot happen before,
nor be delayed after the other. The complete
defeat of an enemy, and the triumph of the con-
queror muft always be cotemporary.

In chap. xi. 3. the two witnefTes fhall prophefy
1260 days in fackcloth; verfe 2d, the Gentiles fhall
tread the holy city under foot for 42 months ; and
in chapter, xiii. 5. power is given to the beaft to
continue 42 months : but, as was formerly Ihewn,
all thefe numbers fignify the fame fpacc of time,
even 1243 folar years, which all commence at the
year 756, and therefore muft all terminate in the
year 1999.

The feventh trumpet foretels the complete tri-
umph of Chrift's church, but as that is cotempora-
ry with the final overthrow of Antichrift, it gives
aifo ftriking intimations of that overthrow. And
the feventh vial which foretels the final overthrow
of Antichrift, gives for the fame reafon ftriking
intimations of the triumph of Chrift's church.

In the feventh vial, the principal things predic-
ted are voices, thunderings, lightnings, a great
earthquake ; Babylon the great coming in re-
membrance before God, and receiving from him
the cup of the wine of the fiercenefs of his wrath ;
a great hail falling upon men, and men blafphem-

ing

Ver. 15, — 19. ON THE REVELATIONf. 4«7

ing God. In the feventh trumpet all thefe things
are particularly mentioned, though they are not
the principal things predicted by it. Thus it is
faid under that trumpet, " the nations w^re an-
" gry, the wrath of God is come, and the time
" that he fhould deftroy them who deilroy the
" earth ; and that there were lightenings, and voi-
** ces, and thunderings, and an earthquake, and
" great hail." And the chief things predided in
the feventh trumpet are, that the myftery of God
is finiflied; (for it was to be finifhed in the days of
the feventh angel, and the feventh angel was to
introduce the third wo, and the introdudtion to
this trumpet is, " the fecond wo is paft, and the
*' third wo cometh quickly;") that there were
great voices in heaven, that the kingdoms of this
world are become the kingdom of our God and of
his Chrift, and that the temple of God was opened
in heaven. In the feventh vial all thefe are parti-
cularly mentioned. The Judge fays, " Behold, I
come as a thief.** There was a great voice out of the
temple in heaven faying, It is done, the cities of
the nations as well as great Babylon fell, and the
mountains were not found. Mountains, as was
formerly fhewn, fignify kings.

Having thus fixed the time to which this fe-
venth trumpet relates, and alfo fuggeiled fo ma-
ny confiderations, as in the mean time may fatir-
fy the candjd reader that this trumpet is cotem-

purary

4^8 A COMiMENTARY Ch. XI.

porary with the feventh vial ; let us proceed to
confider the import of the predidioiis which it
contains.

This trumpet contains a wo, the third and lafl
wo ; a wo not to the church of Chrift, (the hea-
ven), but to the votaries and citizens of the Ro-
man empire, the inhabiters of the earth, as is evi-
dent from chap. viii. 13. This trumpet prediding
the final overthrow of Papal Rome and the com-
plete triumph of the church of Chrift, muft con-
tain the .greateft and laft wo to the votaries of
Rome. Either of thefe events would have diftref-
fed them more than tongue can exprefs; the two
together muft occalion a diftrefs too great for us
at prefent to figure.

This wo is to come (t^x^) quickly. The arro-
gance, pride, felf-confidence and vain claim to in-
fallibility of Papal Rome fhall hinder her from per-
ceiving the approach of her complete overthrow
luitil it is juft at hand. With refped to the unex-
pededncfs and rapidity of this overthrow, God
fays, chap. xvi. 15. "Behold, 1 come as a thief in
" the night."

This trumpet which brings the laft wo upon the
Roman empire, (the inhabiters of the earth),
brings praiie and triumph to heaven, the church
of Chrift. " For there were great voices in hea-
" ven, faying, the kingdoms of this world are be-
" come the kingdoms of our Lord and of his Chrift,

" and

Ver. 15, — 19. ON THE REVELATION. 409

" and he fhall rei^n for ever and ever." Then
Chriftians in the church of Chrift fliall lift up their
voices aloud, and in triumph proclaim the purity,
profperity, and extent of Chrifl*s fpiritual king-
dom, in fuch a manner that no part of the world
Ihall be ignorant of the proclamation, or willing
and able to gainfay- it. Then all the kingdoms,
which Daniel foretold fhould arife and fall in the
world before the kingdom of Chrill fhould extend
over the whole world, Ihall have fallen, and that
kingdom of our Lord and of his Chrft, whish is not
meats and drinks, but trui^h and righteoufnefs, and
peace, and joy in the Holy Gholl, fhall extend
over the whole earth. Then all the particular
kingdoms and churches, which ihall be ereded in
the world, for the civil and religious government
of men in fociety, fhall be formed on thefe princi-
ples of truth, righteoufnefs, peace, and joy, which
form the conflirution of the kingdom of our Lord
and of his Chrift. From that time forth, fo long
as this world ftands, Chrift's church fliall reign in
triumph ; no kingdom fliall again rife up to per-
fecute and opprefs it with fuccefs, as Rome Hea-
then and Papal had done before that period, and
its purity and triumph fliall be for ever and ever
in the heavenly world.

The language of the 15th verfe clearly teaches
the divinity of Chrift. It is faid, " The kingdoms
*' of this world are become the kingdoms of ourLord

Vol. I. 3 F «« and

4IO A COMMENTARY Ch. XI.

" and of his Clirifl, and He fliall reign for ever
" and ever." Though it is faid the kingdoms of
this world are become the kingdoms of our Lord
and of his ('hrift, it is not added, and they fliall
reign, which muft have been the only proper ex-
preffion if our Lord and his Chrill; had been effen-
tially different from each other, but it is faid, "and
" He lliall reign," which can be proper language
on no other account than that which is ilated by
Chrid himfelf, when he fays, John x. 30. " I and
" my Father are one."

Theglory of this triumphant ftate of Chrift's
kingdom is defcribed in a very particular and full
manner in chapters xix. xx. xxi. and a part of
xxii. and fhall be iJluftrated in the commentary
on thefe chapters. On this glorious occafion, the
true church of Chrill, reprefented by the twenty-
four elders, with the mod profound humility and
devotion, and the warmeft gratitude, fliall adore and
praife God as the felf-exiftent, omniprefent, and
omnipotent Being, whofe perfedl knowledge of
all times and places, and whofe fupreme power, are
now fully illullrated by the exadl accompiilbment
of all the predidions in this book, concerning the
Itate of the world at large, of his church in par-
ticular, and of its triumphant Hate in this world in
an efpecial manner. Now they adore that fore-
knowledge of God which perceives with certainty,
and that powerful providence of his which overrules

all

Ver. 15, 19: ON THE REVELATION. 41 1

all events, even the imft contingent, to fixed and
determinate ends, without doing violence to the
liberty of moral agents and accountable creatures.
They praife God, becaufe he hath taken his great
power and hath reigned. Then it fliall appear,
that the church of Chrift hath been fupported by
a divine power, and that therefore it hath finally
prevailed over the oppolition of devils and wicked
men.

This interpofition of God in eftablilhing Chrift's
kingdom over the whole world is called his great
power, thTiX. is, in the fymbolical language, the exer-
tion of his power in favours of the church of Chrift,
of which all his former exertions were only
types. However great, gracious, and many have
been the exertions of divine power in favours of
the church of Chrift, all thefe fliall not only be
greatly exceeded by that one which fhall over-
throw Antichrift, bind Satan, and eftabUHi and
perpetuate the reign of truth, righteoufnefs,
peace and joy over the whok earth, but by that
one, their true intention, and the hand that per-
formed tliem, (hall be rendered much more vifible
than they were before that period. Then the
kingdom of God fhall come, and it fhall then be
evident that his is the power which hath brought
about that period, and that the whole fhall illuf-
trioufly difplay his glory. At that time, the na-
tions of the earth fhall be angry to fee all their
3 F 3 attempts

412 A COMMENTARY Ch. XI.

attempts to banifh the true, pure, fpiritual, holy,
and fimple religion of Jeliis from the earth, vain.
It fhall vex them to fee this religion and its votaries
triumphant, both of whom they had long treated
with fuch contempt. Then the v/rath of God
fhall in heavy judgements fall upon thofe nations
who, by contemning his religion, would not have
Chrift to reign over them, nor over the world, if
they could have prevented his reign. Then the
predidion in Pfalm ii. i, — 9. concerning fuch kings
and people ftiall be accompliflied.

At this period, ample juftice Iliall be done to the
charaders and memory of the dead ; that is, of
the martyrs who, both under heathen and papal
Rome, fealed their teftimony to the truth with
their blood. Until that period fliall come, their
principles, motives and charaders, fhall be mifre-
prefented by the greateft part of mankind ; and
though their murderers, as individuals, mufl: have
felt the wrath of God, for the injuries which they
did to them, yet till then their blood fliall not be
fully avenged on the collective body of the Roman
ftate which perfecuted them to death, Thofe,
who were put to death by Rome in its heathen
ftate, were mifreprefented by the heathens as con-
temners of the gods, enemies to Ca^far, and dif-
turbers of the public peace. Whilft papal Rome
[ built their tombs, garniflied their fepulchres, and
even worfhipped them as mediators between God

and

Ver. 15, — 19. ON THE REVELATION. 4I3

and man, they perfecuted to death, and branded
with the name oi heretics, thofe who in their day
bore the fame teflimony to Jefus and to the word
of God. The memories of thofe, who fuffered in
both periods have ofueu been and fiill are branded
by many for their weaknefs, folly, enthufiafm,
bigotry and obftinacy. In every age and coun-
try, thofe who have no fixed principles of religion ;
thofe who difbelieve or doubt Divine revelation ;
thofe who in the pride of their underilandings
would much rather think wrong, than think with
the bulk of mankind ; and thofe whofe hopes aie
confined to this world, and the things of this world,
the lull of the eye, the lull of the flefh, and the
pride of life ; who alas I are alv/ays too great a
proportion of mankind, treat their memory with
contempt. But then, when that religion, for
which thefe martyrs fuffered, fhall become univer-
fal and triumphant ; when fuperftition fhall be
deflroyed, and Satan bound up from tempting
men; when theyfhall judge impartially, coolly, and
attentively, they fliall admire the difcernment,
the piety, and the firmnefs of thefe excellent men,
of whom the world was not worthy, who perceiv-
ed, loved, obeyed, and adhered to the truth,
amid fo much ignorance, infidehty, fuperftition,
wickednefs, and perfecution. Then they fliall
highly refpedl the memory of thofe independent
and generous men, who feared God, and had no

Other

414 A COMMENTARY

Other fear, and who, at the price of their property,
liberty, fame, and blood, tranfmitted the know-
ledge of truth and virtue, not merely to an un-
grateful pofterity, but alfo to thofe very enemies
who crucified their bodies, and ftill crucify their
memories.

" The time ofthedead that they Aiould be judg-
" ed," has a reference to a requifition made by
thofe, who were llain as martyrs under Papal
Rome, and to the anfvver which was given to it, as
in chap. vi. 9. — 1 1. They were not to be judged,
and their blood was not to be avenged on the ci-
tizens of Rome, until thofe of their brethren,
who Ihould be flain as they were, fliould all be
killed, that is, thofe Chriftians who fliould be kil-
led as martyrs by Papal Rome But now when
papal Rome is totally deftroyed, and when the
church of Chrift is rendered triumphant, the num-
ber of their brethren the martyrs is fulfilled, and
the time is come, when, even in this world, ample
juftice lliall be done to their memories, and that
empire which killed them fliall be jitdged and
puniflied in its public capacity ; at this period,
the flate of religion and of the world at large fhall
do juftice and honour, not only to the memory of
thofe worthy men who fuffeied for the word of
God and for the teftimony of Jefus ; but it Ihall
alfo vindicate the character of the prophets of God,
and of ail the true worlhippers of God of every

age,

Ver. I^, 19. ON THE REVELATION. 415

age, country, rank, or fitnation in the world. Then,
by the moft exa6t and evident accomphQiment of
their prediclions in the events, it fhall be proven,
beyond all contradidion, thafDaniel, Ifaiah, Eze-
kiel, Paul, Peter, and John, were all true prophets
of God. Then it fliall fully appear, that all the
true worfliippers of God were wife, pious, and
holy, fuch as purfued that courfe, which was the
beft and the wifeit for theitifelves, and for fociety.
Then, it lliall appear, that in them the fear of the
Lord was wifdom, and to depart from evil was un-
derllanding. Then, a juft and high refped fliall be
paid to the memory of all the faints of God, of all
who in the preceding period were holy, and
whofe holinefs proceeded from the befl. of principles, '
the fear of the Lord, whatever their rank in the
world hath been. Then, the v/orth of character
fhall not be eftimated by rank, or any external
thing which a foolifh and wicked man may poflefs,
and without which a man may be wife, good, truly
great and happy, but by thofe quahties which
conflitute real worth of character, which are in-
feparable from a wife, good, truly great and hap-
py man, and which depend not on- rank or litua-
tion. The faints fliall be refpecled as the excel-
lent ones of the earth, and the righteous as more
excellent than his neighbour.

At that period, " God fliall deflroy them, who
" deftroy the earth." By thofe who dellroy the earth

41 6 A COMiMENTARY

is meant the papal hierarchy, which lliall then
deftroy the Roman empire. Perhaps fume may
imagine, that the deftroyers of heaven (the church
of Chrift) would have been a more jufl character
of the papal hierarchy, than the deftroyers of the
earth (Roman empire) is. A juft attention to this
matter, will fatisfy every candid and intelligent
pcrfon of the contrary. The words tranllated,
" them who deftroy the earth," are in the original
7-xf S/af Sei^oKTocf Th yyiv. The Verb lix(f>Qeif>o fignifies " to
■*' deftroy completely by corrupting." The verb
S-«f(a to deilroy by corrupting, when compounded
with the prepofition ha, fignifies " to deflroy com-
'* pletely." The defign of Rome was to deflroy
the church of Chrift ; but ftie failed in the execu-
tion of this defign,' becaufe fhe could not corrupt
that church, which firmly adhered to the word of
God and to the teftimony of Jefus. But Rome
corrupted her own votaries with her errors and
fuperftitions, and thus not only led many indivi-
duals bhndfold to deftruction ; but, by thefe cor-
ruptions aifo gradually fhook the pillars of her
own governmient, and fliall at laft totally over-
turn their very foundations. The. defign of the
devil and of the bifiiop of Rome was to deftroy the
cllurch of Chrift, by. the floods of errors which
they poured out upon the earth; but the church
of Chrift was unhurt by them, wbilft the votaries
of Rome imbibed them to their own deftrucliou*

Tliis

Ver. 15,-19. ON THE REVELATION. 4I7

This is plainly prediaed in chap. xii. 15, 16, as
fhall be fliewn in the commentary on thefe verfes ;
and it hath alfo been verified in the hiftory of the
real church of Chrift, and in that of the church
of Rome. By her corruptions, relative to indul-
gences and other fuperftitions, Rome Ihook the pil-
lars of her government, in the i6th century^ at the
glorious aera of the reformation. By her corrup-
tions, file hath frequently alarmed and roufed dif-
ferent kingdoms in Europe, who have greatly cur-
tailed the extent of her territory, power, and do-
mination. In the courfxi of i Divine providcrice,
her own corruption$ Oiall be fo overruled, as' to
complete her total deftniclion at the period refer-
red to in this pafFage. l They fliall therr d^aw upon
her the vengeance of certain furrounding tempo-
ral powers ; and the cup of her iniquity, then
filled up, fhall draw upon her the judgements of
that God, who fliall deftroy them, who deflroy
the earth.

The nature, manner and means of this deftruc-
tion are particularly predicled in chapters xvi. and
xvii. and fliall be explained in the commentary upon
thefe. At that period, " the temple of God fliall
*' be opened in heaven." As the tabernacle or
moveable tent was the flated place of public wor-
fliip among the Jews, during their pilgrimage,
■ivanderings, and perfecutions in the wildernefs ;
You I. 3 G . and

4l8 A COMMENTARY Ch. XI.

and the temple built on mount Zion at Jerufa-
lem, was the Hated place of public worfhip for
them, during their fettled and triumphant ftate
in the land of promife : Hence, in the fymbolical
language, the tabernacle fignifies the wildernefs,
or, perfecuted Hate of the Chriftian church, for
the period of the reign of the beaft, from the year
756 to .the year 1999; and the temple fignifies
the peaceful, fettled, and triumphant ftate of the
church, which Ihall commence in the year 2000,
and continue for a tho.ufand years. In this fenfe,
the tabernacle is ufed, chap. xiii. 6. In reference
to this ftate- of the church, . the woman is faid to
fly, unto the wildernefs, chap. xii. 14.

In thjs>verfe the temple being opened in hea-
ven, fignifies that then the fettled and triumph-
ant ftate of the church fhall commence* In this
fenfe the temple is ufed, as ftiall appear in the
commentary, in chapters xiv. 15. and xv. 5, 6,8.
This fettled and triumphant ftate of the church
is particularly defcribed in chapters xx. and xxi.
anjd ftiall be confidered at full length in the com-
mentary on thefe chapters. It is remarkable that
that period of purity, peace, and triumph, is re-
prefented in chapter xx. to be of 1000 years con-
tinuance, and alio, that from the time when the
building of the temple was finiflied to the birth of
Chrift was alfo 1000 years, fo that as on other ac-
counts,

Ver. 15, — 19: ON THE REVELATION. ' 4I9

counts, in refped of its duration, the temple is the
fymbol of this triun^phant ftate of the church.
In this hieroglyphic, particular notice is taken of
one chief circumftance in that profperous period :
*' And there was feen in his temple the ark of liis
*' teftament." The ark of the teflament was a
fmall cheft, plated with gold, in which was laid
up the teftimony of God, that is, the two tables
of the moral law of God originally promulgated
on mount Sinai. It was placed in the innermolt
apartment of the tabernacle and afterwards of th§
temple, called the moft holy place. On the top
of this ark were placed the mercy -feat and the
two cherubim ; here it was that God manifefted
himfelf and his will, in the oracular refponfes
which he made to the high priefts when they con-
fulted the oracle of God. The reader may fee a
particular account of the ark of the teflament or
teftimony in Exodus, xxv. 10, — 22, i Kings viii.
J, — II, and 2 Chron. v. i, — lo.

The plain meaning of this hieroglyphic is, that,
at that period, the church of Chrifl fiiall appear
in a ftate of peace, triumph, and magnificence.
It fhali no longer be a tabernacle, but- it fliall be
a temple : Not a temple like the worldly gran-
deur of the church of Rome, in the preceeding
period, not one of human contrivance and execu-
rjon, like the vain pageantry of heathen temples ;
5 G 2 but

420 A COMMENTARY Ch. XI.

but the temple of God, a church whofe ornaments
are thofe pure and limple dodrines of truth and
grace, which came from God, are worthy of God,
and calculated to lead men to God. Then Chrif-
tians fhall not be amufed, deceived, and perverted,
by mere external obfervances without commu-
nion with God, by falfe atonements and media-
tors, and by papal bulls in place of the command-
ments of God; but they Ihall fee the mercy-feat
guarded by the cherubim ; they fhall obtain juil
views of and repofe a juft confidence in the mercy
of God through the mediation of Chrift, that
mercy which is guarded by juftice, and that juf-
tice which is the brighteil: difplay of Divine mer-
cy. Now they fhall clearly fee that God is jufl,
even while he is the juftifier of him that believeth
in Jefus. They fhall look unto, and regard the
teflimony of God contained in thofe facred fcrip-
tures, which are given by infpiration of God as
the only infallible ftandard of their faith, profef-
fion, worfhip, and practice. Notwithftanding all
the interefh and inclination which infidels, fceptics,
fuperftitious and wicked perfons have had to cor-
rupt or deftroy thefe facred fcriptures, and the
many attempts v»'hich they have made for thefe
impious and mad purpofes, it fnall then appear
that the infpired fcriptures have been preferved
as fafe, by the fuperintendency of Divine provi-
dence.

Ver. 15, 19. ON THE REVELATION. 421

dence, from deflruftion and from any material
corruption, as if, like the law given upon mount
Sinai, they had been laid up in a golden cheft for
prefervation. In every religious exercife, they
fhall enjoy communion with God. They fliall
worlhip, in fpirit and in truth, the one God only
through the one Mediator between God and man,
the man Chrilt Jefus. They fhall pray without
ceafmg. They fhall afk of God in prayer only
according to his will, and he fhall hear them. The
law of God fhall be written upon their hearts.
" They fliall not teach every one his neighbour,
" faying know the Lord ;" but they fhall all know
God from the higheft to the lowefl. Loving the
Lord with all their heart, foul, ftrength, and mind,
and hating every falfe and wicked way with a
perfed: hatred, it fhall be as their meat and drink
to do the will of God; and God fhall be the
ftrength of their heart, and their portion for ever. —
In every outward fituation they fhall rejoice in
the Lord, and joy in the God of their falvation.

" And there were lightnings, and voices, and
" thunderings, and an earthquake, and great hail."
This part of the hieroglyphic is defcriptive of a
revolution in the earth or Roman empire, (an
earthquake) which fliall be brought about by a
great ftorm, that is, by a great war. Along witli
this ftorm mention is made" of voices : By this part

of

423 A COMMENTARY Ch. XI.

of the hieroglyphic, it is fignified, that a diflindl:
and articulate meaning lliall be conveyed to men,
by thofe wars which (liall bring about this great
i-evolution. So many circumftances fliall concur
in them, as fhall plainly point them out as thofe
wars by which Papal Rome fhall be overthrown,
according to the predidions of this book. Hence
theie wars fliail declare, as with an articulate voice,
that the time is juft at hand \vhen the laft and
greateft revolution ihall take place in Rome ;
when Antichrill fliall be deftroyed ; the Roman
power,' feat of government, and name, fliall come
to an end; and the myllery of God in the final o-
verthrow of Papal Rome and complete triumph of
Chriftianity fliall be finiflied under the found of
the feventh trumpet.

This i-evolution, by which Papal Rome fliall be
totally overthrown in the end of the year 1999,
and the wars by which it fliall be brought about,
are particularly defcribed in chap. xvi. 12, — 21.
and fliall be explained in the commentary on thefe
verfes. Here they are mentioned only as it were
by the by. But being the principal fubjedts of
the fixth and feventh vials, they are treated at
full length under them. It was proper to men-
tion, and only to mention them here, becaufe the
fubjedl of this trumpet is the beginning of the
triumph of Chriftianity over all oppofition ; but

this

Ver. 15, 19. ON THE REVELATION. 423

this triumph could not commence until Antichrift
fliould be overthrown; and therefore the wars
and revolutions, by which this overthrow fliall be
accompliflied, coinciding in point of time with
the commencement of this triumph, it v/as necef-
fary that this intimation fhould be given of them
m this place.

END OF THE FIRST VOLUxME.

BS2825.J72V.1

A commentary on the Revelation of St.

Princeton Theological Semmary-Speer Library

1 1012 00069 9332